Toronto District School Board - Kane Public School Kane C.S. ARC... · TDSB - Kane Public School...

TDSB - Kane Public School Section 00001KOHN SHNIER architects Project No. KE1016 February 28, 2011

Project Manual Title Page A

Project Manual

Issued for Tender

Toronto District School Board - Kane Public School300 Kane Avenue

York, Ontario

KOHN SHNIER architects110 Spadina Avenue, Suite 900

Toronto, OntarioM5V 2K4

Tel: 416-504-7508Fax: 416-504-7509

Project No. KE1016

February 28, 2011

TDSB - Kane Public School Section 00002KOHN SHNIER architects Page 1Project No. KE1016 February 28, 2011

Document Responsibility and Project Directory

1.1 Document Responsibility

.1 Refer to Project Manual, Section 00010 - Table of Contents, for indication of documentresponsibility (DR). Abbreviations for entity responsible for document preparation are asfollows:

.1 A - Denotes documents prepared by Architect.

.2 E - Denotes documents prepared by Electrical Engineer.

.3 L – Denotes documents prepared by Landscape Architect.

.4 LS – Denotes documents prepared by Land Surveyor.

.5 M - Denotes documents prepared by Mechanical Engineer.

.6 O - Denotes documents prepared by Owner.

.7 S - Denotes documents prepared by Structural Engineer.

.8 T - Denotes documents prepared by Traffic Consultant.

1.2 Project Directory

.1 Owner:

Toronto District School BoardSchool15 Oakburn CrescentToronto, OntarioM2N 2T5

.2 Architect (the Consultant):

Kohn Shnier Architects110 Spadina Avenue, Suite 900Toronto, OntarioM5V 2K4

Tel: 416-504-7508Fax: 416-504-7509

.3 Structural Engineer:

Blackwell Bowick Partnership Limited19 Duncan Street, Suite 405Toronto, OntarioM5H 3H1

Tel: 416-593-5300Fax: 416-593-4840


Document Responsibility and Project Directory

.4 Mechanical Engineer:

Jain & Associates Limited2260 Argentia Road, 2nd FloorMississauga, OntarioL5N 6H7

Tel: 905-542-7211Fax: 905-542-7622

.5 Electrical Engineer:

Jain & Associates Limited2260 Argentia Road, 2nd FloorMississauga, OntarioL5N 6H7

Tel: 905-542-7211Fax: 905-542-7622

.6 Landscape Architect:

Johnson Sustronk Weinstein & Associates20 Mural Street, Unit 10Richmond Hill, OntarioL4B 1K3

Tel: 905-889-8100Fax: 905-889-6616

.7 Traffic Consultant:

BA Group Transportation Consultants45 St. Clair Avenue West, Suite 300Toronto, OntarioM4V 1K9

Tel: 416-961-7110Fax: 416-961-9807

.8 Land Surveyor:

Speight, Van Nostrand & Gibson LimitedOntario Land Surveyors750 Oakdale Road, Unit 66Toronto, OntarioM3N 2Z4

Tel: 416-749-7864Fax: 416-749-7866

END OF SECTION


Table of Contents

DR - indicates entity responsible for preparation of listed documents (see Section 00002)

Document Identification DR Pgs Issued

DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION00001 Project Manual Title Page................................................A 1 February 28, 201100002 Document Responsibility and Project Directory................A 2 February 28, 201100010 Table of Contents ............................................................A 3 February 28, 2011

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01015 General Requirements.................................................... O 12 February 28, 201101016 General Instructions.........................................................A 8 February 28, 201101210 Allowances ......................................................................A 2 February 28, 201101250 Product Substitution Procedures .....................................A 2 February 28, 201101260 Requests for Interpretation...............................................A 2 February 28, 2011

RFI Form .........................................................................A 1 February 28, 201101311 Coordination ...................................................................A 2 February 28, 201101312 Project Meetings ..............................................................A 5 February 28, 201101320 Construction Progress Documentation.............................A 2 February 28, 201101323 Photographic Documentation...........................................A 1 February 28, 201101330 Submittals........................................................................A 8 February 28, 201101351 Special Procedures for Work in Public Schools................A 6 February 28, 201101450 Quality Control ................................................................A 4 February 28, 201101500 Temporary Facilities and Controls ...................................A 7 February 28, 201101570 Hoarding .........................................................................A 2 February 28, 201101600 Products and Workmanship ............................................A 7 February 28, 201101700 Execution Requirements .................................................A 3 February 28, 201101732 Cutting and Patching .......................................................A 2 February 28, 201101741 Progressive Cleaning ......................................................A 2 February 28, 201101770 Contract Closeout Procedures and Submittals.................A 6 February 28, 201101780 Warranties ......................................................................A 1 February 28, 2011

DIVISION 02 - SITEWORK

02070 Site Demolition and Removals ......................................... L 2 February 28, 201102104 Temporary Tree Protection .............................................. L 1 February 28, 201102212 Topsoil and Finish Grading .............................................. L 2 February 28, 201102222 Demolition........................................................................A 5 February 28, 201102485 Stone Work ...................................................................... L 1 February 28, 201102510 Asphalt Paving................................................................. L 2 February 28, 201102520 Exterior Concrete ............................................................. L 1 February 28, 201102580 Pavement Marking ........................................................... L 1 February 28, 201102710 Sub-Drainage................................................................... L 1 February 28, 201102831 Chain Link Fencing .......................................................... L 2 February 28, 201102860 Play Structures and Playspaces....................................... L 3 February 28, 201102866 Games Equipment ........................................................... L 1 February 28, 201102870 Signage ........................................................................... L 1 February 28, 201102871 Timber and Woodwork ..................................................... L 2 February 28, 201102938 Sodding ........................................................................... L 2 February 28, 2011


Table of Contents



02950 Trees, Shrubs and Ground Covers .................................. L 3 February 28, 2011

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY

04200 Concrete Masonry Unit Assemblies .................................A 9 February 28, 2011

DIVISION 05 - METALS

05500 Metal Barrier Gate ........................................................... L 1 February 28, 201105505 Metal Fabrications ...........................................................A 5 February 28, 2011

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

06400 Architectural Woodwork ..................................................A 9 February 28, 2011

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07200 Thermal Insulation ..........................................................A 3 February 28, 201107270 Air Barrier Systems..........................................................A 5 February 28, 201107840 Firestopping and Smoke Seals .......................................A 6 February 28, 201107900 Joint Sealants .................................................................A 8 February 28, 2011

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS

08110 Steel Doors and Frames ..................................................A 11 February 28, 201108140 Flush Wood Doors ...........................................................A 5 February 28, 201108511 Aluminum Windows .........................................................A 7 February 28, 201108710 Finish Hardware ..............................................................A 5 February 28, 2011

Finish Hardware Schedule...............................................H 8 February 28, 201108800 Glass and Glazing ..........................................................A 10 February 28, 2011

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

09100 Metal Supports for Gypsum Board ...................................A 7 February 28, 201109290 Gypsum Board.................................................................A 12 February 28, 201109310 Tiling ...............................................................................A 10 February 28, 201109512 Acoustical Tile Ceiling Systems ......................................A 6 February 28, 201109642 Wood Floor Refinishing....................................................A 4 February 28, 201109650 Resilient Base..................................................................A 3 February 28, 201109659 Vinyl Composite Tile Flooring ..........................................A 4 February 28, 201109664 Terrazzo Repair and Patching .........................................A 7 February 28, 201109900 Painting............................................................................A 12 February 28, 2011

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

10110 Visual Display Surfaces ..................................................A 4 February 28, 201110250 Service Walls ..................................................................A 2 February 28, 201110280 Washroom Accessories ..................................................A 3 February 28, 2011

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

12241 Roller Window Shades.....................................................A 5 February 28, 2011


Table of Contents



DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL

15010 Mechanical General Requirements ................................. M 25 February 28, 201115250 Insulation ........................................................................ M 8 February 28, 201115400 Plumbing & Drainage ...................................................... M 15 February 28, 201115750 Liquid Heat Transfer ....................................................... M 8 February 28, 201115850 Air Distribution ................................................................ M 12 February 28, 201115900 Building Automation System – Appendix ‘A’ .................... M 2 February 28, 201115900 Building Automation System ........................................... M 31 February 28, 2011

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL

16010 Electrical General Requirements......................................E 9 February 28, 201116050 Basic Materials & Methods...............................................E 18 February 28, 201116500 Lighting Systems .............................................................E 6 February 28, 201116600 Data Cabling System .......................................................E 5 February 28, 201116700 Communication Systems .................................................E 7 February 28, 201116950 Occupancy & Daylighting Sensors ...................................E 6 February 28, 201116995 Modular Control Panels ...................................................E 4 February 28, 2011

END OF SECTION


General Instructions

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Language of the Contract

.1 The use of the words “include” or “including”, or variations thereof, within the ContractDocuments is not limiting.

1.2 The Contract Documents

.1 The Contract Documents have been arranged into various divisions, sections, drawings,and schedules for the purpose of presenting the Work in a logical and organized formand to enable ease of reference and interpretation, and are not intended to be anarrangement of precise and independent Subcontractors, or jurisdiction of responsibilityfor the various parts of the Work. The Contractor shall be solely responsible forcoordinating the execution of the Work of this Contract in accordance with therequirements of the Contract Documents.

.2 As a result, the Consultant shall not be required to decide on questions arising withregard to agreements or contracts between the Contractor and Subcontractors orSuppliers, nor to the extent of the parts of the Work assigned thereto.

.3 Further, no extra will be allowed as a result of the failure to coordinate and allocate theWork such that the Work is Provided in accordance with the Contract Documents.

.4 This section coordinates, relates, and governs the work of other sections of thespecifications.

.5 Specifications contained in Division 15 may also be referred to as “Mechanical”.

.6 Specifications contained in Division 16 may also be referred to as “Electrical”.

1.3 Laws, Notices, Permits and Fees

.1 The building code - Ontario Regulation 350/06, including amendments, shall govern theWork.

.2 Comply with codes, by-laws, and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction over thePlace of the Work. Codes and regulations form an integral part of the ContractDocuments.

.3 Owner shall apply and pay for the building permit. The Contractor shall pick up buildingpermit from the municipal department having jurisdiction at the Place of the Work. Obtainand pay for all other permits, licenses, deposits and certificates of inspection as part ofthe Work.

.4 Arrange for inspection, testing and acceptance of the Work required by the authoritieshaving jurisdiction. Be responsible for necessary preparations, provisions and pay costs.

.5 Obtain permits required to execute work on municipal rights of way. Obtain damagedeposits for sidewalks, roads and services, unless otherwise indicated.

.6 It is the responsibility of the Contractor to schedule notifications and inspections requiredby authorities having jurisdiction such that notifications can be properly received and thatinspections can be properly undertaken without causing a delay in the Work. TheContractor, at no additional cost to the Owner, shall be solely responsible for any delayin the Work caused by failure to properly schedule required notifications and inspections.


General Requirements

1.4 Project Control

.1 Construction Schedule: Within 5 working days of issuance of the Purchase Order, theContractor shall submit to the Owner’s Representative a Construction Schedule. SuchSchedule shall itemize a complete breakdown of the project timing including submission ofshop drawings and, fabrication and installation.

.2 Drawings and Specifications: Contractor shall keep in good order on the job, one completeset of all drawings and specifications, including shop drawings and test reports.

.3 Project Meetings: Schedule and administer project progress meetings throughout theprogress of the work in consultation with the Consultant and the Owner ’s Representative.

.1 The Consultant shall record proceedings and significant decisions taken, anddistribute copies of minutes to participants and affected parties not in attendance.

1.5 Coordination of Work

.1 Coordinate Work so that the Work of all trades may be executed as specified, without delay,hindrance, contradiction or ambiguity.

.2 Ensure that each Trade informs the Contractor of construction, substrates, surface andenvironmental conditions required for the successful execution of his Work, and that theseconditions are met in the execution of all Work.

.3 The Contractor shall clean up and remove debris on a daily basis. Under no circumstancesshall the Contractor use the school's garbage disposal containers.

.4 Co-ordinate all construction personnel and Trades. Maintain efficient and continuoussupervision. Ensure co-operation of workers in laying out the Work.

.5 The Contractor shall be responsible to assign the various parts of the Work to the appropriateTrades and forces and shall not impose upon the Consultant or Owner the duty to arbitratedisputes between the Contractor and the Trades nor shall it relieve the Trades from theirresponsibility for carefully examining all the Drawings and Specifications and coordinatingtheir work with each other and the Contractor.

1.6 Consultant’s Instructions, Additional Work and Changes

.1 The Consultant will issue instructions required to verify and correct work. Such instructionsshall be binding as part of the specifications.

.2 No extras to the Contract will be paid, and no extra work is to proceed, until a signed changeorder is issued.

.3 Complete breakdown of labour and material involved, with separate unit prices for each itemshall be submitted for extra work or credited work. Submit quotations immediately forcomment and approval.

1.7 Cooperation

.1 Cooperate with, and assist in coordinating work by Owner's own forces or other Contractorsengaged by the Owner, in the interest of the school.

1.8 Permits

.1 The general building permit shall be applied for and obtained by the Consultant on behalf ofthe Owner.



.2 Apply for, secure, and pay for, all other required permits from authorities having jurisdiction,including, and where required, inspection fees and permits.

.3 Be responsible for ensuring that no work whatsoever is undertaken which is conditional onpermits, approvals, guarantees, until certain that all conditions necessary to obtain these aremet. No time extension will be allowed for delay in obtaining necessary permits.

1.9 Regulatory Requirements

.1 Nothing contained in the Drawings and Specifications shall be so construed as to be inconflict with any law, by-law or regulation of the municipal, provincial or other authoritieshaving jurisdiction.

.2 Abide by all the requirements of the Municipal Building By-Laws and other amendmentsthereto, including but not limited to: the Ontario Building Code (Ontario Reg.350/06);Canadian Electrical Code (CEC); CAN/CSA-B44-04 Safety Code for Elevators; CSA-W59-03(R2008) Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding); the Occupational Health & SafetyAct, Ontario, 1990 (Bill 208); the National Fire Code; the local Municipal Fire Code; and allother applicable Codes and building by-laws having jurisdiction.

.3 Where required under the Occupational Health & Safety Act, engage a Professional Engineerto design formwork and falsework for concrete.

.4 Give all notices, conduct all tests and required inspections, obtain all permits and pay allresulting charges.

.5 Contract forms, codes, specifications, standards, manuals, and installation, application andmaintenance instructions referred to in these specifications are of the latest publishededitions at the date of signing the Contract.

1.10 Workmanship & Standard of Construction

.1 Perform Work to equal or exceed minimum standards specified for materials, installationmethods, workmanship and construction in the Ontario Building Code, except whereadditional or more stringent requirements are imposed by jurisdictional authorities, or by theDrawings, Specifications, specified reference standards, and other instructions issued inrelation to the Contract Documents for this Project. In case of conflict or discrepancy, themore stringent shall apply.

.2 Workmanship shall be the best quality, executed by workers experienced and skilled in therespective duties for which they are employed. Immediately notify the Consultant if necessarywork is such as to make it impractical to produce required results. Any work which is notacceptable to the Owner or Consultant shall be immediately removed and replaced when andwhere directed. The expense of re-executing this work shall be paid by the Contractor.

.3 Where the Codes or this specification do not provide all information necessary for completeinstallation of an item, then the manufacturer's instructions for first quality workmanship shallbe strictly complied with. Where reference is made to manufacturer's directions, instructionsor specifications they shall include full information on storing, handling, preparing, mixing,installing, erecting, applying, or other matters concerning the materials pertinent to their useand their relationship to materials with which they are incorporated.

.4 These specifications are not intended as a detailed description of installation methods, butserve to indicate particular requirements in the completed work.

.5 Wherever in the specifications a material or article is specified by name, there shall be nosubstitution for the material so specified unless approved in writing by the Consultantbeforehand.



.6 Whenever an article or material is specified "or approved equal", it shall be understood thatthe written approval from the Consultant is required before any substitution is made. Theresponsibility of satisfying the Consultant whether or not the "equal" is acceptable remainswith the Contractor.

1.11 Reference Standards

.1 Unless the edition date is specified, references to manufacturer's and published codes,standards and specifications are to the latest edition, (revision) approved by the issuingorganization, current at the date of this Specification.

1.12 Testing & Inspections

.1 Arrange for inspection of all work by authorities having jurisdiction. Submit final unconditionalcertificate of approval by inspecting authorities.

.2 Provide Consultant and Owner ’s Representative 24 hours notice of date when tests willoccur.

.3 Do not conceal work until tested and approved.

.4 Re-testing and re-inspections of work found deficient, and costs of making good, shall bepaid for by the Contractor.

1.13 Drawings Required by Authorities

.1 Supply copies of detail drawings for various building components if requested by theMunicipal Building Departments, Provincial Agencies and the Local Fire Department.

1.14 Deliveries

.1 Contractor shall receive all construction deliveries and endeavour to avoid such deliveriesbothering the schooloffice. School staff shall not sign for any construction related deliveries.

1.15 Protection of Work and Property

.1 LOADING OF BUILDING: Do not store materials in building or utilize it for constructionpurposes in any manner which would exceed design loading on any building element.Temporarily support or strengthen parts of the structure subjected to excessive loads duringconstruction.

.2 New and existing work and materials affected by the alterations shall be protected at all timesduring construction period. Anydamage, soiling and staining occurring from the time the siteis turned over to the Contractor until the work is completed will be required to be made goodby the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.

.3 Protect floor finishes from construction traffic and transport of construction materials andequipment by adequate means. In areas where work is designated to be done adjacent toexisting acoustic ceilings composed of lay-in panels in a supporting grid, panels shall becarefully removed to avoid damage and re-placed when the work is completed. If existinglay-in panels in a room are damaged or dirty and cannot be matched with new panels, then allthe panels in that room shall be replaced at no expense to the Owner.

.4 The existing building shall be maintained weathertight at all times.



.5 Where the school's security system is breached by negligence of the Contractor, theContractor shall be responsible for any damage or for theft of school property, regardless ifthe area where damage or theft occurred is under his control or not.

.6 Protect by bracing or shoring the Work and its parts from movement and damage untilelements are securely anchored and braced to permanent structure and cannot be damaged.

.7 Restrict access by placing barricades or posting guards to unauthorized personnel to areas ofthe Work being temporarily shored. Unauthorized personnel shall mean the public andanyone not directly concerned with the execution, supervision or inspection of the shoring.

.8 Protection of Off-Site Structures, Surfaces and Trees: The Contractor shall accept all costand responsibility for any injury or damage to the existing structures, surfaces and trees onthe City's property which may be caused by his workforce and his material suppliers.

1.16 Construction Safety

.1 Include all provisions for construction safety such as fences, barricades, bracing supports,storage facilities, fire protection, ventilation, construction ramps, platforms, runways, ladders,scaffolds, guardrails, all as required by the Construction Safety Act and other jurisdictionalauthorities.

1.17 School Safety & Security

.1 The Contractor shall understand, and ensure that all Trades understand that student safety isthe first priority in all instances.

.2 The building shall remain secure from intrusion at all times. Buildings which have asurveillance system shall have the surveillance system operational at all times. In such caseswhere the surveillance system must be shut down by the Contractor to effect repairs or otheralterations of any description the Contractor shall be to protect the premises outside theschool's normal hours of operation.

.3 All personal injury incidents and property damage, no matter how minor, which occur onschool property, shall be reported immediately to the school principal.

1.18 Access to and Driving In School Yards

.1 Access to School Yard: Vehicles shall not enter or be parked in school yards without firstobtaining the authorization of the school principal or his/her designate, usually the ChiefCaretaker.

.2 Driving in School Yards: When a vehicle is being driven on the school grounds, the drivershall observe normal safe driving practices consistent with proximity to school zones, andescorted by a designated “flagman” on foot.

.3 No vehicle shall be left unsupervised with keys in the ignition, nor with its engine running.

1.19 School Operation & Use of Existing Premises

.1 The Contractor shall organize his work at the school in cooperation with the Principal, throughthe Owner’s Representative, so that the academic programme of the school is not disrupted.The Contractor shall include in his/her tender price, all costs required to phase or stage theproject so that construction does not interfere with normal operations of the school.



.2 In areas where room(s) are required by the school the following day, each room must beready for occupancy the following morning. All furniture must be in place and the room cleanand tidy.

.3 Take reasonable measures for the control of noise and dust during operations while thebuilding is in use.

.4 Prevent excessive noises which will be disturbing to school operation. Machine tools whichare set up in fixed locations shall be so located as to minimize noise and suitable sounddeflectors shall be used if directed by the Consultant. Air compressors and pneumatichammers shall be used only with the express authorization of the Consultant at times asdirected by him. Gasoline welding machines or gasoline driven compressors shall not beused. The Contractor may be requested from time to time to suspend noisy or otherwiseobjectionable operations during certain functions, should such operations cause undueinterference with the said functions. The Contractor will be expected to extend the fullest co-operation and courtesy in such cases.

.5 Parking is available only with the School principal's permission.

1.20 Asbestos Containing Materials (ACM’s)

.1 No products, materials or equipment containing asbestos in any form will be permitted to beused on the project.

.2 Prior to any work being done, theContractor shall review the Asbestos Management ProgramManual of each school with the Head Caretaker and determine whether ACM's will bedisturbed by project work.

.3 If it is determined by the Contractor that ACM's will be disturbed, the Contractor shall notifythe Consultant and Owner ’s Representative of their findings. The Owner’s Representativeshall arrange for appropriate remedial action prior to commencement of the project work.

.4 If the Contractor encounters "unexpected" ACM's during the course of demolition of work,he shall temporarily cease such work at once, immediately inform Head Caretaker for fanshutdown, and report to the Consultant and Owner’s Representative.

1.21 List of Designated Substances Which May Be Encountered on This Project

.1 If encountered, handle in accordance with appropriate current legislation made under theOccupational Health & Safety Act, after consultation with the Consultant, and Owner ’sRepresentative.

DESIGNATED SUBSTANCE PROBABLE LOCATIONSAsbestos pipe insulation, ceiling tiles, plasterLead old piping; lead solder joints; old paint finishes.Silica in concrete and cement productsOTHER SUBSTANCES:PCB'S capacitors; light ballasts

1.22 Owner Salvage From Items to be Removed Under This Contract

.1 Provide minimum 5 working days notice to the Owner ’s Representative prior to removal ofany salvage items. Salvaged items will be picked up by Owner forces on site, after removalby the Contractor.

.2 Materials and equipment not designated for salvage shall become the property of theContractor and shall be promptly removed from site, in accordance with hazardous materialsand waste handling requirement.



1.23 Selective Demolition and Removal

.1 Carry out demolition, removal and disposal in strict accordance with provincial and municipalregulations as applicable, the Ontario Building Code, the Occupational Health and SafetyAct, and the Construction Act.

.2 Provide all demolition and disposal required to permit the various parts of the Work.Demolish only those portions of the existing building that is made necessary by installation ofnew Work, unless otherwise specified.

.3 Protect immediate and adjacent surfaces against damage which might occur from fallingdebris or other cause; do not interfere with use of or safe passage to and from buildings.

.4 Take precautions to guard against movement or settlement of adjacent portions of structure;design, provide and place bracing or shoring as required; be responsible for safety andsupport of such elements; be liable for any such movement or settlement, any damage orinjury caused thereby or resulting therefrom. If at any time safety of any portion of thebuilding appears to be endangered, cease operations, notifyConsultant, take precautions tosupport structure; do not resume operations until permission has been granted. If suchmovement or settlement of building is caused by negligence or default of Contractor, restorethe structural integrity of the structure to the Consultant's design at no extra cost to Owner.When Consultant considers additional bracing or shoring necessary to safeguard or preventsuch movement or settlement, install bracing and shoring upon order.

.5 Should any demolition of building commence before any new construction Work, provideand maintain legal and necessary guards, railings, lights, warning signs, morality lights, andwatchperson(s) during execution of Work to fully protect all persons and Owner from loss,damage, death or injury through neglect, carelessness or incompetence of Contractor or hisemployees or condition or handling of materials.

.6 Investigate existing construction exposed by demolition and removal. Report to Consultantall uncovered dry rot, corrosion of structural members, insect and other infestations,dampness, and material deterioration that may adversely affect the structural adequacy,finishing Work, or sanitation of the building. Such deficiencies shall be reviewed by theOwner’s Representative, Consultant and Contractor together, to determine if furtherinvestigatory demolition is required, and the extent of replacement or treatment that may beindicated.

1.24 Accessibility to Work Areas

.1 Ensure that fitments and other equipment are made up in sections of such size that theymay easily be transported in and through the building to the final location without alterationor damage to property.

1.25 Removal of Existing Furnishings and Furniture

.1 Before work is commenced in any section of the existing building that is occupied, providethe school principal and Owner’s Representative with sufficient notice to make arrangementsfor removal of furnishings.



1.26 Scaffolding

.1 Provide suspended platforms and scaffolding in accordance the Ontario Health & Safety Act& Regulations for Construction Projects.

.2 A Professional Engineer registered in the Province of Ontario shall provide stamped andsealed design drawings and shall inspect and provide written report that platforms andscaffolding erection has been completed in accordance with design drawings prior to use ofscaffolding or suspended platforms.

.3 Promptly remove scaffolding and platforms when no longer required.

1.27 Temporary Facilities

.1 Hoarding shall be provided to protect school operations from construction activity, secure thework areas, restrict non-authorized personnel from the work areas and to protect theContractor’s property.

.1 Hoarding shall meet requirements of the Ontario Health & Safety Act.

.2 Hoarding Shall be a minimum of 2400 mm high and consist of chain link fencing,adequately braced

.2 Throughout the duration of the work, water and power may be taken from existing services inthe building. Only the amount of power and water required for the normal and properexecution of the work may be used. Unusual or unwarranted consumption of water andpower shall be paid for by the Contractor. The decision of the Owner’s Representative onthis matter shall be final and binding.

.3 Arrangements may be made by the Contractor for the use of the school's staff washroomfacilities. Under no circumstances shall construction personnel use student washrooms.

1.28 Shop Inspection

.1 When any work is being executed off premises, The Consultant shall be notified inreasonable time when and where such work will be ready for review so that if desired,reviews can take place from time to time before delivery. Approvals given because of visualreviews shall not relieve the Contractor of his/her responsibility to ensure the work is incomplete accordance with the documents.

1.29 Submittals

.1 Shop Drawings:

.1 Submit digital copies of Shop Drawings in pdf format.

.2 The Contractor shall check, sign and make notations he considers necessary onshop drawings before each submission.

.3 Do not proceed with Work dependent on Shop Drawings until Consultants reviewshave been completed.

.4 Keep one copy of each "reviewed" shop drawing at project site at all times.



.5 Shop drawings which require extensive correction will be sent back for revisions andresubmission, otherwise shop drawings will be sent back with review comments only.Only drawings noted for revision and resubmission need be resubmitted.

.2 Mock-Ups and Samples:

.1 Submit Mock-ups and samples as specified in each Trade specification

.2 Do not proceed with Work until Mock-ups and samples are approved. Do not installmaterials that do not match approved samples.

.3 Record Drawings:

.1 After award of Contract, the Consultant will provide the Contractor with a hardcopy ofthe plans. The Contractor shall maintain, as the work progresses, records ofsignificant changes, revisions, additions and deletions to or from ContractDocuments, including accurate location, depth size and type of existing andabandoned utilities and services.

.2 Neatly mark on the hardcopy, locations of structures, services and similar work notclearly in view, the position of which is required for maintenance, alteration work, andfuture additions. Do not conceal critical work until its location has been recorded.Utilize shop drawings to record changes to the work.

.3 Contractor shall submit to the Consultant to enter as-built information from marked-up record drawings to an digital format of AutoCAD 2002 or later version, on CD-Rom or neatly labelled floppy diskette. As-built information to be entered on layers toOwner standard.

.4 Submit marked-up hardcopy to the Consultant who will transfer updated to the digitaldrawing file on application for Certificate of Substantial Performance.

.4 Maintenance and Operating Instructions

.1 Instruct Owner ’s representatives in the proper operation and maintenance ofequipment.

.2 Provide 3 (three) copies of Maintenance Manuals and Operating Instructions.Manuals to be delivered to the Owner’s Representative office at time of applicationfor Substantial Performance.

.3 Data shall be contained in “D-ring” binders with soft vinyl covers. Binders shall haveclear plastic pocket at back of spine containing identification label “OPERATIONAND MAINTENANCE MANUAL”, and the project name and volume number, ifapplicable. All data shall be typewritten or neatly printed on A4 size (8.5”x11”).

.4 Data shall be assembled in systematic order, generally following the specificationformat. Provide celluloid covered tabs fastened to hard paper dividers to identifydifferent sections.

.5 Provide the following data as applicable to the work of this Contract:

.1 List of Contents; cross-referenced to each Volume.

.2 Complete list of Contractor, Subcontractors and suppliers, indicating name,address, telephone & fax numbers, email addresses, name of contact personand description of work done.



.3 Complete list of products used in the work, indicating product name andmanufacturer for each listing.

.4 Copy of Finish Hardware List, complete with all amendments and revisions, ifapplicable.

.5 Schedule of paints and coatings. Include sufficient explanation to fully identifyeach surface with the applicable paint or coating used. Enclose copy of ColourSchedule.

.6 All “reviewed” shop drawings.

.7 Maintenance instructions for all finished surfaces.

.8 Brochures and cuts of all equipment and fixtures.

.9 Operating and maintenance instructions for all equipment.

.10 All Warranties and Guarantees required by the Specifications for this Work.

.6 Refer to Division 15 for more specific mechanical data required beyond thedescription of this paragraph.

.7 Refer to Division 16 for more specific electrical data required beyond the descriptionof this paragraph.

1.30 Fasteners

.1 Fasteners for drywall or acoustic ceiling suspension from concrete slabs or beams shall bedrilled-in Ramset #3116 TW or equal by Star Expansion Industries, having a holding powerof 9.25 KN (2,080 lbs). Fasteners extending into cells of blocks or cores of precast concreteceilings shall be toggle bolts with eye couplings.Work of each trade shall include necessaryfastenings, anchors, inserts, attachment accessories, and adhesives. Where installation is inWork of other Sections locate devices for other trades and cooperate with them as theyrequire.

.2 Install fastenings and anchors to provide anchorage that is permanent and of sufficientstrength, and that it will not loosen from vibration or other causes normal to building use.Space anchors within their load limit and shear capacity.

.3 Do not use fastenings of wood plugs or blocking in masonry, concrete or metal constructionunless specified or shown on Drawings, or which cause spalling or cracking of material inwhich installed. Do not use powder-actuated fastening devices unless approved byArchitect. Do not use fastenings which will set up electrolytic action between them and otherWork with which they are in contact.

.4 Use hot-dipped galvanized steel fasteners and anchors for securing exterior work.

.5 Submit to the Consultant, written confirmation from an independent testing and inspectioncompany that the suspended ceiling system has been designed and installed to support theadditional weight of the fixtures and associated wiring, air diffusers and pressure of flexibleducts, in accordance with Bulletin 30-4-3 of the Ontario Hydro Electrical Safety Code.Written confirmation must be certified (stamped) by a Professional Engineer registered inthe Province of Ontario.



1.31 Cutting, Patching and Making Good

.1 Generally: Make good all surfaces adjacent to and affected by new work.

.2 Where reference is made to "patch" or "make good" on the Drawings, it shall mean toprepare and refinish all surfaces damaged, marred, replaced, or otherwise remedied, and tomatch and blend to adjacent surfaces. Junctions of existing to new surfaces shall be made"invisible" in final assembly.

.3 Join and make new Work to existing in such a manner that the joint is structurally sound andinconspicuous.

.4 Make good existing surfaces, found unfinished or in a "bad state of repair" after removal ofexisting construction. Make good such surfaces to blend to adjacent surfaces.

1.32 Allowances for Deflection

.1 Make allowance for deflection of the structure or other components above.

1.33 Dissimilar Metals and Metal Contact

.1 Insulate metals where necessary to prevent electrolytic action and corrosion due to contactbetween dissimilar metals, and between metals and masonry, concrete or gypsum board.Use Bituminous paint, butyl tape, building paper or other approved means. Use bituminouspaint only on aluminum surfaces.

1.34 Manufacturer’s Instructions

.1 Unless otherwise indicated in the specifications, install or erect Products in accordance withmanufacturer's instructions. Do not rely on labels or enclosures provided with Products.Obtain written instructions directly from manufacturers.

.2 Notify the Consultant in writing, of conflicts between the specifications and manufacturer'sinstructions, so that the Consultant may establish a course of action.

.3 Improper installation or erection of Products, due to failure in complying with theserequirements, authorizes the Consultant to require removal and re-installation at no increasein Contract Price.

1.35 Replacement of Defective Items

.1 The replacement of defective items shall be the responsibility of the installing Trade if thedefect is due to faulty manufacture.

.2 The responsibility shall include the complete removal and reinstallation of such items andthe making good of the work of all trades involved in such replacement and/or defect at nocost to the Owner.



1.36 Periodic Cleaning

.1 Keep the work premises clean. Promptly, as the work proceeds and on completion, clean upand remove from the premises all rubbish and surplus materials resulting from the work.Remove from finished surfaces foreign materials, droppings, spatters, which would set up orbecome difficult to remove.

1.37 Final Cleaning

.1 At completion of Contract work, new work to satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative.Include cleaning of stains and smudges from all adjacent finished surfaces.

.2 Remove all temporary protection. Defects in material and workmanship noted after removalof temporary protection shall be made good before continuation of cleaning operations.

1.38 Closeout

.1 Submit Project Data Book, warranties and guarantees, maintenance manuals, recorddrawings and extra stock.

.2 Demonstration, Inspection and Temporary Use of Equipment: Arrange for a demonstrationof systems and operating equipment upon the 100% completion of their installation.

.3 Final Inspection: The Contractor shall advise the Consultant in writing when the project iscomplete and request an inspection at the earliest opportunity. The Inspection shall beperformed by the Consultant, Owner’s Representative, and the Contractor and such Sub-Trade as required.

.4 Deficiencies: a list of deficiencies shall be drawn up by theConsultant. The Contractor shallcorrect the deficiencies and complete the project as expeditiously as possible.

.5 This paragraph is complementary and does not restrict or override other specificrequirements noted in the documents.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

Not applicable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not applicable.

END OF SECTION



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Language of the Contract

.1 The use of the words “include” or “including”, or variations thereof, within the ContractDocuments is not limiting.

1.2 The Contract Documents

.1 The Contract Documents have been arranged into various divisions, sections, drawings,and schedules for the purpose of presenting the Work in a logical and organized formand to enable ease of reference and interpretation, and are not intended to be anarrangement of precise and independent Subcontractors, or jurisdiction of responsibilityfor the various parts of the Work. The Contractor shall be solely responsible forcoordinating the execution of the Work of this Contract in accordance with therequirements of the Contract Documents.

.2 As a result, the Consultant shall not be required to decide on questions arising withregard to agreements or contracts between the Contractor and Subcontractors orSuppliers, nor to the extent of the parts of the Work assigned thereto.

.3 Further, no extra will be allowed as a result of the failure to coordinate and allocate theWork such that the Work is Provided in accordance with the Contract Documents.

.4 This section coordinates, relates, and governs the work of other sections of thespecifications.

.5 Specifications contained in Division 15 may also be referred to as “Mechanical”.

.6 Specifications contained in Division 16 may also be referred to as “Electrical”.

1.3 Laws, Notices, Permits and Fees

.1 The building code - Ontario Regulation 350/06, including amendments, shall govern theWork.

.2 Comply with codes, by-laws, and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction over thePlace of the Work. Codes and regulations form an integral part of the ContractDocuments.

.3 Owner shall apply and pay for the building permit. The Contractor shall pick up buildingpermit from the municipal department having jurisdiction at the Place of the Work. Obtainand pay for all other permits, licenses, deposits and certificates of inspection as part ofthe Work.

.4 Arrange for inspection, testing and acceptance of the Work required by the authoritieshaving jurisdiction. Be responsible for necessary preparations, provisions and pay costs.

.5 Obtain permits required to execute work on municipal rights of way. Obtain damagedeposits for sidewalks, roads and services, unless otherwise indicated.

.6 It is the responsibility of the Contractor to schedule notifications and inspections requiredby authorities having jurisdiction such that notifications can be properly received and thatinspections can be properly undertaken without causing a delay in the Work. TheContractor, at no additional cost to the Owner, shall be solely responsible for any delayin the Work caused by failure to properly schedule required notifications and inspections.



.7 The Contractor shall provide to the chief building official or the registered code agency,where a registered code agency is appointed under the Ontario Building Code Act inrespect of the construction to which the notice relates, the required notices set out inDivision C – Part 1 Sentence 1.3.5.1(2) and Sentence 1.3.5.2 of the Ontario BuildingCode, O. Reg. 350/06 as amended. The Contractor shall be present at each siteinspection by an inspector or registered code agency as applicable under Division C –Part 1 Sentence 1.3.5.2 of the building code.

.1 It is the responsibility of the Contractor to schedule notifications to the chiefbuilding official or the registered code agency such that the inspection pertainingto the notifications can be made within the time frame as required under DivisionC – Part 1 Sentence 1.3.5.3 of the Ontario Building Code, O. Reg. 350/06 asamended, without causing a delay in the Work. The Contractor, at no additionalcost to the Owner, shall be solely responsible for any delay in the Work causedby failure to properly schedule required notifications and inspections.

1.4 Examination of the Place of the Work, Documents, Surfaces and Conditions

.1 Carefully examine the Place of the Work and investigate matters relating to the nature ofthe Work, means of access and egress, obstacles, rights and interests of other partieswhich may be interfered with during the execution of the Work, conditions and limitationsincluding obstructions, existing structures or facilities, local conditions, actual levels,character and nature of the Work, and other consideration which may affect performanceof the Work.

.2 Carefully examine the extent of work to be performed and matters which are referred toin the Contract Documents prior to start of the Work.

.3 Examine work to which work is to be applied, anchored or connected, and relevant as-built conditions.

.4 Each work operation following on a previous work operation of a differing Subcontractor,as in the case of finishing and surfacing work, shall include a thorough examination ofthe condition of the previous work. Conditions found unacceptable, either for thecommencement of the new work or its satisfactory completion, shall be reported inwriting to the Consultant.

.5 Do not commence work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Commencement ofwork implies acceptance of surfaces and conditions and existing conditions will not beaccepted as a contributing factor to subsequent failure or acceptability of the Work.

1.5 Quantity of Items

.1 Where a component, device, item or part of materials or equipment is referred to in thesingular number, such reference shall require the provision of as many components,devices, items or parts of material or equipment necessary to complete the Work.

1.6 Standards and Codes

.1 Contract forms, codes, specifications, standards, manuals and installation, applicationand maintenance instructions referred to in these specifications, unless otherwisespecified, amended or date suffixed, shall be latest published editions at Contract date.



1.7 Discrepancies and Clarifications

.1 Advise Consultant of discrepancies discovered in requirements of the ContractDocuments and request clarification in written form.

.2 Advise Consultant when clarifications are required pertaining to meaning or intent ofrequirements of Contract Documents and request clarification from Consultant in writtenform.

.3 Do not proceed with related work until written clarification is provided by Consultant.

.4 Failure to notify Consultant shall result in Contractor incurring responsibility for resultingdeficiencies and expense at no additional cost to the Owner.

.5 Written instructions issued by Consultant for the purpose of clarification, implicitlysupersede applicable and relevant aspects of the Contract Documents irrespective ofwhether or not these documents are explicitly or specifically cited in clarification requestsor clarification instructions.

1.8 Use of Premises and the Place of the Work

.1 Make good roads, soft landscaping, walkways, curbs, sidewalks, possessions andproperty, soiled or damaged due to the Work, to requirements of authorities havingjurisdiction and requirements of Making Good, as applicable.

.2 Fully protect adjacent site improvements, services, landscaping, and other works usingsuitable covering and support framing, to prevent damage by construction relatedactivities.

1.9 Public Utilities and Services

.1 Verify limitations imposed on the Work by presence of utilities and services, and ensureno damage occurs to them.

.2 Notify service authorities concerned so that they protect, remove, relocate, ordiscontinue them, as they may require.

.3 Make arrangements and pay for connection charges for services required for the Work.

.4 Locate new poles, pipes, conduit, wires, fill pipes, vents, regulators, meters, and sanitaryservices in inconspicuous locations. If not indicated in Contract Documents, verifylocation with Consultant before commencing installation.

1.10 Work on Public Property

.1 Include curb cuts and making good of existing property to Provide fully paved andfinished approaches to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

.2 Include making good of existing curbs, walks, paving and soft landscaping on adjacentproperty.

1.11 Setting out the Work

.1 Assume full responsibility for and execute complete layout of the Work to requiredlocations, lines and elevations.



.2 Arrange meeting with Consultant to discuss critical setting out assumptions for the Workand establish limiting conditions for setting out the Work. Consultant shall chair andprepare minutes of the meeting, and prepare and submit sketches recordingunderstanding of key setting out principles.

.3 Provide devices needed to lay out and construct the Work.

.4 Establish existing bench marks, grades, lines, levels, and temporary, widely separatedbench marks. Employ the services of a firm of registered land surveyors licensed in thePlace of the Work.

.5 Surveyor shall verify grades, lines, levels at the Place of the Work critical setting outpoints specified herein, and dimensions shown and report discrepancies in levels ordimensions before commencing Work. Where discrepancies between intended layoutand existing conditions are found to exist, prepare and submit a detailed report toConsultant, including schematic digital layout of conflicting conditions, in formatcompatible with currently licensed edition of AutoCAD 2002 software for Consultant’suse in reconciling these issues. Surveyor shall lay out building areas, and floorelevations.

.6 Surveyor shall verify location and datum reference elevation of finished foundations,relative to reference markers, showing actual finished grades in relation to noted gradesin the Contract Documents. Prepare and submit a reproducible plan of survey certifiedAs-Built by above firm and in format compatible with currently licensed edition ofAutoCAD 2002 software, prior to date of Substantial Performance of the Work.

.7 Preserve bench marks, reference points and stakes.

.8 Upon completion of foundation work, prepare and submit an accurate survey showingthe location of the foundations at the Place of the Work, foundation wall dimensions, andthe gross floor area of the foundation plan. The survey is to be prepared by aRegistered Ontario Land Surveyor acceptable to the Owner and to the Consultant.Submit 4 copies of this survey to the Consultant at time of completion of foundationwork. Submit additional copies as part of the closeout submittals in accordance withSection 01770.

.9 Prepare and submit record survey documents and survey logs for incorporation intoproject record documents in accordance with Section 01770.

.10 Work adjacent to public property:

.1 Verify before commencing portions of the Work adjacent to public and privateproperties, that no plans for altering clearances, set-backs, easements, grades,or otherwise have been established by authorities having jurisdiction, subsequentto issuance of the building permit.

1.12 Documents at the Place of the Work

.1 Maintain at the Place of the Work, one copy of each of following:

.1 Contract Documents including drawings, specifications, addenda, and othermodifications to the Contract.

.2 ‘Reviewed' or 'Reviewed as Modified' shop drawings.

.3 Construction and submittal schedules.

.4 Supplemental Instructions, proposed Change Orders, Change Orders, andChange Directives.



.5 Field Test Reports.

.6 Consultant’s field review reports and deficiency reports.

.7 Reports by authorities having jurisdiction.

.8 Building and other applicable permits, and related permit documents.

.9 Daily log including:

.1 Demolition conditions.

.2 Start and finish date of each part of the Work.

.3 Date, quantities and particulars of each concrete pour.

.10 As-built drawings recording as-built conditions, instructions, changes forstructure, equipment, wiring, plumbing, and the like, as called for in Sections01015, 01770 and Division 15 and Division 16, prior to being concealed.

.2 Make above material available to Consultant upon request.

1.13 Overloading

.1 Protect the existing building from loads which may cause permanent deformation.

.2 Protect the Work from loads which may cause permanent deformation.

1.14 Inserts, Anchors and Fasteners

.1 The following shall supplement the requirements given under Section 01015.

.2 Use only factory made, threaded or toggle type inserts as required for supports andanchors, properly sized for load to be carried.

.3 Where inserts cannot be placed, use factory made expansion shields for light weightsonly.

.4 Supply and locate inserts, holes, anchor bolts and sleeves during placement orfabrication of structural elements.

.5 Fasteners stressed in withdrawal are not acceptable, except where otherwise indicated.

.6 Metal fastenings shall be uniform to metals materials and components being anchoredor of a metal which will not set up a galvanic action causing damage to the fastening ormetal component under moist conditions.

.7 Fastenings for prefinished materials shall be of concealed type unless otherwiseindicated, and when exposed finish is required, of matching prefinishing materials.

.8 Metal fastenings and accessories shall be same texture, colour and finish as material onwhich they occur, as selected by Consultant.

.9 Power actuated fasteners:

.1 Power actuated fasteners: Fastener system of type suitable for applicationindicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain,without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing perASTM E1190-95(2007) conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

.2 Do not use power actuated fasteners which are stressed in withdrawal in finishedwork.



.3 Do not use power actuated fasteners within 100 mm (4") of the edge of concreteor masonry, unless otherwise accepted in writing by Consultant.

.4 Do not use power actuated fasteners in post-tensioned concrete.

1.15 Penetrations

.1 Holes or voids created in assemblies or partitions for penetrating mechanical, electrical,or sprinkler service items, shall be of sufficient size to accommodate the penetrating itemas well as additional required fill materials, such as sealants, firestopping and smokesealants, insulation, and the like, without exceeding the maximum opening allowable bythe manufacturer of the additional required fill material.

1.16 Concealed Services

.1 Conceal wiring, conduit, pipes and ductwork in finished areas, unless otherwiseindicated or authorized by Consultant.

1.17 Trademark and Labels

.1 Trademarks and labels, including applied labels, shall not be visible in finished work infinished areas, unless otherwise accepted or indicated by Consultant.

.2 The exceptions to this requirement are trademarks and labels which are essential toidentify materials, systems, assemblies, and equipment for maintenance andreplacement purposes, and for life safety, fire resistance and temperature rise ratings.

1.18 Survey Location Devices

.1 Replace, at no additional cost to the Owner, any iron pins and survey bars, monuments,geodetic datum and similar reference markers, which are disturbed, moved, or lost incourse of construction.

1.19 Artifacts and Fossils

.1 Fossils, coins, articles of value or antiquity, structures and other remains or things ofscientific or historic interest discovered at the Place of the Work shall, as between theOwner and the Contractor, be deemed to be the absolute property of the Owner.

.2 The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions to prevent removal or damage todiscoveries as identified above, and shall advise the Consultant upon discovery of suchitems, and await Consultant’s written instructions before proceeding with work in thisarea.

.3 The Consultant will investigate the impact on the Work of the discoveries identifiedabove. If conditions are found that would cause an increase or a decrease in theContractor’s cost or time to perform the Work, the Consultant, with the approval of theOwner, will issue appropriate instructions for a change in the Work.

1.20 Waste Audits/Plans for Waste Reduction

.1 Comply with requirements of jurisdictional authorities.



.2 Deliver to nearest appropriate depot materials accepted for recycling by region ormunicipality having jurisdiction over the Place of the Work, including but not limited tocardboard, paper, plastic, aluminum, steel, and glass. Deliver to nearest appropriatedepot scrap and excess gypsum wallboard for recycling of this material. Costs for thiswork are included in the Contract Price.

1.21 Interferences

.1 Coordinate placement of equipment to ensure that components will be properlyaccommodated within spaces provided prior to commencement of the Work.

.2 Take complete responsibility for remedial work that results from failure to coordinateaspects of work prior to its fabrication/installation.

.3 Ensure that accesses and clearance required by jurisdictional authorities and/or for easymaintenance of equipment are provided in layout of equipment and services; notifyConsultant if indicated clearances are in conflict.

1.22 Items Supplied by Owner

.1 NIC (Not In Contract) shall be used to designate various items of equipment that requirecoordination for installation although are not Provided as part of the Work.

.2 SBO (Supplied by Owner) shall be used to designate various items of equipment that willbe supplied by the Owner for installation by the Contractor as part of the Work.

.1 Install items indicated as supplied by Owner (SBO) during the Work. Coordinateshipping and delivery with the Owner. Store items supplied by Owner at thePlace of the Work and protect from damage. Install completely, and leave in fulloperating condition, in accordance with manufacturer’s directions.

1.23 Security

.1 Be responsible for security of the Place of the Work and material from time the Workcommences until completion of the Work.

.2 Provide and maintain signs, hoardings, guard-rails, barriers, warning lights and otherprotection as required by authorities having jurisdiction for safety of the Place of theWork. Be responsible for adequacy of protection.

1.24 Publicity Releases and Photographs

.1 No press or publicity releases will be permitted without prior written approval of theOwner.

.2 No photographs of the Place of the Work or of any portion of the Work will be permittedwithout written approval of the Owner, except as provided by the Contract Documents.

1.25 Smoking Policy

.1 Smoking in the Owner’s premises is prohibited.

.2 Smoking at the Place of the Work is prohibited.



1.26 Electronic Files

.1 In the event that the Contractor, a Subcontractor, or a Supplier requestsAutoCAD files from the Consultant, a fee paid to the Consultant for preparing theelectronic files of plans will be required. The Consultant may require a copyrightwaiver to be signed, at the Consultant‘s discretion.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

Not applicable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not applicable.

END OF SECTION


Product Substitution Procedures

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Approved Alternates and Approved Equals

.1 Named Products alternates or equals, indicated by the phrases "or approved alternateby XYZ Manufacturing" or "or approved equal by XYZ Manufacturing", shall beinterpreted to mean that named Product alternate or equal, if selected for use in lieu ofindicated or specified Product, meets or exceeds performance, appearance, generalarrangement, dimensions, availability, code and standards compliance, and colour ofspecified Product. Be responsible for costs and modifications associated with theinclusion of named Product alternate or equal at no additional cost to the Owner.

.2 The process for proposing and approving alternates or equals shall be the same processas for proposing and approving substitutions (refer to paragraph 1.2 below).

.3 Confirm delivery of specified items prior to proposing alternates or equals.

1.2 Substitutions

.1 Submission of substitutions:

.1 Proposals for substitutions of Products and materials must be submitted inaccordance with procedures specified in this section.

.2 Consultant may review submissions, if directed by Owner, but in any case withthe understanding that the Contract Time will not be altered due to the timerequired by the Consultant to review the submission and by the Contractor toimplement the substitution in the Work.

.2 Submission requirements:

.1 Description of proposed substitution, including detailed comparative specificationof proposed substitution with the specified Product.

.2 Manufacturer’s Product data sheets for proposed Products.

.3 Respective costs of items originally specified and the proposed substitution.

.4 Confirmation of proposed substitution delivery, in writing by Productmanufacturer.

.5 Compliance with the building codes and requirements of authorities havingjurisdiction.

.6 Affect concerning compatibility and interface with adjacent building materials andcomponents.

.7 Compliance with the intent of the Contract Documents.

.8 Effect on Contract Time.

.9 Reasons for the request.

.3 Substitutions submitted on shop drawings without following requirements of this sectionprior to submission of the affected shop drawings will cause the shop drawings to berejected.

.4 Proposed substitutions shall include costs associated with modifications necessary toother adjacent and connecting portions of the Work.


Product Substitution Procedures

.5 Consultant’s decision concerning acceptance or rejection of proposed substitutions isfinal. Should it appear to the Consultant that the value of services required to evaluatethe substitution exceeds the potential reduction, the Consultant will advise the Ownerthat the substitution does not merit consideration before proceeding with a fullevaluation. If the substitution will produce a reduction commensurate with or exceedingthe value of the Consultant’s services to evaluate the substitution, the Consultant willrequest the Owner’s direction to proceed with evaluation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not applicable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not applicable.

END OF SECTION


Requests for Interpretation

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Request for Interpretation – RFI

.1 A request for interpretation (RFI) is a formal process used during the Work to obtain aninterpretation of the Contract Documents pursuant to GC 2.2.7 through GC 2.2.10(inclusive).

.1 An RFI shall not constitute notice of claim for a delay.

.2 Submittal procedures:

.1 RFI form:

.1 Submit RFI on “Request for Interpretation” form, appended to this section.The Consultant shall not respond to an RFI except as submitted on this form.

.2 Where RFI form does not provide sufficient space for complete information tobe provided thereon, attach additional sheets as required.

.3 Submit with RFI form necessary supporting documentation.

.2 RFI log:

.1 Maintain log of RFIs sent to and responses received from the Consultant,complete with corresponding dates.

.2 Submit updated log of RFIs with each progress draw submittal.

.3 Submit RFIs sufficiently in advance of affected parts of the Work so as not tocause delay in the performance of the Work. Costs resulting from failure to dothis will not be paid by the Owner.

.4 RFIs shall be submitted only to the Consultant.

.5 RFIs shall be submitted only by Contractor. RFIs submitted by Subcontractors orSuppliers shall not be accepted.

.6 Number RFIs consecutively in one sequence in order submitted.

.7 Submit one distinct RFI per RFI form.

.8 Consultant shall review RFIs from the Contractor submitted in accordance withthis section, with the following understandings:

.1 Consultant’s response shall not be considered as a Change Order or ChangeDirective, nor does it authorize changes in the Contract Price or ContractTime or changes in the Work.

.2 Only the Consultant shall respond to RFIs. Responses to RFIs received fromentities other than the Consultant shall not be considered.

.9 Allow 5 Working Days for review of each RFI by the Consultant.

.1 Consultant’s review of RFI commences on date of receipt by the Consultantof RFI submittal and extends to date RFI returned by Consultant.

.2 When the RFI submittal is received by Consultant before noon, review periodcommences that day; when RFI submittal is received by Consultant afternoon, review period begins on the next Working Day.


Requests for Interpretation

.3 If, at any time, the Contractor submits a large enough number of RFIs suchthat the Consultant cannot process these RFIs within 5 Working Days, theConsultant, will confer with the Contractor within 1 Working Day of receipt ofsuch RFIs, and the Consultant and the Contractor will jointly prepare anestimate of the time necessary for processing same as well as an order ofpriority between the RFIs submitted. The Contractor shall accommodate suchnecessary time at no increase in the Contract Time and at no additional costto the Owner.

.10 Contractor shall satisfy itself that an RFI is warranted by undertaking a thoroughreview of the Contract Documents to determine that the claim, dispute, or othermatters in question relating to the performance of the Work or the interpretationof the Contract Documents can not be resolved by direct reference to theContract Documents. Contractor shall describe in detail this review on the RFIform as part of the RFI submission. RFI submittals that lack such detailed reviewdescription, or where the detail provided is, in the opinion of the Consultant,insufficient, shall not be reviewed by the Consultant and shall be rejected.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not applicable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not applicable.

END OF SECTION

Date # ofPages

To FromCo. Co.Phone # Phone #

Contractor’s Request for Interpretation

Consultant’s Supplemental Instructions

Fax # Fax #Email Email

Project: RFI No.:

Owner:Date ofRequest:

To: Contractor:(Consultant’s

Representative)

Project No.:Contractor’sRepresentative:

Consultant’s FaxNo.: Fax No.:

Interpretation Requested: (Description of request for interpretation and references to relevantportions of Contract Documents)

Attachments:Requested by:

Consultant’s Supplemental Instruction:

Attachments:Reply By:

The work shall be carried out in accordance with these Supplemental Instructions issuedin accordance with the Contract Documents without change in Contract Price or ContractTime. Prior to proceeding with these instructions, indicate acceptance of theseinstructions as being consistent with the Contract Documents by returning a signedcopy to the Consultant.

Supplemental Instruction Issued: Supplemental Instruction Accepted:

By: By:Consultant Date Contractor Date

Cc: Owner Consultant Contractor Field Other:


Coordination

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 General

.1 Provide the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and be responsible fordelays or costs resulting from failure to properly inspect or coordinate the Work, and forreplacement or corrective work required.

1.2 Identification of Systems

.1 Provide identification of electrical and mechanical system installations and otherautomated systems or equipment in compliance with Contract Documents.

1.3 Commissioning and Systems Demonstrations

.1 Provide testing, adjusting, balancing and certification and commissioning of mechanicaland electrical installations and other automated systems or equipment in accordancewith Section 01770.

.2 Instruct Owner’s designated representatives in operation and maintenance ofmechanical and electrical installations and other automated systems or equipment, inaccordance with Section 01770.

1.4 Superintendence

.1 Provide superintendent and necessary supporting staff personnel who shall be inattendance at the Place of the Work while Work is being performed, with provenexperience in erecting, supervising, testing and adjusting projects of comparable natureand complexity.

.2 The Contractor shall appoint a superintendent at the Place of the Work who shall haveoverall authority at the Place of the Work and shall speak for the Contractor andrepresent the Contractor’s interest and responsibilities at meetings at the Place of theWork and in dealings with the Consultant and the Owner.

1.5 Dimensions

.1 Verify dimensions at the Place of the Work before commencing shop drawings. Beforefabrication commences report discrepancies to Consultant in writing. Incorporateaccepted variances on shop drawings and as-built records.

1.6 Coordination

.1 Coordinate and ensure workers, Subcontractors, and Suppliers cooperate to ensure thatthe Work will be carried out expeditiously and in proper sequence.

.2 Make adjustments to allow adjustable work fit to fixed work.

1.7 Building Dimension, Templates, Built-ins, and Coordination

.1 Take necessary dimensions for the proper execution of the Work. Assume completeresponsibility for the accuracy and completeness of such dimensions, and forcoordination.


Coordination

.2 Provide forms, templates, anchors, sleeves, inserts and accessories required to be fixedto or inserted in the Work and set in place or instruct separate Subcontractors as to theirlocation.

.3 Supply items to be built in, as and when required together with templates,measurements, shop drawings and other related information and assistance.

.4 Pay the cost of extra work and make up time lost as a result of failure to providenecessary information and items to be built in.

.5 Verify that the Work, as it proceeds, is executed in accordance with dimensions andpositions indicated which maintain levels and clearances to adjacent work, as set out byrequirements of the Contract Documents, and ensure that work installed in error isrectified before construction resumes.

.6 Check and verify dimensions referring to interfacing of services. Verify such dimensionswith interconnected portions of the Work.

.7 Do not scale directly from drawings. Obtain clarification from Consultant if there isambiguity or lack of information.

.8 Details and measurements of any work which is to fit or to conform with work installedshall be taken at the Place of the Work.

.9 Advise Consultant of discrepancies and omissions in the Contract Documents, thataffect aesthetics, or that interfere with services, equipment or surfaces. Do not proceedwith work affected by such items without clarification from Consultant.

.10 Prepare and submit setting drawings, templates and other information necessary for thelocation and installation of material, holes, sleeves, inserts, anchors, accessories,fastenings, connections and access panels.

.11 Subcontractors shall direct related Subcontractors on site of specific locations requiredfor sleeves and openings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not applicable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not applicable.

END OF SECTION


Project Meetings

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Administrative

.1 The Contractor shall schedule meetings as specified herein.

.1 Such scheduling shall be in consultation both with the Owner and with theConsultant.

.2 The Contractor shall prepare agendas for meetings specified herein.

.1 Agendas shall include, as a minimum, the agenda items specified in the ContractDocuments.

.3 The Contractor shall distribute written notice of each meeting specified herein, completewith meeting agenda, 4 Working Days in advance of meeting date to the Consultant andthe Owner and other affected parties.

.4 The Contractor shall chair and record the minutes of meetings specified herein exceptfor Contract start-up meeting which shall be chaired by the Consultant and the Owner.

.1 Contractor shall distribute copies of minutes to the Owner, the Consultant, and allothers in attendance within 3 Working Days after date of meeting.

.5 Representatives of parties attending meetings shall be authorized to act on behalf of theparties they represent.

.6 Subcontractors and Suppliers shall not attend meetings unless authorized by theConsultant and the Owner.

.7 The Contractor shall prepare, and distribute to the Consultant and the Owner 4 days inadvance of next progress meeting date, the following:

.1 Monthly progress reports containing updated schedules, shop drawing logs,requests for interpretation logs, submittals and budget.

1.2 Contract Start-Up Meeting

.1 Within 5 days after award of Contract, request a meeting of parties in Contract to discussand resolve administrative procedures and responsibilities prior to the commencement ofthe Work.

.2 The Owner, the Consultant, the Contractor, site superintendent(s), and inspection andtesting company will be in attendance.

.3 Agenda to include the following:

.1 Code-of-conduct for workforce at the Place of the Work.

.2 Appointment of official representative of participants in the Project.

.3 Status of permits, fees and requirement of authorities having jurisdiction. Actionrequired.

.4 Staging area.

.5 Establishing a schedule for progress meetings.


Project Meetings

.6 Requirements for Contract modification and interpretation procedures, including,but not limited to: requests for interpretation, contemplated change orders,Change Orders, Change Directives, Supplemental Instructions, procedures,approvals required, mark-up percentages permitted, time extensions, overtime,and administrative requirements.

.7 Schedule of submission of samples, colour chips, and items for Owners and/orConsultant’s consideration, Section 01330.

.8 Construction schedule and progress scheduling Section 01330.

.9 Delivery schedule of specified equipment, Section 01330.

.10 Appointment of inspection and testing agencies or firms, Section 01450.

.11 Requirements for notification for reviews. Allow a minimum of 48 hours notice toConsultant for review of the Work.

.12 Requirements for temporary facilities, signs, offices, storage sheds, utilities,fences, Section 01500.

.13 Security requirements at and for the Place of the Work.

.14 Owner supplied Products.

.15 Record drawings.

.16 Maintenance manuals.

.17 Take-over procedures, acceptance, warranties.

.18 Progress claims, administrative procedures, holdbacks.

.19 Insurances, transcripts of policies.

.20 Contractor’s safety procedures.

.21 Cleaning area for vehicles.

.22 Workplace Safety and Insurance Board Certificate.

1.3 Pre-Installation Meetings

.1 During the course of the Work prior to Substantial Performance of the Work, schedulepre-installation meetings as required by the Contract Documents and coordinated withthe Consultant.

.2 As far as possible, pre-installation meetings shall be scheduled to take place on thesame day as regularly scheduled progress meetings.


.1 Appointment of official representatives of participants in the Project.

.2 Review of existing conditions and affected work, and testing thereof as required.

.3 Review of installation procedures and requirements.

.4 Review of environmental and site condition requirements.

.5 Schedule of the applicable portions of the Work.

.6 Schedule of submission of samples, colour chips, and items for Consultant’sconsideration.


Project Meetings

.7 Requirements for temporary facilities, site sign, offices, storage sheds, utilities,fences, Section 01500.

.8 Requirements for notification for reviews. Allow a minimum of 48 hours notice toConsultant for review of the Work.

.9 Requirements for inspections and tests, as applicable. Schedule and undertakeinspections and tests in accordance with Section 01450.

.10 Delivery schedule of specified equipment.

.11 Special safety requirements and procedures.

.4 The following shall be in attendance:

.1 Contractor.

.2 Subcontractors affected by the work for which the pre-installation meeting isbeing conducted.

.3 Consultant.

.4 Manufacturer’s representatives, as applicable.

.5 Inspection and testing company, as applicable.

1.4 Progress Meetings

.1 During the course of the Work prior to Substantial Performance of the Work, scheduleprogress meetings as directed by the Consultant.

.2 Attendees at progress meetings shall include the following:

.1 Contractor.

.2 Contractor’s site superintendent(s).

.3 Consultant.

.4 Owner.


.1 Review, approval of proceedings of previous meeting.

.2 Review of items arising from proceedings.

.3 Review of progress of the Work since previous meeting and Contractor’s monthlyprogress report.

.4 Field observations, problems, conflicts.

.5 Update construction schedule.

.6 Problems that impede compliance with construction schedule.

.7 Review of off-site fabrication delivery schedules.

.8 Review material delivery dates/schedule.

.9 Corrective measures and procedures to regain construction schedule.

.10 Revisions to construction schedule.

.11 Progress, schedule, during subsequent period of the Work.

.12 Review submittal schedules.


Project Meetings

.13 Review status of submittals.

.14 Maintenance of quality standards.

.15 Pending changes and substitutions.

.16 Review of Contract modifications and interpretations including, but not limited to:requests for interpretation and log, contemplated change orders, Change Orders,Change Directives, Supplemental Instructions, for effect on constructionschedule and on Contract Time.

.17 Review of status of as-built documents.

.18 Other business.

1.5 Pre-Takeover Meeting

.1 Prior to application for Substantial Performance of the Work, schedule a pre-takeovermeeting.



.2 Review of items arising from proceedings.

.3 Review of procedures for Substantial Performance of the Work, completion of theContract, and handover of the Work.

.4 Field observations, problems, conflicts.

.5 Review of outstanding Contract modifications and interpretations including, butnot limited to: requests for interpretation and log, contemplated change orders,Change Orders, Change Directives, Supplemental Instructions, for effect onconstruction schedule and on Contract Time.

.6 Problems which impede Substantial Performance of the Work.

.7 Review of procedures for deficiency review. Corrective measures required.

.8 Review of arrangements for hydro, heating, and other services.

.9 Progress, schedule, during succeeding period of the Work.

.10 Review submittal requirements for warranties, manuals, and all demonstrationsand documentation required for Substantial Performance of the Work.

.11 Review of keying and hardware requirements.

.12 Review of status of as-built documents and record drawings.

.13 Status of commissioning and training.

.14 Review Contractor’s deficiency list and status.

.15 Cleaning for occupancy.

.16 Other business.

1.6 Post-Construction Meeting

.1 Prior to application for completion of Contract, schedule a post-construction meeting.Four days prior to date for meeting, Consultant shall confirm a date for meeting basedon evaluation of completion requirements.


Project Meetings



.2 Confirmation that no business is arising from proceedings.

.3 Confirmation of completion of the Contract, and handover of revieweddocumentation from the Consultant to the Owner.

.4 Confirmation of completion of contemplated change orders, Change Orders,Change Directives, and Supplemental Instructions.

.5 Problems that impede Contract completion.

.6 Identify unresolved issues or potential warranty problems.

.7 Confirmation of completion of deficiencies.

.8 Corrective measures required.

.9 Confirmation of arrangements for hydro, heating and other services.

.10 Confirm submittal requirements for warranties, manuals, and demonstrations anddocumentation for Contract completion are in order.

.11 Review of procedures for communication during post-construction period.

.12 Handover of reviewed record documents by the Consultant to the Owner.

.13 Handover of Contract completion insurance policy transcripts by Contractor.

.14 Submission of final application for payment.

.15 Review and finalize outstanding claims, pricing, and allowance amounts.

.16 Status of commissioning and training.

.17 Demobilization and the Place of the Work restoration.

.18 Review of requests for interpretation log.

.19 Other business.

.20 Special Meetings

.3 Owner and/or Consultant reserve the right to require special meetings which may beheld on short notice and at which attendance by Contractor and representatives ofaffected Subcontractors and Suppliers is mandatory. Meetings shall be chaired by theConsultant and Owner. Contractor shall keep detailed and accurate meeting notes anddistribute copies promptly to all in attendance and those affected by agreements madeat such meetings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not applicable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not applicable.

END OF SECTION


Construction Progress Documentation

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 General

.1 Schedules required:

.1 Construction schedule.

.2 Product delivery schedule.

.3 Inspection and testing schedule.

.2 Format:

.1 Prepare schedules in the form of a PERT or GANTT or Microsoft Project chartmethod.

.2 Construction Schedule shall to be developed utilizing either Microsoft Project2003 (or later version) or Primavera Project Planner version 3.1 (or later version).Include a separate bar for each trade or operation.

.3 Include horizontal time scale identifying the first Working Day of each week.

.4 Format for listings: The chronological order of the start of each item or part of theWork.

.5 Identification of listings: By systems description.

.6 Upon request by the Consultant, submit a digital copy of the constructionschedule to the Consultant. The digital copy shall be in a native file type thatpermits modification of the data. In case of discrepancy between a digital-copyof the construction schedule and the corresponding hard-copy of the constructionschedule, the hard-copy of the construction schedule bearing the latest date, andthat has been formally submitted and reviewed in accordance with therequirements of Section 01320 shall govern.

.3 Construction schedule:

.1 Include the complete sequence of construction activities, including provision forclimate and weather.

.2 Include the dates for the commencement and completion of each major elementof the Work parallel to the sections of the specifications.

.3 Show projected percentage of completion for each item as of the first WorkingDay of each week.

.4 Submit draft schedule for review, and incorporate responses to commentsidentified by Consultant and/or Owner.

.5 Show dates for the commencement and completion of inspection and testing

.6 At each date of submission of schedule, indicate progress of each activity.

.1 Show changes occurring since previous submission of the constructionschedule:

.1 Major changes in scope.

.2 Change Orders and Change Directives.

.3 Activities modified since previous submission.


Construction Progress Documentation

.4 Revised projections of progress and completion.

.5 Other identifiable changes.

.2 Include a narrative report to define:

.1 Problem areas, anticipated delays, and the impact on the schedule.

.2 Corrective action recommended and its impact on the schedule.

.7 Submit revised construction schedule with every site meeting.

.4 Product delivery schedule:

.1 Include dates for delivery of Products, equipment, finish items, factory-finishedmanufactured items. Show last dates for order, shipment, and delivery in order tomeet construction schedule.

.5 Inspection and testing schedule:

.1 Prepare schedule for inspection and testing by advance discussion with theselected inspection and testing company to determine the time required for theinspection and testing company to perform its tests and to issue each of itsfindings, and allow for required time in the construction schedule.

.2 Refer to Section 01450 for additional requirements for inspection and testingscheduling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not applicable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not applicable.

END OF SECTION


Photographic Documentation

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 General

.1 Provide photographic documentation in digital format and in accordance with proceduresand submission requirements specified in this section.

1.2 Digital Photographs

.1 Equipment: Provide photographs using minimum 4 megapixel digital camera.

.2 Submit the required photographs to the Consultant and to the Owner.

.3 Output: Supply date stamped maximum resolution colour photos to Consultant in JPEGformat, on CD-ROM format.

.4 Number of photos required:

.1 Prior to construction: Provide necessary number of photographs, as required todocument existing conditions and verify damage to adjacent streets and propertywhich may or may not have occurred during construction: Minimum 50 photos.

.2 Each Progress draw: Provide 24 construction photographs each month toaccompany each application for progress draw to document the stage of theWork from points selected by the Consultant showing as much as possible of theWork installed during the previous month.

.3 Provide minimum of 8 photographs on each meeting report and for eachprogress meeting.

.4 Completion: When the Work is completed, arrange to take final photographs ofthe Work from a minimum of 8 points of view.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not applicable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not applicable.

END OF SECTION


Submittals

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 General Requirements

.1 Submit submittals as requested by the Contract Documents, as specified herein, and inaccordance with the conditions of the Contract and requirements of Section 01015,which shall be supplemented by the requirements of this section.

.2 In addition to submittals specifically requested by the Contract Documents, submit othersubmittals as may be reasonably requested by the Consultant, or as are required tocoordinate the Work and to provide the Owner with choices available, within the scope ofContract Documents.

.3 Procedures and requirements for Contract closeout submittals shall be in accordancewith the following sections:

.1 Section 01770 - Contract Closeout Procedures and Submittals.

.2 Section 01780 - Warranties.

.4 Contractor’s review of submittals:

.1 Review submittals for conformity to Contract Documents before submitting toConsultant. Submittals shall bear stamp of Contractor and signature of aresponsible official in Contractor’s organization indicating in writing that suchsubmittals have been checked and coordinated by Contractor. Contractor’sreview shall be performed by qualified personnel who have detailedunderstanding of those elements being reviewed and of the conditions at thePlace of the Work proposed for installation.

.2 Check and sign each submittal and make notations considered necessary beforesubmitting to Consultant for review. Where submittal is substantially andobviously in conflict with requirements of Contract Documents, reject submittalwithout submitting to Consultant and request resubmission. Note limited numberof reviews of each submittal covered under Consultant’s services as specifiedbelow.

.3 Contractor shall assume sole responsibility for any conflicts occurring in the Workthat result from lack of comparison and coordination of submittals required for theWork.

.4 Submittals that have not been reviewed, checked, and coordinated by Contractorprior to submission to Consultant, will be rejected.

.5 Notify Consultant in writing of changes made on submittals from ContractDocuments. Consultant’s review of submittals shall not relieve Contractor ofresponsibility for changes made from Contract Documents not covered by writtennotification to Consultant.

.5 Consultant’s review of submittals:


Submittals

.1 Review of submittals by Consultant is for the sole purpose of ascertainingconformance with the general design concepts and the general intent of theContract Documents. This review shall not mean that Consultant approves thedetail design inherent in the submittals, responsibility for which shall remain withthe Contractor. Such review shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility forerrors or omissions in the submittals, or responsibility for meeting requirementsof Contract Documents.

.2 Contractor shall be responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated atthe Place of the Work for information that pertains solely to fabrication processesor to techniques of construction and installation, and for coordination of the Work.

.3 As part of their scope of work, Consultant shall review shop drawings no morethan twice. Should three or more reviews be required due to reasons ofContractor omissions causing resubmission requests, then Contractor shallreimburse the Consultant for time expended in these extra reviews. Time shall beinvoiced to the Owner (to be deducted from monies due to the Contractor andpaid to Consultant by Owner) at rates recommended by Consultant’sprofessional association and disbursements shall be invoiced at Consultant’scost. The Contractor shall cover directly costs and administration associated withcourier services and the like for these extra shop drawing reviews.

.4 Consultant’s review and markings on submittals do not authorize changes in theWork or the Contract Time, and will be accommodated at no additional cost tothe Owner. If, in the opinion of the Contractor, the Consultant’s markings onsubmittals constitute a change in the Work or will effect a change in the ContractTime, then the Contractor shall so notify the Consultant in writing and request aninterpretation following the procedures for requests for interpretation inaccordance with Section 01260. If the Consultant finds that the Consultant’smarkings on submittals do constitute a change in the Work or will effect a changein the Contract Time, then a Change Order will be prepared therefore. The timetaken to process such a request for interpretation shall not, in and of itself,constitute a change in the Work nor increase the Contract Time.

.5 Submittals which are not required by the Contract Documents or not requestedby the Consultant will not be reviewed by the Consultant and will be marked'NOT REVIEWED' by the Consultant and returned to the Contractor.

.6 Make submittals with reasonable promptness and in an orderly sequence so as to causeno delay in the Work. Be responsible for delays, make up time lost and pay added costs,at no additional cost to the Owner, incurred because of not making submittals in duetime to permit proper review by Consultant.

.7 Submittals that contain substitutions will be rejected. Substitutions are permitted only onsubstitution submittals as specified in Section 01250.

.8 Do not proceed with work affected by a submittal, including ordering of Products, untilrelevant submittal has been reviewed by Consultant.

.9 Prepare submittals using SI (metric) units.

.10 Contractor’s responsibility for errors and omissions in submittals is not relieved byConsultant’s review of submittals.

.11 Contractor’s responsibility for deviations in submittal from requirements of ContractDocuments is not relieved by Consultant’s review of submittal, unless Consultant giveswritten acceptance of specific deviations.


Submittals

.12 Engineered submittals:

.1 Submittals for items required to be sealed by professional engineer (engineered)shall be duly prepared, sealed, and signed under the direct control andsupervision of a qualified professional engineer registered in the Place of theWork, having in force, professional liability insurance with minimum limit ofliability of $1,000,000 per claim.

.2 Include with engineered submittal, proof of insurance identifying insurer, policynumber, policy term, and limit of liability, on duly signed letterhead and / orcertificate of insurance.

.3 Design includes life safety, sizing of supports, anchors, framing, connections,spans, and as additionally required to meet or exceed requirements of applicablecodes, standards, regulations, authorities having jurisdiction, and designrequirements of the Contract Documents.

.4 Engineered submittals shall include design calculations, complete withreferences to codes and standards used in such calculations, supporting theproposed design represented by the submittal. Prepare calculations in a clearand comprehensive manner so that they can be properly reviewed.

.5 Professional engineer responsible for the preparation of engineered submittalsshall undertake periodic field review, including review of associated mock-upswhere applicable, at locations wherever the work as described by the engineeredsubmittal is in progress, during fabrication and installation of such work, and shallsubmit a field review report after each visit. Field review reports shall besubmitted to the Consultant, to authorities having jurisdiction as required, and inaccordance with the building code.

.6 Field reviews shall be at intervals as necessary and appropriate to the progressof the work described by the submittal to allow the engineer to be familiar withthe progress and quality of such work and to determine if the work is proceedingin general conformity with the Contract Documents, including reviewed shopdrawings and design calculations.

.7 Upon completion of the parts of the Work covered by the engineered submittal,the professional engineer responsible for the preparation of the engineeredsubmittal and for undertaking the periodic field reviews described above, shallprepare and submit to the Consultant and authorities having jurisdiction, asrequired, a letter of general conformity for those parts of the Work, certifying thatthey have been Provided in accordance with the requirements both of theContract Documents and of the authorities having jurisdiction over the Place ofthe Work.

.8 Costs for such field reviews and field review reports and letters of generalconformity are included in the Contract Price.

.13 Keep copies of reviewed submittals at the Place of the Work in a neat, orderly condition.Only submittals that have been reviewed by the Consultant and are marked withConsultant’s review stamp, as applicable, are permitted at the Place of the Work.

.14 The Work shall conform to reviewed submittals subject to the requirements of thissection. Remove and replace materials or assemblies not matching reviewed submittalsat no increase in the Contract Time and at no additional cost to the Owner.


Submittals

1.2 Schedule of Submittals

.1 Before commencement of the Work, submit to the Consultant a detailed schedule ofsubmittals required by the Contract Documents.

.1 Schedule shall be accompanied by a checklist, correlated to each of theschedule of submittals, the construction schedule (specified under Section01320), the Product delivery schedule (specified under Section 01320), and theschedule of inspections and tests (specified under Sections 01320 and 01450),listing the following:

.1 Shop drawings.

.2 Samples.

.3 Mock-ups.

.4 Reviews, tests and inspections by:

.1 Manufacturers.

.2 Authorities having jurisdiction.

.3 The Owner.

.4 The Consultant.

.5 Inspection and testing companies.

.5 Demonstration and training.

.2 Indicate dates for submitting, review time, resubmission time, float time, and last date formeeting construction schedule.

.3 Consultant will review submittal schedule and advise Contractor if volume and timing ofsubmittals will permit timely review and response. Consultant may require modificationsto submittals schedule in order to allow adequate time for review of submittals. Adjustsubmittals schedule and construction schedule as required to comply with Consultant’sneeds.

.4 Make provisions in schedule for at least 5 Working Days for Consultant’s review ofsubmittals.

.5 If the Consultant requires resubmission of submittals, allow for an additional 2 WorkingDays review for each resubmission.

.6 If, at any time, the Contractor submits a large enough number of submittals such that theConsultant cannot process these submittals within 5 Working Days, the Consultant, inconsultation with the Contractor within 3 Working Days of receipt of such submittal, willprovide the Contractor with an estimate of the time necessary for processing same. TheContractor shall accommodate such necessary time at no increase in the Contract Timeand at no additional cost to the Owner.

.7 The Contractor shall periodically resubmit the submittal schedule, including the shopdrawing schedule to correspond to changes in the construction schedule. Suchresubmissions shall maintain the minimum 5 Working Day period for the Consultant’sreview.

.8 Schedule submissions of submittals well in advance of scheduled dates for installation,to provide lead time for reviews and possible resubmissions and for placing orders andsecuring delivery so as to avoid delays in the Work.


Submittals

1.3 Submission Procedures

.1 Coordinate each submittal with requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.Individual submittals shall include related information.

.2 Distribute copies of submittals to parties whose work is affected by submittals exceptConsultant and Owner before final submission for review by Consultant.

.3 Accompany submittals with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing:

.1 Date.

.2 Project title and number.

.3 Contractor’s name and address.

.4 Identification and quantity of each submittal.

.5 Other pertinent data.

.4 Each submittal shall be identified numerically by relevant specification section numberwith a numeric indicator for multiple submittals by that section followed by revisionsnumber, for example 04080-01-R0.

.5 Make any changes in submittal that Consultant may require, consistent with ContractDocuments Contract Documents, and resubmit as directed by Consultant.

.6 Notify Consultant, in writing, when resubmitting, of any revisions other than thoserequested by Consultant.

.7 After Consultant’s review, distribute copies to affected parties.

1.4 Product Data Sheets

.1 Submit Product data sheet prints; 8 copies. All drawings exceeding 8-1/2” x 11” formatshall have a reproducible sepia along with 3 prints.

.2 Submit Product data sheets for requirements requested in the Contract Documents andas the Consultant may reasonably request where shop drawings will not be prepareddue to a standardized manufacture of a Product. Manufacturers' catalogue cuts will beacceptable in such cases, providing that they are 213 mm x 275 mm (8-1/2" x 11")originals, and that they indicate choices including sizes, colours, model numbers, optionsand other pertinent data, including installation instructions. Submissions showing onlygeneral information are not acceptable.

.3 Where requirements of Contract Documents are more stringent than design proposed onProduct data sheets, the requirements of the Contract Documents take priority.

.4 Upon completion of review by Consultant, 1 marked set of Product data sheets will bereturned to Contractor for reproduction and distribution.

.5 Retain 1 complete set of prints of reviewed Product data sheets for issuance to Ownerimmediately prior to Substantial Performance of the Work, in an acceptable, boundmanner and in accordance with Section 01770.

1.5 Shop Drawings

.1 Submit shop drawings prints in accordance with Section 01015, supplemented asfollows.

.2 Lettering on shop drawings shall be not less than 3mm (1/8") high.


Submittals

.3 Where requirements of Contract Documents are more stringent than design proposed onshop drawings, the requirements of the Contract Documents take priority.

.4 Consultant markings and resulting action required:

.1 Shop drawings requiring no changes will be marked 'REVIEWED', and shall besubmitted for as-built drawings purposes.

.2 Shop drawings requiring several changes will be marked 'REVIEWED asNOTED' and shall be revised and submitted for as-built drawings purposes.

.3 Shop drawings requiring substantial changes will be marked 'REVISE AND RE-SUBMIT' and shall be revised and resubmitted until Consultant stamps drawingswith 'REVIEWED' or 'REVIEWED as NOTED'.

.5 Shop drawing size shall be multiple of 213 mm and 275 mm (8-1/2" and 11") excluding38 mm (1-1/2") binding margin and not larger than 838 mm x 1117 mm (33" x 44").Leave minimum 150 mm x100 mm (6" x 4") clear space for Consultant’s comments.

.6 Upon completion of review by Consultant, 1 marked set of shop drawings will bereturned to Contractor for reproduction and distribution.

.7 Retain 1 complete set of prints of reviewed shop drawings for issuance to Ownerimmediately prior to Substantial Performance of the Work, in an acceptable, boundmanner and in accordance with Section 01770.

.8 Submit copies of reviewed shop drawings to authorities having jurisdiction as required.

.9 Shop drawings shall include:

.1 Fabrication and erection dimensions.

.2 Plans, sections, elevations, arrangements and sufficient full size details whichindicate complete construction, components, methods of assembly as well asinterconnections with other parts of the Work.

.3 Design calculations prepared by professional engineer, as required,substantiating sizes for members and connections based on design loads.

.4 Clear definition of the division of responsibility for the work described thereon.No Products, items or equipment, or description of work, shall be indicated to besupplied, or work to be done, “By Others” or “By Purchaser”. Shop drawingsmarked with either of these phrases will be rejected without having beenreviewed by the Consultant.

.5 Location and type of exposed anchors, attachments and locations and types offasteners, including concealed reinforcements to accept mounted fasteners.

.6 Adhesives, joinery methods and bonding agents.

.7 Kinds and grades of materials, their characteristics relative to their purpose,detailed description of finishes and other fabrication information.

.8 Configurations, types and sizes required; identify each unit type on drawing andon Product.

.9 Descriptive names of equipment and mechanical and electrical characteristicswhen applicable.

.10 Data verifying that superimposed loads will not affect function, appearance andsafety or work shown on shop drawings, as well as other interconnected work.


Submittals

.11 Assumed design loadings, dimensions of elements and material specifications forload-bearing members.

.12 Proposed chases, sleeves, cuts and holes in structural members.

.13 Wall thicknesses of metals.

.14 Location and types of welds. For structural welds use AWS symbols and clearlyshow net weld lengths and sizes.

.15 Materials, gauges, and sizes being supplied including connections, attachments,reinforcement, anchorage and locations of exposed fastenings.

.16 Installation instructions and details for Products to be installed by separateSubcontractors, including function of each part.

.17 A list of Products covered by, or included on, the shop drawing. List of Productsshall be complete and show manufacturer's name, Product name, genericdescription, standard certification where specified, manufacturer's completeinstallation data and precautions against wrong installation, operation andmaintenance.

.18 Refer to individual sections of the specifications for more particular requirementsfor shop drawings.

.10 Compatibility statement: Include with each shop drawing a statement that each Productand material indicated on the shop drawing is compatible with each other Product andmaterial with which it comes into contact.

1.6 Samples

.1 Deliver 3 samples to Consultant’s office with expenses, including carrying costs, prepaid,unless otherwise instructed.

.2 Identify samples or assemblies by Project number and name, name of Consultant,Contractor and Subcontractor, and date of submission. Identify location, specifiedmaterial reference and any other pertinent information. Show construction by layeredmethod if necessary, clearly displaying textures and patterns.

.3 Resubmit samples until written acceptance is obtained from Consultant.

1.7 Mock-Ups

.1 Provide field or shop erected example of work complete with specified materials andworkmanship.

.2 Erect mock-ups at locations as specified and as acceptable to Consultant. Do notproceed with work for which mock-ups are required prior to Consultant’s review of mock-ups.

.3 Protect and maintain mock-ups until directed to be removed. Commence workdemonstrated in mock-up only after review and acceptance of workmanship. If possible,mock-up may become part of finished work, at sole discretion, and with prior writtenacceptance of Consultant.

.4 Reviewed and accepted mock-ups will become standards of workmanship and materialagainst which installed work will be compared.

.5 Remove and replace materials or assemblies not matching reviewed mock-ups.


Submittals

.6 Resubmit mock-ups until written acceptance is obtained from Consultant.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not applicable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not applicable.

END OF SECTION


Special Procedures for Work in Occupied Buildings

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 General Procedures

.1 This section supplements the requirements of Section 01015 regarding work in existingoccupied school buildings and on properties with existing occupied school buildings.

.2 For the purposes of this section:

.1 The words “worker” or “workers” shall mean the Contractor, Contractor’s staff oremployees, Subcontractors, Subcontractor’s staff or employees, Suppliers,Supplier’s staff or employees, or anyone engaged for the Work, directly orindirectly, by the Contractor, unless otherwise indicated.

.3 Operational limitations:

.1 The existing building will remain in full use and occupancy throughout the Work,except for such parts of the building that have been vacated for the Work.

.2 Contractor’s use of the Place of the Work is limited to permit regular use ofexisting Owner’s facilities to continue with the least amount of interference anddisruptions possible.

.3 In consultation with, and to acceptance of, the Consultant in the presence of theOwner, designate an entrance and a circulation route that workers shall use andthat shall not be used by Owner’s staff, building occupants, or the public.

.4 Dust tight enclosure and partition doors and entrance doors to the Place of the Workshall remain closed.

.5 Areas of the existing building adjacent to the Place of the Work or areas affected by theWork, including circulation and access routes, shall be maintained in a clean stateequivalent to the level of cleanliness maintained in the existing building, and as follows:

.1 Clean and vacuum the Place of the Work and areas surrounding the Place of theWork daily or more frequently as required.

.2 Wet mop floor areas in vicinity of access doors to the Place of the Work daily, ormore frequently as required.

.3 Vacuum carpeted areas daily or more frequently as required.

.4 Wet clean carpets in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations oncework in such areas is complete.

.5 Final cleaning shall be in accordance with Section 01770.

.6 Waste protection and removal:

.1 Waste management and disposal shall be in accordance with Section 01500 assupplemented herein.

.2 Transport waste in containers with tightly fitting lids or cover waste with a wetsheet.

.3 Remove waste as it is created. Debris shall be contained and covered if it cannot be removed immediately.

.4 Do not transport waste through occupied areas of existing building.



.5 Remove waste at the end of each Working Day through construction accessroutes.

.7 Document condition of the existing building in areas immediately adjacent to the Place ofthe Work by means of construction photographs in accordance with Section 01323.

1.2 Security

.1 Provide security for the Place of the Work by methods compatible with the securitysystem for the existing building.

.2 Contractor shall coordinate the Work carefully with the Consultant in the presence of theOwner in order to ensure no disruption to the existing building’s security system.

.3 Where existing building’s security system is breached due to Contractor’s negligence, beresponsible for any damage or theft of property, regardless if area where damage ortheft occurred is under Contractor’s control or not.

1.3 Use of Existing Facilities

.1 Restrict access, parking, material deliveries, execution of work, operations andprocedures to designated locations and times and do not deviate from designatedprocedures without prior acceptance by the Consultant in the presence of the Owner.

.2 Periodically review proposed construction operations with the Consultant in the presenceof the Owner and cooperate as required to ensure that Owner’s interests andrequirements are not unduly compromised with regard to the normal operation andfunction of occupied areas on the existing building.

.3 Traffic through occupied areas of the existing building shall be kept to a minimum.Travel within occupied areas of the existing building shall be via the most direct route.

.4 Noise, dust and debris, and odours shall be minimized to ensure building occupants inadjacent areas are disturbed as little as possible. Corrective action to cease or limitdisagreeable annoyances to building occupants shall be implemented immediately uponnotification by the Consultant or the Owner.

.5 Use of existing containers and garbage bins shall not be permitted.

.6 Use of existing elevators shall not be permitted.

.7 Existing fire protection equipment:

.1 Existing fire protection equipment shall only be used in an emergency situation.

.2 Do not remove existing fire protection equipment.

.3 If any existing fire protection equipment is used or interfered with in any way, theOwner’s fire equipment inspector shall be retained to inspect, test, recharge, andotherwise repair such equipment at no additional cost to the Owner.

.8 Use of existing student sanitary facilities shall not be permitted. Provide temporarysanitary facilities in accordance with Section 01500.

1.4 Parking

.1 Parking for workers shall not be made available by the Owner.



.2 Throughout the Work, ensure that there is no interference with the operation of theexisting premises, and that the existing parking areas and road system remain free andclear of obstructions.

.3 Illegally parked vehicles will be ticketed and/or towed at vehicle owner’s expense, and atno additional cost to the Owner.

1.5 Existing Services

.1 Service interruptions:

.1 Connection or disconnection of services that will interfere with the operation ofthe Owner’s facilities shall not be done without the prior written acceptance of theConsultant in the presence of the Owner and during the times designated by theOwner. Premium charges associated with such work shall be included in theContract Price.

.2 Provide at least 10 Working Days prior written notice to the Consultant and theOwner of requirement or intention to interrupt services, and obtain writtenpermission of the Consultant in the presence of the Owner prior to commencingsuch interruption.

.3 In no instance shall interruptions affect the entire existing building.

.4 As far as possible, coordinate interruptions with the Owner’s regular maintenanceof building services and systems.

.5 Areas adversely affected by changes in air flows outside the construction areasas a result of a required shut-down of portions of the existing HVAC systemwithin the construction areas are to be re-balanced to comfortable levels asadvised by the Consultant.

.2 Should existing services be interrupted in breach of the above, Make Good immediatelyand provide protection against further such disruptions. Costs resulting from suchinterruptions and for making good shall be the responsibility of the Contractor at noadditional cost to the Owner.

1.6 Protection of the Existing Building

.1 Protection requirements shall be in accordance with Section 01500, as supplementedherein.

.2 Keep Place of the Work safe and secure, denying access to unauthorized personnel.

.3 Protect existing work from damage. Make Good any damage caused. The onus is onthe Contractor to substantiate that damage existed prior to commencement of the Work.

.4 Do not overload the existing structure due to the Work.

.5 Take special measures to protect existing work from damage when moving heavy loadsor equipment. Protect areas used as passageways or through which materials aremoved. Use resilient tired conveyances only when moving materials and equipmentinside building. Provide coverings as required to protect existing work from damage.

.6 Separate exterior access, work and storage areas from Owner occupied existing areas,with fencing and hoarding as specified in Section 01570. Rearrange fencing/hoarding asWork progresses to suit extent and configuration of the Work.



.7 Provide guards, barricades and other temporary protection to prevent injury to persons.

.8 Protect existing building components and contents from damage by weather, whenexecuting Work affecting integrity of the building envelope. Provide temporary insulatedand air tight weatherproof closures to protect openings made in existing buildingenvelope. Make Good existing building components and contents damaged by weatherresulting from inadequate temporary protection measures.

.9 Provide temporary fire resistant closures at existing areas openings exposed toconstruction areas for the Work to maintain fire and life safety of existing building.

.10 Protection of existing occupied areas:

.1 Existing exterior walls with windows of plain glazing, when exposed to the Work,shall be protected with 16 mm (5/8”) gypsum board for interior surfaces and9.5 mm (3/8”) exterior grade plywood for exterior surfaces, mounted on suitableframing.

.1 Plywood: in accordance with Section 06100.

.2 Metal framing: in accordance with Section 09100.

.3 Gypsum board: in accordance with Section 09290.

.2 Maintain such protection throughout the Work.

.3 Other openings in the existing exterior walls, such as doors and louvres, shall besimilarly protected or replaced with doors of solid core wood or hollow steelconstruction.

1.7 Emergency and Fire Protection

.1 Provide and maintain ready access to fire protection equipment.

.2 Provide temporary fire resistant closures at existing building openings exposed toconstruction areas.

.3 Contractor shall coordinate the work carefully with the Owner in order to ensure nodisruption to the existing fire detection and annunciation systems. Failure to providesuch coordination shall result in the Contractor incurring the responsibilities andexpenses associated with disruption to the existing fire detection and annunciationsystems at no additional cost to the Owner.

.1 Provide fire watch when existing fire detection and annunciation systems are notoperational or on bypass.

.2 Whenever a changeover time occurs, which is an outage time of at least aportion of the fire alarm system, the municipal fire department shall be notified ofthe temporary shutdown and alternative measures shall be devised.

.4 Contractor shall coordinate the work carefully with the Consultant in the presence of theOwner in order to prevent unapproved disruptions to the existing sprinkler system,standpipe system, or other fire protection systems.

.1 Where temporary shut-down is necessitated, such shut down shall be inaccordance with the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and thebuilding code.



.5 Obtain ‘Hot Work Permit’ from Owner prior to hot work operation, which may cause thebuilding's fire alarm system to be activated or create an unwarranted fire risk condition.The prevention of fires and false fire alarms caused by hot work operations is theprimary goal of this procedure. Gas hoses, backflow preventers, fire resistive tarpaulins,curtains and other cutting and welding equipment must be in good repair before thepermit is issued.

.1 ‘Hot Work’ is defined as work using open flames or sources of heat that couldignite materials in the work area.

.6 Fire separations:

.1 Maintain the integrity of fire separations, fire protection systems , and fire ratedassemblies.

.2 Make Good fire separations, fire protection, and fire rated assembliescompromised as a result of the Work.

.7 Temporary fire separations:

.1 Provide temporary fire separations between existing occupied floor areas andnew areas under construction.

.2 Construct temporary fire separations out of steel studs and gypsum board toprovide a construction equivalent to a minimum of 1 hour fire resistance rating,unless otherwise indicated.

.1 Firestopping and smoke sealant: in accordance with Section 07840.

.2 Gypsum board: in accordance with Section 09290.

.3 Steel studs: in accordance with Section 09100.

.3 Where access is required, the doorway shall be protected by a door of solid corewood or hollow steel construction.

.4 Finish hardware equivalent to a minimum of 1 hour fire resistance rating, unlessotherwise indicated.

.8 Maintaining existing building exit facilities:

.1 Maintain exit facilities serving the existing building.

.2 Where an exit is blocked-off or deleted as a result of the Work, an alternative exitshall be Provided that is acceptable to the Consultant, the Owner, and authoritieshaving jurisdiction.

.3 Where it is necessary for access to be gained to an exit through the Place of theWork, the access shall be clearly defined and protected so that it is separatedfrom construction areas by a smoke tight fire separation equivalent to a minimumof 1 hour fire resistance rating, unless otherwise indicated.

.9 Fire department access:

.1 Do not obstruct access route designated for fire department equipment.

.2 If it is necessary that existing access routes be obstructed or deleted, alternativeaccess routes acceptable to the fire department and in accordance with therequirements of the Contract Documents and authorities having jurisdiction shallbe Provided prior to commencement of work that will obstruct or delete existingaccess.



.10 Combustible materials:

.1 Stockpiling of combustible materials adjacent to or inside the existing buildingshall not be acceptable.

.11 Temporary protection of openings in fire separations:

.1 Openings in existing floor assemblies and vertical fire rated assemblies requiredby the Work, shall be temporarily protected with materials as required to maintaincontinuity of the required fire resistance rating for existing fire rated assembly.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not applicable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not applicable.

END OF SECTION


Quality Control

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Related Requirements

.1 Materials and workmanship quality, reference standards - under Section 01600.

.2 Balancing and testing of systems - under Division 15, and Division 16.

1.2 Independent Inspection and Testing

.1 From time to time during progress of the Work, the Owner may require that inspectionand testing be performed to determine that materials Provided in the Work meet therequirements of the Contract Documents.

.1 Subcontractors shall verify with Contractor, in writing, portions of the Work thatwill require inspection and /or testing, prior to commencing such affected work.

.2 Inspection and testing services shall be required for, but not limited to, thefollowing:

.1 Concrete reinforcement.

.2 Concrete.

.3 Mortar.

.4 Firestopping and smoke sealants.

.2 The Consultant will, on behalf of Owner, appoint inspection and testing companies,representing, reporting and responsible to the Owner through the Consultant.

.3 Cost of inspection and testing will be authorized as a disbursement from CashAllowance. Inspection and testing company shall submit monthly invoice original toContractor for review, relating invoices to tests and inspection reports. Provide originalreceipts for disbursements. Invoices will be forwarded by Contractor to Consultant forinclusion in progress payment application.

.4 Additional testing required because of changes in materials, proportions of mixesrequested by Contractor or Subcontractors as well as any extra testing of materialsoccasioned by lack of identification or by failure of such materials being replaced to meetrequirements of the Contract Documents or testing of structure or elements includingload testing, shall be carried out at no additional cost to the Owner.

.5 Inspection and tests required by codes or ordinances, or by an authority havingjurisdiction, and made by a legally constituted authority, shall be the responsibility of theContractor and not requested or directed by Consultant. Shall be paid for by theContractor and not be paid by Owner, unless otherwise specified in the ContractDocuments.

.6 Inspection or testing performed exclusively for Contractor’s convenience shall be soleresponsibility of Contractor, and will not be paid by Owner.


Quality Control

.7 Where evidence exists that defective workmanship may have occurred or that the Workmay have been carried out incorporating defective materials, the Consultant reservesthe right to have tests, inspections or surveys performed, analytical calculation ofstructural strength made and the like in order to help determine the extent of defect andwhether such work must be replaced. Tests, inspections or surveys carried out underthese circumstances will be made at the Contractor’s expense, and will not be paid byOwner, unless the results indicate that the work so tested, inspected or surveyed is notdefective or that, in Consultant’s opinion, the work so tested, inspected, or surveyed maybe accepted, in which case tests, inspections or surveys will be paid by Owner.

.8 Inspection and testing shall be performed by qualified and/or certified personnel underprofessional supervision or performed directly by a professional engineer qualified inconformance with applicable codes and certification programs.

.9 Requirements of regulatory agencies:

.1 Testing shall be conducted in accordance with requirements of the building code.

.2 Obtain certification where required by the building code and standards.

.10 Cooperation with inspection and testing company:

.1 Provide inspection company with materials and installation information asrequired and /or requested.

.2 Provide access to the Work for representatives of inspection and testingcompanies.

.3 Cooperate with inspection and testing companies and give adequate notificationof any changes in source of supply, additional work shifts and any otherproposed changes.

.4 No Product nor part of the Work shall be installed before it is tested when a testis specified or required, nor shall work be executed where a test or inspection isrequired and the inspector cannot attend.

.5 Cooperate in permitting access to the Work for inspection and testing companywherever the Work is in progress, or wherever Products, materials, or equipmentare stored prior to shipping.

.6 Supply labour required to assist inspection and testing company in sampling andmaking tests.

.7 Repair work damaged as a result of inspection and testing work.

.8 Cost of above labour and material shall be borne by applicable Subcontractors.

.9 The inspection and testing service does not relieve the Contractor ofresponsibility for normal shop and site inspection, and quality control ofproduction.

.11 Prepare schedule for inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01330 and asfollows:

.1 Establishing schedule:

.1 By advance discussion with the selected testing laboratory, determine thetime required for the laboratory to perform its tests and to issue each of itsfindings.

.2 Allow required time within construction schedule.


Quality Control

.2 Adherence to schedule:

.1 Contractor shall advise testing laboratory in advance when testing of theWork is required.

.1 Amount of advance notice shall be as required by the testing laboratory,but shall be no less than 2 Working Days.

.2 When testing laboratory is ready to test according to predetermined schedule,but is prevented from testing or taking specimens due to incompleteness ofthe parts of the Work scheduled for inspection and testing, extra costs fortesting attributable to the delay may be back-charged to Contractor at noadditional cost to the Owner.

.3 Notify Contractor and inspection company at least 3 Working Days before workrequired to be inspected commences, and arrange for a meeting at the Place ofthe Work, to be held 1 Working Day before the work starts with the followingpresent:

.1 Contractor, a principal of the Subcontractor whose work is to be inspectedand/or tested, inspection and testing company, manufacturer's representativeand Consultant.

.4 Give 2 Working Days prior notice to inspection company of the commencementof each phase of the Work requiring inspection, and provide inspection companywith materials and installation information.

.12 Reports and documents

.1 Inspection and testing companies shall submit shop inspection and siteinspection reports within 5 Working Days of each inspection.

.2 Distribute reports as follows:

.1 Owner; 2 copies.

.2 Consultant; 1 copy.

.3 Contractor; 2 copies.

.4 Consulting engineers, as applicable; 1 copy each.

.3 Inspectors shall submit a written report on each inspection or test, includingpertinent data such as conditions at the Place of the Work, dates, testreferences, locations of tested materials, actual Product identification,procedures and descriptions, site instructions given, recommendations and/orany other information required by standard applicable to reporting of tests andinspections.

.4 Report shall clearly indicate failure of Product or procedures to meet applicablestandards, give recommendations for retesting or correction. Inspector shallcontact Consultant immediately when Product or procedure fails to meetapplicable standards.

.5 Upon completion of those parts of the Work subject to independent inspectionand testing, submit to the Consultant duplicate certificates of acceptance of theinstallation issued by the independent inspection and testing company.

.13 Inspection and test specimens


Quality Control

.1 Inspection and testing will, generally, consist of procedures listed in the followingparagraphs, but additional tests may be performed as required to verifyconformance to Contract Documents.

.2 Specimens and samples for testing, unless otherwise specified in the ContractDocuments, will be taken by the testing laboratory; sampling equipment andpersonnel will be provided by the testing laboratory; and deliveries of specimensand samples to the testing laboratory will be performed by the testing laboratory.

.3 Inspection and testing company shall take samples necessary to verify quality asspecified by applicable standards or as specified herein. Taking of samples shallnot endanger the structure or life, and shall be taken so as to best represent theWork as a whole.

.4 Samples shall be handled, packaged, stored and delivered so as to best ensurethe validity of tests that will be performed on them. Sample handling whererequired shall duplicate conditions at the Place of the Work (such as site-curedconcrete cylinders).

1.3 Manufacturer’s Field Review

.1 Where manufacturer’s field review is specified, manufacturer’s representative shallreview the relevant parts of the work at the Place of the Work, or wherever such affectedwork is in progress, to ensure that work is being executed in accordance withmanufacturer's written recommendations.

.2 Manufacturer’s field review is to ensure that the Products specified are being used in theWork and are being applied on surfaces prepared in accordance with theirrecommendations and the requirements of the Contract Documents.

.3 Unless otherwise indicated, manufacturer’s representative shall undertake a minimum of1 field review, with additional reviews as deemed necessary by the manufacturer, todetermine that the work of such sections is in accordance with the manufacturer’s writtenrecommendations.

.4 Manufacturer’s representative shall submit a type-written report on manufacturer’sletterhead within 2 Working Days after each field review. Report shall documentmanufacturer’s representative’s field observations and recommendations.

.5 Manufacturer’s field review reports shall be prepared and distributed following theprocedures specified for preparation and submittal of inspection and testing reportsgiven above.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not applicable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not applicable.

END OF SECTION


Temporary Facilities and Controls

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 General Instructions

.1 Temporary facilities and controls specified in this section shall be supplemented asapplicable in accordance with Sections 01015 and 01351.

.2 Arrange, obtain and pay cost for permits required for temporary facilities and controls.

.3 Provide and maintain temporary facilities and controls for the Work and remove themfrom the Work upon issuance of certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work.

.4 Do not use permanent conveying, mechanical, or electrical systems during the course ofthe Work unless specific written permission is provided by the Consultant. Use ofpermanent facilities or services for temporary construction service shall not prejudicewarranties.

.5 Provide connection and disconnection of temporary services and facilities required in theWork.

1.2 Existing Services and Facilities

.1 Do not use any existing services and facilities during construction unless specific writtenpermission is provided by Owner.

.2 Where existing services are made available by the Owner, Provide meters for measuringusage, the costs for which usage and meters shall be the responsibility of theContractor.

1.3 Temporary Electrical Services

.1 Provide and maintain an adequate temporary electrical service for performance of theWork including, but not limited to, operation of electric pumps, motors, vibrators andother power tools, hoisting and related construction and general illumination during theWork.

.1 Use existing power, where available, subject to Owner’s approval. Pay for usageat rates stipulated by the Owner.

.2 Provide and maintain any components and equipment necessary to transform supplypower to necessary temporary power voltage.

1.4 Temporary Water Supply

.1 Provide and maintain a temporary supply of water for use in the Work.

.1 Use existing water supply, where available, subject to Owner’s approval. Pay forusage at rates stipulated by the Owner.

.2 Extend supply pipe or pipes from nearest available sources and maintain in goodcondition until permanent system is installed and ready for use.

1.5 Temporary Sanitary Facilities

.1 Provide and maintain temporary sanitary water closets and washbasins for use byworkers.

.2 Use of existing building's student washroom facilities by workers is strictly prohibited.



.3 Use of new building's washroom facilities by workers is strictly prohibited.

1.6 Temporary Site Offices

.1 Owner shall make available to Contractor a designated space within existing building foruse as temporary site office of sufficient size to accommodate site meetings for 12people. Furnish with meeting table and chairs, drawing layout table, filing cabinets, faxmachine, telephone, and computer as described below.

1.7 Temporary Telephone, Fax Machine, and Computer

.1 Provide and maintain a telephone and fax machine (no combined units) in temporary siteoffice for exclusive use of Consultant, Contractor, and Subcontractors. Pay phone is notacceptable.

.2 Superintendent shall be equipped with mobile telephone device.

.3 Fax machine shall be capable of recording date and time on faxes. Fax machines shallhave dedicated telephone line.

.4 Long distance charges shall be paid by party making call.

.5 Provide and maintain a computer for the purposes of email and internet access.Computer to have dedicated, high-speed access, and be Provided complete with aprinter capable of printing 11” x 17” format.

1.8 Temporary Heating and Ventilation

.1 Provide and pay for temporary heating, cooling and ventilating required for the Work,including attendance, maintenance and fuel.

.2 Provide temporary heat and ventilation as required to:

.1 Facilitate continuous uninterrupted progress of the Work.

.2 Protect the Work and Products against damage and defacement caused byweather, harmful levels of temperature, humidity, and moisture.

.3 Provide ambient temperatures and humidity levels for proper storage, installationand curing of materials, in accordance with specified standards andmanufacturer's requirements.

.4 Provide adequate ventilation to meet health regulations for safe workingenvironment.

.3 Prior to enclosing building, maintain work areas at not less than 7 °C. After enclosing,keep premises heated to at least 13 °C using approved temporary heating devices.Increase temperatures in isolated areas to 20 °C as required by various sections of thespecifications or by Product manufacturers.

.4 Solid fuel salamanders will not be permitted.

.5 Provide temporary heat or adequate protection by means of straw or other coverings tofloor slabs, footings, or any part of building not specifically designed to withstand frostpenetration.

.6 Furnish other temporary heating as required by various sections of the specifications orby Product manufacturers.



.7 Ventilate to the exterior of the building work areas as required when toxic materials arebeing utilized or cured.

.8 Replace with new, any work damaged due to failure to provide adequate heat at no costto Owner.

1.9 Temporary Enclosures and Protection

.1 Provide temporary weather-tight enclosures and protection for exterior openings inbuilding as soon as walls, floors and roofs are built so as to protect the Work fromweather and vandalism. Provide doors in enclosures as necessary to maintain fire exits.

.2 Temporary enclosure and protection shall be of finished appearance and painted tocolour approved by Owner.

.3 Supplement these requirements in accordance with Section 01351.

1.10 Signs and Notices

.1 Project sign:

.1 Design and erect a 1220 x 2440 mm (4' x 8') free standing project sign includingoverlaid plywood, backing posts, post foundations, framing and installation.

.2 Sign shall contain information regarding the project, Owner, Consultant,Contractor and other information as required.

.3 Sign shall be professionally painted according to the design provided byConsultant.

.4 Location of sign: In prominent location to Consultant acceptance.

.2 Consultant signs:

.1 Install at the Place of the Work corporate signs as provided by Consultant.

.2 Location of sign: In prominent location to Consultant’s acceptance.

.3 Mount sign on suitable supports.

1.11 Plant, Machinery and Scaffolding

.1 Provide formwork, scaffolding, equipment, tools, machinery and incidentalappurtenances necessary for the proper execution of the Work.

.2 Erect plant, machinery and scaffolding to permit access to building and the Work.

.3 Use scaffolds in such manner as to interfere as little as possible with other trades'operations.

.4 Support scaffolds from finished surfaces only after taking precautions to preventdamage. No supports, clips, brackets, or similar devices shall be welded, bolted, orotherwise affixed to any finished member or surface without prior permission.

1.12 Site Storage

.1 Handle and store materials so as to prevent damage or defacement to the Work andsurrounding property.



.2 Construct weather-tight storage sheds for storage of materials that may be damaged ordefaced by weather. Provide floors raised 150 mm (6”) clear of ground for storage ofProducts.

.3 Provide separate shed located where directed in writing by Consultant for storage ofvolatile materials.

.4 Owner is not responsible for securing Products or materials at the Place of the Work.

1.13 Protection of the Public

.1 Provide fencing, barricades, hoarding, notices and warning boards and maintain lightsand signals for protection of workers engaged on the Work, for protection of adjoiningproperty and for protection of the public.

.2 Such protective measures shall be finish painted to Owner’s approved colour, whenvisible to the public.

.3 Where any special hazard exists from which it is not possible to protect the public safetyby other means, watchpersons shall be employed to preserve public safety until the areaof special hazard no longer poses a risk to public safety.

1.14 Protection of the Work

.1 Protect the Work from damage and defacement, and maintain protection until the Workis complete.

.2 Protect completed work from soiling, abrasion, punctures, damage, and defacement,and maintain protection until the surrounding or overhead work is complete.

.3 Keep surfaces free of oils, grease or other materials that may damage or deface them oraffect bond of applied Products.

.4 Remove and replace materials damaged or defaced as a result of failure to provideadequate protection.

.5 Have damaged or defaced work corrected by workers meeting qualification requirementsof the Contract Documents.

.6 Protect historically important surfaces during the course of the Work and removeprotection only for the purposes of cleaning or restoration work. Protect such surfacesfrom damage caused by impacts, moisture, weather, lubricants, corrosive materials,paint, weld spatter, exhaust fumes, and chemicals that could leave stains or residues.Ensure that historically important surfaces are protected from exposure to precipitationby providing temporary flashings at tops of walls and other locations where moisturemay collect and enter masonry assemblies.

1.15 Snow Removal

.1 Allow no accumulation of ice and snow within the Place of the Work. There shall be nouse of salt for de-icing in areas of building work.

.2 Remove snow from access routes to the Work to maintain uninterrupted progress of theWork.

1.16 Pest Control

.1 Provide rodent control and other pest control programs during the Work in accordancewith the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.



1.17 Vehicle Cleaning

.1 Establish a designated vehicle loading point at the Place of the Work on a gravel base tominimize tracking of soil off the Place of the Work. If the loading point becomescontaminated, it shall be cleaned and replaced.

.2 Vehicles leaving the Place of the Work shall be cleaned of loose soil and dust, includingtire washing, and sweeping or washing of exteriors and tailgates by a designatedlabourer.

.3 Keep a daily log of each vehicle leaving the Place of the Work, including time of cleaningand name of cleaner.

.4 Tarp vehicles containing indigenous soil or debris leaving the Place of the Work.

1.18 Waste Management

.1 Do not bury rubbish and waste materials at the Place of the Work.

.2 Do not dispose of waste into waterways or storm or sanitary sewers.

.3 Do not burn waste materials at the Place of the Work.

.4 Comply with waste disposal requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

.5 Remove waste material from the Place of the Work daily.

.6 Arrange and pay for removal of debris and waste from the Place of the Work.

.7 Make arrangements with and obtain permits from authorities having jurisdiction fordisposal of waste and debris. Pay fees.

1.19 Control of Dust, Debris and Noise

.1 Cover or wet down dry materials and rubbish to prevent blowing dust and debris.

.2 Control dust and dirt produced during the Work to prevent dispersion beyond theimmediate work areas.

.3 Prevent materials from contaminating air beyond application area, by providingtemporary enclosures and ventilation/filtration.

.4 Limit noise levels in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction andthe Owner.

.5 Prevent abrasive-blasting, pressure-washing spray, and other extraneous materials fromcontaminating air beyond application area.

1.20 Traffic Control and Road Maintenance

.1 Do not block roads or impede traffic. Keep construction traffic to designated roads only.Provide flagperson to direct traffic as required.

.2 Provide a hard surface area at the Place of the Work for cleaning down trucks prior toentry onto municipal roads or private roads outside of the Place of the Work.

.3 Keep public and private roads free of dust, mud and debris resulting from truck,machinery and vehicular traffic related specifically to this Project, for the duration ofWork.



.4 Clean roads regularly, public or private. Wash down and scrape flush roads at least dailywhen earth moving operations take place. Maintain public property in accordance withrequirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.21 Security

.1 Provide security for the Place of the Work in accordance with Sections 01015 and01351.

.2 The Contractor shall be solely responsible for securing the Place of the Work and theWork, and for securing areas used for the storage of Products or construction machineryand equipment. The Owner shall have no responsibility in this regard.

.3 Provide and maintain security lighting.

.4 Provide and maintain temporary locks. Premises to be locked after working hours.

1.22 Design and Safety Requirements for Temporary Facilities

.1 Be responsible for design, erection, operation, maintenance and removal of temporarystructural and other temporary facilities. Engage and pay for registered professionalengineering personnel skilled in the appropriate disciplines to perform these functionswhere required by law or by the Contract Documents; and in cases where suchtemporary facilities and their method of construction are of such a nature thatprofessional engineering skill is required to produce safe and satisfactory results.

.2 Engage and pay for professional engineer(s) registered in Place of the Work to designand supervise construction and maintenance of hoardings, covered ways, protectivecanopies and project sign(s). Designs provided by Consultant or Owner for such workcover general appearance only.

1.23 Moisture Control

.1 Concrete slabs shall be properly cured and dried before installation of finished flooringassemblies. Allow for proper drying time before slabs are ready for moisture testing. Donot cover concrete slabs with finish flooring assemblies unless the moisture vapouremission rate meets manufacturer’s printed installation specifications.

.2 Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting, protect asfollows:

.1 Protect porous materials from water damage.

.2 Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water.

.3 Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact withconcrete.

.4 Remove standing water from decks.

.5 Keep deck openings covered or dammed.

.3 After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning ofbuilding, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture, protect asfollows:

.1 Do not load or install gypsum board or other porous materials or components, oritems with high organic content, into partially enclosed building.

.2 Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage.



.3 Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organicmatter.

.4 Discard or replace water-damaged material.

.5 Do not install material that is wet.

.6 Perform work in a sequence that allows wet materials adequate time to drybefore enclosing the material in gypsum board or other interior finishes.

.4 After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation ofpermanent heating, ventilation, and air conditioning systems, maintain as follows:

.1 Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dryingconditions.

.2 Use permanent heating, ventilation, and air conditioning system to controlhumidity.

.3 Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relativehumidity, and exposure to water limits.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not applicable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not applicable.

END OF SECTION


Hoarding

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Permits

.1 Arrange and pay for necessary permits for proper execution and completion of the workof this section.

1.2 Design

.1 Design hoarding to meet bylaws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction andobtain approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

.2 Hoarding shall be of post and chainlink construction unless otherwise indicated orrequired by authorities having jurisdiction.

.3 Scope and location of hoarding intent as indicated. Contractor to submit final hoardingplan for Owner and Consultant review and approval.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

.1 Chain link hoarding:

.1 Fence fabric: 3.75 mm diameter (No. 9 gauge) steel wire woven in a 50 mm (2")mesh, hot dipped galvanized after weaving and knuckled finish top and bottomselvage edges. Galvanized fabric to have a minimum zinc application of 490 g/m²of surface area.

.2 Posts: CLFMI (Chain Link Fence Manufacturer Institute) Type 1, standard butt-welded Schedule 40, ASTM F1083-96 standard weight, galvanized pipe.

.3 Provide prefabricated panelized chainlink and post galvanized metal hoardingsystem.

.2 Signage: Provide suitable sized notice signs at entrance to the Place of the Work withcontrasting text "RESTRICTED ACCESS - CONSTRUCTION SITE" complete with thename of Contractor.

.3 Silt control fabric: Geotextile membrane suitable for silt retention work.

.4 Fencing mesh: Tensar mesh, square grid, safety colour.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Erection

.1 Erect framing members and install hoarding panels at the perimeter of the Place of theWork as indicated or required by authorities having jurisdiction to fully enclose the Placeof the Work and as follows, unless otherwise indicated or required by authorities havingjurisdiction:

.1 Height of hoarding: 2400 mm (8') minimum, unless otherwise indicated, abovegrade at any point.

.2 Vertical posts spaced 2400 mm (8’) on centre, maximum.

.3 Horizontal rails securely nailed or screwed to vertical posts at top, bottom, andintermediate locations at 600 mm on centre.


Hoarding

.4 Erect panels around objects as required.

.5 Hoarding shall contain no opening more than 150 mm wide or less than 900 mmabove the bottom of the fence except where required for access to and from thePlace of the Work.

.6 Provide no rails, other horizontal or diagonal bracing, attachments, or pattern ofopenings on the outside that would facilitate climbing.

.7 At access openings: Provide gates that provide performance and safety at leastequivalent to hoarding and contain wire mesh of sufficient openness to providevisibility for traffic entering or exiting the Place of the Work.

.2 Paint plywood hoarding to colour as selected by Consultant.

.3 Provide overhead protection hoarding where public access is required.

.4 Provide hoarding, access gates, access doors, in conformance with the ContractDocuments and authorities having jurisdiction.

3.2 Hardware

.1 Provide rough and finish hardware as required.

END OF SECTION


Products and Workmanship

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Availability of Products

.1 In the event of delays in supply of Products, and should it subsequently appear that theWork may be delayed for such reason, Consultant reserves the right to substitute morereadily available Products of similar character, at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.2 Product Handling

.1 Handle and store Products in a manner to prevent damage, adulteration, deteriorationand soiling and in accordance with manufacturer's and Supplier’s recommendations andso as to ensure preservation of their quality and fitness for the Work, and protect fromvandalism and theft.

.2 Store packaged or bundled Products in original and undamaged condition withmanufacturer's seals and labels intact, facing to outside. Do not remove from packagingor bundling until required in the Work.

.3 Store materials susceptible to environmental damage in a weathertight enclosure raisedclear of ground so that they are protected from weather, dampness and deterioration. Donot use such materials which have been damaged by exposure to moisture.

.4 Keep sand, when used as ingredients for grout, mortar or similar mixed materials, cleanand dry. Store sand on wooden platforms and cover with waterproof tarpaulins duringinclement weather.

.5 Store sheet materials, lumber and other Products susceptible to deterioration on flat,solid supports and keep clear of ground or slab. Slope to shed moisture.

.6 Store and mix paints in a single designated, heated and ventilated room. Remove oilyrags and other combustible debris from Place of the Work daily. Take every precautionnecessary to prevent spontaneous combustion.

.7 Carefully handle materials to preclude damaging existing surfaces and work of others.

.8 Remove and replace damaged Products.

.9 Transportation:

.1 Pay cost of transportation of Products required in performance of Work.

.2 Transportation cost of Products supplied by Owner will be paid for by Owner.Unload, handle and store such Products at the Place of the Work.

.3 Reject Products damaged during transport.

.4 Transportation of Products must be undertaken to suit construction schedule.Contractor is responsible for determining mode of transport to ensure delivery,obtaining shop drawings, placement of orders, and on-time premium costs, airfreight, and the like.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Product Requirements and Quality

.1 Products used for temporary facilities may have been previously used, providing theyare sound in structural qualities.



.2 Specified options: The Work is based on materials, Products and systems specified bymanufacturer's catalogued trade names, references to standards, by prescriptivespecifications and by performance specifications.

.1 Where only one manufacturer's trade name is specified for a Product, theProduct is single sourced and shall be supplied by the specified manufacturer.

.2 Where more than one manufacturer's trade name is specified for a Product,supply one Product from list of Products specified.

.3 When a Product is specified by reference to a standard, select one Product frommanufacturer that meets or exceeds the requirements of the standard andmanufacturer’s written application directions.

.4 When a Product or system is specified by prescriptive or performancespecifications, Provide one Product or system which meets or exceeds therequirements of the prescriptive or performance specifications andmanufacturer’s written application directions.

.5 The onus is on the Contractor to prove compliance with governing publishedstandards, prescriptive specifications and with performance specifications.

.6 Visual selection specification:

.1 Where specifications include the phrase "as selected by Consultant frommanufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complieswith requirements. Consultant will select color, gloss, pattern, density, ortexture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard andpremium items.

.7 Visual matching specification:

.1 Where specifications require "match Consultant’s sample", provide a productthat complies with requirements and matches Consultant’s sample.Consultant’s decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

.3 Products, materials, equipment and articles (referred to as Products throughout theContract Documents) incorporated in the Work shall be new, not damaged or defective,and of the quality standards specified, for the purpose intended. If requested, furnishevidence as to type, source and quality of Products Provided.

.4 Where Contract Documents list acceptable Products or acceptable manufacturers,select as applicable, one Product meeting performance of specifications andmanufacturer’s written application directions.

.5 Where Contract Documents require design of a Product or system, and minimummaterial requirements are specified, the design of such Product or system shall employmaterials specified within applicable section. Where secondary materials or componentsare not specified, augment with materials meeting applicable code limitations, andincorporating compatibility criteria with adjacent work.

.6 Defective Products, whenever identified prior to completion of the Work, will be rejected,regardless of previous reviews. Review of the Work by the Consultant or inspection andtesting companies does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for executing theWork in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, but is aprecaution against oversight or error. Remove and replace defective Products and beresponsible for delays and expenses caused by rejection at no additional cost to theOwner.



.7 Should dispute arise as to quality or fitness of Products, the decision rests strictly withConsultant based upon the requirements of the Contract Documents.

.8 Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, maintain uniformity of Productand manufacturer for any like item, material, equipment or assembly for the duration ofthe Work.

.9 Products exposed in the finished work shall be uniform in colour, texture, range, andquality, and be from one production run or batch, unless otherwise indicated.

.10 Permanent labels, trademarks and nameplates on Products are not acceptable inprominent locations, except where required for operating instructions, or when located inmechanical, electrical, machinery or like rooms.

.11 Owner retains right to select from choices available within specified Products for colours,patterns, finishes or other options normally made available. Submit full range of Productoptions in accordance with 01330 for such selection.

.12 Quality control:

.1 Implement a system of quality control to ensure compliance with ContractDocuments.

.2 Notify Consultant of defects in the Work or departures from intent of ContractDocuments that may occur during construction. Consultant will recommendappropriate corrective action in accordance with requirements of the Contract.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Manufacturer's Instructions

.1 Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, install or erect Products inaccordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Do not rely on labels or enclosuressupplied with Products. Obtain printed instructions directly from manufacturers.

.2 Notify Consultant in writing, of conflicts between the Contract Documents andmanufacturer's instructions.

.3 Improper installation or erection of Products, due to failure in complying with theserequirements, authorizes Consultant to require removal and re-installation at noadditional cost to the Owner.

.4 Manufacturers’ representatives shall have access to the Work at all times. Contractorshall render assistance and facilities for such access in order that the manufacturers’representatives may properly perform their function.

3.2 Galvanic/Dissimilar Metal Corrosion

.1 Insulate dissimilar metals from each other by suitable plastic strips, washers or sleevesto prevent galvanic corrosion where conductive liquid or electrolyte (rainwater orcondensation) exists.

3.3 Workmanship

.1 General:

.1 Execute the Work using workers experienced and skilled in the respective dutiesfor which they are employed.



.2 Do not employ an unfit person or anyone unskilled in their required duties.

.3 Decisions as to the quality or fitness of workmanship in cases of dispute restsolely with Consultant, whose decision is final.

.4 Upon request by the Consultant, submit proof, in the form of CCDC 11 -Contractor's Qualification Statement, of qualifications of Subcontractors to verifySubcontractor’s qualifications and experience meet or exceed the requirementsof the Contract Documents.

.1 If, upon review of the Contractor’s Qualification Statement, it is found that theSubcontractor does not meet the qualification requirements specified in theContract Documents pertaining to the parts of the Work for which theSubcontractor has been retained, the Contractor shall replace the unqualifiedSubcontractor with a qualified Subcontractor, satisfactory to the Contractorand the Owner, at no additional cost to the Owner and at no increase in theContract Time.

.5 Remove Products or materials that have been broken, chipped, cracked,discoloured, abraded, or damaged during construction period and Provideundamaged Products or materials meeting the requirements of the ContractDocuments.

.2 Coordination:

.1 Ensure cooperation of workers in layout of the Work. Maintain efficient andcontinuous supervision.

.2 Be responsible for coordination and placement of openings, sleeves andaccessories.

.3 Concealment:

.1 In finished areas, conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in floors, walls and ceilings,except where indicated otherwise.

.2 Before installation, inform Consultant of any contradictory situation. Install asdirected by Consultant.

.4 Cutting and remedial work:

.1 Perform cutting and remedial work required to make parts of the Work cometogether. Coordinate the Work to ensure this requirement is maintained. Obtainpermission from Consultant before commencing any cutting. Refer also torequirements of Sections 01015 and 01732.

.5 Location of f ixtures:

.1 Consider location of fixtures, access panels, outlets and mechanical andelectrical items indicated as approximate only. Locate fixtures, and the likeapproximately; Architectural drawings will relate these items to knowndimensions, such as ceiling tile grid or wall locations and the like.

.2 Obtain Consultant’s acceptance for precise locations of fixtures, access panels,outlets, mechanical, and electrical items.

.3 Consultant reserves the right to relocate electrical outlets and mechanical fixturesat a later date, but prior to installation, without cost, provided that the relocationper outlet does not exceed 3050 mm (10') from the original location.



.4 Inform Consultant of conflicting installations. Install only as directed byConsultant.

.6 Fastenings:

.1 Provide metal fastenings and accessories in same texture, colour and finish asadjacent materials, unless indicated otherwise.

.2 Prevent electrolytic action and corrosion between dissimilar metals andmaterials.

.7 Protection of work in progress:

.1 Take reasonable and necessary measures, including those required byauthorities having jurisdiction, to Provide protection.

.2 Adequately protect parts of the Work completed or in progress. Parts of the Workdamaged or defaced due to failure in providing such protection is to be removedand replaced, or repaired, as directed by the Consultant, at no additional cost tothe Owner.

.3 Prevent overloading of any part of the building. Do not cut, drill or sleeve anyload bearing structural member without written permission of Consultant, unlessspecifically indicated. Refer also to Sections 01015 and 01732.

.4 Adequately protect finished flooring from damage. Take special measures whenmoving heavy loads or equipment on them.

.5 Keep floors free of oils, grease or other materials likely to discolour them or affectbond of applied surfaces.

.6 Protect work of other Subcontractors from damage while doing subsequent work.Damaged work shall be made good by appropriate Subcontractors but atexpense of those causing damage.

.7 Protect existing buildings, curbs, roads and lanes. If, during the Work, anybuildings, curbs, roads or lanes are damaged, bear costs for repairs.

.8 Existing utilities:

.1 When breaking into or connecting to existing services or utilities, execute theWork at times approved by Owner, with a minimum of disturbance to Owner’songoing operations, the Work, and traffic.

.2 Protect, relocate or maintain existing active services. When inactive services areencountered, cap off in a manner approved by authority having jurisdiction andstake or otherwise record location of capped service.

.9 Protection of mechanical and electrical Products or materials:

.1 Wrap in protective plastic and seal mechanical and electrical items of mechanicaland electrical equipment prior to and during for shipment, storage at the Place ofthe Work and after installation.

.2 Remove protective coverings only to the extent required for installation of theitems. Re-install protection immediately following installation.

.3 Remove protective coverings in stages, as work areas are completed, or whendirected by Consultant.

.10 Operational requirements:



.1 Operable Products shall be Provided fully operational and ready for intendeduse.

.2 Adjust operating hardware and accessories for a tight fit at contact points andweather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricatehardware and moving parts for smooth squeak-free function, in accordance withmanufacturer’s instructions.

.11 Alterations:

.1 Restore new or existing work which is altered by new work and make good.Materials and workmanship shall be match existing materials and workmanship.Exposed materials shall match and blend in with the appearance of the existingundamaged surfaces in all respects, including, colours, textures, layout, jointing,and material types so as to not vary in appearance when compared to adjacentmaterials from a distance of 150 mm (6").

.12 General construction tolerances:

.1 Where tolerances are not defined elsewhere in the Contract Documents orbuilding code, construct the Work to the following tolerances:

.1 Maximum variation from plumb in vertical lines, surfaces of columns, walls,and arrises:

.1 6.4 mm (1/4”) in 3 m (10 ft)

.2 9.6 mm (3/8”) in a storey height not to exceed 6 m (20 ft)

.3 12.7 mm (1/2”) in 12 m (40 ft) or more

.2 Maximum variation from plumb for external corners, expansion joints, andother conspicuous lines:

.1 6.4 mm (1/4”) in any storey or 6 m (20 ft)

.2 12.7 mm (1/2”) in 12 m (40 ft) or more

.3 Maximum variation from level of grades for exposed lintels, sills, parapets,horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines:

.1 6.4 mm (1/4”) in any bay or 6 m (20 ft)

.2 12.7 mm (1/2”) in 12 m (40 ft) or more

.4 Maximum variation from drawing location of columns, walls, and partitions:

.1 12.7 mm (1/2”) in any storey or 6 m (20 ft)

.2 19 mm (3/4”) in 12 m (40 ft) or more.

.5 Maximum variation in cross-sectional dimension of columns and thicknessesof wall from dimensions indicated:

.1 Minus 6 mm (1/4”)

.2 Plus 12.7 mm (1/2”)

.6 Maximum variation from plane or from straight:

.1 3.2 mm (1/8”) in 3 m (10 ft) under a 3 m (10 ft) straight edge.

.7 Maximum variation from angle indicated:



.1 10 seconds.

.8 Tolerances shall be non-cumulative.

END OF SECTION


Cutting and Patching

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Cutting, Patching and Remedial Work

.1 Comply with requirements of Section 01015 as supplemented by this section.

.2 Submittal Items:

.1 Comply with administrative requirements of Section 01330.

.2 Submit written request in advance of cutting, coring, and alteration that affects:

.1 Structural integrity of any element of Work.

.2 Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements.

.3 Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element.

.4 Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements.

.5 Owner or work of other contractors.

.3 Include in request:

.1 Identification of Project.

.2 Location and description of affected work.

.3 Statement on necessity for cutting or alteration.

.4 Description of proposed work, and Products to be used.

.5 Alternatives to cutting and patching.

.6 Effect on Owner or work of other contractors.

.7 Written permission of affected separate contractor.

.8 Date and time work will be performed.

.9 Non-destructive structural survey: Radiography (X-ray) imaging of work to becut or cored.

.4 Do not commence cutting, patching, or remedial work until request has beenreviewed by Consultant.

.3 Preparation:

.1 Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movementduring cutting and patching.

.2 After uncovering, inspect conditions affecting performance of the Work.

.3 Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.

.4 Provide supports to assure structural integrity of surroundings; devices andmethods to protect other portions of the Work from damage.

.5 Provide protection from elements for areas which may be exposed by uncoveringwork; maintain excavations free of water.



.6 Where uncovering of area exposes local deterioration, cracking, evidence ofwater infiltration, structural settlement, previous modifications, or otherunexpected conditions, advise Consultant immediately in writing and leaveconditions exposed until receipt of Consultant’s written instructions. If area isexposed to the exterior, Provide temporary protection from inclement weather.

.4 Execution:

.1 Execute cutting, fitting, and patching to complete the Work. Under nocircumstances will overcutting of corners of opening be accepted. Ensure cornersof openings to be cut are predrilled or sawed.

.2 Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work.

.3 Remove samples of installed work for testing if directed by Consultant.

.4 Shop drawings identifying precise locations and size of openings to be cored andcut are to be submitted for review by Consultant. Provide non-destructivestructural survey of structural concrete to be cored or cut, for Consultant review.Coring and cutting work locations shall be reviewed by Consultant for acceptancebefore proceeding.

.5 Provide openings in non-structural elements of the Work for penetrations ofmechanical and electrical work

.6 Perform work by methods to avoid damage to other work, and which will Provideproper surfaces to receive patching and finishing.

.7 Employ qualified installer with at least 3 years of relevant experience to performcutting and patching for weather-exposed and moisture-resistant elements, andsight-exposed surfaces.

.8 Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic or impact tools notallowed to be used anywhere within existing buildings unless approved byConsultant.

.9 Restore work with new Products in accordance with requirements of ContractDocuments.

.10 Fit work to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations throughsurfaces and with suitable allowance for deflection, expansion, contraction, andfirestopping.

.11 Enclose pipes, ducts, conduit and wires passing through floors at areas wherefaucets occur (for example, washrooms, kitchens, mechanical rooms onsuspended floors, janitor rooms) in a 100 mm (4") high metal sleeve and makeair and watertight with water resistant firestopping.

.12 Completely seal voids of penetrations of fire rated wall, ceiling, and floorconstructions with firestopping and smoke seals.

.13 Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. Refinish continuous surfaces tonearest intersection. Refinish entire assembly units.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not applicable.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not applicable.

END OF SECTION


Progressive Cleaning

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Environmental Controls

.1 Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and anti-pollution laws.

.2 Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers, and remove from Place of the Workdaily.

.3 Prevent accumulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions.

.4 Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances.

1.2 Materials

.1 Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleanedand as recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.

1.3 Cleaning During Construction

.1 Supplement the requirements for periodic cleaning given under Section 01015 with therequirements of this section.

.2 Clean-up the Place of the Work daily. Maintain clean and clear egress routes at alltimes.

.3 Maintain Place of the Work, grounds and public properties free from accumulations ofwaste materials and rubbish.

.4 Provide containers at the Place of the Work for collection of waste materials and rubbish.Remove waste materials and rubbish from the Place of the Work when containersbecome full.

.5 Vacuum and clean interior building areas when ready to receive finish painting, andcontinue vacuum cleaning on an as-needed basis until Substantial Performance of theWork.

.6 Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting fromcleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.

.7 Promptly as the Work proceeds, on a daily basis and upon completion, clean up andremove rubbish, surplus materials and equipment.

.8 Remove as the work of this section progresses, corrosive and foreign materials whichmay set or become difficult to remove at time of final cleaning or which may damagemembers.

.9 Wash exposed surfaces with a cleaning solution approved by Product manufacturers.

.10 Debris and waste not permitted within cavities of Work.

1.4 Final Cleaning

.1 Perform final cleaning in accordance with requirements of Section 01770.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not applicable.


Progressive Cleaning

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not applicable.

END OF SECTION


Contract Closeout Procedures and Submittals

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 The procedures for completing Contract and acceptance by the Owner shall be inaccordance with the methods described in OAA/OGCA Document 100 (April 1997) andany additional requirements described below and in Section 01015.

.2 Stages will be reviewed at the Contract start-up meeting to ensure that partiesunderstand their responsibilities. Refer to Section 01312 for procedures andrequirements for Contract start-up meeting.

.3 Within 4 weeks of commencement of the Work, submit to the Consultant a list ofcloseout submittals required by the Contract Documents.

1.2 Final Cleaning

.1 Environmental controls:

.1 Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances andanti-pollution laws.

.2 Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers, and remove from Place of theWork daily.

.3 Prevent accumulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions.

.4 Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances.

.2 Materials:

.1 Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to becleaned and as recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.

.3 Final cleaning:

.1 Immediately prior to Consultant’s review to determine if Substantial Performanceof the Work has been achieved, remove surplus Products and constructionmachinery and equipment not required for the performance of the remainingWork.

.2 Remove waste Products and debris other than that caused by the Owner, andleave the Work clean and suitable for occupancy by Owner.

.3 When the Contract is completed, remove surplus Products, tools, constructionmachinery and equipment.

.4 Clean glass, mirrors, hardware, wall tile, stainless steel, chrome, porcelainenamel, prefinished surfaces, and fixtures.

.5 Remove stains, spots, marks and dirt from decorative parts of the Work,electrical and mechanical fixtures, furniture fittings, walls, and floors.

.6 Vacuum clean and remove dust from building interiors, behind grilles, louvres,and screens. Vacuum clean interior of electrical equipment.

.7 Clean floor finishes to recommendations of manufacturer.

.8 Remove non-permanent labels.

.9 Remove dirt and residue from surfaces.



.10 Inspect finishes, fittings and equipment and ensure specified workmanship andoperation.

.11 At completion of the Work, remove protective coatings, clean surfaces andremove excess compounds and sealant materials. Make good defective,scratched or damaged work.

.12 Broom clean and wash exterior walks, steps and surfaces.

.13 Sweep and wash clean paved areas at the Place of the Work.

.14 Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition, clean or replace filters ofmechanical equipment.

.15 Remove seal wrap on mechanical and electrical Products and materials andclean as required.

.16 Clean and/or replace lamps, light fixtures, lenses and grilles.

.17 Remove protective covering and labels from lamps, hardware, and specialityitems.

.18 Under the direction of the Consultant, aim adjustable luminaires .

1.3 Closeout Submittals

.1 Collect reviewed submittals, and assemble required closeout submittals executed bySubcontractors, Suppliers, and manufacturers. Prior to submitting closeout submittals tothe Consultant, undertake the following:

.1 Review maintenance manual contents (operating, maintenance instructions, as-built drawings, materials) for completeness.

.2 Review supply and completeness of spare parts required by Contract Documentsand manufacturers.

.3 Review in relation to Contract Price, Change Orders, Change Directives,holdbacks and other adjustments to the Contract Price.

.4 Review inspection and testing reports to verify conformance to intent of ContractDocuments and that changes, repairs or replacements have been completed.

.5 Execute transition of performance bond and labour and materials payment bondto warranty period requirements.

.6 Submit a final statement of accounting giving total adjusted Contract Price,previous payments, and monies remaining at time of application for completion ofthe Contract. Consultant will issue a final change order reflecting approvedadjustments to Contract Price not previously made.

.2 No later than 10 Working Days prior to submitting request for Consultant’s review todetermine if Substantial Performance of the Work has been achieved, submit to theConsultant the closeout submittals specified in this section, including, but not limited to,reviewed shop drawings, Product data sheets, samples, operating instructions, as-builtrecords, fully executed warranties and guarantees, reports recording demonstration andinstruction provided to Owner for operation and maintenance of building systems,software required for operation and maintenance of building systems, maintenancematerials, and keys.



.3 For equipment put into use with Owner’s permission during the Work, submit requiredcloseout submittals within 10 Working Days after start-up.

.4 For items of the Work delayed materially beyond date of Substantial Performance of theWork, provide updated closeout submittals within 10 Working Days after acceptance,listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period.

.5 Neither the Consultant’s review to determine if Substantial Performance of the Work hasbeen achieved, nor acceptance of the Work, will take place until receipt, by theConsultant, of acceptable copies of the closeout submittals required herein and by theContract Documents.

.6 As-built records; prepare as-built records in accordance with requirements for recorddrawings given under Section 01015 supplemented as follows:

.1 Consultant will provide 1 reproducible set of Contract Documents to theContractor for as-built drawing purposes.

.2 Accurately record changes to the Work and deviations from Contract Documentsas the Work progresses.

.3 Mark changes in red ink.

.4 Record, without being limited to, the following:

.1 Changes by Change Orders, Change Directives , and SupplementalInstructions.

.2 Locations of interior mechanical and electrical equipment and distribution.

.3 In project manuals / specifications: Record as-built Products, includingmanufacturer, manufacturer’s model or system number and finish / finishsystem.

.5 As-built drawings:

.1 Submit 3 copies of as-built drawings.

.6 As-built project manuals:

.1 Submit 3 copies of as-built project manuals.

.7 Digital as-built records:

.1 Once hard copy of as-built record drawings have been accepted byConsultant, Contractor shall receive digital media in format compatible withcurrently licensed edition of AutoCAD 2002 software from the Consultant, toupdate drawings to reflect "As-Built" conditions as referenced above. Referalso to requirements of Division 15 and Division 16.

.2 Contractor shall transcribe hard copy changes to the drawings into theelectronic media.

.3 After final acceptance by Consultant, submit 2 disk copies of revisedelectronic media as-built drawings to Owner.

.7 Operation and maintenance manuals:

.1 Submit operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with requirements formaintenance and operating instructions given under Section 01015supplemented as follows:



.2 Operation and maintenance manuals shall contain operating and maintenancedata and information specified below for supplied Products, in English, and shallbe made up as follows:

.1 Enclose title sheet, labelled as applicable, with project name, date and list ofcontents.

.2 Organize contents into applicable sections of work to parallel projectspecifications break-down. Mark each section by labelled tabs protected withcelluloid covers fastened to hard paper dividing sheets.

.3 Neatly type lists and notes. Use clear drawings, diagrams of manufacturers'literature.

.4 Shop drawings:

.1 Submit one copy of each final accepted shop drawing issued for the Workon which have been recorded changes made during fabrication andinstallation caused by unforeseen conditions.

.2 Engineered shop drawings shall include copies of the certificate ofinsurance, the engineer’s field review reports, and the engineer’s lettersof general conformity that were provided as part of the engineeredsubmittal in accordance with Section 01330 appended to the pertinentengineered shop drawing in the shop drawing manual.

.5 Warranties:

.1 Submit copies of bonds, guarantees, warranties and extended warrantiestogether in one report binder, complete with an indexed summary list ofwarranties and expiration dates. Warranties to be in accordance withSection 01780.

.6 Project data: include the following information supplemented by additionalrequired data specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents:

.1 Description, operation and maintenance instructions for equipment andparts list. Indicate nameplate information such as make, size, capacity,serial number.

.2 Names, addresses and phone numbers of Subcontractors and Suppliers,as applicable.

.3 Additional material used in the Work listed under various sectionsshowing name of manufacturer and source of supply.

.4 Charts, diagrams and reports identified in Division 15 and Division 16 ofthe specifications.

.5 Report recording demonstration and instruction provided to Owner foroperation and maintenance of building systems as described below in thissection.

.6 Key construction photos.

.7 Permits and forms:

.1 Workplace Safety & Insurance Board certificate of clearance.

.2 Certificates of approval of the Work by local building department (ifavailable).



.3 Electrical authority certificate of inspection.

.8 Maintenance materials:

.1 Provide overage, extra stock, and maintenance materials. For required materials,see individual sections of specifications. Deliver to a location and at a timespecified by the Owner, and as follows:

.1 Use unbroken cartons, or if not supplied in cartons, material shall be stronglypackaged.

.2 Clearly mark cartons or packaging as to contents, project name, andSupplier.

.3 If applicable give colour and finish, room number or area where material isused.

.2 Replace incorrect or damaged maintenance materials delivered to Owner,including damage through shipment.

.3 Provide a typed inventory list of maintenance materials prior to SubstantialPerformance of the Work application. List all items, complete with quantities, andstorage locations.

.4 Establish a master list identifying maintenance materials and maintain a log ofwhen materials are turned over to Owner and signing authority for acceptance ofmaterials on behalf of Owner.

1.4 System Demonstration and Project Commissioning

.1 Refer also to requirements of Division 15 and Division 16 with respect to commissioningfor control systems,, mechanical / electrical systems.

.2 Perform system demonstration and commissioning work no later than 10 Working Daysprior to submitting request for Consultant’s review to determine if SubstantialPerformance of the Work has been achieved.

.3 Submit required certificates of approval or acceptance from authorities havingjurisdiction.

.4 Meet with other consultants (structural, mechanical, electrical) to coordinatedemonstration, instruction, commissioning and completion.

.5 Review condition of equipment such as lighting, elevators and heating system, whichhas been used in the course of the Work to ensure turning over at completion in "as newcondition" with warranties dated and certified from time specified.

.6 When partial occupancy of uncompleted project is required by Owner, coordinateOwner’s uses, requirements, access, and the like, with Contractor's requirements tocomplete the Work.

.7 Demonstration and instruction:

.1 Demonstrate operation of each system to Owner and Consultant.

.2 Instruct Owner’s personnel in operation, adjustment and maintenance ofequipment and systems, using operation and maintenance data provided as thebasis for instructions. Arrange and coordinate instruction of Owner’s staff incare, maintenance and operation of building systems and finishes



.3 Contractor, manufacturer’s representatives, and responsible personnel fromSubcontractors whose work is being demonstrated shall be present at thesedemonstrations.

.4 Instruct Owner’s representative on use of software required for operation andmaintenance of building systems and provide a toll-free telephone number orwebsite address for further assistance to the Owner.

.5 Prepare and insert additional data in the operation and maintenance datamanuals when the need for additional data becomes apparent duringdemonstration or instruction.

.6 Demonstration and instruction report: Submit a written report of suchdemonstration, instruction, and commissioning to the Consultant as part of thecontract closeout submittals described earlier in this section. Report shall includetime and date of each demonstration, instruction, and commissioning activity,complete with a list of persons present.

.8 Correct deficiencies and defects identified during demonstration, instruction, orcommissioning.

.9 Attend 'end-of-work' testing and break-in or start-up demonstration.

1.5 Warranty Period

.1 Provide on-going review and attendance to building call-back, maintenance and repairproblems during the warranty periods.

.2 At the beginning of the 12th month after Substantial Performance of the Work, theOwner, Contractor and Consultant, along with key Subcontractors as designated, shallcarry out a complete review of building and its systems to determine which deficienciesare to be rectified under the warranty. Contractor shall be responsible for timely writtennotification of Owner, and Consultant prior to such end of warranty period inspection andany delay in such notification shall extend such warranty period until proper notificationis received by Owner, and Consultant.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not applicable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not applicable.

END OF SECTION


Warranties

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Warranties

.1 Warranties shall be in accordance with General Condition GC 12.3, as amended and asfollows:

.1 Warranties shall commence at date of Substantial Performance of the Work.

.2 Submit warranties for applicable items, signed by the applicable companyresponsible for each warranty.

.3 Submit warranties on form approved by Owner including, but not limited to, thefollowing information:

.1 Name and address of Project.

.2 Warranty commencement date (date of Substantial Performance of theWork).

.3 Duration of warranty.

.4 Clear indication of what is being warranted and what remedial action will betaken under warranty.

.5 Authorized signature and seal of company providing each warranty.

.4 Owner shall be named in manufacturer's Product warranties. Submit on relevantProduct manufacturer's standard warranty or guarantee form.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not applicable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not applicable.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02070

SITE DEMOLITION AND REMOVALS Page 1 of 2

08-23

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 PROTECTION

.1 Protect municipal property from heavy vehicular damage and keep allroadways and sidewalks clean and clear of all dirt, debris, etc.,resulting from the work.

.2 Protect existing services from damage. If necessary, relocate activeservices to ensure that they function continuously, in safety andwithout risk of damage.

.3 Cap-off and remove unused services encountered during demolition.Proceed with this work only after receiving approval fromJurisdictional Authorities.

.4 Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent site areas.Maintain protected egress and access at all times.

.5 Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices.

1.2 SCOPE OF REMOVALS WORK

.1 Shall include but is not limited to the removal of site elements,equipment, precast concrete elements, concrete and asphalt pavements,railings, fencing , vegetation identified for removal, and soils.

.2 Disposal of all removed materials off site unless indicated otherwise.Disposal of materials is to be included in the base bid price for thissection in the contract.

.3 Work shall include removal of soils to sub-grade elevations. Gradeevenly to suit and/or match existing surrounding grades.

.4 Install temporary fencing as per section 02104 prior to start ofremovals work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 None.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

.1 Locate and stake out all underground services prior to commencingsite demolition work

.2 Protect existing items which are not indicated to be altered. Makegood any damage caused by alterations.

SECTION 02070

SITE DEMOLITION AND REMOVALS Page 2 of 2

08-23

.3 Disconnect and remove, or cap designated utility services withindemolition areas.

3.1 EXECUTION

.1 Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Protect existingfoundations, supporting structural members and items designated toremain or be reused. Completely remove foundations wheredesignated to be removed and make good existing surfaces.

.2 Except where noted otherwise, immediately remove demolishedmaterials from site.

.3 Remove materials to be re-installed or retained in manner to preventdamage. Store and protect on site.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02104

TEMPORARY TREE PROTECTION PAGE 1 of 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 Trees with large roots (+25mm) in the excavation zone are to behand excavated prior to mechanical excavation work.

.2 The Contractor shall ensure that trees are protected from mechanicaldamage at all times. Should trees be damaged by the Contractorunder this contract, the value of the contract will be reduced by theassessed amount.

.3 Maintain the temporary fencing throughout the work period. Adjustand tighten the wires and T-bars to ensure that the fence is taut andperpendicular, and replace any portions of the fencing that maybecome damaged.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Temporary Fencing: 1.2m high, galvanized chain link fencing ingood condition.

.2 T-Bars and metal ties: 2.4m long heavy duty T-bars, 16-gaugealuminium wire.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION

.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of existingtrees and shrubs.

.2 Drive the T-bars into the ground to a minimum depth of 1 metre andat a maximum spacing of 1.8 metre, secure fencing to the T-Barswith wire.

.3 Confine the movement and storage of heavy equipment and thestorage of materials to predetermined areas approved by theConsultant. Do not store materials or place any equipment over theroot systems of exiting trees or shrubs.

.4 No rigging cables shall be wrapped around or installed in the trees.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02212

TOPSOIL AND FINISH GRADING Page 1 of 2

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 Contractor to supply and place a minimum of 150mm approvedtopsoil for areas to be sodded. Provide test results for approval prior todelivery to the site.

.2 Finish grade and fine contour site.

.3 Remove excess soil from site.

1.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK

.1 Schedule placing of topsoil and finish grading to permit soddingoperations under optimum conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Imported Topsoil .1 Clean friable sandy loam containing a minimum of a 3% organicmatter, maximum 15% clay and minimum 40% sand by volume, freeof subsoil, roots, sod, stones, foreign objects and toxic materials.Acidity range (pH) of 5.5 to 7.5.

.2 Sub-soil .1 Excavated material, graded free of lumps larger than 150mm, rockslarger than 75mm and debris.

.3 Fertilizer .1 Supply and implement a starter fertilizer with analysis of 10-20-10 ata rate of 5 kg per 100 m².

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION OF EXISTING GRADE

.1 Cultivate entire area which is to receive topsoil.

.2 Remove surface debris, roots, vegetation branches and stones in excessof 25mm diameter.

3.2 SPREADING OF TOPSOIL

.1 Topsoil shall not be placed until Landscape Architect has inspectedand approved subgrade and topsoil materials.

.2 For sodded areas adjacent to hard pavements keep topsoil 25mmbelow finished grade.

.3 Ensure soils are appropriately compacted to minimize settlement ofsodded areas.

SECTION 02212

TOPSOIL AND FINISH GRADING Page 2 of 2

3.3 FINISH GRADING

.1 Fine grade and loosen topsoil. Eliminate rough spots and low areas toensure positive drainage.

3.4 APPLICATION OF FERTILIZER

.1 Spread fertilizer uniformly over entire area of topsoil at rate indicatedabove.

.2 Rake fertilizer into top 10 mm of topsoil prior to sodding.

.3 Roll to consolidate topsoil for areas to be sodded leaving surfacesmooth, uniform, firm against deep foot printing, and with a fine loosetexture to approval of Landscape Architect.

END OF SECTION


Demolition

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Read and be governed by conditions of the Contract and sections of Division 1.

1.2 Section Includes

.1 Demolition and removal of selected non-structural portions of building.

.2 Salvage:

.1 Salvaging of designated items for reuse by Owner

.2 Salvage of designated items to be reused or recycled.

.3 Removal of surplus materials from the Place of the Work.

.4 Related mechanical and electrical work and demolition requirements are covered underDivision 15 and Division 16 respectively.

1.3 Quality Assurance

.1 The work of this section shall be executed by a Subcontractor having a minimum of 5years specialized demolition experience and able to deploy adequate equipment andskilled personnel to complete work expediently in an efficient and orderly manner.

.2 Pre-demolition meeting:

.1 Schedule a pre-demolition meeting following the procedures specified for pre-installation meetings in accordance with Section 01312.

.2 Review existing conditions at the Place of the Work thoroughly to establish fullextent of items to be removed, including footings, foundations, slabs, toppings,secondary floor finishes, and structures and items to remain. Commencement ofdemolition work will be considered to be acceptance of existing conditions at thePlace of the Work and removal of such items.

.3 Examine adjacent properties to determine extent of protection required.

1.4 Submittals

.1 Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01330.

.2 Existing conditions documentation:

.1 Document existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements,including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused bydemolition operations.

.2 Comply with Section 01323.

.3 Submit existing conditions documentation before demolition work begins.

.3 Landfill records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfillfacility licensed to accept hazardous wastes.

.4 Demolition report:


Demolition

.1 Prior to commencement of the work of this section at the Place of the Work,prepare and submit to the municipal building department having jurisdiction overthe Place of the Work a report on the proposed demolition methods andprocedures for the removal of indicated structures for the safe retention ofstructures to remain.

.2 Report shall be prepared under the supervision, and bear the seal and signature,of a professional engineer licensed to practice engineering in the Place of theWork, experienced in this type of engineering, and in accordance with Section01330.

.3 Submit 3 copies of the demolition report to the Consultant for record purposesonly: Consultant shall neither review nor accept any liability for the contents ofthe report.

.4 Without limiting the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, the demolitionreport shall include:

.1 Drawings, diagrams and details showing sequence of demolition work andsupporting structures.

.2 Description, in detail, of the methods and procedures for working at the baseof existing buildings to remain.

.3 Schedule of demolition activities indicating the following:

.1 Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with startingand ending dates for each activity.

.2 Interruption of utility services.

.3 Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.

.4 Location of temporary street barricades, building interior partitions andmeans of egress.

.4 Written description of methods for removal and temporary bracing ofstructural members or supporting construction.

.5 Inventory of items to be salvaged:

.1 Prepare typewritten inventory of units to be salvaged and cross-reference todrawing showing existing elevations. Inventory shall designate size of units, facesetting bed, or natural setting bed. Provide temporary marking to salvaged unitscorrelated to this inventory.

.2 Submit inventory following procedures for submittal of shop drawings inaccordance with Section 01330.

1.5 Safety Requirements

.1 Comply with CSA S350-2003.

.2 Undertake the Work and effect arrangements required by authorities having jurisdictionfor protection of public and workers.

.3 Post danger signs conspicuously around property. Close doorways and thoroughfaresgiving access to area of demolition with barricades and hoarding as indicated orrequired.


Demolition

.4 Provide a competent, experienced supervisor in charge of the work and present at thePlace of the Work whenever work is in progress.

.5 Demolition of asbestos containing materials can be hazardous to health. Stop the Workand notify the Owner and Consultant immediately should material resembling spray ortrowel-applied asbestos, which has not already been identified, be encountered in thecourse of demolition work. Do not proceed until written instructions have been receivedfrom the Owner and Consultant.

.6 Should any suspect PCBs or other hazardous materials be encountered which have notalready been identified, stop the Work in the immediate area which may disturb suspectmaterials. Immediately report any suspect asbestos, PCBs or other hazardous materials,not previously identified, to the Owner and Consultant.

1.6 Protection

.1 Prevent movement, settlement or damage of adjacent structures, services, walks,paving, trees, landscaping, adjacent grades and parts of existing building to remain.Make good damage caused by demolition.

.2 Take precautions to support affected structures and, if safety of building beingdemolished or adjacent structures or services appears to be endangered, ceaseoperations and notify demolition engineer, Contractor and Consultant.

.3 Provide temporary weather enclosures in accordance with Section 01351 01500.

.4 Prevent debris from obstructing active services and drainage systems.

.5 Protect work to remain against damage. Repair or replace damaged work at noadditional cost to the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not applicable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Examination

.1 Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.

.2 Observe existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determineextent of selective demolition required.

.3 Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items tobe removed and salvaged.

.4 When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict withintended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature andextent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Consultant.

.5 Survey of existing conditions: Record existing conditions by use of photographs inaccordance with Section 01323.

3.2 Utility Services and Mechanical / Electrical Systems

.1 Refer to Division 15 and Division 16 respectively.


Demolition

3.3 Selective Demolition, General

.1 General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by newconstruction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the work withinlimitations of governing regulations and as follows:

.1 Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level.Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier beforedisturbing supporting members on the next lower level.

.2 Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required.Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoiningconstruction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing orgrinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacentsurfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

.3 Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoidmarring existing finished surfaces.

.4 Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. Atconcealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contentsof hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch andportable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

.5 Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.

.6 Remove decayed, infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials andpromptly dispose of off-site.

.7 Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable toavoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.

.8 Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so asnot to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

.9 Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.

.2 Dispose of demolished materials from Project site except where noted otherwise and inaccordance with authorities having jurisdiction. Remove and transport debris in amanner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

.3 Do not sell demolished material at the Place of the Work.

.4 Clean existing surfaces specified to receive new applied finishes to assure properadherence.

3.4 Selective Demolition Procedures for Specific Materials

.1 Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction toremain and at regular intervals, using power-driven saw, then remove concrete betweensaw cuts.

.2 Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction toremain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.


Demolition

3.5 Salvage

.1 Remove and store items indicated or directed for salvage. Remove, handle andtransport such items to storage area designated in the Contract Documents, to an areawithin the Place of the Work designated by Consultant, or to an area away from thePlace of the Work as directed by the Consultant. Perform such work to prevent damageto the items during removal and in storage.

.2 The Owner will review Place of the Work prior to commencement of demolition andinstruct the Contractor the items to be retained for re-use or be turned over to theOwner.

.3 Remove and store indicated items for future use by Owner. Remove, handle andtransport such items to storage area indicated in the Contract Documents or to an areawithin the Place of the Work designated by Consultant. Perform such work carefully andwith diligence to prevent any damage to the items during removal and in storage.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02485

STONE WORK Page 1 of 1

PART I - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 Work shall be conducted by experienced personnel only.

1.2 STONE SIZE

.1 Delivered to the site and found to be either the wrong size and/orquality is to be removed from the site at the Contractor's expense.

1.3 SOURCE SELECTION

.1 Inform Consultant of proposed source of materials and provide accessfor review at least two weeks prior to the commencement of work.

PART II - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Armourstone supplied shall be within the following sizes:

Height: 400-600mm (16"-20") refer to grading plan to determineheight requirement.

Width: 900-1200mm (3'-4')

Depth: 450-600mm (18"-24")

.2 Stepping Stones shall have flat surfaces, ranging in diameter of 200 to350mm and 100mm thick.

.3 Levelling Bed and infill: Stones shall be installed with a levelling bedappropriate to the material. Brick sand for flagstone and crusher runlimestone for armour stone.

PART III - EXECUTION

3.1 PLACEMENT OF STONE

.1 Place stone in locations and pattern as indicated on drawings.

.2 Note placement of stone in relation to the surface treatment layout.

.3 Ensure stone work is placed level and butt together to eliminateentrapment and trip hazards.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02510

ASPHALT PAVING Page 1 of 2

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 This specification covers the construction of asphalt areas as detailedon the project drawings including all labour, materials, tools andequipment necessary for the completion of the work.

.2 work includes asphalt paving and granular base, asphalt overlay,precast concrete curbs and adjustments to catch basin and manholeframes and covers.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 The contractor shall stakeout all asphalt areas and obtain approvalfrom the Consultant prior to any work under this section.

.2 Contractors employed in this section of the work, shall have provenexperience in the field.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Crushed Stone .1 Crushed stone shall be 19 mm (¾”) and 50 mm (2”) commercialgrade crusher run limestone conforming to OPSS 1003.

.2 Asphalt .1 Asphalt materials shall conform to OPSS 1150.

.2 BinderCourse: OPSS 310, HL-8 (refer to drawings)

.3 Surface Course: OPSS 310, HL-3 (refer to drawings)

.3 Tack Coat .1 Tack Coat shall be an asphaltic emulsion SS-1h, diluted with an equalvolume of water, conforming to OPSS 1103.

.4 Precast Curb Stops .1 Parking Bumper curbs as manufactured by Brooklin ConcreteProducts, 1-800-655-3430.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

.1 Excavation to the lines and grades shown on the drawings.

.2 Excavated material is to be removed and disposed of off site unlessindicated otherwise on the drawings, at the contractor's expense.

3.2 SUB-BASE PREPARATION

.1 Sub-grade to be compacted to a minimum of 100% Standard ProctorDensity. Sub-grade to be shaped to conform to surface elevations andallow for positive drainage.

SECTION 02510

ASPHALT PAVING Page 2 of 2

.2 Verify compacted sub-grade is dry and ready to support base, pavingand imposed loads.

.3 Remove and dispose of soft spots and fill with Granular “B”.

.4 Beginning of installation means acceptance of subgrade. Notifyconsultant that subgrade preparation has been completed prior toproceeding with paving.

3.3 BASE COURSE

.1 Place 50mm and 19 mm Ø crusher run on the approved sub-grade.Final depth of base course shall conform to drawing details.

.2 Each layer shall be compacted to 100% Standard Proctor Density.

.3 Backfill areas around catch basins with free draining granularmaterial and install wrap-around sub-drain connected to catch basin toensure positive drainage.

3.4 SAW CUT & TACK COATING AT EXISTING PAVEMENTS

.1 Saw cut the existing pavement to accommodate the new asphaltpaving.

.2 Tack Coat is to be applied to the existing asphalt edge prior to paving.

3.5 ASPHALT PAVING COURSES

.1 Mix, handle and place asphalt in accordance with OPSS 310.

.2 Place binder course within 24 hours of priming base surfaces.

.3 Compact asphalt paving course in accordance with OPSS 310. Asphaltpaving shall be smooth and true to established grades and shall vary inthickness by not more than 5 mm.

.4 Compact pavement by rolling to minimum 100% Marshall density.Do not displace or extrude pavement from position. Hand compact inareas inaccessible to rolling equipment to same density.

3.6 ACCEPTANCE

.1 Acceptance of the asphalt paving will coincide with the finalinspection of the project including all other work in the contract.

.2 Maximum variation of 6mm measured with 3m straight edge.Variation from design elevation to within 12mm.

3.7 GUARANTEE

.1 The contractor shall guarantee the work for a period of 12 monthsfrom the date of completion and shall make good any defects oromissions occurring during this period.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02520

EXTERIOR CONCRETE Page 1 of 1

PART I - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 This specification covers general concrete work.

1.2 WORKMANSHIP

.1 Materials and workmanship required for the making and placing of allconcrete shall conform to CAN/CSA-A23.1-94/A23.2-94 ConcreteMaterials and Methods of Concrete Construction.

PART II - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Concrete: Shall conform to the F-1 Exposure Class as per CSA-A23.1-94/A23.2-94. F-1 Concrete is specified to be 30 MPa at 28days with air content category 1. Maximum slump 75mm (3") at thetime of deposit. Only mixed-in-transit concrete shall be used on thiswork. The Company producing the concrete shall carry out thework in accordance with ASTM Standard Specification C94.

.2 Aggregates: All aggregates must conform to CSA SpecificationA23.1.

.3 Granular Base: 19mm (3/4") crusher run limestone.

.4 Fibre Reinforcing: (pavements) Polypropylene Fibre.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

.1 Contractor to examine the areas and conditions under which work is tobe installed. Detrimental conditions to the work shall be correctedbefore proceeding.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Concrete shall have broom finish and control joints shall be cut at1.5m (15'-0") spacing between 4 to 18 hours after placement.

.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for removal and replacement, orfor remedial measures necessitated by faulty workmanship or materialswhich fail to meet the requirements specified.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02580

PAVEMENT MARKING Page 1 of 1

06-57

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GUARANTEE

.1 Guarantee for a period of two years from substantial performance.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 Line painting for parking stalls, arrows and handicapped parkingsymbol, 100mm line widths.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Paint: .1 to CGSB 1-GP-74M+Amdt-May-81, alkyd traffic paint.

.2 Colour: .1 to CGSB 1-GP-12C+Amdt-Dec-84, white 513-301.

.3 Applicator: .1 An approved pressure type mobile distributor capable of applyingpaint in single and dashed lines, and that will ensure uniformapplication and having a positive shut-off.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Pavement surface to be free from surface water, frost, ice, dust, oil,grease and other foreign materials.

.2 Layout pavement markings. Obtain approval of Consultant.

.3 Unless otherwise approved by Consultant apply paint only when airtemperature is above 10°C and no rain is forecasted.

.4 Do not thin paint.

.5 Paint lines to be of uniform colour and density with sharp edges.

.6 Paint markings to be within plus or minus 1/2" (12mm) of dimensionsspecified.

.7 Protect pavement markings until dry and inspected by Consultant.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02710

SUB-DRAINAGE Page 1 of 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 Excavate and grade soils as required by project.

.2 Place fabric, drains, conduits, and clear stone in accordance withdrawings and backfill with topsoil.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Pipe and fittings .1 100mm flexible perforated Polyethylene pipe with fabric sleeve andfittings.

.2 150mm solid PVC (catch basin connection and conduit).

.2 Geotextile fabric .1 non-woven, Terrafix 240 or approved equal.

.3 Granular .1 19mm Ø clear stone.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Sub-drain trenches to assume a uniform slope of not less than 0.5%.

.2 Trenches for drainage pipe must be excavated to 200mm wide. Placedrainage pipe and backfill with granular.

.3 Lay drainage pipe with inverts sloping to drainage outlet.

.4 Drainage below paving and curbs shall be through a conduit installedto ensure positive drainage from all protective playground surfaces.

.5 Connect pipe with appropriate ‘T’ and ‘Y’ connectors.

3.2 SUB-DRAIN TERMINATION

.1 Connect sub-drain to drainage structure as indicated on drawings. Forconnection to a catch basin, drill hole to accommodate sub-drain andpatch hole with portland cement mortar type M, 8-12% air entrained.

.2 Terminate in 600mm³ granular sump as indicated on drawings.

3.3 PROTECTION

.1 Care must be taken during construction work not to damage the pipein place. Any damaged pipe must be removed and replaced, takingcare to maintain proper elevations and continuity of grade.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02831

CHAIN LINK FENCING Page 1 of 2

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 The base bid contract includes:

.1 Install all new fence posts.

.3 Install new top and bottom rails and fabric in accordance withspecifications and details.

.4 Install new gates.

.5 Install fence fabric as indicated on drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Pipe .1 Butt weld, Schedule 40 galvanized pipe as per ASTM A120.,galvanized – refer to detail drawing.

.2 Couplings, Fittings andAccessories .1 Aluminium or galvanized.

.3 Galvanizing Paint: .1 Aervoe Cold Galvanizing Compound (97% Pure) Product # A74000946ml. can (not spray) as supplied by Brofasco SCARBOROUGH,

721 Progress Ave., Scarborough, Ontario, M1H 2W7 Phone:416.289.3193 | Fax: 416.289.3843

2.2 FENCE MATERIALS

.1 Terminal Posts .1 89mm (3 1/2") O.D. Length of all posts shall be height of fencingfabric plus 1.0m (3'-6") (to be buried in the concrete footing).

.2 Terminal posts shall be used at ends of runs, corners or other changesin direction and as intermediate straining posts at each end of achange in grade.

.2 Line Posts .1 73mm (2 7/8”) O.D. Line posts shall be spaced at maximum 2.4m (8'-0") on centre.

.3 Top Rail .1 43mm (1 11/16") O.D.

.4 Fittings .1 All line posts shall be finished with line post loop cap fittings.

.2 Terminal posts shall be finished with securely fastened terminal postdome caps

.3 No spear top fittings will be permitted.

.5 Couplings .1 Top rails shall be joined with outside sleeve couplings, 180mm (7")in length.

.2 The top rail shall form a continuous brace for each stretch of fence.Space couplings so that they are supported by a line post loop capfitting.

SECTION 02831

CHAIN LINK FENCING Page 2 of 2

.3 Top rails, bottom rails and braces shall be attached to posts withreceptacle fittings.

.6 Fencing Fabric .1 Refer to detail drawing for fabric gauge and finish.

.2 All fencing fabric shall finish maximum 50mm (2") above finishedgrade.

.7 Tie Wires .1 No.9 gauge tie wire. Attach fabric to rails and braces with wires at450mm (18") spacing. Attach fabric to line posts at 305mm (12") oncentre.

.8 Tension Bar .1 Fencing fabric shall be attached to terminal post with galvanizedtension bars and attachment fittings.

.9 Bottom Rail .1 43mm (1 11/16") O.D. (refer to drawings)

.10 Gate Posts .1 Length of post shall be height of gate plus 1.0m (3'-6"). Diameter andweight of gate posts shall be 89mm (3 1/2") O.D. pipe for single gatesto 3.05m (10'-0") or double gate to 6.10m (20'-0") at a maximum2.44m (8'-0") in height. Posts for full height double gates shall be100mm (4”) O.D. pipe to a maximum gate width of 3.048m (10'-0").

.2 Gate frames shall be 43m (1 11/16") O.D. All joints shall beelectrically welded and galvanized.

.3 Gates over 1.22m (4'-0") long shall include a 43mm (1 11/16") O.D.welded brace running diagonally from the upper hinge side to thelower leading edge of the frame.

.11 Gate Fabric .1 No. 9 gauge, 38mm mesh as specified for fencing fabric. Fasten gatefabric to frame and brace using No.9 gauge aluminium wire atmaximum 300mm (12") on centre.

.12 Gate Hardware .1 All gates shall be complete with galvanized hinges, latches and latchcatches. Hinges shall permit gate to swing back 180 degrees againstthe adjacent fence. Gate latches shall be designed to accept a padlockor chain that can be fully operated from either side of the gate.Provide a gate holdback for each gate - Chain and Band type.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 All chainlink fences shall be installed rigid, plumb, straight and trueto line as shown on the Drawings or directed on the site.

.2 All posts (terminal, intermediate straining, corner, line and gate) shallbe set in the centre of 1.2 (4'-0") deep poured concrete footings.

.3 All concrete shall conform to section 02520.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02860

PLAY STRUCTURES AND PLAYSPACES Page 1 of 3

PART I - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 Provide safety surface under existing equipment and provideequipment adjustments to ensure safety zone requirements have beenmet.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

.1 Playspaces shall conform to the requirements of CAN/CSA-Z614-03(CSA) "Children's Playspaces and Equipment", latest revision.Contractor shall be responsible for co-ordination with the selectedmanufacturer and ensuring that the playspace area accommodates theselected structures. Report discrepancies to the Landscape Architect.

1.3 GENERAL SAFETY SURFACE REQUIREMENTS

.1 Protective Surfacing layout: provide a minimum of 1.8m (6'-0") fromall play structures to edge of protective surfaces (i.e. inside edge ofcurbing). Exceptions to this rule include:

1. Slides – refer to CSA-Clause 14.4.2.2.2.

2. Rocking Equipment for standing – increase to 2.1 m.

3. Swings – refer to CSA –Clause 14.3.2.1.1.

.2 Ensure that a minimum of 1.8m (6’-0”) clearance beyond the edge ofthe safety surface is maintained, adjacent to slides and moving playequipment. No trees, light standards, furniture, fencing, seatwalls orother vertical feature can be accommodated in these areas. If a conflictis identified notify owners representative.

.3 The top of the safety surface shall be below top of the playspace edge.Refer to drawings for tolerances.

.4 The safety surface shall be level unless indicated otherwise on thedrawings.

1.4 SAFETY SURFACE TESTING

.1 The supplier shall ensure that the safety surface conforms with ASTMStandard F 1292 (Critical Height Test) in accordance with CSA-Clause 10.4.3.

.2 If required, the owner will conduct additional tests of the safetysurface material to confirm that it conforms to the CSA Standards.

.3 Failure of the Materials Test will require the contractor to replace therejected materials with materials that conform and pay for all testingcosts incurred by the owner.

SECTION 02860


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Safety Surface .1 Refer to drawings and details for preferred safety surface materials.

.2 Safety surface: Wood Fibre Surfacing – acceptable materials must beapproved by the owner with test results and product informationsubmitted to the consultant for approval.

.3 Materials will be rejected on site if they are manufactured fromrecycled wood that may contain material potentially unsafe toplayspace users.

.4 Manufactured safety surface products shall be installed in accordancewith the manufacturers specifications unless indicated otherwise.

.3 Sub-Drainage .1 Refer to Section 02710.

.4 Playspace Edge .1 Playspace edge is asphalt paving edge as detailed or turf as indicatedon drawings.

.5 Sand Play .1 Granite Based Sand: ‘Playground Sand’ as supplied by HutchesonSand and Mixes, Tel: 1-800-461-5521 or equal. Sand must have aninfiltration rate of greater than 30 inches per hour.

2.2 PLAYSTRUCTURES

.1 Refer to drawings for play equipment layout.

.2 Play equipment is from the adjoining school site less than 500m away.

.3 Original supplier of the equipment is Gametime Recreation.Installation manuals may be available upon request from themanufacturer.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

.1 Preparation .1 Completed excavation, edging, grading, and sub-drainage shall beinspected prior to installation of safety surface.

.2 Ensure that all construction materials are secure during periods the siteis unattended.

.3 Install temporary barricades around incomplete structures inaccordance with Section 02104.

.2 Play StructureInstallation .1 Install play equipment as per manufacturers specifications and

manuals.

SECTION 02860


.3 Edging and SafetySurface Installation .1 Install edging as indicated on drawings and consistent with referenced

Specification sections.

.2 Safety surfacing (wood fibre or granitic sand) to a minimum depth of250mm (10”).

.3 Confirm with play equipment supplier if additional depth of safetysurfacing and matting is required. Notify Landscape Architect ifequipment requirements exceed minimum depth requirements ofspecification.

. 4 Install safety surface as soon as possible. Secure site with temporaryfencing until safety surface is installed and play equipment iscomplete.

.4 Cleanup inspection .1 Remove all waste and left over materials off site. Conduct a finalinspection of the playspace prior to removal of the temporary fencing.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02866

GAMES EQUIPMENT Page 1 of 1

06-18

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED WORK

.1 Refer to drawings for specific locations of items.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 The scope of work under this section includes the supply andinstallation of basketball equipment in the locations indicated on thedrawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BASKETBALL

.1 Basketball equipment supplied by Lolimpin Gym Equipment Tel:(800) 559-5562 or approved equal. Height of hoops to be eight (8’)feet – confirm with school principal.

.2 Two (2) Stationary Frame Extensions – 12” #LO-B3 G12, galvanizedoutdoor frame.

.3 Two (2) fan shaped steel backboards, rear mounted #LO-B76SB.

.4 Two (2) basketball hoops. #LO-B61

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALL FRAME

.1 Install frame through building wall as per suppliers specifications. Lagbolt installation is not acceptable.

3.2 INSTALL EQUIPMENT

.1 Install and assemble equipment as per manufacturers instructions.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02870

SIGNAGE Page 1 of 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 Supply and install signage and posts.

PART II - PRODUCTS

2.1 SIGNAGE

.1 Road Signs: 3 mm Aluminium sign panels painted with vinyl lettering and graphics

.2 Sign Posts: 3m steel 12 gauge galvanized posts - perforated Telspar tubing with breakawaysections.

.3 Concrete footings: shall be 1200 x 250 at 100mm below finished grade, 25 Mpa concrete.

PART III - EXECUTION

3.1 SIGNAGE

.1 Locations of signs will be determined on site.

.2 Install signs on posts using concrete footings or core drill into existing concrete.

.3 General Layout Requirements for signs include: a) Set back 300mm from existing curb faceto outside edge of sign; b) Sign height shall be 2.0m from grade to bottom edge of sign.

3.2 SIGNAGE SCHEDULE

Colour Code

Item Message Type Qty. Size(cm)

Back Message Border Mounting

1 NO PARKING Alum.

Sm-2

2 30 x 45 WHITE RED &BLACK

BLACK Mount on steelpost at 2m HT.

2 STOP Alum.

Ra-1

1 60 x 60 RED WHITE WHITE Mount on steelpost at 2m HT.

3 NO ENTRY Alum. 1 30 x 30 YELLOW BLACK BLACK Mount on steelpost at 2m HT.

4 ONE WAY Alum. 2 15 x 45 WHITE BLACK BLACK Mount on steelpost at 2m HT.

5 DROP OFF ZONE Alum. 2 45 x 45 YELLOW BLACK BLACK Mount on steelpost at 2m HT.

END OF SECTION

Section 02871

TIMBER AND WOODWORK Page 1 of 2

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 Items included in this Section are cedar post and cedar post& railinstallation, wood posts for childcare area, wood deck adjacent to thesand pit.

1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 Protect all materials from harmful exposure during transportation tothe site.

.2 Store materials on site to prevent soiling or deterioration, damage orimpairment of their structural or other essential properties.

.3 All damaged or deteriorated materials will be rejected and must beremoved from the site immediately.

1.3 WORKMANSHIP

.1 Work performed under this section shall be guided by a certifiedcarpenter with a minimum of 5 years experience.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Lumber: Shall be No.1 Construction Grade ACQ SPF or No. 1 GradeWestern Cedar (refer to drawings), with an average maximum 20%moisture content for lumber greater than 50mm (2") thickness. Alllumber shall be straight, sound and free from splits, warps, cracks,large knots and other defects.

.2 Pressure Treatment: All wood shall be vacuum pressure impregnatedin accordance with CSA-080 to a net retention of 0.40 lbs. per cu. ft.;Wolman ACQ or equal. Timber and lumber shall be fully incisedbefore treatment with a minimum of 13mm (1/2") on all faces.

.4 Hardware and Connectors: Shall be hot dipped galvanized, orapproved non-ferrous type.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LAYOUT

.1 The layout must be approved by the Consultant prior to commencinginstallation of the work.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Install all work plumb, level and true. Place accurately and bracerigidly.

Section 02871

TIMBER AND WOODWORK Page 2 of 2

.2 Execute all fastening with hardware as detailed or required. All bolts,nuts and lag screws shall be countersunk where exposed to view.

.3 Bolt holes shall be bored 1.5mm (1/16") larger than the diameter of thebolt. After installation ball pean threads to prevent removal of nuts,and coat with zinc rich primer.

.4 Treat all cuts and holes in ACQ timber with the same preservativewhich was originally used in the pressure treatment of the timber.

.5 Router all exterior edges, refer to drawings for additional information.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02938

SODDING Page 1 of 2

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 This specification covers the sodding portion of the landscape workas detailed on the project drawings, including all labour, materials,tools and equipment necessary for the completion of the work.

.2 The scope of work includes the supply and install all fertilizers asrequired, sod to cover all sod areas as required by project drawingsand maintain all sodded areas until final acceptance of the completedproject


.1 The work shall be carried out in accordance with the specificationsand details provided and consistent with good landscaping practice.

1.3 TESTING & INSPECTION

.1 Prior to the installation of sod the finished grade shall be inspectedand approved by the Landscape Architect.

.2 The contractor shall supply test results from an independent testingagency for all imported topsoil including N,P,K and minor elements,soluble salts, organic matter and pH value.

.3 Where test results indicate deficiencies, the contractor shall amend thesoil with the necessary additives. Separate tests are required for eachtopsoil source.

1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING

.1 Fertilizer .1 Deliver fertilizer and similar material to site packed in standardcontainers, clearly marked with contents, weight, analysis and nameof manufacturer.

.2 Sod .1 Protect sod during transportation to prevent drying out. Keep sodmoist and cool at all times until installation. Install sod within 24hours of it being cut in the field.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Sod .1 Sod shall be certified No. 1 cultivated turf grass sod and grown by amember of the Nursery Sod Growers Association of Ontario.

.2 Fertilizer .1 Refer to Section 02212.

SECTION 02938

SODDING Page 2 of 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 The finished surface shall be smooth, firm against footprints, with afine, loose texture before sod is placed.

.2 Sodding operations shall take place during suitable weatherconditions and on ground which is free from frost, snow and water.

.3 Sod shall be laid closely knit together in such a manner that no openjoints are visible. Sod shall be laid smooth and flush with adjoiningareas unless shown otherwise on the Drawings.

.4 After installation immediately water sod with sufficient amount tosaturate the sod and upper 100mm (4") of soil.

.5 Protect all newly laid sod areas until vigorous, hardy, even growth isestablished.

3.4 MAINTENANCE

.1 Maintenance for sodded areas shall begin immediately after sod hasbeen installed and shall continue until the date of acceptance.

.2 Maintenance shall include all measures necessary to establish andmaintain sod in a vigorous growing condition, including but notlimited to:

.1 Mowing: shall be at regular intervals as required, to maintaingrass at a maximum height of 60mm (2 1/2"). Not more than 1/3of blade shall be cut at any one mowing. Edges of sodded areasshall be neatly trimmed and hand clipped where necessary. Heavyclippings shall be removed immediately after mowing andtrimming.

.2 Watering: shall be carried out when required and with sufficientquantities to prevent grass and underlying soil from drying out.

.3 Any areas which show deterioration shall be repaired.

7. ACCEPTANCE

.1 Sodded areas will be accepted at the final inspection provided that:

Sodded areas are properly established with vigorous growth Sod is free of bare and dead spots and without weeds. No surface soil is visible when grass is cut to height of 50mm. Sodded areas have been cut a minimum of two times.

.2 Lawns sodded in fall will be accepted the following spring, onemonth after start of growing season provided acceptance conditionsare fulfilled.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02950

TREES, SHRUBS AND GROUND COVERS Page 1 of 3

PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Size and quality of plant material shall meet horticultural standards ofThe Canadian Nursery Trades Association, Sixth Edition 1996.

1.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Obtain approval of plant material at source.

.2 Notify Landscape Architect of source of material at least 7 days inadvance of shipment. No work under this Section is to proceedwithout approval.

.3 Acceptance of plant material at its source does not prevent rejection onsite prior to or after planting operations.

1.3 HANDLING OF PLANTS

.1 All plants shall be protected against damage and drying out from thetime of digging until they are planted on the site.

.2 Points of contact with equipment shall be padded.

.3 Plants with broken or abraded trunks or branches are not acceptable.

.4 Root balls, trunks, branches and leaves shall be protected from sun andwind desiccation.

1.4 GUARANTEE

.1 Warrant that plant material as itemized on plant list will remain free ofdefects for two full years from final acceptance.

1.5 REPLACEMENTS

.1 During warranty period, remove from site any plant material that hasdied or failed to grow satisfactorily as determined by LandscapeArchitect.

.2 Replace plant material in the next planting season.

.3 Extend warranty on replacement plant material for a period equal tothe original warranty period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Stakes .1 (3) Three metal T-bars (regular or heavy duty). Height should be1.7m above grade.

.2 Wire .1 Galvanized steel wire strand to CSA 94-M1977 at #9 gauge.

SECTION 02950


.3 Cables and accessories .1 Factory galvanized, cables, wire tighteners, eyebolts and turnbuckles.Use approved horticultural guy wire tightener.

.4 Tree Rings .1 Cinch – tie as supplied by Braun Tel: (800) 246-6984 or equal.

.5 Wire Cage .1 50mm x 50mm (2" x 2") 6 gauge electro-welded fabric wrapped in acircle around T-bars (T-bars placed min. 300mm (12”) from treetrunk). Fasten with 11 gauge wire ties to three stakes.

.6 Tree Wrapping Material .1 New, clean, horticultural crepe tree wrap. Burlap is not acceptable.

.7 Mulch .1 Shredded Pine bark mulch.

.2 Composted Pine mulch.

.3 Supplier: Gro-Bark, Tel.(519) 885-3411 or approved equal (Citysupplied tub grinder mulch).

.8 Planting Soil .1 Refer to Section 02920.

2.2 SUBSTITUTIONS

.1 Substitutions for plant materials as indicated on Planting Plan are notpermitted unless written approval has been obtained as to type, varietyand size. Plant substitutions must be of similar species and of equalsize as those originally specified.

.2 The Landscape Architect has the right to delete plant items fromcontract for full credit as per unit price schedule.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 STAKE OUT

.1 Stake out location of trees and planting beds as per planting plan.Obtain approval prior to excavating.

3.2 PLANTING TIME

.1 Plant only under conditions that are conducive to health and physicalconditions of plants.

.2 Provide planting schedule. Extending planting operations over a longperiod using limited crew will not be acceptable.

3.3 EXCAVATION

.1 Provide drainage for planting holes in heavy soil if natural drainagedoes not exist. Have method approved.

.2 Protect bottom of excavation against freezing.

.3 Remove water that enters excavated areas prior to planting. Ensuresource of water is not ground water.

SECTION 02950


3.4 PLANTING

.1 Dig planting hole to depth to accommodate root system, and set tree sotop of root ball is level with surrounding grade.

.2 Orient plant material to give best appearance.

.3 With balled and burlapped root balls, loosen burlap and cut awayminimum top 1/3 without disturbing root ball. Do not pull burlapfrom under root ball. With container stock, remove entire containerwithout disturbing root ball. Non bio-degradable wrapping must beremoved.

.4 Remove top of wire baskets and binder twine from tree root ball.

.5 Build 150mm (6") deep saucer around outer edge of hole to assist withmaintenance watering.

.6 When planting is complete, give surface of planting saucer dressing oforganic 20-20-20 fertilizer at rate of 6 kg/100m2 for shrub beds or 20to 20 g/mm of caliper for trees. Mix fertilizer thoroughly with toplayer of planting soil and water in well.

3.5 TREE SUPPORT

.1 Staking for caliper trees: drive stakes 300mm below and beside rootball, taking care not to damage main roots. Fasten trunk to stakes.

.2 Fasten wire gage to three metal stakes 1.7m above grade. Providesample to consultant prior to installation.

.3 At end of warranty period, remove tree supports and accessories.

3.7 MULCHING

.1 Obtain approval of planting before mulching material is applied.Loosen soil, remove debris and weeds.

.2 Spread mulch to a minimum thickness of 100mm (4"). See detail onplan for variations in thickness. When mulching is placed in fall,place immediately after planting. When mulch is placed in Spring,wait until soil has warmed up.

.3 See Part 2- Products 2.1.7 regarding mulch types.

END OF SECTION


Concrete Masonry Unit Assemblies

PART 1 - GENERAL




.1 Qualifications: Provide work of this section, executed by competent installers withminimum 5 years experience in application of Products, systems and assembliesspecified and with approval and training of Product manufacturers.

.2 Conduct quality control in accordance with Section 01450.

.3 Before commencing masonry work, verify that conditions at the Place of the Work willallow construction of masonry within required limitations for wall heights, wallthicknesses, openings, bond, anchorage, lateral support, and compressive strengths ofmasonry units and mortars.

.4 Source quality control: Perform tests on masonry units to determine compressivestrength as required by jurisdictional authorities in accordance with CSA A165-04 Series.

.5 Partition mock-ups:

.1 Provide mock-ups of concrete block partition mock-ups; for partitions withtransparent sealer or paint finishes in accordance with Section 01330.

.2 Construct sample panels approximately 900 mm x900 mm (36" x 36”) of concretemasonry partition assemblies.

1.3 Submittals


.2 Product data sheets: Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposedfor use in the work of this section.

.3 Shop drawings:

.1 Submit shop drawings for masonry unit wall assemblies showing proposedlocations of control joints.

.2 Submit engineered shop drawings for masonry reinforcement and connectors.

.4 Submit the following samples:

.1 2 of each type of concrete masonry unit specified.

.2 1 of each type of masonry reinforcement proposed for use.

.5 Submit test results confirming compliance of aggregates with CSA A179-04.

1.4 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling

.1 Deliver materials to the Place of the Work in dry condition.

.2 Keep materials dry until use.

.3 Store under waterproof cover on pallets or plank platforms held off ground by means ofplank or timber skids.

.4 Handle and store cementitious materials protected against moisture.



.5 Handle and store mortar materials to prevent contamination by foreign materials, anddamage by freezing or excessively high temperature.

1.5 Protection

.1 Cover top of walls sufficient to protect walls and cavities with non-staining coverings untilmasonry work is protected by flashings or other permanent construction. Ensure thatcoverings are secured to resist wind loads.

.2 Protect masonry and other work from marking and other damage. Protect completedwork from mortar droppings. Use non-staining coverings.

.3 Protect other materials and finishes from contamination by mortar droppings.

.4 Provide temporary bracing of masonry work during and after erection until permanentlateral support is in place.

.5 Protect cementitious materials against moisture.

.6 Prevent contamination by foreign materials, and freezing.

1.6 Site Conditions

.1 Heat materials as follows: to produce mortar temperature between 4 °C and 50 °C.

.2 When air temperature is between 4 °C and 0 °C, heat either sand or water to producespecified mortar temperature.

.3 When air temperature is below 0 °C, heat both sand and water to produce specifiedmortar temperature.

.4 Do not heat water or sand above 50 °C.

.5 Produce mortar batches subsequent to the first within plus 6 °C of the first.

1.7 Warranty

.1 Warrant work of this section for a period of 2 years, in accordance with Section 01780.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

.1 Use same brands of materials and source of sand throughout the Work.

.2 Mortar and grout: Comply with CSA A179-04.

.3 Portland cement: to CSA A3000-03, Type 10/ASTM C150/C150M-09.

.4 Hydrated lime: to ASTM C207-06, Type S.

.5 Sand: to CSA A179-04.

2.2 Mortar

.1 Mortar for masonry:

.1 Loadbearing: Type S based on proportion specifications.

.2 Non-loadbearing: Type N based on proportion specifications.

.3 Mortar colour: grey.



2.3 Grout

.1 Grout following masonry components:

.1 Lintels and bond beams.

.2 Grouted walls and piers.

.2 Place and grout reinforcing and bearing in accordance with CSA A371-04 and structuraldrawings. Use concrete of minimum 20 MPa compressive strength unless otherwiseindicated.

.3 Grout for block cores: to CSA A179-04.

2.4 Reinforcing and Connectors

.1 General: Conform to minimum requirements of CSA A370 unless otherwise indicated,and to requirements for seismic reinforcement of partition walls as indicated on thedrawings.

.2 Corrosion protection: to CAN/CSA A370-04 (R2009), for metal ties and horizontalreinforcing in exterior walls, hot dipped after fabrication to ASTM A82/A82M-07, andASTM A153/A153M-05 Class B2 (457 g/m2).

.3 Joint reinforcement:

.1 Acceptable manufacturers: Dur-o-wal Limited or Blok-Lok.

.2 Exterior wall assemblies: 4.75 mm (3/16") wire, welded rod, hot dip galvanizedafter fabrication ladder design unless otherwise indicated.

.3 Interior wall assemblies: 9 gauge mill galvanized wire ladder reinforcement.

2.5 Masonry Accessories

.1 Deflection space filler (non-fire rated walls): Roxul "AFB" or AD Fire Barrier Insulation.

.2 Deflection space filler (fire rated walls): in accordance with Section 07840.

.3 Control joint filler: Closed cell neoprene to ASTM D1056 Class RE41, "DA2010" by Dur-o-wal Limited or approved alternate.

.4 Slip-sheet PVC membrane (for lintel bearing locations): 20 mil thick PVC membrane,F20 by Lexsuco or approved alternative.

.5 Expansion strips: polyethylene foam, 10 mm (3/8") thick.

2.6 Concrete Block Masonry Units

.1 Comply with CSA A165-04 Series.

.2 Include shapes, such as end, bond, sash groove, ledge and lintel units, required tocomplete the Work, with uniform appearance.

.1 Provide open end blocks where vertical reinforcing occurs in walls.

.2 Provide knock-out blocks where horizontal reinforcing bars occur in walls.

.3 Provide bullnose units at interior partition outside corners and where indicated.

.4 Solid concrete masonry units may be used where grouted block is indicated,whenever reinforcing is not indicated, in lieu of grouted solid installation method.

.5 Size: metric.



.3 Light weight units:

.1 Hollow units: H/15/C/O.

.2 Semi-solid units: SS/15/C/O.

.3 Full solid units: SF/15/C/O.

.4 Colour: grey.

.5 Profiles: as indicated.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation

.1 Provide protection where required at mixing areas to prevent damage attributed tomortar materials.

3.2 Workmanship

.1 Build masonry plumb, level, and true to line, with vertical joints in proper alignment. Laymasonry to tolerances specified in CSA A371-04.

.2 Layout coursing and bond to achieve correct coursing heights, and continuity of bondabove and below openings, with minimum of cutting.

.3 Do masonry mortar and grout work in accordance with CSA A179-04 except wherespecified otherwise.

.4 Do masonry work in accordance with CSA S304.1-04, CAN/CSA A370-04 (R2009) andCSA A371-04 except where specified otherwise.

3.3 Measurement and Mixing

.1 Mix mortars as specified in CSA A179-04. Use only dry aggregate. Test for bulking todetermine accurate proportioning.

.2 Fine grout: mix one part Portland cement and three parts sand with water.

.3 Coarse grout: ready mixed high slump pea gravel concrete.

.4 Adjust water in mortar mix to suit absorption rates of masonry units.

3.4 Laying Masonry Units

.1 Lay concrete masonry units in half running bond unless otherwise indicated.

.2 Installation and materials shall meet or exceed that of accepted samples and mock-up.

.3 Units shall be cut only upon acceptance of Consultant. Walls are to be laid-up with fullsize masonry units.

.4 Where masonry surfaces serve as substrate for thin-set tile and direct applied coatings,build to tolerance of 1:500(1/8" in any 6'-0") under a straight edge.

.5 Remove loose and foreign materials from supporting bed surfaces to ensure bonding.

.6 Stop off horizontal runs of walls by racking back a half unit in each horizontal course. Donot tooth.



.7 Do not install masonry units with face or faces exhibiting chips, cracks, blemishes,texture variation, and other imperfections detracting from appearance when viewed fromdistance of 4600 mm (15 ft.).

.8 Do not install defective, cracked, and broken masonry units.

.9 Mixing and blending: Mix units to ensure uniform blend of colour and texture and complywith manufacturer's recommended installation instructions. Distribute masonry units ofvarying textures to avoid spotty appearance over wall surfaces exposed to view. Do notuse units which contrast too greatly with overall range.

.10 Maintain bracing of walls and piers continuously during construction until structureprovides support.

.11 Locate bearings and piers as indicated. Provide solid masonry units at bearings. Groutunder bearing plates installed on masonry with non-shrink grout.

.12 Extend walls and partitions to deck, slab or structural members, as applicable, exceptwhere otherwise noted in the Contract Documents. Incorporate both lateral support anddeflection space at termination of walls as required by this section.

.13 Maintain mortar joint thickness of 10 mm (3/8"), unless otherwise indicated.

.14 Lay masonry level, true to line, square, plumb, and as indicated. Lay masonry courses invertical alignment to ensure vertical joints align for full height of masonry and full heightof building face.

.15 Lay masonry in full bed of mortar, properly jointed with other work. Buttering corners ofjoints, and deep or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted.

.16 Fully bond intersections, and external corners.

.17 Do not adjust masonry units after laying. Where resetting of masonry is required,remove, clean units and reset in new mortar.

.18 Extend masonry to construction above, except where otherwise indicated. Cut and fillaround obstructions.

.19 Build chases, do not cut them.

.20 Lay hollow concrete masonry units so that shell rest and align.

.21 Exposed cuts shall be made clean and true with a suitable masonry saw.

.22 Exposed corners at interior partitions shall utilise units with bullnose corners; unlessotherwise indicated.

3.5 Exposed Masonry

.1 Do not lay chipped, cracked, blemished, and otherwise damaged units in exposedmasonry.

.2 Do not lay chipped, cracked, and otherwise damaged units in concealed masonry.

.3 Do not lay concrete masonry units that will appear smooth or slick where exposed toview, whether painted or not finished.

.4 Remove chipped, cracked, and otherwise damaged units in exposed masonry andreplace with undamaged units.



3.6 Jointing

.1 Form tooled mortar joints whenever exposed to view, and behind cabinets, fitments, andwall accessories. Tool when mortar is thumb-print hard by tools having long bearingsurface to avoid uneven depressions. Close cracks and crevices.

.2 Concealed masonry: strike flush joints concealed in walls and joints in walls to receiveplaster, acrylic stucco, tile, insulation, or other applied material except paint or similarthin finish coating. Ensure that no mortar protrudes from joints on wall surfaces toreceive materials and coatings.

.3 Tool with round non-staining pointing tool to provide smooth, compressed, uniformlyconcave joints except if specified or shown otherwise.

.4 Joint thickness:

.1 Maintain mortar joint thickness of 10 mm (3/8"), unless otherwise specified orindicated.

.2 At masonry cut around obstructions: maximum joint size of 13 mm (1/2").

.5 Make joints of uniform thickness with vertical joints in alignment.

.6 Trowel point joints in unparged masonry in contact with earth.

.7 Form reglets where indicated for metal flashing in masonry.

.8 Remove loose or defective mortar when masonry is removed and replace.

.9 Rake out joints at junctions of masonry with concrete walls and columns, and atintersection of masonry walls and partitions where joint reinforcement is installed. Thesejoints will be sealed by Section 07900.

.10 Cut out defective mortar joints and repoint.

3.7 Joining of Work

.1 Where necessary to temporarily stop horizontal runs of masonry, and in building corners;

.1 Step-back masonry diagonally to lowest course previously placed.

.2 Do not "tooth" new masonry.

.3 Fill in adjacent courses before heights of stepped masonry reach 1220 mm (48").

3.8 Cutting

.1 Cut out neatly using a wet diamond blade saw for electrical switches, outlet boxes, andother recessed or built-in objects.

.2 Make cuts straight, clean, and free from uneven edges.

3.9 Built-In Work

.1 Prevent displacement of built-in items during construction. Check plumb, location andalignment frequently, as work progresses.

.2 Coordinate and cooperate in the provisions for setting, anchorage and alignment of built-in work.



.3 Metal door frames:

.1 Build masonry around metal door frames supplied and set in accordance with thevarious parts of the Contract Documents.

.2 Ensure that anchors are secured solidly, and that frames are true and plumb.

.3 Fill back void of frames with mortar unless otherwise indicated.

.4 Protect frame with protective covering and leave no mortar on exposed framefaces.

3.10 Support of Loads

.1 Use minimum 20 MPa concrete, where concrete fill is used in lieu of solid units.

.2 Install building paper below voids to be filled with concrete; keep paper 25 mm (1") backfrom faces of units.

3.11 Reinforced Masonry

.1 Conform to requirements of CSA A371-04.

.2 Grouting beneath bearing plates: Completely fill voids beneath steel bases bearing onmasonry with an approved non-shrink grout having a compressive strength at 28 days ofat least 35 MPa. Where grout is exposed to view or weather, use non-ferrous expansionagents.

.3 Reinforced Block Lintels:

.1 Install reinforced block lintels over doorways, other openings and recesses asindicated.

.2 Support masonry units of reinforced block lintels built in place. Provide a levelplatform, true to the proper elevation and of sufficient strength to support the loadwithout visible deflection. Maintain supports in place for a minimum of 7 days andfor a period sufficient to permit the concrete to cure and gain sufficient strength tosafely support all loads.

.4 Lay masonry units with full mortar coverage on all abutting edges with joints shovedtight. Where masonry construction is continued above the lintel, place the first course ofmasonry units on the lintel in a full mortar bed.

.5 Reinforce masonry lintels and bond beams as indicated. Make joints in lintels and bondbeams to match adjacent walls.

.6 Reinforce masonry walls as indicated.

.7 Grouted reinforced masonry: Construct masonry to meet indicated requirements.

.8 Place 100% solid block at each jamb under lintels.

3.12 Provision for Movement

.1 Deflection space:

.1 Incorporate deflection space between tops of non-load-bearing walls/partitionsand structure to prevent transference of structural loads to masonry.

.1 Exterior masonry wall deflection space: 12.7 mm (1/2").

.2 Interior masonry partition deflection space: 35 mm (1-3/8").



.2 Coordinate work of this section with installation of lateral supports.

3.13 Deflection Space Filler

.1 Non-fire rated walls: Fill deflection space with deflection space filler. Where deflectionspace is exposed, tamp filler into deflection space 25 mm (1").

.2 Fire-rated walls: Refer to requirements of Section 07840.

3.14 Loose Steel Lintels

.1 Loose lintels: Install loose lintels as required to suit required openings. Set and levellintels, centred over opening width, on a 20 mil PVC slip-sheet membrane, placed overbed or mortar. Allow suitable movement joint at ends of lintels for expansion andcontraction movement at exterior lintels.

3.15 Lateral Supports

.1 In addition to requirements of Contract Documents, Provide horizontal and vertical walland partition lateral support anchors in accordance with CAN/CSA A370-04 (R2009).

3.16 Control (Movement) Joints

.1 Provide continuous control (movement) joints maximum 7480 mm (24'-6") on centre,and/or as indicated.

.2 Place control (movement) joints at changes in wall direction, changes in building heights,at door and window locations where necessary and directed, at major changes inthickness of wall, periodic lengths of continuous wall (7480 mm (24'6") on centre max.)and as directed by Consultant and as indicated.

.3 Review and coordinate control joint locations with the Consultant prior to installation ofmasonry.

.4 Construct control joints as indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, make control joints19 mm (3/4") wide. Cut masonry reinforcement at control joints.

.5 Stop reinforcing 25 mm (1") short of each side of control joints unless otherwiseindicated.

3.17 Horizontal Reinforcing

.1 Joint reinforcement:

.1 Install joint reinforcement in cavity walls, solid walls and partitions.

.2 Place reinforcement continuously in horizontal joints at 400 mm (16") on centre,beginning with course 400 mm (16") above bearing, unless otherwise indicated.

.3 Do not carry reinforcement through intersections where lateral support anchorsare installed, at intersections of walls and partitions with solid piers and at blockcontrol joints.

3.18 Bolts and Anchors

.1 Embed bolts and anchors solidly in mortar or grout to develop maximum resistance todesign forces.



3.19 Structural Reinforcement

.1 Install to indicated requirements.

3.20 Temporary Bracing

.1 Provide adequate temporary bracing to masonry walls until floor and roof decks areinstalled and can develop adequate diaphragm action to brace walls.

3.21 Cleaning

.1 Protect masonry and adjacent work from damage from cleaning work.

.2 Clean masonry in strict accordance with masonry manufacturer's printed instructions andreferenced standards. Remove masonry and install new masonry, if masonry isdamaged by cleaning work.

.3 Test specified cleaning agent and procedures by cleaning small, inconspicuous samplelocation prior to commencement of overall cleaning work. Review cleaning test area withConsultant and obtain acceptance in writing prior to cleaning remainder of areasrequiring cleaning.

.4 Soak wall with clean water and flush off loose dirt and mortar.

.5 Apply specified cleaning agent in accordance with the manufacturer's direction, workingfrom top to bottom.

.6 Rinse areas thoroughly with clean water to remove cleaning solutions, dirt, and mortarresidue.

.7 Remove mortar from exposed masonry face immediately after pointing and prior to fullset to avoid mortar staining of masonry units. Remove masonry and install newmasonry, if mortar staining cannot be removed without damaging masonry work.

.8 Remove efflorescence and mortar deposits from surfaces to receive coatings andsurfaces which are exposed to view. Remove efflorescence and mortar deposits fromsurfaces to receive coatings or surfaces which are exposed to view, occurring within atime period of 1 year after date of Substantial Performance of the Work

.9 Use proprietary PH-neutral cleaning solution with water as approved by manufacturer ofmasonry units in accordance with manufacturer's printed directions. Use clean water toremove excess cleaning solution.

.10 Remove mortar droppings from flashings and other materials immediately to preventdamage and discolouration.

3.22 Testing

.1 Provide mortar for strength testing in accordance with CSA A179-04 and Section 01450.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 05500

METAL BARRIER GATE PAGE 1 of 1

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 Shop and field fabrication associated with Metal Barrier and handrail.

1.2 QUALIFICATIONS

.1 Welding of structural steel shall conform to the requirements of CSASTD. W59-M1989 and shall be undertaken by a fabricator fullyapproved by the CWB to the requirements of CSA STD. W47.1-1992.

.2 Welding operators shall be properly accredited experienced operators,each of whom shall submit satisfactory evidence of experience andskill in welding structural steel with the kind of welding to be used inthe work.

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Provide shop drawings for mesh frame panels prior to fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Steel Sections: shall match existing steel work.

.2 Samples of steel mesh are to be submitted for approval . The gauge ofthe mesh shall be a minimum of 9 gauge.

.2 Welding Materials: shall be in strict accordance with the AmericanWelding Society (AWS). Structural welding code, D1.1 Filler metalas specified in 4.1 shall be used for the particular welding processrequired. Welders will be certified in accordance with AWS D1.1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 All work done under this section shall include the supply of allequipment, material and labour required to do the work.

.3 Shop fabricate prior to delivery and assembly on site.

.4 Site disturbance and on-site handling shall be minimized by properpre-installation planning. The Contractor must demonstrate to theConsultant that site operations will facilitate these requirements priorto moving units onto site.

END OF SECTION


Metal Fabrications

PART 1 - GENERAL




.1 Work of this section includes metal fabrications and related metals including, but notlimited to, the following:

.1 Miscellaneous metals; primed and concealed from view or primed and finishpainting coats provided in accordance with Section 09900

.2 Architectural woodwork supports; prime painted and concealed from view.


.1 Retain a Professional Engineer registered in the Place of the Work to design the work ofthis section; to prepare, seal and sign shop drawings; and to perform field review. Shopdrawings shall show both design and installation requirements.

.2 Work of this section shall be executed only by a Subcontractor who has adequate plant,equipment, and skilled tradespersons to perform work expeditiously, and is known tohave been responsible for satisfactory installations similar to that required in the Workduring a period of at least the immediate past 5 years.

.3 Welding:

.1 Weld structural components in steel to conform to requirements of CSA W59-03(R2008), and by a fabricator fully certified by the Canadian Welding Bureau toconditions of CSA W47.1-03 (R2008) and CSA W55.3-08 as applicable.

.4 Requirements of regulatory agencies: the work of this section that functions to resistforces imposed by dead and live loads shall conform to requirements of jurisdictionalauthorities.

1.4 Submittals


.2 Submit list of fabrications to be Provided as part of the work of this section.

.3 Product data sheets:

.1 Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in thework of this section.

.4 Shop drawings:

.1 Submit engineered shop drawings.

.2 Include plans, sections and large scale details, and shall indicate componentsand methods of assembly, materials and their characteristics, fastenings, metalfinishes, welds, and their structural characteristics relative to their purpose, andother fabrication information required.

.3 Indicate proposed site connections and methods.


Metal Fabrications

1.5 Design Requirements

.1 Design, fabricate, and install in accordance with the building code and requirements ofall other governing authorities.

.2 Design assemblies and connections to withstand own dead load, live loads, super-imposed dead loads, and fabrication forces, without permanent distortions ordeformation, to maximum allowable deflection of L/360, within the following constructiontolerances:

.1 Maximum variation from plumb in vertical lines:

.1 3.2 mm (1/8") in 3 m (10 ft)

.2 Maximum variation from level:

.1 3.2 mm (1/8") in 9 m (30 ft).

.3 Maximum variation from straight:

.1 3.2 mm (1/8") in 3 m (10 ft) under a 3 m (10 ft) straight edge.

.4 Maximum variation from angle indicated:

.1 10 seconds.

.5 Tolerances shall be non-cumulative.

.3 Design of metal fabrications to be by a professional engineer registered in the Place ofthe Work, except work designed on structural drawings. Professional engineer to beexperienced in this type of engineering and in accordance with Section 01330.

1.6 Delivery, Storage and Handling

.1 Label, tag or otherwise mark metal fabrications supplied for installation by other sectionsto indicate its function, location in building and shop drawing designation.

.2 Protect work from damage during delivery, storage and handling.

.3 Deliver work to location at the Place of the Work designated by Contractor and to meetrequirements of construction schedule.

1.7 Warranty


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

.1 General:

.1 Unless detailed or specified otherwise, standard Products will be acceptable ifconstruction details and installation meet intent of the Contract Documents.

.2 Include materials, Products, accessories, and supplementary parts necessary tocomplete assembly and installation of work of this section.

.3 Incorporate only metals that are free from defects that are visible, or that impairstrength or durability. Install only new metals of best quality, and free from rust orwaves and buckles, and that are clean, straight, and with sharply defined profiles.


Metal Fabrications

.4 The engineer responsible for the production of the shop drawings is responsiblefor structural design, member sizes, arrangement, connections and anchoring ofwork of this section. Coordinate and maintain materials, dimensions, layout andappearance to meet intent of the Contract Documents.

.2 Metals:

.1 Steel, structural shapes, plate, bars: hot-rolled, CAN/CSA G40.21-04, Grade300W.

.2 Steel, hollow structural sections: hot-formed, seamless, CAN/CSA G40.21-04,Grade 350W, Class C or H.

.3 Steel (mild), sheet and strip, hot rolled, ASTM A1011/A1011M-10.

.4 Steel, sheet: cold rolled, stretcher levelled, fully pickled, ASTM A1008/A1008M-07, Grade CS Type A exposed, matte finish, dry, unless otherwise indicated.

.5 Steel pipe: ASTM A53 / A53M - 06a, Type E or S, Grade A or B, standard weight,Schedule 40 seamless black or AISI MT 1010/1015, or acceptable alternative.

.3 Finishes:

.1 Shop primer; steel: to CISC/CPMA 2-75.

.4 Fastenings: steel, cadmium plated screws and bolts, and to ASTM A307-07b, Type 304stainless steel where exposed to exterior (includes washers).

.5 Welding materials:

.1 Steel: to CSA W59-03(R2008).

.6 Grout:

.1 Epoxy grout: non-shrink, non-expanding, 'Sikadur Injection Gel Fast-Set' asmanufactured by Sika Canada Inc., HY-150 as manufactured by Hilti, REZI-WELD 3/2 EPOXY GROUT/PATCH by W.R. Meadows, or approved alternative.

.2 Cementitious grout: non-shrink, non-expanding to ASTM C-1107, 'Sika Grout212' as manufactured by Sika, 'Sealtight CG-86 Construction Grout' asmanufactured by W.R. Meadows, or approved alternative.

.7 Anchors: where exposed, countersunk 410 stainless steel Tapcon fasteners to suit.Where exposed to view to match metal anchored.

.8 Dielectric separator: Best grade, quick drying non-staining alkali resistant bituminouspaint to CAN/CGSB 1.108-M89-1979, or membrane type to acceptance of Consultant.

2.2 Fabrication

.1 General:

.1 Fabricate metal fabrications with machinery and tools specifically designed forthe intended manufacturing processes and by skilled tradesmen.

.2 Fit and assemble metal fabrications in shop. When this is not possible, make atrial shop assembly.

.3 Incorporate anchors at 610 mm (24") on centre or as otherwise required forsecure attachment for metal fabrications located in cast-in-place concrete andconcrete masonry units.


Metal Fabrications

.4 Incorporate means for fastenings of other work secured to work of this section.

.5 Do welding work in accordance with CSA W59-03(R2008) and CSA W59.2, asapplicable, unless specified otherwise.

.2 Construction:

.1 Fabricate with materials, component sizes, metal gauges, reinforcing, anchors,and fasteners of adequate strength to withstand intended use, and withinallowable design factors imposed by jurisdictional authorities. Fabricate itemsfrom steel unless otherwise noted.

.2 Ensure that metal fabrications will remain free of warping, buckling, opening ofjoints and seams, distortion, and permanent deformation.

.3 Assembly:

.1 Accurately cut, machine and fit joints, corners, copes and mitres so that junctionsbetween components fit together tightly and in true planes.

.2 Fasten work with concealed methods unless otherwise indicated.

.3 Weld connections where possible, bolt where not possible, and cut off bolts flushwith nuts. Countersink bolt heads, and incorporate method to prevent looseningof nuts. Ream holes drilled for fastenings.

.4 Grind welds smooth where exposed to view. Grind welds flat and fill flush withfiller compatible with finish coating system, where exposed to view.

.5 Allow for differential movements within assemblies and at junctions of assemblieswith surrounding Work.

.4 Finish work:

.1 Incorporate holes and connections for work installed under other sections.

.2 Cleanly and smoothly finish exposed edges of materials including holes.

.3 Cap open ends of sections exposed to view, such as pipes, channels, angles,and other similar work.

.4 Machine or grind floor assemblies or their bearings to obtain level support.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1 Examination

.1 Take measurements at the Place of the Work to ensure that metal fabrications arefabricated to fit surrounding construction, around obstructions and projections in place,or as indicated, and to suit service locations.

3.2 Installation

.1 Install metal fabrications plumb, true, square, straight, level, and accurately and tightlyfitted together and to surrounding work.

.2 Include in work of this section anchor bolts, high tensile bolts, washers and nuts,expansion bolts, toggles, straps, sleeves, brackets, clips, and other items necessary forsecure installation as required by loading and jurisdictional authorities. Weld toCAN/CSA-S16-01 CONSOLIDATION.


Metal Fabrications

.3 Attach metal fabrications to interior concrete and masonry with corrosion resistantexpansion bolts to support load with a safety factor of 3.

.4 Insulate between dissimilar metals or between metal, and masonry or concrete withbituminous paint to prevent electrolytic action.

.5 Hand items over for casting into concrete or building into masonry to appropriate tradestogether with setting templates.

3.3 Adjustment and Cleaning

.1 After erection, touch up primed surfaces that are burned, scratched or otherwisedamaged with prime paint to match shop paint.

.2 Clean and repair areas of bare metal and welds on galvanized surfaces with 2 coats zincrich paint. Welded area of members to be masked to minimize overpainting of adjacentundamaged surfaces.

.3 Remove damaged, dented, defaced, defectively finished, or tool marked componentsand replace with new.

3.4 Protection

.1 Maintain protection of work of this section from time of installation until final finishes areapplied or to final cleanup.

.2 Protect finished surfaces from damage.

END OF SECTION


Architectural Woodwork

PART 1 - GENERAL




.1 Work of this section includes architectural woodwork including, but not limited to, thefollowing:

.1 Cabinetry and hardware.

.2 Plastic laminate countertops.

.3 Solid surfacing countertops.

.4 Sliding wood doors; hardware to be provided by Section 08710.

.5 Factory and site finishing of architectural woodwork.


.1 Special experience requirements:

.1 Manufacturer/Fabricator: architectural woodwork shall be manufactured by a firmhaving a minimum of 5 years experience on work of similar size and quality tothat indicated and specified.

.2 Installer qualifications: engage an installer who has successfully completed 2architectural woodwork projects similar in scope, materials and design to thisProject within the last 5 years.

.2 Single-source manufacturing and Installation responsibility: Engage a qualifiedManufacturer to assume undivided responsibility for woodwork specified in this section,including fabrication, finishing, and installation.

.3 Quality Standard: Comply with AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality StandardsManual (“AWI/AWMAC Manual”).

.4 Conduct a pre-installation meeting in accordance with Section 01312.

1.4 Submittals



.1 Submit manufacturer’s Product data for each type of Product and processproposed for use in the work of this section and incorporated into items ofarchitectural woodwork.

.3 Shop drawings:

.1 Submit shop drawings for the work of this section.

.2 Include full scale drawings of all exposed-to-view edge conditions.

.3 Include plans, sections and large scale details, and indicate components andmethods of assembly, materials and their characteristics, fastenings, finishes,and other fabrication information required for the work of this section. Indicateassembly joint lines.



.4 Submit coordination drawings indicating locations of concealed grounds, cutouts,plates, and other required fabrications.

.5 Show relation to adjoining construction, details of outside and inside corners anddoor openings.

.4 Verification samples:

.1 Submit samples for purpose of verification of compliance with specifiedrequirements.

.2 Submit 3 sets of 200 mm x 200 mm (8” x 8”) samples, or 200 mm (8”) long asapplicable, of each specified Product, material and finish, including but not limitedto the following:

.1 Shop finished materials, showing each type of finish and colour.

.2 Samples of each specified Product, in each specified colour and finish.

.3 Solid surfacing, in each specified colour and finish.

.4 Plastic laminates, in each specified colour and finish.

.5 Mock-ups:

.1 Provide mock-ups prior to preparation of shop drawings and make modificationsas required.

.2 Provide mock-ups for the following:

.1 All veneer and solid types.

.2 All edge and joint types.

.6 Provide manual, detailing maintenance procedure for finishes requiring specific care,noting particularly those procedures or materials which will cause damage to finishedsurfaces.

1.5 Coordination

.1 Coordinate with other work to ensure satisfactory and expeditious completion of the workof this section.

.2 Take dimensions at the Place of the Work relative to the work of this section. Performwork of this section to suit dimensions and conditions at the Place of the Work.

.3 Provide forms, templates, anchors, sleeves, inserts and accessories required to be fixedto or inserted in the work of this section and set in place. Instruct applicableSubcontractors as to their locations.

.4 Coordinate with partition accessories, electrical, communications and finish componentsto ensure that proper provisions are made for the installation of the work of this sectionand for work by others.

.5 Provide cut-outs for raceways, sleeves, grommets and other manufactured accessorieswhich are required for the work of this section and for work by others.


.1 Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage,spoilage, and deterioration.



.2 Do not deliver woodwork until painting, wet work, grinding, and similar operations thatcould damage, soil, or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas.If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas whoseenvironmental conditions meet requirements specified under paragraph 1.7 "ProjectConditions" (below).

.3 The woodwork manufacturer and the Contractor shall be jointly responsible to makecertain that woodwork is not delivered until the building and storage areas are sufficientlydry so that the architectural woodwork will not be damaged by excessive changes inmoisture content.

1.7 Project Conditions

.1 Environmental conditions; during installation: Obtain and comply with woodworkmanufacturer's advice for optimum temperature and humidity conditions for woodworkduring its storage and installation. Do not install woodwork until these conditions havebeen attained.

.2 Environmental conditions; during service life of woodwork: Obtain and comply withwoodwork manufacturer's advice for optimum temperature and humidity conditions forwoodwork during its storage and installation. Do not install woodwork until theseconditions have been attained. Note that building humidity control is not in operation 24hours per day or 365 days per year and system is intermittent during winter and summermonths. As a result, fabrication of wood components should anticipate major changes inhumidity levels.

.3 Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction,check actual dimension of other construction by accurate field measurements beforemanufacturing woodwork; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings.Coordinate manufacturing schedule with construction progress to avoid delays in theWork.

1.8 Warranty


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Wood Materials

.1 Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI/AWMAC Manual for eachtype of woodwork and quality grade indicated and, where Products are part ofwoodwork, with requirements of the referenced Product standards that apply to Productcharacteristics indicated.

.2 Lumber: to AWI/AWMAC Manual with the following requirements:

.1 Hardwood for concealed blocking and framing: Economy grade, any species that,when painted, will not show any defects.

.2 Hardwood for exposed blocking: species and grade to match panel veneer.

.3 Moisture Content: Provide kiln-dried (KD) lumber with an average moisturecontent range of 6% to 11% for interior work. Maintain temperature and relativehumidity during fabrication, storage and finishing operations so that moisturecontent values for woodwork at time of installation do not exceed 5% to 10%.

.4 Solid hardwood; for Transparent Finish:



.1 Grade: to Architectural Woodwork Standards, 8th Edition, 2003, Grade I.

.2 Species: White maple to match existing.

.3 Cut: to match existing.

.3 Wood Veneers:

.1 Veneer face grade: to Architectural Woodwork Standards, 8th Edition, 2003,Grade AA; unless otherwise indicated, and as follows:

.1 Veneer species: White maple to match existing.

.2 Veneer cut: to match existing.

.3 Veneer leaf matching: to match existing/

.4 Veneer assembly matching: to match existing.

2.2 Panel Materials

.1 Panel material schedule: except where indicated otherwise:

.1 Thickness: 19 mm (3/4"), minimum.

.2 Core panels:

.1 At veneered work: MDF, except at shelving use veneer core plywood.

.2 At plastic laminate and melamine work: MDF.

.3 Plywood backing; countertops: exterior grade DFP, sanded good one sideplywood, with no added urea-formaldehyde used in composition.

.3 Maximum moisture content at time of installation: 10% to 12%.

.2 Plywood:

.1 Backing grade, veneer core:

.1 Softwood plywood to CSA O151-04

.2 Douglas Fir plywood to CSA O121-M1978.

.3 Medium density fibreboard; MDF:

.1 Premium grade, medium density fibreboard to ANSI/NPA A208.2-2009, 750kg/m3 density, MDF Classification MD, interior MDF, FSC certified, no addedurea-formaldehyde used in composition, and 100% recovered and recycled fibre.

.1 Acceptable Products:

.1 SierraPine Ltd. ‘Medite II’.

.2 SierraPine Ltd. ‘Arreis’.

.3 Uniboard ‘NuGreen’.

.4 PanelSource ‘PureKor’.

.5 Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01250.

2.3 Plastic and Composite Materials

.1 Melamine:



.1 Conforming to ANSI A208.1-1999, grade M3, 16 mm (5/8") minimum thick,complete with matching non-yellowing edge trim, unless otherwise noted.

.2 Colour: to later selection by Consultant from manufacturer’s full range.

.2 Plastic Laminate:

.1 To CSA A172-96, Grade GP and Grade PF, Type S, 1.2 mm thick.

.2 Colours and patterns: in accordance with Room Finish Schedule.

.3 Acceptable manufacturers: in accordance with Room Finish Schedule.

.3 Solid surfacing sheet:

.1 Acceptable Product/manufacturer:

.1 Dupont 'Corian'.

.2 Staron.

.2 Nominal sheet thickness: 13 mm (1/2") minimum, unless otherwise indicated.

.3 Colour/pattern: in accordance with Room Finish Schedule.


2.4 Fasteners and Adhesives

.1 Fasteners:

.1 Wood Screws: FF-S-111D Amendment 1 (1989), type, size, material and finishas required for the condition of use.

.2 Nails: FED FF-N-105, type, size material and finish as required for the conditionof use.

.3 Anchors: Type, size material and finish as required for the condition of use.

.4 Fastening devices shall be set or countersunk flush with surface of framingmember. No exposed fasteners permitted. Where accepted by Consultant,exposed fasteners shall be flat head hex socket cap screws and matching jointconnector sex bolts by Murakoshi, distributed by Richelieu, Spaenaur JointConnector bolt with decorative head, hex drive series; finish as selected byConsultant, bronze finish unless otherwise indicated.

.2 Adhesives: Moisture resistant complying with FS MMM-A-125, Type II, or FED MMM-A-188, Type I, II or III; type best suited for the purpose.

2.5 Hardware

.1 Casework hardware; to be furnished and installed by the architectural woodworkmanufacturer:

.1 Cubby hooks: Hafele 846.52.808.

.2 Wall mounted hooks: Canadian Builders Hardware CBH61.

.3 Pulls: Hafele 116.07.631.

.4 Sliding glass door hardware: To later selection by Consultant.

.5 Glass shelf hardware: To later selection by Consultant.

.2 Casework hardware: to ANSI/BHMA A156.9-2003.



.1 Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): ANSI/BHMA A156.9-2003,B01602, 135.

.2 Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: ANSI/BHMA A156.9-2003, B04071;with shelf rests, B04081.

.3 Shelf Rests: ANSI/BHMA A156.9-2003, B04013; metal, two-pin type with shelfhold-down clip.

.4 Drawer Slides: ANSI/BHMA A156.9-2003, B05091.

.1 Standard Duty (Grade 1, Grade 2, and Grade 3): Side mounted andextending under bottom edge of drawer; full-extension type; epoxy-coatedsteel with polymer rollers.

.2 Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated steel ball-bearing slides.

.5 Door Locks: ANSI/BHMA A156.11-2004, E07121.

.6 Drawer Locks: ANSI/BHMA A156.11-2004, E07041.

.7 Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: moulded-plastic grommetsand matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.

.8 Auxiliary hardware: to ANSI/BHMA A156.16-2002.

.9 Hardware finish:

.1 Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish thatcomplies with ANSI/BHMA A156.18-2006 for BHMA finish number indicated.

.1 Bright Chromium Plated: BHMA 625 for brass or bronze base;BHMA 651 for steel base.

.2 For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish thatcomplies with product class requirements in ANSI/BHMA A156.9-2003.

2.6 Fabrication

.1 Fabrication shall be in accordance with the Architectural Woodwork Standards, 8thEdition, 2003, Premium Grade, unless otherwise indicated or scheduled, and as follows:

.1 Architectural Cabinetry:

.1 Fabricate in accordance with Architectural Woodwork Standards, 8th Edition,2003, Section 400.

.2 Construction: Flush overlay.

.2 Stile and Rail Doors:

.1 Fabricate in accordance with Architectural Woodwork Standards, Edition 1,2009, Section 1400.

.2 Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated with openings andmortises pre-cut, where possible, to receive hardware and other items of work.

.3 Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work beforeshipment to maximum extent possible. Trial fit in shop and disassemble componentsonly as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary, provide ampleallowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. Reassemble with concealed fasteners.



.4 Pre-cut openings: Provide woodwork, solid tops and other indicated materials with pre-cut openings, where possible, for hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electricalwork, telephone cut-outs and similar items. Locate openings accurately and Provideproper size and shape. Smooth edges of cut-outs and, where located in countertops,seal edges of cut-outs with a water-resistant coating.

.5 Measurements: Before fabrication of woodwork to be fitted to other construction, obtainfield measurements and verify dimensions and shop drawing details as required foraccurate fit.

.6 Provide lumber framing for architectural woodwork, complete with all bracing andfastening devices as required for a rigid installation, and as required to sustain theimposed loads.

.7 Do fabrication from field measurement with provision for scribing and transportation asrequired to meet built-in conditions.

.8 Maintain relative humidity and temperature during fabrication, storage and finishingoperations matching that of the areas of installation.

.9 Reinforcing shown is minimum. Provide additional reinforcing as required to ensure arigid assembly. Exposed surfaces shall be free from dents, tool marks, warpage, buckle,glue and open joints, or other defects. Accurately fit all joints, corners and mitres.

.10 Provide balancing sheets as required, and specified, complying with the ArchitecturalWoodwork Standards, 8th Edition, 2003.

.11 Provide necessary cut-outs on or through the furniture to accommodate architecturalwoodwork and work of other sections.

.12 Provide surface mount blocking & strapping necessary to support the work of thissection. Such blocking shall not be exposed upon completion of work.

.13 Prefinish work at the factory, except where specified or indicated otherwise.

.14 Take responsibility for the stability of furniture and fitments.

.15 No end grain shall be visible: mitre external corners; house internal corners.

2.7 Fabrication - Solid Surfacing

.1 Fabrication to be performed by a solid surface manufacturer's certifiedfabricator/installer.

.2 Wherever possible, fabricate in single piece accurately made to fit space.

.3 Fabricate components in shop to greatest extent practical to size and shape indicated, inaccordance with reviewed shop drawings and manufacturer's written requirements.

.4 Form joints between components using manufacturer's standard joint adhesive. Jointsshall be inconspicuous in appearance and without voids. Attach 100 mm (4") wide solidsurfacing material reinforcing strip under joints.

.5 Provide holes and cut-outs as indicated or as required.

.6 Rout and finish component edges to a smooth, uniform finish. Rout cut-outs then sandedges smooth. Repair or reject defective or inaccurate work.

.7 Surfaces shall have a uniform finish.



2.8 Finishing of Interior Architectural Woodwork

.1 Quality Standard: Comply with the Architectural Woodwork Standards, 8th Edition, 2003unless otherwise indicated.

.2 General: The entire finish of interior architectural woodwork is specified in this section,regardless of whether factory applied or applied after installation.

.3 Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, fillingcountersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces and similar preparations for finishingof architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.

.4 Transparent finish for hardwood veneer and solid hardwood, and MDF:

.1 Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system, staining, andsheen.

.1 Grade: Premium.

.2 Sheen: Low.

.3 Factory finish with Premium grade transparent, pigmented, catalysed lacquerin accordance with the Architectural Woodwork Standards, 8th Edition, 2003,Section 1500.

.1 Pigment colour: to later selection by the Consultant.

.5 Paint finish, where indicated or scheduled: in accordance with Section 09900.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation

.1 Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areasbefore installing.

.2 Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completionand complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing.

.3 Provide all grounds, nailers and other required fabrications which are to be built intoother work when required.

3.2 Installation

.1 Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with Section 1700 of the ArchitecturalWoodwork Standards, 8th Edition, 2003 for same grade specified in Part 2 of this sectionfor type of woodwork involved.

.2 Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as requiredwith concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 3 mm in 2400 mm (1/8" in 8') for plumband level (including tops) and with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces.

.3 Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repairdamaged finish at cuts.

.4 Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates.Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners andblind nailing as required for a complete installation. Except where prefinished matchingfastener heads are required, use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk andfilled flush with woodwork and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated.



.5 Complete the finishing work specified in this section to whatever extent not completed atshop or before installation of woodwork.


.1 Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate defectsfunctionally and visually; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joineryfor uniform appearance.

.2 Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

.3 Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up factory-appliedfinishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

.4 Protect architectural woodwork during remainder of construction period to ensure thatwork will be without damage or deterioration at time of acceptance.

3.4 Protection

.1 Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturerand installer, that ensure that woodwork is without damage or deterioration at time ofSubstantial Performance of the Work.

END OF SECTION


Thermal Insulation

PART 1 - GENERAL




.1 Batt insulation: Unfaced, mineral-fibre batts.

.2 Semi-rigid insulation; within cavity walls.

.3 Foamed-in-place gap filler insulation.


.1 Execute work of this section using a Subcontractor who has adequate plant, equipmentand skilled workers to perform it expeditiously, and is known to have been responsiblefor satisfactory installations similar to that specified during a period of at least theimmediate past 5 years.


1.4 Submittals


.2 Samples: Submit representative samples of each specified insulation material, insulationclips, adhesives, fasteners, tapes and other material for review.

.3 Manufacturer's Product data:


.2 Submit data and installation instructions for materials and prefabricated devices,providing descriptions sufficient for identification at the Place of the Work.

.3 Submit data from manufacturer's or independent laboratory indicatingcompatibility and adhesive results of proposed materials.

1.5 Protection

.1 Comply with manufacturer's printed recommendations respecting protection.

.2 Protect polystyrene insulation from extended exposure to sunlight.

.3 Repair damage resulting from performance of work of this section in manner acceptableto Consultant.

1.6 Warranty


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Insulation Materials

.1 Batt insulation: Unfaced, mineral-fibre batts, to CAN/ULC-S702, Type 1.


Thermal Insulation

.1 Acceptable manufacturers:

.1 Fibrex.

.2 Johns Manville.

.3 Owens Corning.

.4 Roxul.

.2 Semi-rigid insulation; within cavity walls: mineral-fibre to CAN/ULC S702-97, Type 1,48 kg/m³ (3 lb/ft³) minimum density to ASTM C612-09 for glass fibre mineral-fibreinsulation, and 72 kg/m³ (4.5 lb/ft³) minimum density to ASTM C612-09 for basalt rockand steel slag mineral-fibre insulation.


.1 Fibrex ‘CWB 45’

.2 Owens Corning 'Fiberglas Type 703'.

.3 Foamed-in-place gap filler insulation:

.1 One-component CFC-free polyurethane foam to CAN/ULC S710.1-05.

.2 Two-component CFC-free polyurethane foam to CAN/ULC S711.1-05.

2.2 Accessory Materials

.1 Insulation fasteners; soft washer and pin type; direct fasten type: Grey polyethylenewasher, corrosion resistant fastener, pin length to suit application for recommended pinembedment depth.

.1 Acceptable Products: Hilti 'X-SW 60 Pins'.

.2 Insulation fasteners: Impaling clip of galvanized steel with washer retainer, to beadhered to surface to receive board insulation with adhesive, length to suit insulationthickness and substrate, capable of securely and rigidly fastening insulation in place.Self-adhesive impaling pins are unacceptable.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1 General Installation Requirements

.1 Comply with requirements of Section 01830.

.2 Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.

3.2 Examination

.1 Take measurements at the Place of the Work to ensure that work is fabricated to fitstructure; surrounding construction; around obstructions and projections in place, or asindicated; and to suit locations of services.

.2 Verify that backup construction is aligned for proper installation of work beforecommencing erection.

3.3 Installation - General

.1 Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's printed recommendations. Installattachment at rate as required to prevent displacement of insulation boards duringconstruction operations.


Thermal Insulation

.2 Butt joints tightly and offset vertical joints to form an unbroken thermal envelope. Useonly insulation boards free from chipped or broken edges. Use largest possibledimensions to reduce number of joints.

.3 Apply insulation to ensure total and complete coverage of surfaces indicated to beinsulated, and in direct contact with such surfaces. Unless otherwise specified, applyinsulation in single layer of thickness indicated.

.4 Ensure integrity and continuity of insulation at juncture with different types of materialsand seal in an acceptable manner.

.5 Do not enclose insulation until it has been reviewed and accepted by Consultant.

3.4 Batt Insulation

.1 Fit insulation closely around electrical boxes, pipes, ducts, frames and other objects in orpassing through insulation.

.2 Do not over compress insulation to fit into spaces.

.3 Insulation equal to that specified shall be placed in jamb and header assemblies that willbe inaccessible after their installation into wall. Ensure that insulation is kept dry and notcompressed.

3.5 Semi-Rigid Insulation

.1 Install at masonry assembly locations in accordance with Section 04200.

.1 Where applicable, fasten insulation using masonry tie securement platesProvided under Section 04200.

.2 In locations where insulation clips are not practical or available with masonryconnectors, mechanically fasten insulation at maximum spacing of 400 mm (16")on centre, using fasteners to suit substrate condition.

.2 Secure semi-rigid insulation boards to substrate at rate of 6 fasteners for each610 x 1220 mm (24” x 48”) board minimum, with corrosion resistant mechanicalfasteners with oversize heads or 25 mm (1") plastic washers.

3.6 Foamed-in-Place Gap Filler Insulation

.1 Install one-component foam in accordance with CAN/ULC S710.2-05 applicationstandard.

.2 Install two-component foam in accordance with CAN/ULC S711.2-05 applicationstandard.

.3 Install at exterior building envelope assemblies to locations as indicated, to cavity andgaps surrounding metal frames.

.4 Refer also to foamed-in-place insulation as specified in Section 08440.

END OF SECTION


Air Barrier Systems

PART 1 – GENERAL




.1 Sheet-Applied Self-Adhesive Air / Vapour Barrier Membrane.

1.3 Definitions

.1 Air barrier material: A building material that is designed and constructed to provideprimary resistance to airflow through air barrier system.

.2 Air barrier system: The collection of air barrier materials and auxiliary materials appliedto substrate, including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to control airmovement through the building envelope.


.1 Qualifications: Provide the work of this section, executed by competent installers withminimum 5 years experience in application of Products, systems and assembliesspecified and with approval and training of Product manufacturers.


.3 Single source responsibility: Materials shall be sourced from one manufacturer includingsheet membranes, air barrier sealants, primers, mastics and adhesives.

1.5 Submittals




1.6 Performance Requirements

.1 Air barrier system shall perform as continuous air barrier and as liquid-water drainageplane flashed to discharge to exterior of building envelope incidental condensation orwater penetration.

.2 At wall transitions, air barrier system shall perform as continuous air barrier and asliquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to exterior of building envelopeincidental condensation or water penetration by creation of unobstructed drainage planethat extends across the cladding transition or by flashing to discharge to exterior ofbuilding envelope incidental condensation or water penetration.

.3 Air barrier system shall accommodate substrate movement, construction materialchanges, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakageexceeding the following specified limits and requirements, or interruption of the drainageplane:

.1 Air permeance of air barrier material: Maximum 0.02 L/s m2 at 75 Pa (0.004cfm/ft2 at 1.57 psf) to ASTM E2178-03.


Air Barrier Systems

.2 Rate of air leakage of air barrier system: Maximum 0.1 L/s m2 at 75 Pa (0.004cfm/ft2 at 1.57 psf) to ASTM E283-04.

.3 Water vapour transmission for air / vapour barriers: Maximum 5.7 ng/Pa.m2 .s.(0.1 perms).

.4 Water vapour transmission for vapour permeable air vapour barriers: Minimum570 ng/Pa.m2 .s. (10 perms).

.5 Pull-off strength of liquid or sheet applied membrane and laps: Cohesive orsubstrate failure permitted when tested to specified wind load. Air barrier systemshall transfer wind load to structure and shall resist 100% of design wind load orminimum of 2.15 kPa (45 psf), whichever is greater.

.6 Low temperature flexibility: to -30°C (-22°F) to CGSB 37-GP-56M-1985.

.4 Air barrier system shall be joined in an airtight and flexible manner to air barrier materialof adjacent building envelope air barrier systems, allowing for relative movement ofsystems due to thermal and moisture variations and creep. Connection shall be madebetween the following unless otherwise applicable:

.1 Walls and openings (windows, doors, louvres, and other wall penetrations).

1.7 Environmental Requirements

.1 Provide forced air circulation during curing period for enclosed applications.

.2 Low temperature application:

.1 Perform adhesion test for membrane when ambient temperature is below -5 °C.

.2 Proceed with work when temperature is (or predicted) to fall below -5 °C ambienttemperature only with the mutual documented agreement of inspection andtesting company, manufacturer and applicator.

.3 Do not perform installation during rainy or inclement weather or on wet or frost coveredsurfaces.

.4 Provide temporary protection of the applied membrane to prevent mechanical damageor damage from spillage of oil or solvents.


.1 Package materials and identify on attached labels the manufacturer, contents andmaterial specification number.

.2 Store flammable solvent-base liquids away from excessive heat and open flame. Primercontains solvent. Do not use near open flame.

.3 Store surface conditioner at temperature above 5 °C to facilitate handling.

.4 Store roll materials on end.

1.9 Warranty


.2 The work of this section shall meet the specified building envelope performancerequirements during the warranty period.


Air Barrier Systems

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Sheet-Applied Self-Adhesive Air / Vapour Barrier Membrane


.1 Bakor 'Blueskin SA' and ‘Blueskin SA LT’.

.2 Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing ‘CCW 705’.

.3 Grace Construction Products ‘Perm-A-Barrier Wall Membrane’.

.4 Soprema 'Sopraseal Stick 1100 Summer Grade’ and Sopraseal Stick 1100Winter Grade'.

.5 Tremco ‘ExoAir 110LT’.

.6 W.R. Meadows 'Air Shield' and ‘Low Temperature Air Shield’.

.2 Description: Composite preformed modified bituminous membrane system consisting ofSBS modified asphalt for low temperature flexibility and polyethylene scrim reinforcing,with physical properties as follows:

.1 Thickness: 1.0 mm (40 mils).

.2 Application temperature: as per manufacturer’s printed installation instructions.

.3 Elongation: 200% minimum in accordance with ASTM D412-06ae2-modified.

.3 Primer: as recommended by manufacturer of air barrier sheet membrane beingProvided in the Work.

.4 Termination mastic: Rubberised asphalt-based mastic with 200 g/l max. VOC content, asrecommended by manufacturer of air barrier sheet membrane being Provided in theWork.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 General Installation Requirements

.1 Comply with requirements of Section 01830.

.2 Examine surfaces to receive membranes to assure they are smooth, dry and free fromconditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence, or quality of the work of thissection.

.3 Do not install air barrier membrane until other work which penetrates membrane hasbeen completed.

.4 Seal around materials penetrating membrane in accordance with manufacturer’s printedinstallation instructions.

3.2 Installation – Sheet Applied Self-Adhesive Type Membrane

.1 Priming:

.1 Apply fluid primer to substrate and allow to dry 1 hour or until tack free. Primeonly areas to be covered by membrane within 24 hours. Re-prime surfaces notcovered within 24 hours.

.2 Apply primers at manufacturer's recommended rate.


Air Barrier Systems

.3 At ambient air temperatures below 5°C, follow membrane manufacturer's writteninstructions for cold weather application. Do not apply primer or membrane intemperatures that fall outside membrane manufacturer's acceptable applicationconditions.

.2 Flashing and corner reinforcing:

.1 Where applicable, bring flashing a minimum of 150 mm (6") onto horizontalsurfaces and a minimum of 200 mm (8") up walls from horizontal elevationshown.

.2 Stagger flashing and membrane seams.

.3 Install flashing to protrusions, expansion joints, control joints and the like. Bringflashing a minimum of 150 mm (6") onto the membrane.

.4 Wrap air barrier membrane into jambs and sills at openings. Terminatemembrane at points that will prevent visibility from interior.

.3 Installation:

.1 Install membrane in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions overflashings and corner reinforcement.

.2 Begin installation at the base of the wall placing top edge of membraneimmediately below materials protruding from substrate.

.3 When properly positioned, place against surface by pressing firmly into place.Roll membrane with extension-handled countertop roller immediately afterplacement.

.4 Overlap horizontally-adjacent pieces 50 mm (2") and roll seams.

.5 Bottom edge shall be slit to fit around reinforcing wires or ties, and membraneshall overlap the membrane sheet below by 50 mm (2"). Roll firmly into place.

.6 Seal around materials penetrating membrane with termination mastic. At end ofeach working day, seal top edge of membrane to substrate with terminationmastic.

.7 Do not allow the rubberised asphalt surface of membrane to come in contact withpolysulfide sealants, creosote, uncured coal tar products or EPDM.

.8 Do not expose membrane to sunlight for more than thirty days prior to enclosure.

.9 Apply a bead or trowel coat of mastic along membrane edges, seams, cuts, andpenetrations.

.10 Roll membrane with 75 mm (3") wide hand roller.

.11 Tie into adjacent wall systems and roof systems for continuous air barrier atbuilding envelope.

.4 Inspection: Inspect membrane for punctures, misaligned seams and fishmouths, applyadditional layer of membrane over affected area, extending minimum of 150 mm (6")beyond damaged area in all directions.

.5 Coordinate proper construction of the roof/wall intersection to maintain the continuity ofthe air barrier system from the wall to the roofing membrane system.


Air Barrier Systems

3.3 Adjustment

.1 Examine completed air barrier systems, repair and seal breaks in the system to ensuremaintenance of its integrity and continuity.

END OF SECTION


Firestopping and Smoke Seals

PART 1 - GENERAL




.1 Materials installed in cavities, joints, around penetrations, and openings in floors, walls,partitions, and other building components to restrict the spread of fire and smoke.


.1 Applicator qualifications:

.1 Qualifications: Provide work of this section, executed by competent installers withminimum 5 years experience in application of Products, systems and assembliesspecified and with approval, training and certification of Product manufacturers.

.1 Submit proof of manufacturer’s installer certification for each installer offirestopping and smoke sealant systems.

.2 Manufacturer's willingness to sell its firestopping Products to the Contractoror to a Subcontractor or installer engaged by the Contractor does not in itselfconfer qualification on the buyer.

.2 Applicator shall designate a single individual as Project foreperson who shall bepresent at the Place of the Work at all times throughout the work of this sectionwhen the work of this section is being performed.

.2 Single source responsibility for firestopping and smoke seal materials:

.1 Obtain firestopping and smoke seal materials from single manufacturer for eachdifferent Product required.

.2 Manufacturer shall instruct applicator in procedures for each material.

.3 Regulatory requirements:

.1 Firestop systems shall be listed in accordance with CAN/ULC-S115-05 andtested assemblies shall achieve a fire resistance rating equal to that ofconstruction being penetrated.

.2 Proposed firestopping and smoke seal materials and methods shall conform toapplicable governing codes having local jurisdiction.


.5 Quality control to be in accordance with Section 01450. Representatives for themechanical and electrical work and independent inspection and testing company shallattend pre-installation meeting.

1.4 Submittals


.2 Firestopping manual:



.1 Manufacturer of the Products proposed for use in the work of this section shallprepare a firestopping manual scheduling the products to be used for eachassembly and installation required in the Work.

.2 Manual shall include manufacturer’s Product data sheets as specified underparagraph 1.4.4 (below).

.3 Firestopping manual shall be submitted within 4 weeks of Contract award.

.3 Shop drawings:

.1 Submit drawings indicating fire resistance rated assembly number, requiredtemperature, hose stream, and flame rating, material thicknesses, installationmethods and materials of firestopping and smoke seals, primers, supports,damming materials as applicable, reinforcements, anchorages, fastenings andmethods of installation for each condition to be encountered.

.2 Designate on shop drawings static through penetrations and dynamic jointsystems, relative positions, expansion and control joints in rated slabs and walls,firestopping details at receptacles and similar poke-through devices andsurrounding permanent materials. Identify re-entry locations.

.4 Manufacturer's Product data: Submit data and installation instructions for Products andprefabricated devices, providing descriptions sufficient for identification at the Place ofthe Work.

.1 Materials list of Products proposed for use in the work of this section;

.2 Listing agency's detailed drawing showing opening, penetrating items, andfirestopping materials, identified with listing agency's name and number ordesignation, fire rating achieved, and date of listing.

.3 Manufacturer’s specifications, detail sheets, and other data needed to provecompliance with the specified requirements;

.4 Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certification that installed firestopping andsmoke seal Products are suitable for the use indicated and comply with specifiedrequirements.

.5 Submit fire resistance rating test listings for firestopping and smoke sealsystems.

.6 Manufacturer's engineering judgment identification number and shop drawingdetails when no ULC, c-UL or other Canadian listed assembly is available for anapplication. Engineered judgment must include both Project name andSubcontractor’s name who will install firestop system as described in shopdrawing.

1.5 System Description

.1 Provide firestop and smoke seal systems consisting of a material, or combination ofmaterials installed to retain the integrity of fire-rated construction by effectively impedingthe spread of flame, smoke, and/or hot gasses through penetrations, blank openings orgaps, membrane penetrations, construction joints, or at perimeter fire containment in oradjacent to fire-rated barriers.

.2 Provide also smoke sealants applied over firestopping materials or combination smokeseal/firestop seal material to form air tight barriers to retard the passage of gas andsmoke.



.3 Provide fire-resistance rating equivalent to the rating of the adjacent floor, wall or otherfire separation assembly.

.4 Provide firestopping, at fire rated assemblies with assembly STC rating requirements,with STC rating equal or better to STC rating of fire rated assembly.

.5 Firestopping and smoke seals within mechanical and electrical assemblies shall beProvided as part of the work of Division 15 and Division 16 respectively.

.6 Provide firestopping and smoke sealant system assemblies as practical and as requiredto coordinate with the schedule and sequencing of the Work.

.7 Confirm locations of exposed/non-exposed firestopping/smoke seal surfaces withConsultant prior to application.

.8 Provide movement capability at movement joints in accordance with designrequirements for movement joint.

1.6 Delivery Storage and Handling

.1 Deliver the materials to the Place of the Work in the manufacturer's unopenedcontainers, containing the classification label, with labels intact and legible at time ofuse.

.2 Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations with properprecautions to ensure fitness of material when installed.

.3 Do not use damaged or adulterated materials and materials exceeding their expiry date.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers/Installation Specialists

.1 General: Manufacturers of firestopping and smoke seal system Products and installationspecialists for the work of this section are limited to applicable assemblies as requiredfor the Work and having listing mark on packaging.

.2 Acceptable manufacturers for work of this section:

.1 3M Canada Inc.

.2 A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.

.3 Hilti Canada Corp.

.4 Nuco – Self-Seal Firestopping Products.

.5 Specified Technologies Inc.

.6 Tremco Canada Ltd.

2.2 Materials

.1 Firestopping and smoke seal systems shall conform to the following:

.1 VOC content not to exceed 250 grams per litre minus water.

.2 Asbestos-free materials and systems capable of maintaining an effective barrieragainst flame, smoke and gasses in compliance with requirements of CAN/ULC-S115-05 and not to exceed opening sizes for which they are intended.



.3 Provide firestopping materials and systems with fire-resistance rating not lessthan the fire-resistance rating of applicable adjacent assembly.

.4 Listed in accordance with CAN/ULC-S115-05.

.5 For services that penetrate a fire separation or a membrane forming part of anassembly required to have a fire-resistance rating, provide firestop system with"F" rating as required by building code.

.6 For combustible pipe penetrations through a fire separation required to have afire-resistance rating, provide firestop system with “F” rating as required bybuilding code.

.7 For joints in fire-separations, provide firestop system as required by buildingcode.

.8 Products shall be compatible with abutting dissimilar membranes, architecturalcoatings, finishes at floors, walls and ceilings. Check with requirements ofContract Documents and manufacturer of selected materials being installed.

.2 Smoke sealants for overhead and vertical joints shall be non-sagging; sealants for floorsshall be self-levelling.

.1 Smoke seal sealant colour: Grey. (Red will not be accepted).

.3 Firestop collar or wrap devices attached to assembly around combustible plastic pipe(closed and open piping systems).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Manufacturer's Instructions

.1 Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's written Product data including Producttechnical bulletins, Product installation instructions and Product packaging instructions.

3.2 Preparation

.1 Examine sizes, anticipated movement and conditions to establish correct thickness andinstallation of back-up materials.

.2 Comply with manufacturer’s instructions relative to temperature and humidity conditions,before, during and after installation.

.3 Clean bonding surfaces to remove deleterious substances including dust, paint, rust, oil,grease, moisture, frost and other foreign matter which may otherwise impair effectivebonding.

.4 Remove insulation from insulated pipe and duct where such pipes or ducts penetrate afire separation unless listed assembly permits such insulation to remain within assembly,or where mechanical trades have installed special fire rated insulated sleeves.

.5 Secure pipe, conduit, cable, and other items that penetrate firestopping and smoke sealsystems.

.6 Prepare surfaces, prime, mask adjacent surfaces and clean in accordance withmanufacturer's written specifications and to requirements of tested assembly.



3.3 Installation

.1 Coordinate with other sections to assure that pipes, conduit, cable, and other items thatpenetrate fire rated construction, have been permanently installed prior to installation offirestop assemblies.

.2 Schedule the Work to assure that penetrations and other construction that concealspenetrations are not erected prior to the installation of firestop and smoke seals.

.3 Mix and apply firestopping, gas and smoke seals in strict accordance withmanufacturer's written instructions and tested designs to achieve required flame ratedseal, to prevent the passage of gas and smoke and, where specifically designated, thepassage of fluids.

.4 Provide temporary forming and packing as required. Apply materials with sufficientpressure to properly fill and consolidate the mass to seal openings.

.5 Tool or trowel exposed surfaces. Mask areas adjacent to sprayed firestopping to limitfirestopping overspray to area not greater than 25 mm (1") of minimum required.

.6 Provide forming/damming materials and other accessories in accordance withmanufacturers’ written instructions.

.7 Provide fill materials for through-penetration firestop systems by techniques to achievethe following results:

.1 Completely fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials,accessories, and penetrating items.

.2 Install materials so that they contact and adhere to substrates formed byopenings and penetrating items.

.3 For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish toProvide smooth, uniform surfaces.

.8 Seal joints to ensure an air and water resistant seal, capable of withstandingcompressions and extensions due to thermal, wind or seismic joint movement.

.9 Provide joint fillers to provide support of firestop materials during application and at theposition required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed firestopmaterial relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability anddevelop fire-resistance required.

.10 Notify Consultant when random completed installations are ready for review, as directedby Consultant , prior to concealing or enclosing firestopping and as applicable, smokeseals.

.11 Remove temporary forming and dams only after materials have gained sufficientstrength.

3.4 Identification

.1 Identify through-penetration firestopping and smoke seal systems with pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, printed vinyl labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces ofpenetrated construction on both sides of each firestopping system installation wherelabels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping andsmoke seal systems. Include the following information on labels:

.1 The words: “Warning: Through-Penetration Firestopping system – Do NotDisturb”;



.2 Applicator’s name, address and phone number;

.3 Designation of applicable testing and inspection agency;

.4 Date of installation;

.5 Manufacturer’s name for firestopping and smoke seal system materials.

3.5 Field Quality Control

.1 Quality control: in accordance with Section 01450.

.2 Inspection consultant to review installation of the work of this section and to performrandom tests to verify its completion in accordance with the requirements of the ContractDocuments.

.3 Give at least 48 hours notice before operations commence, and arrange for a pre-jobconference with the Contractor, Subcontractor, inspection and testing company,manufacturer, and Consultant present.

.4 Inspection and testing company shall examine penetration firestopping in accordancewith ASTM E2174-09. Inspection and testing company shall examine firestopping andshall determine, in general, that firestopping has been installed in accordance with therequirements of the Contract Documents and the tested and listed firestop system.

.5 Representatives of the manufacturer(s) shall have access to the Work. Contractor shallprovide assistance and facilities for such access in order that the manufacturer(s)representative(s) may properly perform its function.

END OF SECTION


Joint Sealants

PART 1 - GENERAL




.1 Exterior building sealants.

.2 Interior building sealants.


.1 Qualifications: Provide work of this section, executed by competent installers withminimum 5 years experience in application of Products, systems and assembliesspecified and with approval and training of Product manufacturers. Installer to complywith quality assurance articles referenced in ASTM C1193-09 for installation of jointsealants.

.2 Conduct a pre-installation meeting in accordance with Section 01312. In addition to theagenda specified under Section 01312, the following items shall be addressed at thepre-installation meeting:

.1 Analysis of the work and weather conditions.

.2 Shape factor of the joint.

.3 Recommendations for priming joints.

.4 Inspection of surfaces and joints.


1.4 Submittals


.2 Submit manufacturer's and Product name for each sealant which will be used in theWork prior to commencing the Work.



.4 Test sealant in contact with samples of materials to be sealed to verify adhesion will beachieved and no staining of the material will result. Prepare sample joints at the Place ofthe Work of each type of sealant for each joint condition.

.1 Submit test results to Consultant prior to application of sealants.

.5 Test sealant in contact with samples of porous materials to be sealed to ensure that nostaining of the material will result in accordance with ASTM C1248-08.

.1 Submit test results to Consultant prior to application of sealants.

.6 Submit 2440 mm (96") long sealant joint mock-up.

.7 Submit "wet sample" sealant colour samples for each sealant Product and colour.


Joint Sealants


.1 Verify substrates and ambient air temperature at the Place of the Work before, duringand after application to ensure compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations.Surfaces shall be frost-free, dust-free, clean and completely dry at time of installation.

.2 Weather Conditions: In accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, do not applysilicone joint sealants in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when such conditions are expected.Allow joint surfaces to attain dry conditions as recommended by manufacturer beforesealant application.

.3 Sealant and substrate materials: Conform to sealant manufacturer's specifications andrecommendations. Keep organic sealant materials heated to at least 16°C when workingat temperatures below 10°C.

1.6 Warranty


.2 Repair or replace joint sealants which fail to perform as air tight and water-tight joints; orfail in joint adhesion, cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, or generaldurability; or appear to deteriorate or become unserviceable or causing an objectionableappearance resulting from either defective or non-conforming materials andworkmanship or in any other manner not clearly specified by submitted manufacturer'sdata as an inherent quality of the material for the exposure indicated.

.1 Defects shall include, but are not limited to:

.1 Staining from abutting materials or filler.

.2 Migrating, bleeding into, or staining abutting materials.

.3 Unsightly surface deformation by causes other than movement.

.4 Excessive colour change, chalking, or dust pick-up.

.5 Failing adhesively or cohesively where maximum elongation is less than 25%of designed width of exposed joints.

.6 Hardening to more than 25% over specified hardness.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Sealants

.1 General:

.1 Colours: Sealant colours shall match colours of adjacent materials, as selectedand approved by Consultant.

.1 Colours shall be selected from manufacturer’s full range of colours.

.2 Comply with ASTM C920-08 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant, including those referencing ASTM C920-08classifications for type, grade, class, and uses.

.3 Provide joint sealants, primer(s) and backings that are compatible with oneanother and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application asdemonstrated by joint sealant manufacturer based on proven test results andfield experience.


Joint Sealants

.4 For sealants to be applied to porous substrates: Provide products that haveundergone testing according to ASTM D1248-05 and have not stained porousjoint substrates indicated for Work.

.5 Sealant supplied shall not exude any material(s) which travels into adjacentmaterials, or travels onto surfaces of adjacent materials; causing damage, orattracting soiling, which becomes apparent during the service life of the building.

.2 Exterior sealants; joints in vertical surfaces:

.1 Sealant: single-component, non-sag, low to medium modulus non-bleed siliconesealant, in accordance with the following:

.1 Comply with:

.1 ASTM C920-08, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50 or greater.

.2 CAN/CGSB 19.13-M87-M87.

.3 SWR Institute Sealant Validation Program.


.1 Dow Corning ‘790’

.2 Dow Corning ‘795’

.3 GE Silicones ‘Silpruf NB SCS9000’

.4 Tremco, Inc. 'Spectrem 3'

.5 Tremco, Inc. 'Spectrem 4-TS'

.6 Sika Canada Inc. ‘SikaSil -C 990’.

.7 Sika Canada Inc. ‘SikaSil -C 995’.

.3 Interior sealants:

.1 VOC limit: less than 250 g/L.

.2 Interior sealant; at joints with painted gypsum board: one-component paintableacrylic sealant in accordance with the following:

.1 Comply with:

.1 ASTM C834-05.

.2 CGSB 19-GP-5M-1984.


.1 BASF Building Systems "Sonolac"

.2 Sika "Sikaflex 1A"

.3 Tremco, Inc. "Tremflex 834"

.3 Interior sealant; at movement and non-movement joints in vertical surfaces, nodetectible odour: one-component sealant in accordance with the following:

.1 Comply with:

.1 ASTM C920-08, Type M or S, Grade NS, Class 25

.2 CAN/CGSB 19.13-M87.


Joint Sealants


.1 BASF Building Systems "Sonolastic 150 VLM"

.4 Interior sealant, mildew resistant one part silicone sealant in accordance with thefollowing:

.1 Comply with:

.1 ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NT, Class 25

.2 CAN/CGSB 19.22-M89.


.1 GE Silicones "Sanitary SCS1700 Sealant"

.2 BASF Building Systems "OmniPlus";

.3 Dow Corning "786"

.4 Tremco, Inc. "Tremsil 200";

2.2 Accessories

.1 General: Provide component joint sealant primers, backings and fillers that arecompatible with joint substrates and other sealants or joint fillers specified and approvedfor applications indicated under joint sealant schedule.

.2 Cylindrical sealant backings: Provide joint backings that meet ASTM C1330-02(2007),Type O (open-cell polyurethane), or Type B (non-absorbent bi-cellular backing materialswith surface skin), sized 25 percent or greater than joint opening with proper density tocontrol sealant depth and profile. Follow joint sealant manufacturer’s recommendationswith backing selections for optimum joint sealant performance, in accordance with thefollowing schedule:

.1 Use open cell foam with non-absorbing closed cell skin (Sof-Rod) for verticaljoints; round shape for open joints and triangular shape for angular joints.

.2 Use closed cell foam for horizontal joints.

.3 Bond-breaker tape: Polyethylene tape or other approved plastic tape as recommendedby joint sealant manufacturer to prevent 3-sided joint adhesion to rigid, inflexible jointfillers or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would restrict proper sealantmovement or result in sealant failure.

.4 Masking Tape: Non-staining, non-absorbent and compatible with joint sealants andadjacent surfaces.

.5 Sealant primers: Use primers only as recommended by sealant manufacturer whererequired to enhance adhesion of sealant to specific joint substrates indicated and asdetermined for use from pre-construction mock-up testing. Select primers in consultationwith sealant manufacturer and manufacturer of substrate material which do not have adetrimental effect on sealant adhesion or in-service performance.

.6 Cleaners for nonporous surfaces: Provide non-staining, chemical cleaners of type whichare acceptable to manufacturer of sealant and sealant backing material, which are notharmful to substrates and adjacent nonporous materials, and which do not leave oilyresidues or otherwise have a detrimental effect on sealant adhesion or in-serviceperformance.


Joint Sealants

.1 Provide cleaner conditioner required for glass and glazed surfaces asrecommended by sealant manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Manufacturer’s Recommendations

.1 Unless specified otherwise herein, comply with the recommendations and directions ofthe manufacturer whose materials are being used in the work of this section.

3.2 Preparation

.1 Prior to installation, clean substrates of substances that could impair the bond of jointsealants. Clean and prepare joint surfaces immediately before installing joint sealants.Protect adjacent work areas and finished surfaces from damage during joint sealantinstallation.

.2 Clean porous joint surfaces by using heavy-duty brushing, light abrasive, mechanicalabrading or combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound surface foroptimum bond with joint sealants per manufacturer’s recommendations. Provide a dry,dust-free and cleaned substrate for optimum results.

.3 Non-porous surfaces should be cleaned using the two-cloth wipe method as referencedin ASTM C1193-09 and outlined by joint sealant manufacturer’s instruction.

.4 Rusting or scaling surfaces must be prepared using abrasive cleaning methods asrecommended by joint sealant manufacturer prior to joint sealant installation.Efflorescence, mould, mildew and algae must be removed and neutralized prior to jointsealant installation.

.5 Coordinate cleaning, priming and installation to avoid contamination of wet, freshlycoated or adjacent finished surfaces. Prepare finish-coated surfaces per joint sealantmanufacturer’s specific recommendations.

.6 Test materials for indications of staining or poor adhesion before any sealing iscommenced. Submit reports in writing to Consultant of results.

3.3 Masking

.1 Where necessary to prevent contamination or marring surfaces of adjacent materials,mask areas adjacent to joints with masking tape prior to priming or sealing application.Remove tape immediately after joint has been completed and an initial set achieved.

3.4 Installation

.1 Review the complete Contract Documents for extent of sealant work required.

.2 Comply with joint sealant manufacturer’s installation instructions for products, primersand applications indicated unless more stringent project-specific instructions orrequirements apply.

.3 Apply joint sealants for continuous waterproof sealant joint protection. Vertical jointsshould be lapped over horizontal joints as recommended by sealant manufacturer.Comply with installation recommendations in ASTM C1193-09 for use of joint sealantsas applicable to each specific sealant installation.


Joint Sealants

.4 Install sealant primers only when recommended by sealant manufacturer anddemonstrated at pre-construction tests after joint surface preparation has beencompleted and when surfaces are verified as clean and dry. Allow any primer installationto completely dry or cure prior to installation of backing or joint sealants.

.5 Install joint sealants in accordance with joint sealant manufacturer’s instructions usingproven techniques that comply with the following and in proper sequence withinstallation of primers and backings.

.1 Using proper joint sealant dispensing equipment, place sealants by pushingsealant beads into opening to fully wet-out joint sealant substrates. Fill sealantjoint opening to full and proper configuration.

.2 Install, providing uniform cross-sectional shapes and depths in relation to jointwidth for optimum sealant movement capability per joint sealant manufacturer’sinstructions.

.6 Joint sealant tooling is required for non-sag joint sealant installations. Immediately afterplacing fresh sealants and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants using metalspatulas designed for this purpose in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.Provide a smooth, uniform sealant finish, eliminating air pockets and ensuring goodcontact for optimum sealant adhesion within each side of the joint opening.

.1 Provide concave joint configuration as indicated per figure 5-A in ASTM C1193-09 unless otherwise indicated. Dry tooling is required for joint sealants, and wettooling agents are not allowed.

.2 Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joint openings using metalspatula, promptly cleaning any sealant residue from adjacent finished surfaces.Remove masking after joint sealant is installed.

.7 Allow single-component sealants to fully cure before adhesion testing is performed asrecommended by joint sealant manufacturer.

.8 Match approved sealant mock-up for colour, finish and overall aesthetics. Remove,refinish or re-install work not in compliance with the Contract Documents.

.9 When surfaces of adjacent materials are to be painted, perform sealant work beforethese surfaces are painted.

.10 Check to make sure shop paint is compatible with primer and sealant. Whenincompatible, inform Consultant and change primer and sealant to compatible typeacceptable to Consultant.

.11 Check form release agent used on concrete for compatibility with primer and sealant. Ifthey are incompatible inform Consultant and change primer and sealant to compatibletype, or clean concrete to sealant manufacturer's acceptance.

.12 Install joint backing material, filler strips, gaskets, bond breakers and similar typematerial of comparable performance characteristics. Install bond breaker tape or packingover asphalt impregnated fibre board as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

.13 Where joints are 12.7 mm (1/2") or deeper, insert backing material in continuous uniformcompression with setback from finished face of adjoining materials equal to requireddepth of sealant (width/depth ratio) as specified herein.

.14 On horizontal traffic surfaces, support joint filler against vertical movement which mightresult from traffic loads, including foot traffic.


Joint Sealants

.15 Pack joints tightly with sealant backing set at depth specified for sealant. Fill other voidswith filler.

.16 Install bond breaker tape in bottom of joints in lieu of sealant backing where properdepth cannot be obtained when backing is installed.

.17 Maintain correct sealant depth. Sealant depth shall be 1/2 the width of the joint,maximum depth shall be 12.7 mm (1/2"), minimum depth shall be 6 mm (1/4"). Complywith manufacturer's written recommendations.

.18 Fillet bead sealant joints to be sized to provide proper contact area with substrates, inaccordance with manufacturer's written recommendations.

.19 Apply sealants using pressure-operated guns fitted with suitable nozzles in accordancewith manufacturer's directions. Apply sealants in such manner as to ensure goodadhesion to sides of joints and to completely fill voids in joints.

.20 Apply sealants so that surfaces of joints are smooth, full bead, free from ridges, wrinkles,sags, air pockets and embedded impurities. Tool sealant surfaces to produce a smoothsurface.

.21 Remove droppings and excess sealant as work progresses, before material achievesinitial set. Do not use soap and water in tooling.

.22 Install sealant materials and primers when surfaces are prepared, and ambienttemperature and weather conditions are prevalent, consistent with manufacturer'srecommendations. Primer is mandatory for gun applied sealants.

.23 Install sealant with exterior face of sealant set back 10 mm (3/8") from face of adjacentmaterials at building movement joints, unless otherwise indicated.

.24 Do not apply sealants to areas where installation of paints, coatings or flooring is inprogress. Apply sealants after such work is complete and fully cured.

3.5 Exterior Sealant Schedule

.1 Include in work of this section joint sealants in exterior assemblies to seal open joints insurfaces exposed to view, and to make building weather-tight and air-tight, asapplicable, as indicated, and as otherwise specified, except where specified under thework of other sections.

.2 Exterior sealant work is part of the work of this section. Install exterior sealant to:

.1 Perimeters of exterior openings where frames meet exterior facade of building.

3.6 Interior Sealant Schedule

.1 Include in work of this section sealants to seal open joints in surfaces exposed to view,and to make building weather-tight and air-tight, as applicable, as indicated, and asotherwise specified, except where specified under the work of other sections.

.2 Install interior sealant to:

.1 Movement and control joints on exposed insitu concrete walls.

.2 Interior control and expansion joints in floor and wall surfaces.

.3 Raked out joints at junctions of masonry with concrete walls and columns, and atintersection of masonry walls and partitions where joint reinforcement is installed.

.4 Perimeters of exterior door and window frames.


Joint Sealants

.5 Joints at tops of non-load bearing masonry walls at the underside of insituconcrete.

.6 Exposed interior control joints in gypsum board.

.7 Millwork junctions with walls.

.3 Mildew resistant sealant at wet areas:

.1 Perimeter joints of wet fixtures such as:

.1 Washroom fixtures.

.2 Wall tile corner joints, tile to tile joints.

.3 Counter/wall junctions at countertops.

3.7 Cleaning

.1 Clean off excess sealant or sealant residue adjacent to sealant joint installations as thework progresses by methods approved by joint sealant manufacturer. Do not damageadjacent surfaces with harmful removal techniques and protect finished surfaces beyondthose that have been masked. Protect installed sealants during and after final curingfrom damage resulting during construction. Remove and replace damaged jointsealants.

.2 Remove temporary coverings and masking protection from adjacent work areas uponcompletion. Remove construction debris from the project site on a planned and regularbasis.

END OF SECTION


Steel Doors and Frames

PART 1 - GENERAL




.1 Hollow metal doors and panels (steel doors).

.2 Insulated metal doors (insulated steel doors).

.3 Metal frames (steel frames, transom frames).

.4 Thermally broken metal door frames (thermally broken steel frames).


.1 Provide doors and frames manufactured by a firm specializing in the design andproduction of hollow metal steel doors and frames.

.2 Manufacturer shall be a member in good standing of the Canadian Steel DoorManufacturers Association (CSDMA).

.3 Coordination: cooperate fully with finish hardware distributor's representative duringpreparation of shop drawings and execution of shop fabrication.

1.4 Submittals




.3 Submit copy of NAAMM-HMMA 840-07 standard.

.4 Shop drawings:

.1 Include details of each door and frame type, finish hardware types and locations,frame profiles, door and frame elevations, mitre details, glazing preparationdetails and anchor details and locations.

.2 Include schedule identifying each unit, with door marks and numbers relating tonumbering on drawings and in door schedule.

1.5 Fire Rating Requirements

.1 Fire rated labelled doors and frames: tested to ULC CAN4-S104-M80 and listed by anationally recognized agency having a factory inspection service and shall beconstructed as detailed in Follow-Up Service Procedures/Factory Inspection Manualsissued by listing agency to individual manufacturers.

.2 Install fire labelled steel door and frame products in accordance with NFPA 80-2007,current edition, except where indicated otherwise.



1.6 Delivery, Storage, and Handling

.1 Inspect materials thoroughly upon receipt and report immediately discrepancies,deficiencies and damages, in writing, to Supplier.

.2 Note damages incurred during shipment on carriers' bill of lading and report immediately,in writing, to Supplier.

.3 Store materials properly on planks, out of water and covered to protect from damagefrom adverse weather conditions. Remove wet packaging immediately.

.4 Remove wrappings or coverings from doors upon receipt at the Place of the Work, andstore in a vertical position, spaced with blocking to permit air circulation between them.

1.7 Warranty


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers

.1 The following manufacturers are approved for work of metal doors and frames:

.1 All Steel Doors 2000 Ltd.

.2 Ambico Limited.

.3 Apex Industries Inc.

.4 Artek Door (1985) Ltd.

.5 Daybar Industries Ltd.

.6 Fleming-Baron Door Products, an ASSA ABLOY group company.

.7 Gensteel Doors.

.8 Greensteel Industries Ltd.

.9 Les Métaux Tremblay Inc.

.10 Metal Door Ltd.

.11 M.J. Daley Manufacturing Co. Ltd.

.12 Trillium Steel Doors Limited.

.13 Vision Hollow Metal Limited.

2.2 Materials

.1 Steel:

.1 Fabricated from tensioned levelled steel to ASTM A924/A924M-09, galvanized toASTM A924/A924M-09, Commercial Steel CS, Type B.

.2 Steel shall be free of scale, pitting, coil breaks, surface blemishes, buckles,waves, and other defects.

.3 Equivalent minimum base steel thicknesses for gauges shall be in accordancewith Appendix 1 of CSDMA “Recommended Specifications for Commercial SteelDoor and Frame Products”.



.4 Finish: Galvanneal coating designation ZF120 (A40).

.2 Door core materials:

.1 Honeycomb: Structural small cell 25 mm (1") maximum Kraft paper 'honeycomb'.Weight: 36.3 kg (80 lb) per ream (minimum). Density: 16.5 kg/m3 (1.03 pcf)minimum, sanded to required thickness.

.2 Polyisocyanurate: Closed cell, faced board, thermal value: RSI 2.17 (R12.3)minimum, conforming to ASTM C1289-08.

.3 Adhesives:

.1 Heat resistant, single component, polyurethane reactive (water) hot melt,thermoset adhesive.

.2 Rigid insulation cores: Heat resistant, epoxy resin based, low viscosity, contactcement.

.3 Lock seam doors: fire resistant, resin reinforced polychloroprene, high viscositysealant-adhesive.

.4 Primer: rust inhibitive for touch-up.

.5 Finishing hardware: in accordance with Section 08710.

.6 Miscellaneous:

.1 Door silencers: single stud rubber or neoprene type.

.2 Exterior top caps: Rigid polyvinylchloride extrusion.

.3 Frame thermal breaks: Rigid polyvinylchloride extrusion.

.4 Glazing stops: formed channel of minimum 1 mm (0.039”) (20 gauge) steel,15.9 mm (5/8") high.

2.3 Fabrication - General

.1 Fabricate steel doors, frames, transoms, sidelights and borrowed lights as applicable, tothe design and dimensions indicated. Take field measurements where coordination withadjoining work is necessary.

.2 Fabricate steel doors and frames to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects,warp, wave or buckle with all corners square unless otherwise indicated.

.3 Operating clearances:

.1 Provide clearance at floor with allowance made for indicated finish flooringmaterials.

.2 Clearances for Fire-Rated Doors: As required by NFPA 80-2007.

.3 Clearances for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Not more than 3 mm (1/8") at jambs andheads, except not more than 6 mm (1/4") between pairs of doors. Not more than19 mm (3/4") at bottom.

.4 Drill and tap or reinforce for mortised or surface mounted hardware in accordance withaccepted hardware schedule, ANSI A115, NFPA 80-2007, or manufacturersrecommendations.

.5 Countersink exposed fasteners unless otherwise shown. Use flat or oval head screws.



.6 Reinforce components to resist stresses imposed by hardware in use.

.7 Allow for anticipated expansion and contraction of frames and supports.

.8 Fit elements at intersections and joints accurately together, in true planes, and plumband level.

.9 Weld continuously at joints exposed to view or at joints through which air or water couldpenetrate from the exterior of building to the interior.

.10 Perform welding to CSA W59-03(R2008).

.11 Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap to receive hardware and security devices using templatesprovided by respective Supplier.

.12 Touch up finish damaged during fabrication.

.13 Prepare doors or frames to receive seals where seals are indicated.

.14 Attach labels to suit required fire-protection ratings.

2.4 Fabrication – Steel Doors and Panels

.1 Fabricate steel doors and panels to a thickness of 45 mm (1-3/4"), unless indicatedotherwise.

.2 Insulated doors and panels:

.1 Face sheets fabricated from 1.60 mm (0.063") 16 gauge steel.

.2 Insulation core: Polyisocyanurate.

.3 Longitudinal edges mechanically interlocked.

.1 Adhesive assisted with edge seams visible.

.3 Interior doors and panels:

.1 Face sheets fabricated from 1.3 mm (0.05") 18 gauge steel.

.2 Core: Honeycomb.

.3 Longitudinal edges mechanically interlocked.

.1 Adhesive assisted with edge seams visible.

.4 Fabricate of composite metal face construction with each face formed from flush sheetsteel without visible seams, free of scale, pitting, coil brakes, buckles and waves.

.5 Formed edges shall be true and straight with minimum radius for the thickness of steelused.

.6 Lock and hinge edges shall be bevelled 3 mm in 50 mm (1/8" in 2") unless hardware ordoor swing dictates otherwise.

.7 Top and bottom of doors shall be provided with inverted, recessed, 1.51 mm (0.063") 16gauge steel end channels, welded to each face sheet at 50 mm (2") on centre maximum.

.8 Prior to shipment, mark each door with an identification number as shown on theapproved submittal drawings.

.9 Exterior doors shall be provided with factory installed flush PVC top caps. Fire labelledexterior doors shall be provided with factory installed flush steel top caps.



.10 Blank, reinforce, drill and tap doors for mortised, templated hardware. Locate hardwareto manufacturer's standard unless indicated otherwise.

.11 Holes 12.7 mm (1/2") and larger shall be factory prepared.

.12 Glazing:

.1 For glazing materials up to and including 8 mm (5/16") thick, doors shall beprovided with 1.00 mm (0.039") 20 gauge steel glazing trim and snap-in glazingstops.

.2 For glazing materials greater than 8 mm (5/16") thick, doors shall receive 1.00mm (0.039") 20 gauge steel trim and screw fixed glazing stops. Screws shall be#6 x 32 mm (1¼") oval head TekTM (self-drilling) type at 305 mm (12") on centremaximum.

.3 Glazing trim and stops shall be accurately fitted (within 0.39 mm (0.015”)tolerance), butted at corners, with removable glazing stops located on the 'push'side of the door.

.13 Fabricate closing stiles of paired doors as indicated or scheduled.

.14 Provide 2.5 mm (0.1") 12 gauge 'flat' or 'Z' astragal at meeting stiles of pairs of doors forfire rating according to the manufacturers listing and as scheduled.

.15 Where indicated in schedule, prepare doors and panels for installation of fire-rated doorgrilles. If required to meet door grille manufacturer's rated design, provide reinforcementaround door grill opening.

2.5 Fabrication – Steel Frames

.1 General: Applicable to frames, transom panel frames, sidelights, and windowassemblies.

.2 Exterior thermally broken frames:

.1 Fabricated from:

.1 1.60 mm (0.063") 16 gauge steel.

.2 Supplied set-up and welded (SUW).

.3 Interior and exterior sections of thermally broken frames, separated bycontinuous PVC thermal break.

.4 Thermally broken sections shall not be assembled by means of screws,grommets or other fasteners.

.5 Welds shall not cause thermal transfers between interior and exterior surfaces ofthe frame sections.

.6 Closed sections (mullions and center rails) factory insulated with 24 kg/m³(1.5 pcf) loose batt type fibreglass material.

.7 Insulation of open sections (jambs, heads and sills): in accordance with Section07200.

.8 Incorporate head drips of same gauge material as frame and plug weld at150 mm (6") on centre, fill and sand smooth.

.3 Interior frames; welded:



.1 Fabricated from:

.1 1.60 mm (0.063") 16 gauge steel.

.2 Supplied set-up and welded (SUW).

.4 Factory assembled frame product shall be square, free of defects, warps or buckles.

.5 Set-up and welded corner joints (SUW):

.1 Profile welded–punch mitred, continuously welded on inside of the profile faces,rabbets, returns and soffit intersections, with exposed faces filled and ground to asmooth, uniform seamless surface, as defined in the CSDMA - “RecommendedSpecifications for Commercial Steel Door and Frame Products”.

.6 Set-up and welded joints at mullions, sills and center rails:

.1 Coped accurately, butted and tightly fitted.

.2 At intersecting flush profile faces, securely weld, fill and grind to flush, smooth,uniform, seamless surface.

.3 At intersecting recessed profile faces, securely weld to concealedreinforcements, with exposed hairline face seams.

.4 At other intersecting profile elements make exposed face seams to hairlinetolerance.

.7 Glazing stops shall be formed 1.00 mm (0.039") 20 gauge steel, 16 mm (0.625") heightchannel, accurately fitted, butted at corners and fastened to frame sections with#6 x 32 mm (1¼") oval head Tek (self-drilling) type screws at 305 mm (12") on centremaximum.

.8 Where required due to site access, when required for co-ordination or installation, orshipping limitations, frame product shall be fabricated in sections for splicing in the field.

.1 Field spliced jambs, heads and sills shall be provided with 1.60 mm (0.063") 16gauge steel splice plates securely welded into one section, extending 100 mm(4") minimum each side of splice joint.

.2 Field splices at closed sections (mullions or center rails) shall be 1.60 mm(0.063")16 gauge steel splice angles securely welded to the abutting member.Face of splice angle shall extend 100 mm (4") minimum into closed sectionswhen assembled.

.3 Field splice joints shall be welded, filled and ground to present a smooth uniformsurface by the installation company responsible for installation after assembly.

.9 On factory assembled frame product, provide 2 temporary steel jamb spreaders weldedto the base of the jambs or mullions to maintain alignment during shipping and handling.Remove spreaders prior to anchoring of frames to floor.

.10 Each door opening shall be prepared for single stud door silencers. Silencers shall beshipped loose for installation by installer, after finish painting.

.1 Single interior doors: 3 at strike jamb.

.2 Pair of interior doors: 2 at header.

.3 Dutch doors: 4 at strike jamb.

.4 Weather-stripped doors: None required.



.5 Sound, light, or smoke sealed doors: None required.

.6 Transom Panels: 2 at each jamb.

.11 Prior to shipment, mark each frame with an identification number as shown on theapproved submittal drawings.

.12 Provide mullions and transom bars of closed construction type. For fixed condition,attach members to frame with butt-welded joints. For removable condition, attachmembers with removable mullion anchors.

.13 Conceal fastenings unless otherwise indicated.

.14 Fasten removable stops by counter-sunk Phillips head screws at approximately 225 mm(9") on centre symmetrically spaced on stop length.

.15 Anchor frames to floor by 1.60 mm (0.063") 16 gauge thick angle clips, welded to frameand Provide with 2 holes for floor anchorage.

.16 Grind welded corners to a flat plane, fill with metallic paste filler and sand to uniformsmooth finish.

.17 Protect strike and hinge reinforcements using guard boxes welded to frames at masonryconstruction.

.18 Reinforce head of frames wider than 1220 mm (48").

.19 Brace frame units to prevent distortion in shipment and protect finish.

.20 Where removable mullions provided under this section are indicated, head or transommullion shall be reinforced. Provide loose mounting bracket/shoe mechanical fastenersand installation instructions.

2.6 Hardware Reinforcements and Preparations

.1 Door and frame product shall be blanked, reinforced, drilled and tapped at the factory forfully templated mortise hardware only, in accordance with the approved hardwareschedule and templates provided by the hardware supplier.

.2 Door and frame products shall be factory blanked and reinforced only for mortisedhardware that is not fully templated.

.3 Where surface mounted hardware, anchor hinges, thrust pivots, pivot reinforced hinges,or non-templated hardware are required frame product shall be reinforced only, withdrilling and tapping done by field installation.

.4 Templated holes 12.7 mm (1/2") diameter and larger shall be factory prepared, exceptmounting and through bolt holes, which shall be by installation on site. Templated holesless than 12.7 mm (1/2") diameter shall be factory prepared only when required for thefunction of the device (for knobs, levers, cylinders, thumb or turn pieces) or when theseholes over-lap function holes.

.5 Hinge reinforcements shall be 3.51 mm (0.138") 10 gauge steel minimum, highfrequency type shall be provided.

.6 Reinforcements for hinges shall be 2.74 mm (0.108") 12 gauge minimum.

.7 Frames shall be prepared for 114 mm (4.5”) standard weight hinges minimum unlessotherwise indicated.



.8 Doors and frames in excess of 2450 mm (96") rabbet height shall be prepared for114 mm (4.5”) heavy weight 4.6 mm (0.180”) hinges minimum.

.9 Lock, strike and flush bolt reinforcements shall be 1.60 mm (0.063") 16 gauge steelminimum, with extruded tapped holes that provide equivalent number of threads as 2.74mm (0.108") 12 gauge.

.10 Strike reinforcements shall be 1.60 mm (0.063") 16 gauge steel minimum.

.11 Reinforcements for surface mounted hardware, concealed closers and holders and flushbolts shall be 1.30 mm (0.051") 18 gauge steel minimum.

.12 Reinforcements are not required for surface applied hardware supplied with thru-boltsand spacers or sex-bolts.

.13 Provide hardware mortises on perimeter frame members to be grouted in masonry orconcrete partitions with 0.84 mm (0.033") 22 gauge steel grout guards.

2.7 Frame Anchorage

.1 Frame products shall be provided with anchorage appropriate to floor, wall and frameconstruction.

.2 Each wall anchor shall be located immediately above or below each hinge reinforcementon the hinge jamb and directly opposite on the strike jamb.

.3 Frame products for installation in new masonry walls shall be provided with steeladjustable wall anchors of the T-strap, stirrup or wire, 1.60 mm (0.063") 16 gaugeminimum or 3.96 mm (0.156”) diameter wire. Straps shall be not less than 50 mm(2") x 254 mm (10”) in size, corrugated and/or perforated.

.4 Frame products installed in steel stud and drywall partitions shall be provided with1.00 mm (0.039") 20 gauge steel snap-in or "Z" stud type anchors.

.5 Jambs of frames in previously placed concrete, masonry or structural steel shall bepunched and dimpled to accept machine bolt anchors, 6.4 mm (1/4") diameter, locatednot more than 150 mm (6") from the top and bottom of each jamb. Anchor preparationsand guides shall also be located immediately above or below the intermediate hingereinforcing and directly opposite on the strike jamb. Each preparation shall be providedwith 1.60 mm (0.063") 16 gauge anchor bolt guides.

.6 Anchor bolts and expansion shell anchors for the above preparations shall be providedby the installation company.

.7 Where frame product is installed prior to construction of the adjacent wall, each jambshall be provided with 1.60 mm (0.063") 16 gauge steel floor anchors. Each anchor shallbe provided with 2 holes for mounting to the floor and shall be securely welded to theinside of the jamb profile.

.8 On sidelights or windows exceeding 3 m (9’-10”) in width, installed in stud partitions,channel extensions shall be provided from the top of the frame assembly to theunderside of the structure above. Extensions shall be fabricated from 2.74 mm (0.108")12 gauge steel formed channels, mounting angles and adjusting brackets, with mountingangles welded to the inside of frame head. Formed channels, adjusting brackets andfasteners shall be shipped loose. Channels shall be mechanically connected tomounting angles and adjusting brackets with supplied fasteners, on site, by contractorresponsible for installation.



2.8 Sizes and Tolerances

.1 Widths of door openings shall be measured from inside of frame jamb rabbet with atolerance of +1.6 mm (+0.063"), -0.8 mm (- 0.031").

.2 Heights of door openings shall be measured from the finished floor (exclusive of floorcoverings) to the head rabbet of the frame with a tolerance of ± 1.2 mm (± 0.047").

.3 Unless finishing hardware dictates otherwise, doors shall be sized so as to fit the aboveopenings and allow a 3 mm (1/8") clearance at jambs and head. A clearance of 19 mm(3/4") between the bottom of the door and the finished floor (exclusive of floor coverings)shall be provided. Tolerances on door sizes shall be ± 1.2 mm (± 0.047").

.4 Manufacturing tolerances on formed frame profiles shall be ± 0.8 mm (± 0.031") forfaces, door stop heights and jamb depths. Tolerances for throat openings and doorrabbets shall be ± 1.6 mm (± 0.063") and ± 0.4 mm (± 0.016") respectively. Hardwarecut-out dimensions shall be as per template dimensions, +0.4 mm (+0.015"), - 0 mm (-0”).

2.9 Hardware Locations

.1 Hardware preparations in frame product shall be as noted below and locations on doorsshall be adjusted for clearances specified in paragraph 2.8 of this section.

.2 Top of upper hinge preparation for 114.3 mm (4.5”) hinges shall be located 180 mm(7.5”) down from head, transom mullion or panel as appropriate. The top of the bottomhinge preparation for 114.3 mm (4.5”) hinges shall be located 310 mm (12.625”) fromfinished floor as defined in paragraph 2.8 of this section. Intermediate hingepreparations shall be spaced equally between top and bottom cutouts.

.3 Strike preparations for unit, integral, cylindrical and mortise locks and roller latches shallbe centered 1033 mm (40-5/16") from finished floor. Strikes for deadlocks shall becentered at 1220 mm (48") from finished floor. Strikes for panic or fire exit hardwareshall be located as per device manufacturer's templates.

.4 Push and/or pulls on doors shall be centered 1070 mm (42") from finished floor.

.5 Preparations not noted above shall be as per hardware manufacturer's templates.

.6 Hardware preparation tolerances shall comply with the ANSI A115 standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Examination

.1 Provide necessary grounds, bracing and strapping for fitting and adequate for securingof the work.

.2 Cooperate with work of other sections to ensure fastenings set by others are providedand located, their work is installed to their specifications and that those responsible forback priming are notified in sufficient time for them to schedule work.

3.2 Installation – Steel Doors and Frames

.1 Set frame product plumb, square, aligned, without twist at correct elevation inaccordance with NAAMM-HMMA 840-07.

.2 Frame product Installation tolerances:



.1 Plumbness tolerance, measured through a line from the intersecting corner ofvertical members and the head to the floor, shall be ±1.6 mm (±1/16").

.2 Squareness tolerance, measured through a line 90from one jamb at the uppercorner of the product, to the opposite jamb, shall be ±1.6 mm (±1/16").

.3 Alignment tolerance, measured on jambs, through a horizontal line parallel to theplane of the wall, shall be ±1.6 mm (±1/16").

.4 Twist tolerance, measured at face corners of jambs, on parallel linesperpendicular to the plane of the wall, shall be ±1.6 mm (±1/16").

.3 Fire labelled product shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 80-2007.

.4 Brace frame product rigidly in position while building-in. Remove temporary steelshipping jamb spreaders. Install temporary wood spreaders at mid-point of frame rabbetheight to maintain frame widths. Remove wood spreaders after product has been built-in.

.5 Provide vertical support at center of head for openings exceeding 1250 mm (48") inwidth.

.6 Secure anchorages and connections to adjacent construction.

.7 Frame product in unit masonry shall be fully grouted in place.

.8 Execute installation and assembly using skilled forces under supervision of a competentjoinery foreperson.

.9 Install doors in accordance with NAAMM-HMMA 840-07, maintaining clearancesoutlined in paragraph 2.8 of this section.

.10 Install finishing hardware in accordance with ANSI A115.1G-1994, manufacturers'templates and instructions, and Section 08710.

.11 Adjust operable parts for correct clearances and function.

.12 Steel surfaces shall be kept free of grout, tar or other bonding materials or sealers.

.13 Remove grout or other bonding material from products immediately following installation.

.14 Provide appropriate anchorage for floor and wall construction. Each wall anchor shall belocated immediately above or below each hinge reinforcement on the hinge jamb anddirectly opposite the strike jamb. On each jamb, install 2 anchors for openings up to andincluding 1525 mm (60") high and install 1 anchor for each additional height of 760 mm(30") of height or fraction thereof, except as indicated below. Frames placed inpreviously placed concrete, masonry or structural steel shall be Provided with anchorslocated not more than 150 mm (6") from top and bottom of each jamb, and intermediateanchors at 660 mm (26") on centre maximum.

.15 Secure frames set in previously constructed concrete or masonry openings bycountersunk expansion bolts at same centres as for adjustable Tee wall anchors.Reinforce frame at fastening location to prevent indentation of frame by fastening device.

.16 Prior to site touch-up, exposed surfaces of Galvanneal steel to be finished with latexpaints shall be cleaned with soap and water to remove foreign matter. When alkydpaints are specified, turpentine or paint thinners shall be used. Refer to paintmanufacturers recommendations for additional information and requirements of Section09900.



.17 Touch-up exposed field welds shall be finished to present a smooth uniform surface andwith a rust inhibitive primer.

.18 Touch-up exposed surfaces that have been scratched or otherwise marred duringshipment, installation, and handling shall be with a rust inhibitive primer.

.19 Finish paint in accordance with Section 09900.

.20 Install door silencers.

.21 Adequately fasten units and secure in place with concealed fixings wherever possible.Include grounds and furring where required.

.22 Coordinate installation of doors and frames with installation of hardware specified inSection 08710.

.23 Make allowance for deflection to ensure structural loads are not transmitted to frames.

.24 Adjust operable parts for correct clearances and function.

3.3 Installation - Finishing Hardware

.1 Install finishing hardware in accordance with Section 08710.


.1 Adjust doors to swing freely, smoothly and easily, to remain stationary at any point, toclose evenly and tightly against stops without binding, and to latch positively when doorsare closed with moderate force.

.2 Adjust hardware so that latches and locks operate smoothly and without binding, andclosers act positively with the least possible resistance in use. Lubricate hardware ifrequired by Supplier’s instructions.

.3 Ensure that doors equipped with closers operate to close doors firmly against anticipatedwind and building air pressure, and to enable doors to be readily opened as suitable forfunction, location and traffic.

.4 Clean hardware after installation in accordance with Supplier’s instructions.

END OF SECTION


Flush Wood Doors

PART 1 - GENERAL




.1 Factory finished flush wood doors.

.2 Fire rated wood doors.


.1 Perform work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Manual, Section 1300, Premium GradeQuality.

.2 Work in this section shall comply with the specified grades of work and sections of thecurrent edition of the Architectural Woodwork Standards, 8th Edition, 2003.

.3 Manufacturer shall be a member in good standing of the Architectural WoodworkInstitute or the Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada.

1.4 Submittals




.3 Shop drawings:

.1 Indicate door opening criteria using numbering system as per door schedule,elevations, sizes, type, swings, details of core and edge construction, details forattachment of closers and exit devices including blocking required, undercuts,bevelling, special blocking, trim for openings.

.2 Indicate AWI/AWMAC construction type, veneer selection, and factory machiningcriteria.

.4 Samples:

.1 Submit 1 – 200 mm x 200 mm (8" x 8") corner sample full size door sample ofeach type wood door, to show stile and rail construction, core, cross banding andveneer indicated. Show cut-away of door components.


.1 Individual architectural door numbers shall be marked in the top hinge cavity created bythe machining for hinges.

.2 Package doors: identify with labels. Package with resilient packaging.

.3 Store doors flat at the Place of the Work in piles with bottom face on bottom of pilesprotected from moisture by water resistant material under skids supporting piles, top ofpiles covered, and air circulation provided at sides of piles.


Flush Wood Doors

.4 Deliver the wood doors only after the building is closed and dry, heated and ventilated.Do not receive the doors in a damp area. Do not drag the doors on the ground, floor oracross one another.

1.6 Warranty


.2 The warranty includes re-installation of hardware, re-hanging and fitting, and finishing.

.3 Defects shall include, but not be limited to, delaminating, telegraphing, and warpexceeding 3 mm (1/8").

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Sustainable Design Requirements

.1 Wood products used in work of this section shall be Forestry Stewardship Council (FSC)Certified, with chain of custody verification, except for products made with recycledmaterial.

.2 Wood-based materials are to contain no added urea-formaldehyde.


.1 The following manufacturers are approved for work of this section:

.1 Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.

.2 Baillargeon Doors, Inc.

.3 Buell Door Company.

.4 Cambridge Door.

.5 Eggers Industries.

.6 JWS Manufacturing Inc.

.7 Lambton Doors.

.8 Marshfield Door Systems.

.9 Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.

.2 Requests for substitution will be considered in accordance with Section 01250.

2.3 Door Construction

.1 Solid core, veneer, particleboard core:

.1 Construction: AWI/AWMAC Manual, Section 1300, Type PC-5, particle boardcore to ANSI A208.1-1999 LD-2 (minimum 529 kg/m3 (33 lbs/ft3) density).

.2 Solid core; veneer, fire resistant core:

.1 Construction: 45, 60 and 90 minute rated doors; veneered: QSI 1300, Type FD-5,non-combustible mineral core,

.1 For 45, 60, or 90 minutes fire rated doors, provide fire resistant core materialand minimum 125 mm (5") wide Tectonite blocking for hinges, closers, flushbolts, mortise pockets, and exit devices. Provide 125 mm (5") Tectonicblocking for full top, bottom and midrail of door.


Flush Wood Doors

.3 Thickness:

.1 45 mm (1-3/4") minimum unless otherwise indicated or scheduled.

2.4 Flush Door Facing

.1 Wood veneered doors; for transparent finish:

.1 Edge; for transparent finish: solid hardwood, Grade 1, species to match faceveneer.

.2 Wood veneer facing type:

.1 Veneer face grade: AA

.2 Veneer species: White maple, to match existing.

.3 Veneer cut: to match existing.

.4 Veneer leaf matching: to match existing.

.5 Veneer assembly matching: to match existing.

.6 Doors in pairs or sets:

.1 For openings with more than one door, including doors with mullions,door faces shall be matched as follows:

.1 Pair matched.

.7 Transom and side panels:

.1 Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed surfaces,and finish specified for associated doors.

.2 Matching requirements: to match existing.

.1 Continuous match.

.2 End match.

.3 No match.

2.5 Accessories

.1 Wood glass stops: solid hardwood, AWI Grade 1, species match face veneer.

.2 Finishing hardware: in accordance with Section 08710.

2.6 Fabrication

.1 Fabricate doors in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Manual, Premium Quality.

.2 Fire rated doors shall be fabricated, labelled and listed by an organization accredited byStandards Council of Canada in conformance with ULC CAN4-S104-M80 and ULCCAN4-S105-M85 for fire protection ratings as scheduled. Attach labels to top of fire rateddoors opposite hinge side.

.3 Factory-prefit and bevel doors 3° (3 mm (1/8") in 50 mm (2")) to suit frame sizesindicated, with 4.76 mm (3/16") prefit in width, +0 mm/-0.79 mm (+0"/-1/32"), tolerances.Prefit top of door 3 mm +1.59 mm/-0 mm (1/8" +1/16"/-0"), and undercut as designatedby floor condition. For fire-rated doors comply with NFPA 80 for prefits and undercuts.


Flush Wood Doors

.4 Factory machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with hardware requirementsand dimensions. Do not machine for surface hardware.

.5 Factory pre-fit doors for frame openings and dimensions identified on shop drawings andschedules.

.6 Provide matching solid wood edge finish at door edges unless otherwise specified.

2.7 Factory Finishing

.1 Finish work in factory in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Manual, Section 1500.

.2 Finish work to meet AWI/AWMAC Premium Grade standards.

.3 Transparent finish: Seal, and finish exposed and semi-exposed surfaces, clear catalyzdlacquer, sheen as selected by Consultant, natural finish.

.4 Factory seal top and bottom door edges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Examination

.1 Provide necessary grounds, bracing and strapping for fitting and adequate for securingof the work.

.2 Cooperate with work of other sections to ensure fastenings set by others are providedand located, their work is installed to their specifications and that those responsible forback priming are notified in sufficient time for them to schedule work.


.1 Execute installation and assembly at the Place of the Work using skilled forces undersupervision of a competent joinery foreperson.

.2 Install work plumb, level and straight, and fasten it securely to backing to support itselfand anticipated superimposed loads.

.3 Build into construction as indicated, or specified in other sections of this specification, orboth.

.4 Adequately fasten units and secure in place with concealed fixings wherever possible.Include grounds and furring where required.

.5 Provide smooth surfaces with concealed fastenings.

3.3 Installation - Doors/Frames

.1 Install wood doors after finishing of walls.

.2 Fit wood doors with 2 mm (0.079") clearance at jambs and heads, and 9.5 mm (3/8")over finished flooring and thresholds, and as required to suit automatic door bottoms.Conform to label requirements for undercutting fire rated doors.

.3 Ensure that top and bottom edges of wood doors are sealed if they are cut to fit, inaccordance with door manufacturer’s instructions and warranty requirements.

.4 Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

.5 Pilot drill screw and bolt holes.

.6 Machine cut for hardware. Core for handsets and cylinders.


Flush Wood Doors

.7 Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames specified in Section 08110,and hardware specified in Section 08710.

.8 Conform to AWI/AWMAC Manual for fit, clearance, and joint tolerances.

3.4 Installation - Finishing Hardware

.1 Install finishing hardware in accordance with Section 08710.






.5 Sand and clean woodwork to leave free from finish defects in any exposed part.

END OF SECTION


Aluminum Windows

PART 1 - GENERAL




.1 Remove and dispose of existing windows and associated trim, scheduled to be replacedunder work of this contract.

.2 Furnish labour, materials and other services to complete the fabrication and installationof windows including all framing, glazing, operating units, and prefinished continuousextruded sills, flashings, louvers and as indicated on the drawings and specifications.

.3 Supply anchors, inserts and items; where necessary provide templates, diagrams orother suitable means of instruction.

.4 Exterior and interior caulking and foaming-in place perimeter frames as specified for aweather-tight installation.

.5 Make good all areas affected due to work of this contract.

.6 Review Asbestos Containing Material Survey at school and notify the Board if it effectsthe work.


.1 Retain a Professional Engineer registered in the Place of the Work to design the work ofthis section; to prepare, seal and sign shop drawings; and to perform field review. Shopdrawings shall show both design and installation requirements.

.2 Qualifications:

.1 Provide the work of this section using Subcontractors with minimum 5 yearsexperience in application of Products, systems and assemblies specified andwith approval and training of Product manufacturers.

.2 Foreperson experience: Minimum 10 years experience as glazing mechanic.

.3 Typical glazing mechanic experience: Minimum 3 years experience as glazers.

.3 Perform welding of structural components only by fabricators certified by CanadianWelding Bureau to CSA Welding qualification codes; CSA W47.1-03 (R2008) for weldingof steel, and CSA W47.2-M1987(R2008) for welding of aluminum.



1.4 Submittals





Aluminum Windows

.3 Shop drawings:

.1 Submit engineered shop drawings.

.2 Further to requirements of Section 01330, indicate system dimensions, framedopening requirements and tolerances, adjacent construction, anticipateddeflection under load, affected related work, weep drainage network, expansionand contraction joint location and details, field welding, coordination withhardware and electrical requirements.

.3 Identify and describe material types being supplied, wall thicknesses ofextrusions, and shapes including connections and grades, dimensions andtolerances (minimum and maximum), attachments, reinforcing, anchorage andlocations of fastenings, and provisions for thermal and structural movementbetween components of this section and adjacent materials.

.4 Include description of materials, metal finishing specifications, and other pertinentinformation.

.5 Design loads, typical reactions and support movement allowances, both verticaland horizontal, shall be placed on the shop drawings.

.6 Shop drawings shall clearly indicate the specification of materials and, whereapplicable, indicate installation methods and coordination with other sections.

.7 Submit framing member structural and physical characteristics, calculations,dimensional limitations, special installation requirements.

.4 Samples:

.1 Submit samples of frame, sill and mullion sections, sill flashing and accessories,fasteners for connection of frame to opening, glazing tape, glass retainers,glazing gaskets, frame, spandrel panels and each finish material and any othermaterial, as requested.

.2 Samples of colour and finish prepared as specified on respective metalcomponents for both extrusion and sheet.

.3 Identify samples as to treatment, thickness, alloy, framing composition, colour,manufacture, performance standard and portion of the work to which they apply.

.4 Fabrication shall not proceed without written acceptance of samples fromConsultant.

.5 Operation and maintenance instructions:

.1 Submit manufacturer’s operation and maintenance instructions for incorporationinto the operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with Section 01770.


.1 Air Leakage: Air leakage through the work shall not exceed 0.3 L/s/m2 (0.06 cfm/ft2) ofglazing area when tested in accordance with ASTM E283-04 at test pressure of 300 Pa(6.24 psf).

.2 Water Penetration: No water penetration shall occur when the work is tested inaccordance with ASTM E331-00(2009), amended to prohibit water from passing throughinterior glazing seals or frame joints, at a test pressure of 300 Pa (6.24 psf).


Aluminum Windows

.3 Fabricate mullions to ensure under specified loads a maximum deflection of 1/175 ofmullion span or 19 mm (3/4"), whichever is less.

.4 Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by pressure andsuction of wind, acting normal to plane of system as calculated in accordance with code.

.5 Design and size components to withstand seismic loads and sway displacement ascalculated in accordance with code.

.6 Provide system to accommodate, without damage to components or deterioration ofseals:

.1 Movement within system,

.2 Movement between system and perimeter framing components,

.3 Dynamic loading and release of loads,

.4 Deflection of structural support framing,

.5 Shortening of building concrete structural columns,

.6 Creep of concrete structural members

.7 Mid-span slab edge deflection.

.7 Ensure no vibration harmonics, wind whistles, noises caused by thermal movement,thermal movement transmitted to other building elements, loosening, weakening, orfracturing of attachments or components of system occur.

.8 Provide anchors sufficiently rigid to resist wind and snow loads caused by aluminumshades and brackets, without damage to wall system.


.1 Brace and protect frame units to prevent distortion and damage in shipment andhandling.

.2 Provide methods for lifting or hoisting units into place without causing damage.

1.7 Warranty


.2 The warranty is a complete aluminum window system warranty and includes thewarranties of sealants and glazing included in the work of this section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufacturers

.1 Work of this section shall be provided by one of the following acceptable manufacturers:

.1 Alumicor.

.2 Commdoor Aluminum.

.3 Kawneer Company Ltd.

.4 Oldcastle Fulton Windows.

.2 Substitutions: Refer to Section 01250.


Aluminum Windows

2.2 Materials

.1 Aluminum extrusions: Accurately formed, extruded aluminum alloy AA-6063-T5/T6 toANSI H35.1-06 minimum, free from defects impairing appearance, strength anddurability.

.2 Aluminum flashing:

.1 Minimum wall thickness: 0.812 mm (0.0320")(20 B&S gauge), unless otherwiseindicated.

.2 Aluminum alloy:

.1 AA3003-H14 Painting Quality.

.2 AA5005-H34 Anodizing Quality.

.3 Aluminum sheet panels:

.1 Minimum wall thickness: 3 mm (0.125”).

.2 Surface flatness: 0.38 mm (0.015”) maximum deviation when measured with150 mm (6") rule.

.3 Squareness: 0.05 mm (0.002”) maximum for each 25.4 mm (1") of length atpanel edge.

.4 Aluminum alloy:

.1 Painting Quality: 3003H14 to ANSI H35.1-06.

.2 Anodizing Quality for anodized aluminum: 5005H14 to ANSI H35.1-06.

.4 Fasteners: aluminum or Type 304 stainless steel, finished to match adjacent material.

.5 Dielectric Separator: Quick drying non-staining alkali resistant bituminous paint toCAN/CGSB 1.108-M89-1979, or membrane type to acceptance of Consultant.

.6 Glazing gaskets: fully resilient, shim type butyl glazing tape or EPDM glazing gasket.

.7 Silicone Sealant: One component, chemical curing; capable of water immersion withoutloss of properties: cured Shore A Durometer hardness of 15 to 25 to ASTM D2240-05,colour as selected by Consultant, where exposed, to ASTM C920-08.

.8 Heal bead sealant; between glazing and framing: One component elastomeric chemicalcuring, to ASTM C920-08.

.9 Frame sealant: One component elastomeric chemical curing, compatible with insulatedglass unit sealants, to ASTM C920-08.

.10 Steel anchors; non-exposed: to CAN/CSA G40.21-04, Grade 300W. Steel anchors incontact with aluminum, exterior to line of air barrier, shall be hot dipped galvanized, 380g/m2 (13.4 oz/ft2) zinc coating to CAN/CSA G164-M92.

.11 Fasteners; aluminum framing: Commercial Quality steel screws, zinc plated and casehardened.

.12 Fasteners; concrete/masonry: Commercial Quality zinc plated steel concrete screws orbolts.

.13 Isolation coating: alkali resistant bituminous paint or epoxy solution.

.14 Thermal Break Component: Rigid polyvinyl chloride or neoprene. Thickness shall be asrequired to meet design, 6 mm (1/4") minimum thickness.


Aluminum Windows

.15 Weather-stripping: durable, non-absorbing material resistant to deterioration by agingand weathering.

.16 Sealant tape; frame to frame connections seals: butyl sealant tape, black.

.17 PVC extrusions: to CAN/CGSB 82.1-M89.

.18 Glazing gaskets: fully resilient, shim type butyl glazing tape or EPDM glazing gasket.

.19 Foamed-in-place insulation: in accordance with Section 07200.

.20 Sealants: in accordance with Section 07900.

.21 Glass and glazing: in accordance with Section 08800.

2.3 Metal Finishes

.1 Exposed aluminum surfaces; anodized to AAMA 611-98:

.1 Clear anodized to AA Designation AA-M12C22A41 at exterior, AA-M12C22A31at interior.

.2 Exposed aluminum surfaces: 70% Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 fluoropolymer resin systems,ceramic pigments and other select inorganic pigments to AAMA 2605-05.


.1 PPG 'Duranar'.

.2 Valspar ‘Fluropon’.


.1 PPG 'Duranar XL'.

.2 Valspar ‘Fluropon Classic’.


.1 PPG 'Sunstorm'.

.2 Valspar ‘Fluropon Classic II’.


.1 PPG 'Duranar XL'.

.2 Valspar ‘Fluropon Premiere’.

.5 Colour: To math existing.

.3 Finish; steel components, clips, and reinforcing/support steel: 275 g/m2 (9.7 oz/ft2) zinccoating to CAN/CSA G164-M92.

2.4 Fabrication

.1 Aluminum window framing system to match existing.

.2 Sill flashing: extruded aluminum, finished to match window frames, profile to matchexisting window frames. Fabricate preformed drip deflectors for sill ends at jambs.Fabricate with preformed butt joint and corner sill splice connectors and applied sealantto prevent water penetration. Locate splice connectors (joint covers) at center line ofmullions when required. Trim and detail corners neatly.


Aluminum Windows

.3 Make allowances for deflection of structure. Ensure that structural loads are nottransmitted to aluminum work.

.4 Provide structural steel reinforcement for strength, stiffness and connections.

.5 Fit intersecting members to flush hairline weathertight joints and mechanically fastentogether, except where indicated otherwise.

.6 Conceal fastenings from view. Exposed fastenings where indicated.

.7 Form cut-outs, recesses, mortising or milling for finishing hardware to templatessupplied. Reinforce with aluminum or galvanized steel plates.

.8 Field apply isolation coating to aluminum in contact with dissimilar metals and/orcementitious materials.

.9 Fabricated assemblies shall make required clearances other other assemblies and fordeflection of structure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Examination

.1 Take dimensions at the Place of the Work to ensure that adjustments in fabrication orinstallation are incorporated, that allowance is made for possible deflection of structureat heads and that clearance to other constructions have been maintained.

.2 Ensure that anchors and inserts, installed by others are adequate to meet specifiedrequirements.

3.2 Installation

.1 Install work plumb, square, level, free from warp, twist and superimposed loads.

.2 Secure work in required position. Do not restrict thermal movement.

.3 Install hardware in accordance with templates.

.4 Adjust operable parts for correct function.

.5 Install in accordance with CAN/CSA A440.4-07 and requirements of building code.

.6 Insulate hollow corner window sections where enclosed within this section's work.

.7 Fasten window jambs at 450 mm (18") on centre maximum spacing with corrosionresistant anchors, and aluminum anchor plates as required.

.8 Install slab edge firestopping in accordance with Section 07840, if applicable.

.9 Explosive actuated or powder actuated fasteners will not be permitted.

3.3 Glazing

.1 Glaze aluminum windows with specified glazing tapes, blocks, and spacer shims inaccordance with Section 08800.

3.4 Foamed-in-Place Insulation

.1 Install foamed-in-place insulation in accordance with Section 07200.

.2 Install at exterior building envelope assemblies to locations as indicated, to cavity andgaps surrounding metal frames.


Aluminum Windows

3.5 Air Barrier Continuity

.1 Fill perimeter gap with foamed-in-place insulation to maintain continuity of air barrier sealto adjacent materials that windows and frames abut as part of the work of this section.

3.6 Sealant

.1 Apply sealant between frame members, sills and adjacent construction as part of thework of this section and in accordance with Section 07900.

END OF SECTION


Finish Hardware

PART 1 - GENERAL




.1 Supply and off-load to place in a clean, dry, and secure room at the Place of the Work,which has been designated for storage of all finish hardware specified includingnecessary fastening devices.

.2 Supply all finish hardware required and not supplied under other Sections.

.3 Check and verify hardware information on door and frame shop drawings, prior tofabrication.

.4 Packaging, labelling, provision of installation instructions, templates, fixings and similaritems, and delivery to the Work site.

.5 Give assistance at the Place of the Work to organize hardware storeroom and supplyqualified staff to correctly categorize, mark, and arrange each item in groups to enableefficient dispensing in specified hardware groups for each door to installation trades.

.6 Provide qualified staff at the Place of the Work promptly to assist installation tradessubsequent to being requested and to ensure that hardware is being correctly installed.

.7 Upon completion of installation of hardware, hardware Supplier shall arrange andconduct, in company of Consultant and Contractor, inspections to verify that all hardwareis installed and functioning satisfactorily, and where necessary shall recommendadjustments of such items as closer arms, valves, door holders and latch and locksets.Report comments in writing to Consultant and Contractor.

.8 Supply temporary locking cylinders and keys for construction purposes. Locks used forContractor security shall be keyed as required to conform to building operations’ securityrequirements.


.1 Qualifications: Provide work of this section, executed by competent Supplier withminimum 5 years experience in Products, systems and assemblies specified and withapproval of Product manufacturers.

1.4 Submittals




.3 Schedules and samples:

.1 Prepare and submit for review, a finish hardware schedule with technical productdata sheets for use in the Work. List type, selected manufacturer's name andnumber, location, mounting heights and finish of hardware and complete crossreference to door schedule and the schedule of finish hardware.


Finish Hardware

.2 The indication or omission of a hardware component on the hardware scheduledoes not remove the responsibility of this section to ensure that all hardware canbe installed and will function as intended.

.3 Submit samples of complete line of hardware and finishes. Identify samplesindicating hardware item numbers used in the Finish Hardware Schedule,manufacturer’s numbers, names, types, finishes, sizes and indication of doorlocation(s). Approved samples will be retained for comparisons and returnedupon completion of the Work.

.4 Prepare and submit for review, a keying schedule recognizing Ownerrequirements which shall be determined after award of Contract.

.4 Jigs:

.1 Submit template jigs for each component to be recessed to enable installationtrades to prepare doors to preclude misalignment and improper fit.

.5 Maintenance Instructions:

.1 Instruct the Owner’s designated representative in proper care and preventativemaintenance of hardware to assure longevity of operation.

.2 Submit maintenance instructions in accordance with Section 01770.

.3 Submit to building maintenance staff prior to date of Substantial Performance,two sets of wrenches for door closers, locksets and fire exit hardware.


.1 Comply with codes and requirements of governing authorities, and as specified.

.2 Provide hardware items with characteristics to meet specified fire ratings, and conform toexit requirements of governing authorities.

1.6 Product Handling

.1 Submit template information drawings, promptly when requested, and submit 3 copies ofinstallation instructions for each item supplied.

.2 Package each item of hardware individually, complete with trim and necessaryfastenings, and accessories, including wrenches, keys, and other appurtenancesrequired to ensure correct installation. Mark each item as to contents and appropriateuse in specified groups.

.3 All items of hardware subject to handling when installed shall be submitted with an easilyremovable covering to protect against scratches, abrasions, coating with dissimilar finishmaterials on adjacent surfaces, and tarnishing.

1.7 Templates

.1 Submit for distribution, 3 copies of templates, template information, installationinstructions and details necessary to enable preparation for, and installation of finishhardware in accordance with Door Hardware Institute recommended procedures. Submittemplates arranged and marked coincident with specified hardware designations.

.2 Submit promptly when requested, the foregoing information in 3-ring plastic hard-covered binders suitably identified.


Finish Hardware

.3 In lieu of 1.7.1 and 1.7.2, arrange for the issue by each hardware manufacturer, themanufacturer's standard book of template drawings, at the option of door and framemanufacturers.

1.8 Inspection

.1 Inspect the installation of finish hardware on an agreed frequency.

.2 Advise in writing of work being performed that will prejudice the installation or correctoperation of items of hardware.

.3 Ensure items have been installed complete with required trim and accessories, andfastenings are adequately secured and approved. Ensure closer arms, valves, holderdevices, locksets and latchsets are correctly adjusted.

1.9 Coordination

.1 Coordinate work of this section to ensure information and material is promptly provided,to ensure orderly and expeditious progress of the Work, and to comply with schedule forcompletion.

.2 Within 3 weeks of Contract Award, submit confirmed orders to manufacturers/Suppliersto Consultant.

.3 Assist Contractor to organize hardware storeroom and supply qualified staff to correctlycategorize, mark, and arrange each item in groups to enable efficient dispensing inspecified hardware groups for each door to installation trades.

.4 Coordinate the work of this section to ensure supplied hardware can function as requiredand can be installed within the particular details of the door and frame assemblies.Hardware that cannot be installed or will not function as intended will be replaced at nocost to the Owner.

1.10 Warranty

.1 Warrant work of this section for a period of 2 years, in accordance with Section 01780,except as follows:

.1 The warranty period with regard to the work of this section with regard to theclosers is 5 years.

.2 Provide manufacturer's standard extended warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

.1 Finish hardware: in accordance with Finish Hardware Schedule. Refer to ‘FinishHardware Schedule'.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1 Examination

.1 Before furnishing any hardware, carefully check Contract Documents, verify doorswings, door and frame materials and operating conditions, and assure that hardwarewill fit work to be attached.


Finish Hardware

.2 Check shop drawings and frame and door lists affecting hardware type and installation,and verify to correctness thereof, or advise of required revisions. Check that doors,frames and panels requiring additional support are reinforced.

.3 Point out special requirements to installer. Make final adjustment of hardware, inparticular closer arms, valves and locksets, to work properly.

3.2 Installation

.1 Perform Installation in accordance with manufacturer’s written installation instructions.Refer also to installation requirements indicated, including that indicated in othersections of specifications.

.2 Accurately locate and adjust hardware to meet manufacturer's instructions. Use specialtools and jigs as recommended.

.3 Locate door stops to contact doors 75 mm (3") from latch edge.

.4 Refer to Section 08140 with respect to factory preparation for hardware for wood doors.Install wood doors and applicable hardware, including hinges.

.5 Take delivery of finishing hardware and install, except hardware specified as part of workof another section. Check each item as received.

.6 Set, fit and adjust hardware according to manufacturer's directions, at heights laterdirected by Consultant. Hardware shall operate freely. Protect installed hardware fromdamage and paint spotting.

.7 Follow manufacturer's directions and installation instructions for installation of finishhardware.

.8 Sound and weather seals:

.1 Install seals to continuously seal entire perimeter of doors. Secure in place withnon-ferrous screws, in accurate alignment.

.2 Maintain integrity of seal at head of doors fitted with closers. Adapt seals asrequired to achieve specified performance.

.9 Pre-drill kickplates and doors prior to installation of kickplates. Apply with water-resistantadhesive and countersunk stainless steel screws.

.10 Set thresholds on two continuous beads of polyurethane caulking fastened with aminimum of 4 countersunk screws.

.11 At wood doors, use screw attachment for exit devices and closers except as follows:

.1 Use through-bolt attachment for exit devices and closers at mineral core doors.

3.3 Electrified Hardware

.1 Install electronic components, security components such as magnetic locks, sentronichold open devices door status switches, card readers, processors, transformers, andother electric devices.

.2 Power wiring will be supplied and installed by Electrical Division 16 including conduit,boxes and other electrical appurtenances, including connections and terminations. Beresponsible for ensuring that all wiring work is done in accordance with the Supplierswiring diagrams and directions.


Finish Hardware

.3 Arrange for testing and commissioning of system by the distributor of the system. Submita copy of reports to the Consultant.

3.4 Keying

.1 Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding ofconstruction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys.

.2 Submit Construction Master Keying (CMK) and Grand Master Keying (GMK) uponcompletion of the work of this section.






END OF SECTION

FINISHING HARDWARE SCHEDULE

PROJECT: KANE PUBLIC SCHOOL RENOVATIONS 300 KANE AVENUE TORONTO, ONTARIO TDSB ARCHITECT: KOHN SHNIER ARCHITECTS 110 SPADINA AVENUE, SUITE 900 TORONTO, ONTARIO M5V 2K4 TEL: (416) 504-7508 FAX: (416) 504-7509 SCHEDULE BY: EMPIRE HARDWARE LIMITED 5 VANLEY CRESCENT NORTH YORK, ONTARIO M3J 2B7 TEL: (416) 638-5400 FAX: (416) 638-0254 CONSULTANT: JOHN EDWARDS PROJECT COORDINATORS: HUGH VAN NOSTRAND MIRA CARLOS DATE: FEBRUARY 25, 2011 REVISED DATE: FEBRUARY 28, 2011

KANE PUBLIC SCHOOL, 300 KANE AVE., TORONTOHARDWARE SCHEDULE

LOWER FLOOR

ITEM 1 1 SGL DOOR 001 CORRIDOR 036 TO NEW CLASSROOM 047 LHITEM 2 1 SGL DOOR 002 CORRIDOR 036 TO NEW CLASSROOM 048 LHITEM 3 1 SGL DOOR 003 CORRIDOR 036 TO NEW CLASSROOM 049 LHITEM 4 1 SGL DOOR 004 CORRIDOR 036 TO NEW CLASSROOM 050 RH

910 X 2130 X 45 WD DR X HM FR TYPE A_____________________________________________________________

12 HINGE/S CB179 114 X 101 26D

4 SECURITY CLASSRM. LOCKSET/S ND95PD X RHO 626

4 KICKPLATE/S GSH 80A 203 X 892 32D

4 OVERHEAD STOP/S GJ 454F 630

ITEM 5 1 SGL DOOR 005 NEW CLASSROOM 050 FROM NEW STORAGE 052 RHRITEM 6 1 SGL DOOR 006 NEW CLASSROOM 050 FROM NEW STORAGE 053 LHR

910 X 2130 X 45 WD DR X HM FR TYPE E_____________________________________________________________

6 HINGE/S CB179 114 X 101 26D

2 STOREROOM LOCKSET/S ND96PD X RHO 626

2 OVERHEAD STOP/S GJ 454S 630

Page 1 of 8


ITEM 7 1 SGL DOOR 105 CORRIDOR 108 TO NEW TECH ROOM 113 LH

910 X 2130 X 45 HM DR X HM FR TYPE B ULC 45 MIN_____________________________________________________________

3 HINGE/S CB179 114 X 101 26D


1 DOOR CLOSER/S 4041 SCUSH TB 689


ITEM 8 1 SGL DOOR 106 CORRIDOR 108 TO NEW SCIENCE CLASSROOM 114 LH

910 X 2130 X 45 HM DR X HM FR TYPE A ULC 45 MIN_____________________________________________________________

3 HINGE/S CB179 114 X 101 26D


1 DOOR CLOSER/S 4041 SCUSH TB 689


Page 2 of 8


ITEM 9 1 PAIR DOORS 107 NEW TECH ROOM 113 TO NEW SCIENCE ROOM 114 LH/RH

2/910 X 2130 X 45 HM DR X HM FR TYPE I RH_____________________________________________________________

6 HINGE/S CB179 114 X 101 26D

2 FLUSH BOLT/S FB458 626

1 LOCKSET/S ND66PD X RHO 626

2 KICKPLATE/S GSH 80A 203 X 892 TEK 32D

2 OVERHEAD STOP/S GJ 454F-SHIM3 630

ITEM 10 1 SGL DOOR 108 NEW TECH ROOM 113 TO NEW SCIENCE ROOM 114 RH

910 X 2130 X 45 HM DR X HM FR TYPE H RH_____________________________________________________________

3 HINGE/S CB179 114 X 101 26D

1 LOCKSET/S ND66PD X RHO 626

1 KICKPLATE/S GSH 80A 203 X 892 TEK 32D

1 OVERHEAD STOP/S GJ 454F-SHIM3 630

Page 3 of 8


ITEM 11 1 SGL DOOR 109 CORRIDOR 112 TO STORAGE 115 RH

910 X 2130 X 45 WD DR X HM FR TYPE D_____________________________________________________________

3 HINGE/S CB179 114 X 101 26D

1 STOREROOM LOCKSET/S ND96PD X RHO 626


1 OVERHEAD STOP/S GJ 454S 630

ITEM 12 1 SGL DOOR 110 NEW CORRIDOR 125 TO NEW KINDERGARTEN CLASSROOM 127 LHITEM 13 1 SGL DOOR 116 NEW CORRIDOR 125 TO NEW KINDERGARTEN CLASSROOM 135 RHITEM 14 1 SGL DOOR 117 CORRIDOR 137 TO NEW KINDERGARTEN CLASSROOM 135 RH

910 X 2130 X 45 WD DR X HM FR TYPE A _____________________________________________________________

9 HINGE/S CB179 114 X 101 26D




Page 4 of 8


ITEM 15 1 SGL DOOR 111 NEW KINDERGARTEN CLASSRM. 127 FROM SUMP PUMP RHRITEM 16 1 SGL DOOR 112 NEW KINDERGARTEN CLASSRM. 143 FROM SUMP PUMP LHR

660 X 2130 X 45 HM DR X HM FR TYPE G_____________________________________________________________

6 HINGE/S CB179 114 X 101 26D

2 LOCKSET/S L463 626

2 DOOR CLOSER/S 1461 PA 689

2 CYLINDER PULL/S GSH 980 26D

2 WALL STOP/S GSH 250 26D

ITEM 17 1 PAIR DOORS 113 CORRIDOR 112 FROM CORRIDOR 124 LHR/RHR

2/910 X 2130 X 45 WD DR X HM FR TYPE F RHR_____________________________________________________________

6 HINGE/S CB168 114 X 101 26D

1 MULLION/S KR4954 X 2130 SP28

2 PANIC BAR/S 98L X 996L-06 626

2 RIM CYLINDER/S 20-021 626

1 MORTISE CYLINDER/S 20-001 X 114 626

2 DOOR CLOSER/S 4041 SHCUSH TB 689

2 DROP PLATE/S 4040-18PA 689


Page 5 of 8


ITEM 18 1 SGL DOOR 114 NEW KINDERGARTEN CLASSRM 127 TO NEW KINDERGARTEN W/C 126 RHITEM 19 1 SGL DOOR 115 NEW KINDERGARTEN CLASSRM 135 TO NEW KINDERGARTEN W/C 134 LHITEM 20 1 SGL DOOR 121 NEW KINDERGARTEN CLASSRM 143 TO NEW KINDERGARTEN W/C 142 LHITEM 21 1 SGL DOOR 122 NEW KINDERGARTEN CLASSRM 145 TO NEW KINDERGARTEN W/C 144 RH

660 X 2130 X 45 WD DR X HM FR TYPE C _____________________________________________________________

12 HINGE/S CB179 114 X 101 26D

4 PASSAGE SET/S ND10S X RHO 626



ITEM 22 1 SGL DOOR 118 CORRIDOR 137 TO NEW PARENTING CENTRE 141 RHITEM 23 1 SGL DOOR 120 CORRIDOR 137 TO NEW PARENTING CENTRE 143 RHITEM 24 1 SGL DOOR 123 CORRIDOR 137 TO NEW PARENTING CENTRE 145 LH

910 X 2130 X 45 WD DR X HM FR TYPE A _____________________________________________________________

9 HINGE/S CB179 114 X 101 26D




Page 6 of 8


ITEM 25 1 SGL DOOR 119 NEW PARENT CENTRE TO NEW PARENT CENTRE W/C 140 RH

910 X 2130 X 45 WD DR X HM FR TYPE D_____________________________________________________________

3 HINGE/S CB179 114 X 101 26D

1 PRIVACY SET/S ND40S X RHO 626



ITEM 26 1 SGL DR 124 KINDERGARTEN CLASSRM 143 TO/FROM NEW KINDERGARTEN CLASSRM 145ITEM 27 1 SGL DR 125 KINDERGARTEN CLASSRM 143 TO/FROM NEW KINDERGARTEN CLASSRM 145

1025 X 2743 X 45 WD DR_____________________________________________________________

4 FLUSH PULL/S GSH 961 26D

2 TRACK/S C108 X 2050 MA

4 HANGER/S C911

4 TRACK STOP/S C100HD

2 GUIDE CHANNEL/S C914 X 1025 MA

2 H/D DOOR GUIDE/S C913

2 FASCIA C110 X 2050 CA

4 FASCIA END CAP C110 CA

Page 7 of 8


SECOND FLOOR

ITEM 28 1 SGL DOOR 201 CORRIDOR 217 TO CLASSROOM 216 RH

910 X 2130 X 45 WD DR X HM FR TYPE A_____________________________________________________________

3 HINGE/S CB179 114 X 101 26D




Page 8 of 8


Glass and Glazing

PART 1 - GENERAL




.1 Qualifications of installers: Provide the work of this section executed by specialistSubcontractor who shall be thoroughly trained and experienced in skills required, becompletely familiar with referenced standards and requirements of the work of thissection, and personally direct installation performed under this section.

.1 Foreperson experience: Minimum 10 years experience as glazing mechanic.

.2 Typical glazing mechanic experience: Minimum 3 years experience as glazers.

.2 Manufacturers: Tempering shall be manufactured by a single manufacturer with aminimum of ten (10) years of fabrication experience and meet ANSI / ASQC 9002 1994.


.4 Single source responsibility: Provide materials from a single manufacturer or fabricatorfor each kind and condition of glass indicated and composed of primary glass obtainedfrom a single source and manufacturing plant for each type and class required.

1.3 Submittals




.3 Shop drawings:

.1 Show details of each type of glazing system in conjunction with the framingsystem indicating type of glass, sizes, shapes, glazing material and quantity.Show details indicating glazing material, glazing thickness, bite on the glass andglass edge clearance.

.2 For glass scheduled or indicated as engineered and glass to serve as guards inaccordance with building code, shop drawings to be engineered shop drawings.

.4 Samples:

.1 Submit 305 mm (12") square samples of each type of glass indicated except forclear monolithic glass products, and 305 mm (12") long samples of each colorrequired, except black, for each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view.

.1 Submit 3 control samples for each glass type showing maximum range ofvisible difference between units for the Project.

.5 Submit test and evaluation reports:

.1 Obtain compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant manufacturerindicating that glazing materials were tested for compatibility and adhesion withglazing sealant as well as other glazing materials including insulating units.


Glass and Glazing

.6 Mock-ups:

.1 Provide mock-up of mirror installation, including minimum of 4 full size mirrors.Locate mirror mock-up where approved by Consultant.

.7 Manufacturer reports:

.1 Submit glass fabricator’s product information and structural calculationsindicating compliance with glazing standards established by the GlassAssociation of North America (GANA). Submittal to include thermal stress andstructural load analysis of the proposed glass types, configuration and sizes.

.8 Submit sample glazing warranty.

.9 Submit copy of letter from IGMAC or a test report prepared by independent testingcompany confirming insulating glass units of the types required have been successfullytested in accordance with CAN/CGSB 12.8-97 and will withstand design loads specifiedin the Contract Documents.

.10 Closeout submittals:

.1 Submit closeout submittals in accordance with Section 01770.

.2 Submit maintenance and cleaning instructions for glass and glazing forincorporation into the operating and maintenance manuals.

1.4 Performance / Design Criteria

.1 Glass strength:

.1 Provide glass products in the thickness and strengths (annealed or heat-treated)required to meet or exceed the following criteria based on project loads and in-service conditions.

.1 Analysis shall comply with CAN/CGSB 12.20-M89 .

.2 Minimum thickness of annealed or heat-treated glass products to be selectedso the worst case probability of failure does not exceed the following:

.1 8 breaks per 1000 for glass installed vertically less than 15 degrees fromthe vertical plane and under wind action.

.2 1 break per 1000 for glass installed 15 degrees or more from the verticalplane and under action of wind and/or snow.

.3 Maximum lateral deflection; insulating glass units: For insulating glass unitssupported on four edges, limit centre-of-glass deflection at design windpressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 19 mm (3/4")maximum.

.2 Design glass and glazing located less than 1070 mm (42") above finished floor,to requirements of the building code. Glass at guards, balustrades, and whereglass is likely to be subjected to human impact shall comply with safety glassrequirements of CAN/CGSB 12.20-M89 and CAN/CGSB 12.1-M90.

.3 Provide annealed, heat strengthened, and tempered lights where required by thebuilding code, and where required for the various solar exposures on thebuilding.


Glass and Glazing

.4 Glass thicknesses and glass types specified, indicated, or scheduled in theContract Documents are minimums required. Glass designer/engineer to modifyas required to satisfy design and building code requirements, and requirementsof authorities having jurisdiction, and any such modifications shall be clearlyindicated on shop drawings.

1.5 Description

.1 Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movements, withoutfailure, including loss due to defective manufacture, fabrication and installation;deterioration of glazing materials; and other defects in construction.

1.6 Storage, and Handling

.1 Protect glass from edge damage during handling. For insulating units exposed tosubstantial altitude changes, comply with insulating glass manufacturers writtenrecommendations for venting and sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures.

.2 Storage and protection: Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer’s writteninstructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials fromcondensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun or other causes.

1.7 Site Conditions

.1 Ambient Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substratetemperature conditions are outside limits permitted by the glazing materialmanufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost,condensation or other causes.

.2 Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditionsare outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 4.4°C.

1.8 Warranty

.1 Warrant work of this section for a period of 2 years minimum unless otherwise indicated,in accordance with Section 01780.

.2 The glazing systems shall perform properly to the extent that the design and ContractDocuments permit such performance for the duration of the warranty period.

.3 Manufacturer's special warranty for coated-glass products:

.1 Provide written 10 year warranty from date of manufacture for sputter coatedglass. Warranty shall cover deterioration due to normal conditions of use and notto handling, installing, and cleaning practices contrary to the glassmanufacturer’s published instructions. Warranty shall be manufacturer's standardform in which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units.

.4 Manufacturer's special warranty for laminated glass products:

.1 Provide written 5 year warranty from date of manufacture for laminated glass.Warranty shall cover deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not tohandling, installing, and cleaning practices contrary to the glass manufacturer’spublished instructions. Warranty shall be manufacturer's standard form in whichlaminated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units.

.5 Manufacturer's special warranty for insulating glass unit products:


Glass and Glazing

.1 Provide a written warranty from date of manufacture for sealed insulating glassunits. Warranty shall cover the following:

.1 Deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing,protecting and maintaining practices contrary to the glass manufacturer’spublished instructions.

.2 Replacement of sealed insulating glass units.

.3 No dollar limit.

.4 Non-prorated.

.5 10-year warranty duration.

.6 Manufacturer's special warranty for mirror glass products:

.1 Provide a written warranty from date of manufacture for mirror silvering.Warranty shall cover the following:

.1 Replacement of mirror glass units.

.2 10 year warranty duration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Glass Materials

.1 Insulating glass units:

.1 Hermetically sealed, CAN/CGSB 12.8-97, minimum 12 mm (1/2") air space, 90%argon/10% air filled, double sealed edges (primary to be polyisobutylene,secondary to be polysulphide/polyurethane), desiccant filled aluminum spacerbar.

.1 The minimum thickness of the secondary seal shall be 1.59 mm (1/16").

.2 The target width of the primary seal shall be 3.97 mm (5/32”).

.3 There shall be no voids or skips in the primary seal.

.4 Gaps or skips between primary and secondary sealant are permitted to amaximum width of 1.59 mm (1/16") by maximum length of 50 mm (2") withgaps separated by at least 450 mm (18"). Continuous contact between theprimary seal and the secondary seal is desired.

.5 Both primary and secondary sealant adhesion shall exhibit continuous,tenacious adhesion to both glass and spacer contact areas.

.2 IGMAC Certified.

.3 Glass thickness: 6 mm (1/4") minimum, and as required to suit designrequirements.

.4 Glass colour: clear, unless otherwise indicated.

.5 Glass type: annealed or heat strengthened or tempered, as required to suitdesign requirements.

.6 Low 'E' coating (solar control, sputtered):



Glass and Glazing


.1 PPG ‘Solarban 80’.

.3 Performance requirements; for clear glass units; based on above description:

.1 Visible light transmittance (VLT): within 68 - 70%.

.2 Winter night-time Metric U-value (Imperial): 1.3 (0.24) 1.7 (0.29).

.3 Shading coefficient (SC): within 0.43 – 0.46.

.4 Solar heat gain coefficient (SHGC): within 0.37 - 0.40.

.2 Wired glass:

.1 Georgian Polished Wire glass, to CAN/CGSB 12.11-M90, Type 1, Style 3, 6 mm(1/4") thick minimum, clear.

.3 Annealed (float) glass: Clear, annealed glass, 6 mm (1/4") thick minimum, CAN/CGSB12.3-M91, Glazing Quality.

.4 Tempered and heat strengthened glass: to CAN/CGSB 12.1-M90, 6 mm (1/4") thickminimum.

.1 Tempering shall be performed using convection type furnace.

.2 Tempered and heat strengthened glass shall be treated prior to applyingreflective or paint coatings.

.3 Tempered glass material to come from one tempering furnace and be temperedto minimize distortion variance.

.1 Roller-wave distortion not to exceed 0.127 mm (0.005") from peak to valley.

.2 Maximum peak to valley roller-wave 0.8 mm (0.003”) in the central area and0.20 mm (0.008”) within 267 mm (10.5”) of the leading and trailing edge.

.3 Maximum bow and warp 0.79 mm per lineal 305 mm (1/32” per lineal foot).

.4 Tempering shall be performed using the horizontal tong-free method.

.5 Orient tempered glass in manner to produce consistent appearance.

.5 Laminated glass: Laminated safety glass to CAN/CGSB 12.1-M90, Laminated, glasslayers shall have clear PVB interlayer of 1.52 mm (0.060") minimum thickness. Glasslayers minimum 3 mm (1/8") and 9 mm (3/8”) thick unless otherwise scheduled orindicated.

.1 Glass type: annealed or heat strengthened or tempered, as required to suitdesign requirements.

.2 Laminated glass products to be fabricated free of foreign substances and air orglass pockets in autoclave with heat plus pressure.

.6 Mirrors: annealed glass, to ASTM C1503-08 as follows:

.1 Grade: Mirror Cut Size.

.2 Quality: Mirror Select Quality, except allowable distortion shall be ≥80° visioninterference angle to ASTM C1036-06 Table 5.

.3 Colour: Clear.

.4 Thickness: 6 mm (1/4")


Glass and Glazing

.5 Exposed edges shall be chamfered, ground, and polished.

2.2 Glazing Materials (non-fire rated)

.1 Glazing materials; general: Select glazing sealants, tapes, gaskets and additionalglazing materials of proven compatibility with other materials they will contact, includingglass products, seals of insulating glass units and glazing channel substrates, underconditions of installation and service, as demonstrated by testing and field experience.

.2 Glazing gaskets: Moulded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required tomaintain watertight seal, made from one of the following:

.1 Preformed, EPDM, silicone compatible, to ASTM C864-05

.3 Setting blocks: Silicone material with Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus orminus 5.

.4 Spacers: Silicone blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glassmanufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

.5 Edge blocks: Silicone material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (sidewalking).

.6 Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

.7 Polyurethane foam glazing tape:

.1 High density, closed-cell, flexible, non-extruding tape, adhesive backed one sideonly; recommended by manufacturer for exterior applications with nominalpressure in glazing channel.

.2 Acceptable manufacturer: Norton Company.

.3 Acceptable products: As recommended by manufacturer suitable for conditionsof application and use.

.8 Mirror clips:

.1 Polished chrome, CR Laurence ‘Vancouver’ clips.

.9 Mirror adhesive: Palmer Mirro-Mastic, complete with sealer as required.

2.3 Fabrication

.1 Factory sealed insulating glass units:

.1 Fabricate units to requirements of CAN/CGSB 12.8-97.

.2 Spacer core shall be straight and evenly set into glass units.

.3 Insulating glass units shall be manufactured to conform to IGMACrecommendations (Insulated Glass Manufacturers Association of Canada) andthe manufacturer shall be a member of IGMAC. Sealed units shall bear IGMACcertification markings.

.2 Grind, chamfer, and polish exposed glass edges, unless otherwise indicated.


Glass and Glazing

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Examination

.1 Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with glazing installer present, forcompliance with the following:

.1 Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness,and offsets at corners.

.2 Inspect butt and mitre joints in framing. Seal joints found to be open with acompatible sealant prior to glazing.

.3 Glazing pockets and surfaces are free of dust, construction debris, andcontaminants.

.4 Presence and functioning of weep systems.

.5 Minimum required face and edge clearances.

.6 Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.

.2 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 Preparation

.1 Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately beforeglazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

.2 Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units asneeded so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not usematerials that will leave visible marks in the completed work.

.3 Clean contact surfaces with solvent and apply primers to surfaces to receive tapes andsealants in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Ensure surfaces are free ofmoisture and frost.

3.3 Glazing - General

.1 Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets,and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, includingthose in referenced glazing publications.

.2 Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by conditions during installation toprovide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequatesealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

.3 Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damagedglass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glasswith edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass andimpair performance and appearance.

.4 Clean glazing rebate surfaces of traces of dirt, dust, or other contaminants.

.5 Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determinedby preconstruction testing.

.6 Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazingpublications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin courseof compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.


Glass and Glazing

.7 Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glasslites.

.8 Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is greater than 1270 mm (50").

.1 Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces ofglass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances,unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability tomaintain required face clearances and to comply with system performancerequirements.

.2 Provide 3.2 mm (1/8") minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equalto sealant width.

.9 Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from movingsideways in glazing channel.

.10 Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

.11 Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior asspecified.

3.4 Tape Glazing

.1 Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edgesare flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

.2 Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretchtapes to make them fit opening.

.3 Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs.Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.

.4 Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, notlapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

.5 Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.

.6 Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

.7 Centre glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by insertingdense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces ofremovable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centres ofopenings.

.8 Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

3.5 Gasket Glazing (Dry)

.1 Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fitopenings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

.2 Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely inplace with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.


Glass and Glazing

.3 Installation with drive-in wedge gaskets: Centre glass lites in openings on setting blocksand press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compressiongaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Startgasket applications at corners and work toward centres of openings. Compress gasketsto produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Sealgasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

.4 Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Centre glass lites in openings on settingblocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compressiongaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compressiongaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bendingstresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasketmanufacturer.

.5 Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.6 Installation – Mirrors

.1 Provide frameless mirrors only. Grind and polish exposed mirror edges.

.2 Mount mirrors in true planes, free of distortions. Surfaces of butted mirrors shall be flushto ≤ 1 mm (0.04"). Mirror installation shall be flat to within 1.5 mm in 1220 mm(1/16" in 4 ft).

.3 Locate joints in mirrors at maximum available mirror sizes to Consultant's direction,unless otherwise indicated. Provide butt joints with ground and polished edges. Apply6 mm (1/4") wide clear silicone bead at butt joints.

.4 Mastic adhesive and top and bottom support clip installation:

.1 Make sure mirror and substrate are free of dust, clean, and dry. On nonporoussubstrates, such as glass, tile, or metal, sealing is not necessary. On poroussubstrates, such as drywall or wood, use Mirro-Mastic Bond (or a primer orsealer, not paint) on the substrates and allow it to dry. Painted surfaces shouldbe sanded through to the original surface and the substrate cleaned and sealedwhere the mastic is to be applied.

.2 Support mirror at the bottom using concealed bottom angles.

.3 Apply mirror adhesive to the mirror or substrate in a minimum of 1 ping-pong ballsize mound for every 0.0929 m2 (1 ft2) of mirror. Do not apply mastic too close tothe edge to prevent "squeeze out". Place the mounds so space will be leftbetween them when the mirror is installed. Mastic adhesive shall be at roomtemperature (22°C).

.4 Press mirror firmly in place making good contact between the mirror, mastic, andsubstrate. Mastic should spread to a pat approximately 114 mm (4-1/2”) indiameter. The mastic needs air circulation to cure properly. Curing time willdepend on temperature, humidity, type of substrate, and amount of air that canreach the mastic.

3.7 Finishing

.1 Immediately remove sealant and compound droppings from finished surfaces. Removelabels after work is completed.


Glass and Glazing

.2 Final cleaning of glass in accordance with Section 01770.

END OF SECTION


Metal Supports for Gypsum Board

PART 1 - GENERAL




.1 Metal support systems for gypsum board partitions, ceilings, and as indicated.


.1 Qualifications: Provide work of this section, executed by a Subcontractor with minimum 5years experience in application of Products, systems and assemblies specified and withapproval and training of Product manufacturers.

.2 Fire resistance rating: Where gypsum board systems with fire resistance ratings areindicated or required, provide materials and installations that are identical with those ofapplicable assemblies tested by fire testing laboratories acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction.

.3 Reference Standards:

.1 Applicable requirements of ASTM C754-09 for installation of steel framing.


1.4 Submittals



.1 Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in thework of this section, including additional data as may be required to demonstratecompliance with the Contract Documents.

.3 Test Results:

.1 Submit certified test results for each required fire resistance rated assembly forwork of this section.

1.5 Fire Resistance Rated Assemblies

.1 Materials for fire resistance rated construction shall conform to requirements of indicatedfire resistance rated assembly.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 General

.1 For sheet metal Products: Sheet metal thickness indicated herein pertains to the“minimum base steel thickness exclusive of coating”.



2.2 Partition Support Materials

.1 Interior non-loadbearing channel stud framing: to ASTM C645-08a; roll formed from0.455 mm (0.0179”) minimum thickness unless otherwise indicated, electro-galvanizedsteel sheet. Provide service holes starting at 450 mm (18") from bottom, then 914 mm(36") on centre to top of studs.

.1 Steel studs at cement board locations: 0.752 mm (0.0296”) minimum thickness.

.2 Interior floor and ceiling tracks (runners): to ASTM C645-08a; in widths to suit stud sizes.

.1 Metal thickness: to match studs.

.2 For openings wider than 914 mm (36"), provide 0.752 mm (0.0296”) minimumthickness for header.

.3 Runner fasteners:

.1 To concrete and masonry: Use stub nails or power-driven fasteners.

.2 To metal concrete inserts: Use 10 mm (3/8") Type S-12 Pan Head screws.

.3 To suspended ceilings: Use prefinished clips to match ceiling grid, asmanufactured by CGC.

.4 Bracing channels: Minimum 19 mm x 10 mm x 1.087 mm (3/4" x 3/8" x 0.0428") coldrolled galvanized steel.

2.3 Ceiling Support Materials and Systems

.1 General: Size ceiling support components to comply with ASTM C754-09 unlessotherwise indicated.

.2 Main Runners: Steel channels, hot or cold rolled; G60 galvanized where used in showerrooms, other wet areas, and outdoors.

.3 Hanger Wire: ASTM A641/A641M-09a, soft, Class 1 galvanized, minimum 3.77 mm(0.1484”).

.4 Hanger Rods and Flats: Mild steel with zinc coating, galvanized for exterior applications.

.1 General: Size devices for 5 times load imposed by completed system asdetermined in accordance with ASTM E488-96(2003).

.1 Power actuated fastening systems are not permitted.

.2 Screws, clips, bolts, concrete inserts or other devices for ceiling hangers whosesuitability for use intended has been proven through standard constructionpractices or by certified test data.

.3 Hangers: Comply with ASTM C754-09 for maximum ceiling area and loads to besupported.

.4 Interior concrete ceiling anchors; acceptable products:

.1 Dynabolt Sleeve Anchor 'TW-1614' or Readi-Tie-Drive 'TD4-112' tie wireanchor by ITW Ramset/Red Head.

.2 Redi-Drive by ITW Ramset/Red Head, complete with galvanized angle clip.

.3 Trubolt, or Dynabolt anchors by ITW Ramset/Red Head, complete withgalvanized angle clip.



.4 Kwik-Bolt 3 - HHDCA 1/4 Ceiling Hangers by Hilti.

.5 Fasteners exposed to weather, condensation, and corrosion: Zinc-plated orstainless steel fasteners in applicable product lines specified in precedingparagraphs.

.5 Tie wire: 1.21 mm (0.0476”) minimum zinc coated, soft-annealed wire, to ASTMA641/A641M-09a.

.6 Furring anchorages: 1.62 mm galvanized wire ties, manufacturer's standard wire typeclips, bolts, nails or screws as recommended by furring manufacturer and complying withASTM C754-09.

.7 Runner (carry) channels: 1.367 mm (0.0538”) thick cold rolled steel, primer painted orzinc coated for interior locations, Z275 galvanized for exterior locations, to ASTM C754-09, with minimum 228 MPa yield strength:

.1 38 mm x 12.7 mm (1-1/2" x 1/2") where supported at centres of 914 mm (36")maximum.

.2 38 mm x 19 mm (1-1/2" x 3/4") where supported at centres of 1220 mm (48")maximum.

2.4 Furring

.1 Furring channels: 0.455 mm (0.0179”) minimum typical thickness, minimum 0.752 mm(0.0296”) at exterior soffits, cold rolled steel, wiped coated, nominal size of 22 mm (7/8")depth x 35 mm (1-3/8") face, hat type with knurled face.

.2 Resilient furring channels: ‘RC-1 Resilient Channel’ as manufactured by CanadianGypsum Company or ‘Resilient Channel’ as manufactured by Nicholson Rollforming orBailey Metal.

.3 Z-furring members: Manufacturer's standard screw type galvanized steel, z-shapedfurring members; ASTM A924/A924M-09, G60, 0.752 mm (0.0296”) minimum thicknessof base metal, of depth indicated, designed for mechanical attachment of insulationboards or blankets.

.4 Fasteners for furring members: Type and size recommended by furring manufacturer forsubstrate and application indicated.

2.5 Accessories

.1 Backer plates:

.1 Metal backer plates: Steel, galvanized; minimum 150 mm (6") wide x 1.367 mm(0.0538”) minimum x lengths to suit size of items to be attached; fastened tostuds for attachment of surface mounted fittings and accessories.

.2 Elimination of backer plates or direct attachment of accessories or equipment tostuds will not be permitted.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1 Installation General

.1 Comply with ASTM C754-09 and manufacturer's instructions, except as modified herein.Do not bridge building expansion joints with support system. Frame both sides of jointswith furring and other supports as indicated.



.2 Provide and install studs, framing, shimming, and furring to provide proper support forgypsum board to achieve the following installation tolerances:

.1 Do not exceed 3 mm (1/8") in 3 m (10’) variation from plumb, level, and plane.

.2 Do not exceed 10 mm (3/8”) from drawings locations.

.3 Do not exceed 1.5 mm (1/16”) variation between planes of abutting edges orends.

.4 Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 3.2 mm(1/8") from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing

.3 Give complete cooperation and direction to trades erecting framing and furring overwhich this work is applied. Coordinate finished joint location with framing.

.4 Coordinate installation and cooperate with mechanical and electrical work toaccommodate mechanical electrical items and any other work required to beincorporated into or coordinated with the partitions, ceiling and soffit systems.

.1 Where the presence of suspended ductwork or other mechanical or electricalservices or devices above ceiling framing conflicts with ceiling framingsuspension points from structure above, provide bridging framing belowconflicting work as required to support ceiling framing on specified intervals.

.2 Do not suspend ceiling framing from mechanical or electrical suspensionsystems unless agreement is obtained in writing from engineer for Subcontractorinstalling such framing that additional imposed loads are acceptable; obtainConsultant’s acceptance before proceeding.

.5 Provide clearances between work of this section and structural elements to preventtransference of structural loads.

.6 Do not bridge building expansion joints with steel framing or furring members.Independently frame both sides of joints with framing of furring members or as indicated.

.7 Size framing systems according to manufacturer’s engineered load tables, to meetallowable deflection without permanent deformation.

.1 Maximum allowable deflection: L/240.

.2 Maximum allowable deflection for tiled partitions: L/360.

3.2 Blocking

.1 Attach to framing adequate backer plates to support the load of, and to withstand thewithdrawal and shear forces imposed by, items installed upon the work of this section.Such items include, but are not restricted to:

.1 Coat hooks.

.2 Cabinetry.

.3 Shelving.

.4 Roller window shades.

.5 Finish hardware.

.6 Projection screens.

.7 Visual display surfaces.



.8 Washroom accessories.

.9 Items as indicated.

3.3 Furring - General

.1 Furring indicated in Contract Documents is schematic. Do not regard as exact orcomplete. Provide all necessary framing and furring to support gypsum board inaccordance with manufacturers' specifications.

.2 Shim furring as required to achieve required installation tolerances.

.3 Leave finished work rigid, secure, square, level, plumb, curved to detailed radius anderected to maintain finish gypsum board line dimensions and contours. Make allowancefor thermal movement.

.4 Thermally separate metal studs from exterior concrete or masonry.

3.4 Suspended and Furred Ceilings

.1 Arrange hangers for suspended gypsum board ceilings to provide support independentof walls, columns, pipes, ducts; erect plumb, and securely anchored to structural frame,or embed in concrete slabs.

.2 Keep lateral braces at hangers back 450 mm (18") minimum unless otherwise noted.

.3 Space hangers at 914 mm (36") on centre maximum along runner channels, and notmore than 150 mm (6") from ends.

.4 Space runner channels at 1220 mm (48") on centre, maximum, and not more than150 mm (6") from boundary walls, interruptions of continuity, and changes in direction.Run channels transversely to structural framing members.

.5 Where splices are necessary, lap members at least 200 mm (8") and wire each end with2 loops. Avoid clustering or lining up of splices.

.6 Attach to rod hangers by bending hanger sharply under bottom flange of runner, andsecurely wiring in place with saddle tie.

.7 Erect cross furring channels transversely across runner channels at 400 mm (16") oncentre maximum, 305 mm (12") on centre at fire rated assemblies, at not more than150 mm (6") from boundary wall openings, interruptions in ceiling continuity, andchanges in direction.

.8 Secure furring channels to each support with purpose-made slips or wire tie. Splicejoints by lapping channels and tying together.

.9 Level cross furring channels to maximum tolerance of 3 mm in 3 m (1/8” in 10 ft).

3.5 Wall Furring

.1 Install steel furring for braced walls, free standing walls, walls that are furred out asindicated.

.2 Frame openings and around built-in equipment, cabinets, access panels, on 4 sides,with channels. Extend furring into reveals. Check clearances with equipment suppliers.

.3 Provide bulkheads and boxed-in duct shafts, for beams, columns, pipes and aroundexposed services where indicated. Install 19 mm (3/4") channels at corners and at305 mm (12") on centre.



3.6 Resilient Furring

.1 Erect gypsum board resilient furring maximum 610 mm (24") on centre and not morethan 150 mm (6") from ceiling/wall juncture. Secure to each support with 25 mm (1")gypsum wallboard screw.

.2 Install 150 mm (6") continuous strip of 12.7 mm (1/2") gypsum board along base ofpartitions where resilient furring installed.

.3 Provide resilient furring channel transverse to framing members, or as indicated.

3.7 Metal Stud Partition Framing

.1 Provide partition tracks (runners) at floor and underside of structural assembly and asfollows:

.1 Align accurately and lay out according to partition layout.

.2 Secure runners to concrete access flooring and to concrete slabs, as applicable,with screwed or shot fasteners located 50 mm (2") from each end and spaced atmaximum 610 mm (24") on centre.

.3 At partition corners, extend one runner to end of corner and butt other runner toit, allowing necessary clearance for gypsum board thickness. Runners should notbe mitred.

.2 Unless otherwise indicated, place interior studs vertically at centres as follows:

.1 Provide studs at 610 mm (24") on centre, and as specially spaced in accordancewith details indicated.

.2 Provide studs not more than 50 mm (2") from abutting walls, openings and eachside of corners.

.3 Provide freedom for 19 mm (3/4") deflection under beams, structural slabs andthe like to avoid transmission of structural loads to studs, or install 50 mm (2") legceiling tracks.

.3 Install studs in tracks at floor and ceiling.

.4 Where horizontal runs of service lines are scheduled to be installed, arrange withapplicable trades and install studs simultaneously with services.

.5 At openings in stud walls, erect track at head and sills to accommodate intermediatestuds. At each end of track, cut out flanges, turn up web, and fasten to studs. Installintermediate studs above and below openings in same manner and spacing as wallstuds. Install double studs at each jamb, and double tracks at head of door openings.

.6 At partitions requiring fire rating, erect in accordance with requirements of listing.

.7 Size studs, connections, and runners to carry loads according to stud manufacturer’sload tables, at 24 kg/m2 (5 lb/ft2) live load to meet maximum allowable deflection limits.Where depth of stud is indicated, size metal thickness to meet allowable deflection limits.

.8 Provide three studs at corner and intermediate intersections of partitions.

.9 Coordinate work with others installing horizontal runs of service lines so that work isdone simultaneously. Where standard holes are too small for installed services, notchstuds, and splice notched flanges with splice pieces 305 mm (12") longer than notches,each fastened with 2 screws.



.10 Provide metal studding to maximum tolerance of 3 mm in 3 m (1/8” in 10 ft).

.11 Coordinate simultaneous erection of studs with installation of service lines. Whenerecting studs ensure web openings are aligned.

.12 Coordinate erection of studs with installation of door/window frames and specialsupports or anchorage for work specified in other sections.

.13 Unless otherwise indicated, partitions, together with gypsum board facings, shall extendabove ceilings to underside of structure above.

.14 Maintain clearance to avoid transference of structural loads to studs.

.15 Chase walls:

.1 Provide chase walls where indicated, consisting of two parallel steel studpartitions.

.2 Provide cross bracing consisting of metal furring, located at quarter points oneach pair of studs. Attach cross bracing to studs with metal screws. Coordinateconstruction of partitions to suit installation of services.

.16 Lateral support bracing channels:

.1 Stiffen partitions over 3 m (10’) in vertical span, at mid-height to maximumvertical spacing of 2440 mm (8’) on centre, with at least one 19 mm (3/4")horizontal bracing channel, extending full length of partition, overlapping at leasttwo stud spaces at ends of bracing channels.

.2 Stiffen partitions at not more than 150 mm (6") from the top and bottom ofopenings and across two full stud spaces at each side of openings withhorizontal bracing channel.

3.8 Control Joints

.1 Control joints: in accordance with Section 09290.

3.9 Concrete Anchors

.1 Provide anchorage points in reinforced concrete floor slab underside in accordance withgypsum board manufacturer’s suspension requirements. Drill holes with carbide-tippeddrill bits conforming to ANSI B212.15-1994.

.2 Provide anchors; minimum installation depth, and method of expansion asrecommended by the anchor manufacturer.

END OF SECTION


Gypsum and Cement Board

PART 1 - GENERAL




.1 Gypsum board; regular type.

.2 Gypsum board; fire rated.

.3 Gypsum ceiling board.

.4 Abuse resistant gypsum board; regular grade.

.5 Tile backer board; cement board.

.6 Gypsum board accessories and miscellaneous related materials.


.1 Subcontractor executing the work of this section shall have a minimum of 10 yearscontinuous experience in successful installation of work of type and quality indicated andspecified.

.2 Single source responsibility: Obtain gypsum board products from a single manufacturer,or from manufacturers recommended by the prime manufacturer of gypsum boards.

.3 Fire resistance rating: Where gypsum board systems with fire resistance ratings areindicated or required, provide materials and installations that are identical with those ofapplicable assemblies tested by fire testing laboratories acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction.

1.4 Submittals




.3 Fire-rated assembly listings:

.1 Submit fire-rated assembly listings for each required fire resistance ratedassembly for work of this section.


.1 Environmental requirements, general: Comply with requirements of referenced gypsumboard application standards and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer, forenvironmental conditions before, during and after application of gypsum boards.

.2 Cold Weather Protection: When ambient outdoor temperatures are below 12°C maintaincontinuous, uniform comfortable building working temperatures of not less than 12°C fora minimum period of 48 hours before, during and following application of gypsum boardand joint treatment materials or bonding of adhesives.



.3 Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to remove water in excess of thatrequired for drying of joint treatment material immediately after its application. Avoiddrafts during dry, hot weather to prevent too rapid drying.

.4 Protection: Provide adequate protection of materials and work of this section fromdamage by weather and other causes. Protect work of other trades from damageresulting from work of this section. Make good such damage at no additional cost to theOwner.


.1 Store materials in protected dry areas. Store gypsum board flat in piles with edgesprotected.

.2 Ensure that finish metal members are not bent, dented, or otherwise deformed.

.3 Deliver Products supplied under the work of this section only to those who areresponsible for installation, to the place they direct, and to meet installation schedules.

.4 Package fire rated materials with labels attached.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Gypsum Board Panels

.1 Gypsum board, regular type: Paper faced gypsum core panel solid set core enclosed inpaper, 12.7 mm (1/2") or 16 mm (5/8") thick unless otherwise indicated, 1220 mm (48")wide x maximum practical length, ends square cut, tapered edges, to ASTMC1396/C1396M-06a.


.1 CertainTeed ‘ProRoc Regular Gypsum Board’.

.2 CGC ‘SHEETROCK Gypsum Panel, Regular’.

.3 Georgia-Pacific ‘ToughRock Gypsum Board’.

.4 Lafarge ‘Gypboard’.

.5 National Gypsum ‘Gold Bond Gypsum Board’.

.2 Fire-rated gypsum board: Paper faced gypsum core panel with a specially formulatedcore for use in fire-resistive Type X or Type C designs, to ASTM C1396/C1396M-06a.


.1 CertainTeed ‘ProRoc X and C’.

.2 CGC ‘SHEETROCK Firecode and Firecode C’.

.3 Georgia-Pacific ‘ToughRock Fireguard and Fireguard Gypsum Board’.

.4 Lafarge ‘Firecheck C and X’.

.5 National Gypsum ‘Gold Bond Fire-Shield and Fire Shield C Gypsum Board’.

.3 Gypsum ceiling board: Paper faced gypsum core, to ASTM C1396/C1396M-06a,12.7 mm (1/2") thick (non-sag type equivalent to 15.9 mm (5/8")) interior ceiling grade.


.1 CertainTeed ‘ProRoc Interior Ceiling’.



.2 CGC ‘Interior Gypsum Ceiling Board’.

.3 Georgia-Pacific ‘ToughRock CD Gypsum Board’.

.4 Lafarge ‘Sagcheck’.

.5 National Gypsum ‘1/2" High Strength Ceiling Board’.

.4 Abuse-resistant gypsum board; impact resistant: Paper faced gypsum core panel withenhanced core to provide resistance to abuse strengthened by a heavy natural-finishpaper on the face side and a strong liner paper on the back side, to ASTMC1396/C1396M-06a, fire rated where indicated.


.1 CertainTeed ‘ProRoc Abuse Resistant’.

.2 CGC ‘SHEETROCK Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Panels’.

.3 Georgia-Pacific ‘ToughRock Fireguard Abuse Guard Gypsum Board’.

.4 National Gypsum ‘High-Abuse XP Gypsum Board’.

2.2 Cement Board Panels

.1 Cement board; interior and, tile backer board applications:

.1 Thickness: 12.7 mm (1/2") minimum.

.2 Composition:

.1 Portland cement, sand, and expanded polystyrene beads, with a fullyembedded alkali resistant glass fibre mesh facing.

.2 Free of asbestos, gypsum, organic fibres or cellulose.


.1 CGC ‘Durock'.

.2 National Gypsum ‘PermaBase Cement Board’.

.3 Smartboard Building Products Inc. ‘Smartboard’.

2.3 Fasteners

.1 Screws; for gypsum board: bugle head, fine thread, self-tapping, Type W or S or S-12point to suit framing type and metal gauge, with corrosion resistant finish to ASTMC1002-04/ASTM C954-07. Screw sizing:

.1 #6 x 25 mm (1") for single thickness board fastening.

.2 #6 x 32 mm (1-1/4") for single thickness 15.9 mm (5/8") board fastening.

.3 #7 x 41 mm (1 5/8") for double thickness board fastening.

.2 Tie wire: 1.6 mm (0.063") diameter galvanized soft annealed steel wire.

2.4 Accessories

.1 Accessories: to ASTM C1047-09 unless otherwise indicated, maximum length piecesper location. Flanges shall be free from dirt, grease, or other material that adverselyaffects the bond of joint treatment or decoration.



.2 Casing trim; “L” or “LC” beads: Bailey D200 and 4411, Nicholson Rollforming Metal Trim200-A and 200-B fillable edge trim, 0.55 mm (0.022") base thickness commercial gradesheet steel with zinc wiped coating to ASTM A924/A924M-09; perforated flanges.

.3 Corner bead: Bailey D100, Nicholson Rollforming No. 114, fillable edge trim, 0.55 mm(0.022") base thickness commercial grade sheet steel with zinc wiped coating to ASTMA924/A924M-09; perforated flanges.

.4 Reveal trim at junctions to exposed masonry and concrete: Gordon Series 300, 312-5/8,or matching style by Fry Reglet.

.5 Reveal trim; at acoustic tile to gypsum board transitions:

.1 Fry Reglet ‘Drywall/Acoustical Reveal DRMAD-50-50, or matching style byGordon Interior Specialties.

.6 Control joints:

.1 No. 093 Zinc Control Joint by CGC Inc. or approved alternate, certified bymanufacturer for use at fire resistance rated assemblies.

.2 Fry Reglet DRM-50-25 2-PC, or matching style by Gordon Interior Specialties.

.3 093V Expansion Bead by Trim-Tex Drywall Products Inc.

.7 Vinyl casing beads; at gypsum board interface with aluminum framed glazing: Vinyl typej-moulds.

.8 Vinyl cove moulding: Trim-Tex 38 mm (1-1/2") inside radius corner trim including 3 wayinside corner trim and termination trim.

.9 Aluminum gypsum board trim: extruded alloy 6063-T5 to ANSI H35.1-09 consisting offin, tapered, grooved, and prepunched for screw attachment and bonding agent, asmanufactured by Gordon, Inc., or Softforms or Fry Reglet.

2.5 Related Support Assemblies and Backer Plates

.1 Metal support systems and backer plates at interior assemblies: in accordance withSection 09100.

2.6 Joint and Adhesive Materials

.1 Joint compound:

.1 Gypsum board work: asbestos-free. Latex resin base, possessing goodadhesion, mixed with fresh, unadulterated water having no detrimental effect oncompounds, to ASTM C475/C475M-02(2007); type recommended bymanufacturer for application indicated.

.2 Gypsum board to receive tile finish: setting-type powder based joint finishingcompound. ‘Durabond’ by CGC or approved alternate.

.2 Joint reinforcing tape:

.1 Gypsum board: 50 mm x 0.3 mm (2" x 0.01") thick, perforated paper, withchamfered edges.

2.7 Acoustic Wall Assembly and Noise Barrier Ceiling Materials

.1 Acoustic sealant; concealed locations: non-skinning acoustic sealant, non-hardeningtype to CGSB 19.21-M87, acceptable products:



.1 Tremco ‘Acoustical Sealant’.


.2 Acoustic sealant; exposed locations: Interior paintable sealant in accordance withSection 07900.

.3 Acoustic sealant for plenum locations: Smokeseal sealant with flame-spread not morethan 25 and smoke developed classification not more than 50 to CAN/ULC-S102-03, inaccordance with Section 07840.

.4 Acoustic compound: premixed perlite plaster.

.5 Acoustic (sound attenuation) insulation:

.1 Mineral-fibre sound attenuation batts: to CAN/ULC S702-97, Type 1, and toCAN/ULC-S114-05.


.1 CertainTeed ‘Fibre Glass Building Insulation’.

.2 Fibrex ‘Sound Attenuation Fire Batt (SAFB)’

.3 Johns Manville ‘Sound-SHIELD’

.4 Roxul 'AFB'.

.5 Owens-Corning 'QuietZone'

2.8 Access Doors

.1 Access doors: in accordance with Division 15 and Division 16.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation

.1 General: Comply with ASTM C840-08, GA 216-07, GA 600-06, and manufacturer'sinstructions, except as otherwise indicated. Do not bridge building expansion joints withsupport system. Frame both sides of joints with furring and other supports as indicated.

.2 Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged ordamp boards. Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not morethan 1.6 mm (1/16") open space between boards. Do not force into place.

.3 Cover both faces of stud partition framing with gypsum board in concealed spaces(above ceiling, and the like) unless otherwise indicated, except in chase walls which areproperly braced internally.

.4 Attach gypsum board to supplementary framing and blocking provided for additionalsupport at openings and cut-outs.

.5 Securely attach trim, casings, framing, and accessories.

.6 Apply components of fire-rated assemblies in conformance with indicated designs.

.7 Erect materials to dimensions indicated, plumb, level, straight, and square to adjoiningelements.

.8 Do not apply gypsum board in close proximity to hot pipes or heating ducts.



.9 Install materials with the minimum number of joints. Tightly butt joints, without force, andneatly align them.

.10 Frame openings on every side. Provide clearances with services.

.11 Work shall include bulkheads over doors, frames, screens, and changes in ceiling levels,pipe space and as indicated.

.12 Provide clearances between work of this section and structural elements to preventtransference of structural loads in accordance with Section 09100.

.13 Tolerances:

.1 Do not exceed 3 mm (1/8") in 3 m (10’) variation from plumb, level, and plane inexposed surfaces, except at end joint between gypsum board panels.

.2 Do not exceed 10 mm (3/8”) from indicated location.

.3 Do not exceed 1.5 mm (1/16”) variation between planes of abutting edges orends.

.4 Surface flatness shall not exceed 1.5 mm (1/16") within 305 mm (12") straightedge. For non-tapered-edge end joints between boards, measure flatnesstolerance with end of straight end at centreline of joint.

3.2 Accessories

.1 At external corners install corner trim secured to framing at 230 mm (9-1/16") on centreon both flanges with screw fasteners or clinch tool.

.2 Secure casing trim at board edges where exposed to view, where board butts againstother materials with no trim to conceal junction, at perimeter of ceiling surfaces at tops ofpartitions where they stop against continuous ceiling surfaces, and where indicated.

.3 Erect accessories straight, plumb or level, rigid and at proper plane.

.4 Use full length pieces.

.5 Make joints tight, accurately aligned and rigidly secured. Mitre and fit corners, free fromrough edges. Secure in accordance with manufacturer's specifications unless otherwiserequired.

.6 Installation tolerances:

.1 Alignment with board panels shall not exceed tolerances specified above.

.2 End joints shall be flush aligned to maximum offset of 0.5 mm (0.020”).

3.3 Board Application - General

.1 Before application of gypsum board commences, ensure that internal services havebeen installed, tested, and approved; that conduits, pipes, cables, and outlets areplugged, capped, or covered; and that fastenings and supports installed by others are inplace.

.2 Extend board into door, window, and other openings, reveals, behind fitments, and otherapplied items and on metal stud partitions to structure above unless indicated otherwise.

.3 Apply board with long dimension perpendicular to supports, unless otherwise indicated.

.4 Locate joints on opposite sides of partitions on different studs, and at least 305 mm (12")from opening jambs.



.5 Install board to minimize joints, and align end joints to be the least objectionable (wherethey are unavoidable), according to the indicated lighting design. Locate joints in ceilingswhere least prominently discerned, and never line them up with opening edges.

.6 Form smooth joints at ends and at field cut edges of board panels.

.7 Fasten board to metal support members by metal gypsum board screws, 9.5 mm(0.374") minimum to, and 12.7 mm (1/2") maximum from, center of joints. Space screws:

.1 At fire rated board as per fire-rated assembly.

.2 At typical board walls at 400 mm (16") on centre at edges and field unlessotherwise required.

.3 At typical board ceilings at 305 mm (12") on centre at edges and field unlessotherwise required.

.8 Offset gypsum board joints 150 mm (6") minimum from corners of openings.

.9 Gypsum panel product joints shall be located so that no joint will align with the edge ofan opening unless control joints are to be installed at these locations.

3.4 Abuse/Abrasion Resistant Board Application

.1 Install impact resistance gypsum board similarly to gypsum board as described above,and in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

.2 Where both impact resistant gypsum panels and regular gypsum panels are usedtogether on the same surface, ensure a smooth transition between the two types ofpanels. Finish the work in a manner such that the transition is not noticeable uponcompletion.

3.5 Interior Tile Backer Board Application

.1 Install in accordance with manufacturer's specifications.

.2 Section 09310 to install tile setting material over tape installed by this section. Installmesh tape centred over tile backer board joints.

.3 Apply tile backer board full height unless otherwise indicated, and in accordance withmanufacturer's installation instructions. Install water barrier sheeting over gypsum boardsubstrates, where applicable.

.4 Fastener spacing:

.1 Walls: fasten at 150 mm (6") on centre at vertical butt joints and 210 mm (8") oncentre in field.

.2 Ceilings: fasten at 150 mm (6") on centre.

.5 Maintain 6 mm (1/4") gap between board and tub or shower base as applicable.

3.6 Interior Cement Board

.1 Install in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and as indicated.

.2 Apply cement board with rough side towards interior, as and with ends applicable, andedges over supports. Fit ends and edges closely, but not forced together. Stagger endjoints in successive courses.



.3 Fasten cement board to framing with specified fasteners. Drive fasteners in field ofcement board first, working toward ends and edges. Hold cement board in firm contactwith framing while driving fasteners. Space fasteners along framing with perimeterfasteners at least 9.5 mm (0.374") and less than 15.9 mm (5/8") from ends and edges.Drive fasteners so bottom of heads are flush with surface of cement board to providefirm board contact with framing. Do not drive fastener heads below panel surface.

.1 Maximum fastener spacing as follows:

.1 Walls: 200 mm (8").

.2 Ceiling: 150 mm (6").

.3 Perimeters: minimum 9.5 mm (3/8") and maximum 15.9 mm (5/8") from endsand edges.

3.7 Acoustic Wall Assemblies

.1 Acoustical sealant and plaster:

.1 Apply acoustical sealant in accordance with applicable requirements of ASTMC919-08.

.2 Apply bead of acoustic sealant to seal both sides of partition assembly betweengypsum board and adjacent floor, wall, and ceiling assembly of partitions whichcontain sound attenuation insulation, and where noted.

.3 Apply bead of acoustic sealant to seal both sides of partition assembly at top andbottom of control joints.

.4 Apply bead of acoustic sealant to seal intersections with sound-isolatingpartitions that are extended to reduce sound flanking paths.

.5 Apply bead of acoustic sealant to seal joint between penetrations and gypsumboard.

.6 Completely seal objects at wall and gypsum board penetrations (such aselectrical boxes) with heavy coating of premixed perlite plaster.

.7 Apply sealant to clean, dry surfaces.

.2 Sound attenuation insulation:

.1 Install sound attenuation insulation wherever insulation in partitions is indicated.

.2 Install sound attenuation insulation in partitions so indicated by filling voids withbatts of specified thickness.

.3 Maintain air space between backs of sound attenuation insulation and back ofopposite face layer, as applicable.

.4 Pack sound attenuation insulation against ducts, conduits and services passingthrough acoustic wall assemblies.

.5 Extend acoustic wall assemblies to underside of structure. Incorporate approvedprovision to prevent transmittance of structural deflection to partition assembly.

.6 Staple sound attenuation insulation where required by manufacturer's data.

.7 Where studs are not faced with gypsum board on both sides, mechanically fastenwire mesh to non-faced side of stud to retain insulation.



.8 Mechanically attach sound attenuation insulation in wall assemblies where cavityof wall assembly is greater than 150 mm (6").

.9 Secure insulation in such a manner that it will not sag.

.3 Sound Flanking Paths:

.1 Where sound rated partition walls intersect non rated gypsum board partitionwalls, extend sound rated construction to completely close sound flanking pathsthrough non rated construction.

.2 Seal joints between face layers at vertical interior angles of intersectingpartitions.

3.8 Finishing

.1 Provide levels of gypsum board finish for locations as follows, in accordance with GA-214.

.1 Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas and concealed areas, except provide higher levelof finish as required to comply with fire resistance ratings and acoustical ratings.

.2 Level 2: Gypsum board substrate at applied hard surfaces, except remove toolmarks and ridges.

.3 Level 4: Exposed gypsum board surfaces, except where another finish level isindicated.

.2 Interior Gypsum Board:

.1 Prefill:

.1 Use setting-type joint compound. Mix joint compound according tomanufacturer's directions.

.2 Fill joints between boards flush to top of eased or beveled edge.

.3 Fill joints of gypsum board above suspended ceilings in fire rated partitions.

.4 Wipe off excess compound and allow compound to harden.

.5 Joint gaps not greater than 3.2 mm (1/8") shall be prefilled with either ready-mix or setting type joint compound; joint gaps greater than 3.2 mm (1/8") shallbe prefilled with setting-type joint compound.

.2 Taping (Level 1):

.1 Butter taping compound into inside corners and joints.

.2 Center tape over joints and press down into fresh compound.

.3 Remove excess compound.

.4 Tape joints of gypsum board above suspended ceilings.

.3 First coat (Level 2):

.1 Use taping or all-purpose drying-type compound.

.2 Immediately after bedding tape, apply skim coat of compound and allow todry completely in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

.3 Apply first coat of compound over flanges of trim and accessories, and overexposed fastener heads and finish level with board surface.



.4 Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with 1 coat of jointcompound.

.4 Second coat (Level 3): After first coat treatment is dried, apply second coat ofcompound over tape and trim, feathering compound 50 mm (2") beyond edge offirst coat.

.1 Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with total of 2 separatecoats of joint compound.

.5 Third coat (Level 4):

.1 After second coat has dried, sand surface lightly and apply thin finish coat tojoints, fasteners and trim, feathering compound 50 mm (2") beyond edge ofsecond coat.

.2 Allow third coat to dry. Apply additional compound, and touch-up and sand,to provide surface free of visual defects, tool marks, and ridges, and ready forapplication of finish.

.3 Finished joints will be accepted with a camber not greater than 1 mm (1/32")and shall be seamless, plumb, true and flush and with square, neat corners.

.4 Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with total of 3 separatecoats of joint compound.

.5 Where new partitions align with existing gypsum board, apply requiredamount of skim coats to make transition inconspicuous from a distance of914 mm (36”).

.6 Completed installation at interface between new and existing constructionshall provide an inconspicuous joint.

.3 Cement board: Prepare, tape, and finish joints in accordance with manufacturer'sinstructions.

.4 Joint Compound:

.1 Apply finish coat of compound feathering 75 to 100 mm (3” to 4”) beyond tapeedges.

.2 Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces so that camber is maximum 0.79 mm(1/32”).

.5 Trim:

.1 Use same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fastengypsum board to supports, unless otherwise recommended by trim manufacturer.

.2 Install metal corner beads at external corners.

.3 Install metal casing bead trim whenever edge of gypsum base would otherwisebe exposed or semi exposed, and where gypsum base terminates againstdissimilar material.

.4 Erect beads plumb or level, with minimum joints.

.6 Control Joints:

.1 Provide control joints set in board facing. Support control joints with studs orfurring channels on both sides of joint.



.2 Provide control joints in required locations.

.1 Review control joint locations with Consultant prior to installation.

.3 Full height door frames shall be considered equivalent to a control joint.

.4 Install control joints where a partition, wall, or ceiling traverses a constructionjoint (expansion, seismic or building control element) in the building structure.

.5 Install control joints where a wall or partition runs in an uninterrupted straightplane exceeding 9100 mm (30 linear feet).

.6 Install control joints in interior ceilings:

.1 With perimeter relief:

.1 Linear dimensions between control joints shall not exceed 15000 mm(50 ft) and total area between control joints shall not exceed 230 m²(2500 ft²).

.2 Without perimeter relief:

.1 Linear dimensions between control joints shall not exceed 9100 mm(30 ft) and total area between control joints shall not exceed 84 m²(900 ft²).

.7 Install control joints where ceiling framing members change direction.

.8 Where a control joint occurs in an acoustical or fire-rated system, blocking shallbe provided behind the control joint by using a backing material such as 16 mm(5/8") type X gypsum panel products, mineral fibre, or other tested equivalent.Construct through-wall control joints at fire-rated assemblies in accordance withassembly listing requirements.

.9 Line up control joints with joints in other construction or with centre lines ofmullions, columns, piers, or similar building elements, where accepted byConsultant.

.10 Install control joints straight and true.

.11 Ceiling height door frames may be used as control joints. Less than ceiling heightframes shall have control joints extending to the ceiling from both corners. Ifcontrol joints are not used, additional reinforcement is required at corners todistribute concentrated stresses.

.12 Board joints shall be located so that no joint will align with the edge of an openingunless control joints are to be installed at these locations.

.7 Construct light troughs and ceiling coves as indicated to profiles as shown, and prepareto receive lighting fixtures supplied and installed by Division 16 where required.

3.9 Fire Separations

.1 Install fire-rated assemblies in accordance with assembly listing requirements in order toobtain fire ratings indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

.2 Vertical bulkheads in ceiling spaces over fire rated partitions, doors and the like shallhave same fire rating as the partition over which they occur. Such bulkheads shall be ofgypsum board construction unless otherwise indicated.

.3 Use fire rated gypsum wallboard as specified.



.4 Where lighting fixtures, diffusers, and the like are recessed into fire rated ceilings orbulkheads, provide enclosure to maintain required fire rating. Form removable panel togive access to fixture outlet box.

.5 Where fire hose cabinets or other fixtures or equipment are recessed in fire rated wallsor partitions, provide gypsum board enclosure or backing to maintain required fire rating,unless otherwise detailed.

3.10 Access Doors

.1 Install access doors to mechanical and electrical fixtures specified in respective sectionsof Division 15 and Division 16.

.2 Access doors shall be as supplied by Division 15 and Division 16. Locations to bereviewed and confirmed by Consultant.

.3 Install access panels in locations to be determined by coordination with trades installingmechanical, electrical and other building services and consultation with Consultant.

.4 Rigidly secure frames to furring or framing systems.

3.11 Special Cleaning

.1 Remove debris and rubbish from wall and ceiling cavities before enclosing with board.

.2 Clean up and remove surplus materials and rubbish resulting from the work of thissection upon completion.

.3 Clean off beads, casings, joint compound droppings and the like, leave the work of thissection ready for painting trades.

END OF SECTION


Tiling

PART 1 GENERAL




.1 Hard surface tiling.

.2 Crack suppression membrane.

.3 Trim accessories.


.1 Execute work of this section only by a Subcontractor who has adequate plant,equipment, and skilled workers to perform it expeditiously, and is known to have beenresponsible for satisfactory installations similar to that specified during a period of atleast the immediate past 5 years.

.2 Subcontractor shall be a member company in good standing of the Terrazzo, Tile andMarble Association of Canada and have been a member for at least the past 5 years.

.3 Comply with 2009-2010 TTMAC Manual Specification Guide 09 30 00 Tile InstallationManual as produced by the Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association of Canada.

.4 Manufacturer shall provide field review in accordance with Section 01450.

1.4 Submittals


.2 Samples:

.1 Submit full size samples of each type of tile specified.



.2 Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions for Products proposed for use inthe work of this section.

.4 Mock-ups:

.1 Submit:

.1 Grout mock-up: 610 mm x 610 mm (24" x 24") sample panels of each tiletype and colour, texture, size, and pattern of tile and grout.

.2 Non-grouted dry laid mock-ups of 1200 mm x 1200 mm (47" x 47") area foreach tile colour.

.2 Install each product and colour mock-up for acceptance by Consultant. Acceptedmock-up shall form basis of standard of workmanship for remainder of work.




Tiling


.1 Provide minimum 2% of each type and colour of tile required for the Work formaintenance use.

.2 Maintenance material to be of same production run as installed material.

.3 Maintenance data:

.1 Submit maintenance instructions for inclusion in the maintenance manuals.


.1 Environmental Conditions: Execute work of this section while temperature is maintainedwithin safe working temperatures in accordance with manufacturer's installationinstructions for a period of 72 hours before, during and following installation. Avoidconcentrated or irregular heating during curing period.

.2 Protection: Protect work of this section against damage by work of other sections for aminimum of 72 hours after application of grouting by prohibiting passage of traffic overtile. Do not immerse in water and protect tilework from freezing for at least 28 days afterinstallation.

1.6 Sequencing and Scheduling

.1 Coordinate installation of tile work with related work.

.2 Proceed with tile work only after curbs, vents, drains, piping, and other projectionsthrough substrate have been installed and when substrate construction and framing ofopenings have been completed.

1.7 Warranty


PART 2– PRODUCTS

2.1 Tile Products

.1 Porcelain tile:

.1 Stone Tile ‘Pavimenti’.

.2 Colour: To later selection by Consultant from manufacturer’s full range.

.2 Ceramic tile:

.1 Stone Tile ‘I ceramiche’.


2.2 Adhesive and Mortar Materials

.1 Unless otherwise specified, select from the following thin-set adhesives:

.1 Latex modified portland cement thin bed mortar gauged:

.1 Interior and exterior grade.

.2 ANSI A118.4-2008 and ANSI A188.11.

.3 White colour for translucent tile applications.


Tiling

.4 Acceptable products:

.1 Flextile ‘51’ mixed with Flextile ‘44’.

.2 Laticrete 'Laticrete 4237 Latex Thin Set Liquid' with 'Portland 211 CreteFiller Powder'.

.3 Mapei 'KERALASTIC' mixed with 'KERABOND'.

.2 Enriched, modified, portland cement thin bed mortar, single component, withintegral polymer:

.1 Interior and exterior grade.

.2 ANSI A118.4-2008 and ANSI A188.11.

.3 White colour for translucent tile applications.


.1 Flextile ‘52’.

.2 Laticrete ‘254 Platinum Multipurpose Thin-Set Mortar’.

.3 Mapei 'Ultraflex 3' or ‘Ultraflex RS’.

.2 Mortar beds, levelling coats:

.1 Materials:

.1 Water: clean and free of chemicals detrimental to mortar and grout mixes.

.2 Sand: to ASTM C144-04, passing 16 mesh.

.3 Cement: to CSA A3000-03, Type U.

.4 Latex: Formulated for use with Portland cement mortars.

.5 Cleavage membrane: 0.10 mm (4 mil) thick polyethylene film to CAN/CGSB51.34-M86.

.6 Metal lath: Galvanized type, 1.4 kg/m3 to ASTM C847-09.

.7 Reinforcing mesh: 51 mm x 51 mm (2” x 2”) mesh size, fabricated from 1.6mm thick galvanized steel wire; welded fabric design.

.2 Mixes:

.1 Scratch coat (by volume): 1 part Portland cement, 4 parts sand, and water orlatex where required by TTMAC detail. Premixed mortar may be used permanufacturer’s instructions. Adjust liquid volume may be adjusted dependingon water content of sand to obtain consistency and workability.

.2 Slurry bond coat: Mix Portland cement and water to a creamy pasteconsistency. Include latex additive where required by TTMAC detail.

.3 Mortar bed for walls (by volume): 1 part Portland cement, 4 parts sand, andwater or latex where required by TTMAC detail. Premixed mortar may beused per manufacturer’s instructions. Adjust liquid volume may be adjusteddepending on water content of sand to obtain consistency and workability.


Tiling

.4 Levelling coat (by volume): 1 part Portland cement, 4 parts sand, and wateror latex where required by TTMAC detail. Premixed mortar may be used permanufacturer’s instructions. Adjust liquid volume may be adjusted dependingon water content of sand to obtain consistency and workability.

.5 Mortar bed for floors (by performance): 1 part Portland cement, 4 parts sand,and water or latex where required by TTMAC detail. Premixed mortar may beused per manufacturer’s instructions. Adjust liquid volume may be adjusteddepending on water content of sand to obtain consistency and workability thatwill alow compaction during tamping of the mortar bed, and achieve minimumcompressive strength of 15 MPa after 28 days.

2.3 Grout Materials

.1 Polyurethane grout:

.1 Chemical, stain, and mildew resistant.

.2 Exceptional colour consistency.

.3 Indoor/outdoor service grade.

.4 For joints greater than 1.5 mm (1/16") less than 12.7 mm (1/2").

.5 ANSI A118.3-2008.

.6 Cured polyurethane grout to be chemically and stain resistant to ketchup,mustard, tea, coffee, milk, soda, beer, wine, bleach (3% solution), ammonia,juices, vegetable oil, detergents, brine, sugar, cosmetics and blood, as well asbeing chemically resistant to dilute food/mineral acids, gasoline and mineralspirits.


.1 Flextile ‘ColourMax Plus’.

.2 Grout colours to later selection by Consultant from manufacturer's full range.

.3 Grout sealer: as recommended by grout manufacturer.

2.4 Crack Suppression Membrane (Crack Isolation Membrane)

.1 ANSI A118.10-2008. Crack isolation membrane to be thin, cold applied, singlecomponent liquid and load bearing. Reinforcing fabric to be non-woven rot-proofspecifically intended for crack isolation membrane. Materials to be non-toxic, non-flammable, and non-hazardous during storage, mixing, application and when cured.


.1 Flextile ‘WP980’.

.2 Laticrete ‘Blue 92 Anti-Fracture Membrane’.

.3 Mapei ‘Mapeguard 2’.

.4 Mapei ‘Mapesonic SM’ (IIC 69).

2.5 Accessories and Related Materials

.1 Floor levelling and repair compound: "Ultra/Plan" High Compressive Strength Self-Levelling Underlayment as manufactured by Mapei.


Tiling

.2 Trim accessories: by Schluter; satin finish; products to later selection by Consultant.

.3 Joint sealants: mildew resistant sealant in accordance with Section 07900.

.4 Expansion and control joint sealant:

.1 One-component, neutral cure, exterior grade silicone sealant.

.2 Tensile Strength (ASTM C794-06): 1.5 MPa (225 psi).

.3 Hardness (ASTM D751-06; Shore A): 25 (coloured sealant)/15 (clear sealant)

.4 Weather Resistance (QUV Weather-ometer): 10000 hours (no change)


.1 Flextile ‘Tile & Grout Caulk’.

.2 Latricrete ‘Latasil Tile and Stone Sealant’.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Examination

.1 Ensure compatibility of Products supplied under this section, and which bear contactwith substrate.

.2 Before work of this section commences, examine the areas to be covered and report anyflaw or adverse conditions in writing to the Contractor and the Consultant. Do notproceed with the tilework until surfaces and conditions comply with the requirementsindicated in the manufacturer's instructions and in ANSI A108.5-2008 specification.

.3 Miscalibrated tiles, tiles with chipped corners, tiles with holes, will not be accepted forinstallation.

.4 Carefully inspect the tiles for colour variation. Tiles presenting noticeable variations shallbe carefully selected, set aside and used in areas where they fit in the patternhomogeneously. Provide for appropriate lighting equipment in addition to existing lightingin the immediate area where the installation is being performed so that any shadedifferences which are normally very slight can be identified easily.

3.2 Preparation

.1 Wall Surfaces:

.1 Roughen previously painted surfaces having hard glossy finish by sandpaper orother abrasive medium, and completely remove finishes which are notcompatible with compounds specified under this section, and that are to be incontact with such objectionable finishes.

.2 Remove all foreign matter such as loose mortar, plaster, visible laitance, cement,form release agents, dust and the like which would otherwise impede bonding oflevelling coat or mortars.

.3 Prime very dry gypsum, wood or porous concrete with primer, brush or rollerapplied at full strength in accordance with adhesive manufacturer'srecommendations.

.2 Mixing:


Tiling

.1 General: Mix mortars, additives and grouts in strict accordance withmanufacturer's requirements.

.2 Rotating blade mechanical mixer: Pour latex additive, start mixer and add sandfirst, followed by Portland cement. Mix no mortar in same mixer as a dissimilartype of mortar unless the mixer is first thoroughly washed clean.

.3 Pail batch mixing with low revolution drill mixers as follows:

.1 Premix separately prior to adding to the latex additive.

.2 Pour latex additive into clean mixing vessel and add dry materials slowlywhile mixing into a homogeneous and smooth consistency.

.3 Floor surfaces:

.1 Completely remove oil, grease, waste and all other contaminants from floor areasscheduled to receive new ceramic tile.

.2 Mechanically or chemically (using trisodium phosphate or similar material)remove all paints, adhesives or other previously applied compounds to exposeclean surface of existing concrete substrate. Do not use any acids.

.3 Levelling Underlayment: Where substrate varies beyond limitations as set forthhereinafter, prime substrate, mix and apply underlayment in accordance withmanufacturer's instructions.

.4 Concrete shall be minimum of 120 days old.

.5 Wire brush steel substrates to remove deleterious substances and rust, topromote full adhesion to steel.

.6 Provide levelling coat where required to bring surfaces to true even plane. Allowlevelling coat to completely cure prior to installation of tile finish.

3.3 Installation Tolerances

.1 Maximum allowable lippage:

.1 Tile up to 152 mm x 152 mm (6" x 6") in size: 1 mm (0.040”).

.2 Tile greater than 152 mm x 152 mm (6" x 6") in size: 2 mm (0.080”).

.2 Finish planes shall be straight and plumb to within 6 mm in 3 m (1/4” in 10 feet).


.1 Install products in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and as indicatedherein.

.2 Install in accordance with 2009-2010 TTMAC Manual Specification Guide 09 30 00 TileInstallation Manual as produced by the Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association ofCanada.except where specified otherwise.

.3 Install in accordance with ANSI A108.5-2008 and ANSI A108.10-2008.

.4 Lay out tile work as indicated on drawings, and where lay-out not indicated, lay-out tilesso tiles less than 1/2 the least dimension do not occur and with minimum amount ofcutting.

.5 Make joints even, straight, plumb and of uniform width.


Tiling

.6 Provide mortar beds and levelling coats in accordance with TTMAC details.

.7 Provide uniform positive slope to floor drains, to minimum allowable slope of 20 mm/m(1/4 inch/ft).

.8 Provide edge protection at tile edges and corners, unless otherwise indicated, usingmaximum length pieces.

.9 Provide edge protection and transition strips at tile transitions, unless otherwiseindicated, using maximum length pieces.

.10 Apply sealant at interface with frames at openings. Apply sealant in accordance withSection 07900 and manufacturer’s instructions. Sealant colour to later selection byConsultant.

.11 Install flooring to entire area indicated or scheduled unless otherwise indicated, includingcoverplates occurring within finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of colourand pattern with pieces of flooring installed on cover plates. Tightly butt edges toperimeter of floor around cover plates and to cover plates. Do not install flooring to floordrains occurring within finished floor areas.

.12 Review locations of tile accessories with Consultant prior to setting tile and comply withdirections of Consultant.

3.5 Setting

.1 Using a damp towel, wipe off the back side of floor tile to remove any dust or otherresidue that may be left over from the manufacturing process.

.2 Place as much tile as possible in one operation before setting bed reaches initial set.Clean back and remove bed when it has set before tile is laid.

.3 Prime materials and by methods specified by manufacturer of bond coat.

.4 Except where tiles have setting tabs, and except for expansion, control and isolationjoints, maintain joint widths as selected by Consultant.

.5 Back up tile coves, curbs and other shaped pieces solid with mortar. Rigidly set,reinforce or otherwise make firm and secure such pieces.

.6 Beat tiles in thoroughly and sufficiently to cause mortar ribs or notches to come togetherinto a continuous void free bed and allow the mortar to flow up partially into the jointspace to maximum of 1/3 the thickness of the tile. Sound floor tiles by tapping and resetall tiles with voids in setting bed.

.7 Tile shall contact setting materials for minimum of 95% coverage.

.8 Remove any excess setting material from the joint area so that 2/3 of the depth of the tileis available for grouting.

.9 Remove smudges or smears of setting material from the tile surface with a damp spongeor cloth immediately after final adjustment and beat-in while the mortar is fresh.

.10 Do necessary cutting and drilling of fixtures, fittings, and built-in or penetrating unitswithout marring the tile. Replace all cracked or damaged tile.

.11 Extend tile into recesses at windows, doors, or other openings.

.12 Extend tiles 100 mm (4") behind mirrors, and fully behind cabinets, cupboards and otherfixed objects at walls.


Tiling

.13 Cut tiles to conform to irregularities in wall lines and vertical planes along outer edges.Smooth cut edges with carborundum block or by other means to provide clean straightedge.

.14 At floor drains in mortar bed: Provide minimum setting bed of 10 mm (3/8"), sloped todrain at 6 mm (1/4") in 305 mm (12").

3.6 Crack Suppression Membrane (Crack Isolation Membrane) Installation

.1 Install membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

.2 Prepare substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.7 Mortar-Bed Tiling

.1 Apply latex-Portland cement thin bed mortar with flat trowel as a slurry bond coatapproximately 1.5 mm (1/16”) thick over clean concrete slab.

.2 Place latex-Portland cement thick bed mortar over slurry bond coat while bond coat iswet and tacky. Omit reinforcing wire fabric and fully compact bed by tamping.

.3 Spread latex-Portland cement thin bed mortar with flat trowel over surface of"green"/fresh mortar bed as a slurry bond coat approximately 1.5 mm (1/16”) thick.

.4 Apply latex-Portland cement thin bed mortar slurry bond coat to back of tile or thresholdand place each piece/sheet while slurry bond coats are wet and tacky. Beat with ahardwood block or rubber mallet to level/imbed pieces before mortar bed takes initial set.

.5 Clean excess mortar/adhesive from finished surfaces.

.6 For installation of tile over cured (pre-floated) latex-Portland cement thick bed mortar,follow Thin Bed Method.

3.8 Thin-Set Method

.1 Use the appropriate trowel notch size to ensure full bedding of the tile.

.2 Work the latex Portland cement mortar into good contact with the substrate and combwith notched side of trowel.

.3 Spread only as much latex Portland cement mortar as can be covered while the mortarsurface is still wet and tacky.

.4 When installing large format (>200 mm x 200 mm (8” x 8”)) tile/stone, rib/button/lug backtiles, pavers or sheet mounted ceramics/mosaics, spread latex Portland cement mortaronto the back of (i.e. ‘back-butter’) each piece/sheet in addition to trowelling latexPortland cement mortar over the substrate.

.5 Beat each piece/sheet into the latex Portland cement mortar with a beating block orrubber mallet to insure full bedding and flatness.

.6 Allow installation to set until firm.

.7 Clean excess latex Portland cement mortar from tile face and joints between pieces.

.8 Do not cover, bridge or fill tile joints located over expansion joints with adhesive.

3.9 Control Joints

.1 Carry substrate control and movements joints through to tile work.


Tiling

.2 Install control joints around the perimeter of tiled areas, around columns and where tileabuts other hard materials, also incorporate control joints over all building expansionjoints.

.3 Cut tiles or stones on both sides along the edges of control or expansion joints.

.4 Provide control joints equal to width of interior tile joints in floors and walls at perimetersof floor and within 7300 mm to 11 m (24 ft to 36 ft) centre to centre by raking out joints tofull depth of tile and cleaning joints for application of sealant in accordance with Section07900. In areas subject to sunlight or exposed to exterior provide control joints within2400 mm to 3500 mm (8 ft to 12 ft) centre to centre.

.1 Review locations with Consultant prior to setting tile and comply with instructiongiven by Consultant.

.5 Control joint width: 6.4 mm (1/4") minimum.

3.10 Grouting or Pointing

.1 Polymer modified cement grout:

.1 Allow tile installation to cure a minimum of 24 hours @ 21°C.

.2 Verify grout joints are free of dirt, debris or tile spacers.

.3 Sponge or wipe dust/dirt off veneer face and remove any water standing in joints.

.4 Apply grout release to face of absorptive, abrasive, non-slip or rough textured tileunits that are not hot paraffin coated to facilitate cleaning.

.5 Surface temperature must be between 4-35°C.

.6 Dampen dry surfaces with clean water.

.7 Spread using a sharp edged, hard rubber float and work grout into joints.

.8 Using diagonal (at 45° angle to direction of grout line) strokes, pack joints full andfree of voids/pits.

.9 Hold float face at a 90° angle to grouted surface and use float edge to"squeegee" off excess grout, stroking diagonally to reduce pulling grout out offilled joints.

.10 Initial cleaning can begin as soon as grout has become firm, typically 20-30minutes after grouting depending on temperature. Drag a clean towel dampenedwith water, or wipe a clean, dampened sponge, diagonally over the veneer faceto remove any grout haze left after “squeegeeing.”

.11 Once excess grout is removed, begin cleaning grout haze approximately 20-30minutes after grouting, but no later than once grout is fully cured.Using a circularmotion, lightly scrub grouted surfaces with the damp sponge to dissolve groutfilm/haze. Then drag sponge diagonally over the scrubbed surfaces to removefroth. Rinse towel/sponge frequently and change rinse water at least every 2 m²(200 ft²). Repeat this cleaning sequence again if grout haze is still present.

.12 Allow grout joints to become firm. Buff surface of grout with clean coarse cloth.Inspect joint for pinholes/voids and repair them with freshly mixed grout. Within24 hours, check for remaining haze and remove it with warm soapy water and anylon scrubbing pad, using a circular motion, to lightly scrub surfaces anddissolve haze/film.


Tiling

.2 Apply grout in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Use sanded grout forjoint size of 3 mm (1/8") and greater.

.3 Grout joint width to be 3.2 mm (1/8") unless otherwise indicated.

.4 Use caution when using sanded grouts to prevent scratching of tile or other materialsurfaces.

.5 Do not cover, bridge or fill any expansion joints in tile with grout.

3.11 Protection and Clean-Up

.1 Clean installed tile surfaces after installation and grouting cured.

.2 Re-point joints after cleaning to eliminate imperfections. Avoid scratching tile surfaces.

END OF SECTION


Acoustical Tile Ceiling Systems

PART 1 - GENERAL




.1 Acoustical tile ceiling systems.



.2 Single source responsibility: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling unit and suspensionsystem from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality inappearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.

.3 Coordination of work: coordinate layout and installation of acoustic ceiling units andsuspension systems components with other work supported by or penetrating throughceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, partition system and fire suppressionsystem components.

.4 Quality control to be in accordance with Section 01450.

1.4 Submittals




.3 Shop drawings:

.1 Submit manufacturer's standard details.

.2 Indicate lay-out, insert and hanger spacing and fastening details, splicing methodfor main and cross runners, location of access splines, and acoustical unitsupport at ceiling fixture.

.3 Submit reflected ceiling plans for special grid patterns as indicated.

.4 Samples:

.1 Submit sample of each component of ceiling system. Samples shall fullyrepresent materials to be supplied in colour, texture, finish and construction.

.2 Submit samples, load test data and design tables for each type of insert to beused in the Work for hanger supports.



.5 Mock-ups:

.1 Construct in locations acceptable to Consultant a typical sample ceilinginstallation 10 m2 in area, complete with perimeter wall trim, and cut tegular tiledemonstrating rectified edge. Modify sample as directed and as required toobtain approval. Upon acceptance retain sample as standard of quality foracoustical ceiling.

.2 Do not begin fabrication and erection of remainder of ceiling system until sampleinstallation has been reviewed and accepted. Accepted sample may become apart of the final Work, subject of approval of Consultant.

.6 Certificate of compliance:

.1 Submit certificate of compliance stating that the suspension system provided,including materials and installation, comply with the requirements of the ContractDocuments.


.1 Submit maintenance materials and manual in accordance with Section 01770.


.1 Submit maintenance and cleaning instructions for acoustical ceiling systemsfor incorporation into the maintenance manuals.


.1 Deliver for maintenance use, 2% of each type and colour of suspensioncomponents and acoustical tiles used in the Work.

.2 Pack panels in suitable containers, clearly dated and identified as to type andlocation of installation in the Work, and store where directed by Owner.


.1 Maximum deflection: L/360 in accordance with ASTM C635/C635M-07 deflection test.

.2 Design suspension system to support safely, and without distortion, the superimposedloads of:

.1 Air supply diffusers and return grilles.

.2 Lighting fixtures.

.3 Coordinate installation and cooperate with mechanical and electrical Subcontractors, toaccommodate mechanical and electrical items, or any other work required to beincorporated in or coordinated with the ceiling system.


.1 Fire resistance rated suspension system: Listed by accredited listing agency.


.1 Commence installation after building is enclosed with windows and exterior doors inplace and glazed, and roof watertight.

.2 Interior temperature of building to range from 15°C to 30°C and relative humidity of notmore than 70% before and during installation.



1.8 Delivery, Storage, and Handling

.1 Ship exposed members and mouldings in rigid crates to avoid damage. Bent ordeformed material shall be rejected. Baked enamelled members shall be suitablywrapped and protected against damage.

.2 Deliver acoustical ceiling units to the Place of the Work in original, unopened packagesand store in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage frommoisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

.3 Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature andstabilized moisture content.

.4 Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acoustical Tiles

.1 Non-fire rated acoustical tile:

.1 Size: 1’-0” x 4’-0” and 1’-0” x 1’-0” tiles, x 5/8” thickness, factory or site cut.

.2 Suspension system: Standard non-fire rated.

.3 Flame Spread: Class A Flame Spread 25 or under, to ASTM E84CAN/ULC S102.


.1 CGC Olympia Micro Clima-Plus.

.2 Fire-rated acoustical tile:

.1 Size: 2’-0” x 2’-0” x 5/8” thickness.

.2 Suspension system: Fire rated.

.3 Flame Spread: Class A Flame Spread 25 or under, to ASTM E84CAN/ULC S102.


.1 CGC Astro Clima-Plus.

2.2 Metal Suspension Systems

.1 Hanger anchorage devices: Screws, clips, bolts, concrete inserts or other devicesapplicable to the indicated method of structural anchorage for ceiling hangers and whosesuitability for use intended has been proven through standard construction practices orby certified test data. Size devices for 3 x calculated load supported except size directpull-out concrete inserts for 5 x calculated loads.

.2 Concrete hanger anchors; post installed: Steel eye bolts and nuts to suit ceiling hangerswith capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times that imposed by ceilingconstruction, as determined by testing per ASTM E488-96(2003), conducted by aqualified independent testing laboratory.

.1 Dynabolt Sleeve Anchor 'TW-1614' or Readi-Tie-Drive 'TD4-112' tie wire anchorby ITW Ramset/Red Head.

.2 Kwik-Bolt II 'HCKB 1/4' tie wire anchor by Hilti Corporation.



.3 Fasteners exposed to weather, condensation, and corrosion: Zinc-plated orstainless steel fasteners in applicable product lines specified in precedingparagraphs.

.3 Hangers: Galvanized wire, recommended by manufacturer of suspension system,minimum 2.66 mm (0.1") (12 gauge).

.4 Tie wire: 1.519 mm (0.06") diameter, galvanized steel wire.

.5 Suspension system accessories:

.1 Splices, clips, and perimeter moulding, of manufacturer's standard type to suitthe applicable conditions unless special conditions and access area are shown orspecified.

.2 Hold-down clips; manufacturer's standard type for fire-rated applications.

.6 Standard suspension system, non fire-rated:

.1 Intermediate duty to ASTM C635/C635M-07, 24 mm (15/16") interlocking teesystem, designed to support acoustical panels in patterns indicated withdeflection of main tees less than L/360, consisting of main tees and cross tees.The system shall provide lock joint intersections of cross and main tees.


.1 Armstrong ‘Prelude ML 15/16" Exposed Tee Systems’

.2 CGC ‘DX’

.7 Fire rated suspension system:

.1 Intermediate duty to ASTM C635, interlocking tee system designed to supportacoustical panels in patterns indicated in fire rated ceiling assemblies, consistingof main tees and cross tees, 24 mm (15/16") exposed tee. The system shallprovide lock joint intersections of cross and main tees.


.1 Armstrong ‘Prelude ML 15/16" Exposed Tee Systems’

.2 CGC ‘DXL’

2.3 Metal Finish

.1 Metal exposed in finished work shall have a pre-coated baked enamel finish in non-yellowing colour. Submit paint formulation of grid system to lighting fixture, speakergrille, sprinkler and diffuser manufacturers to ensure consistency of colour, sheen andtexture of all exposed metal components in the ceiling assemblies. Colour shall be:

.1 Flat white.

PART 3- EXECUTION


.1 Do not start installation until exterior glazing has been completed and exterior openingsare closed in. Ensure wet work is completed and dried out to a degree acceptable topanel manufacturer before installation is commenced. Maintain uniform temperatures ofat least 16°C for 72 hours prior to commencement of the work of this section andmaintain temperature until completion of the work of this section.



.2 Install ceiling panels and metal suspension system in accordance with manufacturer'sdirections. Where manufacturer's directions are at variance with Contract Documents,notify Consultant before proceeding with installation.

.3 Do not commence installation until all work above suspended ceiling has beencompleted, inspected and accepted.

3.2 Installation - Suspension System

.1 Install suspension system rigid, secure, square, level and plumb, framed and erected tomaintain dimensions and contours indicated, and in accordance with ASTM C636,CISCA installation standards and any other applicable national or local coderequirements. Make allowance for thermal and structural movement.

.2 Attach hangers to structure with inserts and hanger supports. Do not use powderactivated fasteners.

.3 Support hangers for suspended ceiling grid independent of walls, columns, pipes andducts.

.4 Space hangers for ceilings at maximum 1220 mm (48") on centre in both directions.Provide additional hangers as required.

.5 Locate hangers at not more than 150 mm (6") from ends of main tee members.

.6 Erect suspension systems at required heights and water tube, transit, or laser beamlevel to tolerance of 1:1200.

.7 Hold-down clips; fire-rated ceiling system: Install hold-down clips when ceiling panelsweigh less than 4.88 kg/m² (1.0 lb/ft²) and as required.

.8 Install fire-rated assemblies in accordance with assembly listing requirements in order toobtain fire ratings indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

.9 Where lighting fixtures, diffusers, and the like are recessed into fire rated ceilingsystems, provide enclosure to maintain required fire rating.

.10 Allowable tolerances: to ASTM C636 / C636M - 08.

.11 Design suspension systems for a maximum mid-span deflection not exceeding L/360.

.12 Install exposed tee members to pattern indicated. Securely attach hangers to main teemembers.

.13 Exposed tees shall be as long as possible to minimize joints. Make joints square, tight,flush and reinforce with splines. Distribute joints to prevent clustering in one area.

.14 Space tee bars to suit ceiling panels and as detailed, and to accommodate lightingfixtures, diffusers and return grilles.

.15 Cooperate in the installation of ceiling systems, making adjustments where required toensure that the lighting fixtures, supply diffusers, exhaust grilles and other built-in itemsproperly fit into ceiling module and finish flush with rest of ceiling.

.16 Restrict creep inside module panels so that in all cases strips are centred on modulelines.

3.3 Installation - Tiles

.1 Take precautions during installation to ensure tile edges are not chipped or otherwisedamaged.



.2 Rectify cut tile edges of tile to match factory cut edges.

.3 Install acoustical tiles to form horizontal and level ceiling with all parts flush and jointsbutted tightly to hairline appearance.

.4 Distribute variations in colour and texture of panels to obtain a uniform appearance.

.5 Minimize field cutting. Where necessary, match factory cut edge and colour.

3.4 Cleaning and Completion

.1 Carefully examine suspended acoustical ceilings on completion and replace uneven ordefective or damaged materials, eliminate all waves, remedy damaged exposed finishedsurfaces and remove soiled or stained areas.

.2 Clean dirty and discoloured surfaces of acoustical units and suspension systemaccording to manufacturer's recommendations.

END OF SECTION


Wood Floor Refinishing

PART 1 - GENERAL




.1 Wood floor patching and repairing.

.2 Wood floor refinishing.


.1 Qualifications: Provide work of this section, executed by refinishers with minimum 5years experience in application of Products and systems specified and with approval andtraining of Product manufacturers.


.3 Conduct quality control in accordance with Section 01450. Conduct quality control inaccordance with NWFA (National Wood Flooring Association) Installation Guidelines –March 2007.

1.4 Submittals




.2 Submit NWFA (National Wood Flooring Association) standards for installationand sanding and finishing guidelines for hardwood flooring.

.3 Samples:

.1 Submit 300 mm (12") long samples of wood flooring finish.

.4 Mock-ups:

.1 Provide minimum 3050 mm x 3050 mm (120" x 120") mock-up of floor in locationas directed by Consultant.

.2 Retain approved mock-up for judging completed floor.



.2 Submit manufacturer’s instructions for incorporation into maintenance manuals.


.1 Install materials of this section only when surfaces and air temperatures have beenmaintained between 18°C and 32°C for 48 hours preceding installation, and will be somaintained during installation and for 48 hours thereafter. Maintain a minimumtemperature of 13°C after above period.



.2 Ensure that adequate ventilation is provided during installation and curing of materials ofthis section.

.3 Concrete floors are to be dry, and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting,and be free of curing/sealing compounds, residue from paint and adhesives.

.4 Conduct the tests in accordance with ASTM F710-08 and the following:

.1 Test for moisture vapour transmission in accordance with ASTM F710-08 andASTM F1869-04 or ASTM F2170-02 in accordance with manufacturer’s writtenflooring installation instructions. Results must not exceed 170 μg/m2 (3 poundsper 1,000 square feet) in 24 hours when tested to ASTM F1869-04, or exceed75% when tested to ASTM F2170-02.

.2 Test for surface pH. Levels of pH shall not exceed the written recommendationsof the flooring manufacturer and adhesive manufacturer. Test in accordance withASTM F710-08.

.3 For each test type: Conduct 3 tests for flooring applications up to 93 m2 (1000square feet) in area, and 1 additional test for each additional 93 m2 (1000 squarefeet) of flooring area.

.5 In areas that are exposed to intense or direct sunlight, Products shall be protectedduring the conditioning, installation, and adhesive curing periods, by covering the lightsource.

1.6 Warranty


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Floor Finish System

.1 Oil modified urethane floor finish system:

.1 Floor sealer:

.1 Description:

.1 Oil modified formula reduces grain raise and prepares the floor forprotective top coat of floor finish.

.2 Ingredients: Oil modified polyurethane resin, mineral spirits (solvent),driers, defoamers.

.3 Colour: Light amber, clear when dry.

.4 VOC: Does not exceed 500 g/L (2.9 lb/gal).

.5 Maximum cure: 2 weeks.

.6 Drying time: 8 - 12 hours.


.1 BonaKemi USA Inc. 'Sport Seal Sealer'

.2 Floor finish:

.1 Description:



.1 Oil modified wood floor finish specifically formulated for professional useon maple sports floors, providing a tough, high-build polyurethane finish.

.2 Ingredients: Oil modified polyurethane resin, mineral spirits (solvent),driers, defoamers.

.3 Colour: Light amber, clear when dry.

.4 Gloss level: (60 degrees) 88+.

.5 VOC: Does not exceed 450 g/L (3.8 lb/gal).

.6 Percent cured after 24 Hours: 50%.

.7 Maximum cure: 100% in 2 weeks.

.8 Drying time: 8 - 12 hours.


.1 BonaKemi USA Inc. 'Sport Poly'

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Wood Floor Finishing

.1 Sand and prepare existing wood flooring to NOFMA-accepted methods.

.1 Apply floor finishing and line painting products in accordance with manufacturersspecifications.

.2 For oil modified floor finish system, make final sanding cut to 100 - 120 gritpaper. Screen with 100 - 120 grit screen.

.3 Vacuum thoroughly.

.4 For oil modified floor finish system, tack with mineral spirits.

.5 Apply 2 coats floor sealer and screen as specified above.

.6 Sweep, pad, and tack. Allow to dry (at least 30 minutes).

.7 Mix finish system components in accordance with manufacturer's printeddirections. Do not adulterate finish system.

.8 Apply 2 finish coats of floor finish to match approved mock-up, at coverage rateof 46-55 m2/L (500-600 ft²/per gallon).

.9 Allow floor finish to cure thoroughly before permitting traffic (at least 7 days).Abrade floor finish between coats when allowed to cure longer than 48 hoursbetween coats.

.10 Apply floor finishing system to provide a premium quality, smooth and consistentfinish free of imperfections, dust or lint particles, and scratches or abrasions.

3.2 Protection

.1 Prevent traffic to floor finishing materials to printed direction of manufacturer.

.2 Traffic is prohibited on floor finish coats for a period of 48 hours minimum, with only lighttraffic permitted up to 7 days. Until floor is fully cured (7 days minimum), traffic over floorfinish is discouraged, including the application of protection sheets.



.3 Do not use protection materials which will damage floor finish, such as plastic film, rosinpaper, non-breathable membranes, and the like, to recommendations of manufacturer.

.4 Do not use cleaning compounds until floor finish is fully cured.

END OF SECTION


Resilient Base

PART 1 - GENERAL




.1 Resilient base.



1.4 Submittals




.3 Samples:

.1 Submit 3 - 305 mm (12") long samples of each colour and type of base material.Include outside corner of base.




.1 Submit maintenance instructions for inclusion in the maintenance manuals.


.1 Deliver 2% of each colour, pattern and type of resilient accessory required forthis project for maintenance use. Store where directed. Clearly identify eachbox.

.2 Maintenance materials to be same production run as installed materials.


.1 Temperature of room and materials shall be at least 18°C for 24 hours before, duringand 7 days after the installation of resilient accessories.

1.6 Warranty


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials



Resilient Base

.1 Amtico.

.2 Burkemercer.

.3 Johnsonite.

.2 Resilient base types:

.1 Resilient base: Vinyl TightLock Resilient Wall Base, as manufactured byJohnsonite, 111.1 mm (4-3/8") nominal overall height, in a 6.3 mm (1/4") taperedwedge thickness, complete with preformed outside corners and field made insidecorners.


.3 Block wall filler: Latex filler, "Planicrete AC" by Mapei Canada Ltd., "43 Thin-Set MortarAdditive and 53 Floor Mix" by Flextile Ltd. or waterproof filler recommended by flooringmanufacturer.

.4 Adhesive: Low VOC adhesive, as recommended by manufacturer, maximum VOC limitof 50 g/L (1.8 oz/gal).

.1 Porous wall surfaces: Johnsonite #960 Wall Base adhesive.

.2 Non-porous wall surfaces (i.e.: metal, epoxy paint, ceramics): Johnsonite #945Contact Bond adhesive.

.5 Sealant: clear silicone, as manufactured by Tremco, CGE, or Dow Corning, maximumVOC limit of 70 g/L (2.5 oz/gal).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Examination

.1 Examine substrate to ensure clean lines, correct level and freedom from cracks, ridges,dusting, scaling and carbonation.

.2 Examine walls in advance of application of base to ensure that surfaces are protectedagainst entry of water and moisture. Perform compatibility test with primer/adhesive andsubstrate.

3.2 Installation of Resilient Base

.1 Allow coiled wall base to lay flat for at least 24 hours at 18°C prior to installation, andmaintain this temperature during installation.

.2 Begin installation after adjacent work has been completed at walls and overhead areas.

.3 Spread adhesive to the ribbed surface (back) of the wall base with a 3 mm (1/8") square-notched trowel; allow slight set-up, then bring base into contact. Ensure full and secureadhesion of base to substrate. The adhesive should cover 80% of the back surface.Leave a 6 mm (1/4") uncovered space at the top of the wall base to prevent the adhesivefrom oozing onto the wall above the base when installed.

.4 Position wall base on wall surface and roll with hand roller. Always roll back to startingpoint to prevent stretching the wall base.

.5 Set base to ensure installation over finished flooring material is free of gaps.

.6 Install base in longest lengths possible, minimum 2440 mm (8’). Adhere toe of base tosubstrate, and ensure edge of toe is straight.


Resilient Base

.7 Install straight and level to variation of 1:1000.

.8 At outside corners apply epoxy adhesive and chamfer. Round off with fine gradesandpaper. Remove any scratches or scuffs with paste wax.

.9 Install base to substrate as scheduled and/or detailed and in accordance withmanufacturer's recommendations.

.10 Ensure that substrate is solid and free of voids, gaps, or other defects which willpreclude adequate adhesion, or will ghost or telegraph through finished base installation.

.11 Scribe and fit to door frames and other obstructions.

.12 Joints shall be tightly fitted, straight and vertical, and not less than 610 mm (24") fromcorners.

.13 Provide joints in base over substrate control joints.

.14 Field-made inside corners:

.1 Install wall base and terminate into the corner.

.2 Position another piece of wall base on opposing wall, without adhesive,approximately 25 mm (1") from the installed piece.

.3 Utilizing the dividers, place the hooked end at the top of the installed piece andthe pointer end on the top of the uninstalled piece. Carefully, move the dividersdownward in a straight vertical motion, allowing the hooked end of the dividers tofollow the profile of the installed piece. At the same time, place adequatepressure on the pointer end to transfer and/or scribe the profile onto the surfaceof the uninstalled piece.

.4 Use a utility knife to cut the pattern on the uninstalled wall base, apply adhesive,and position the trimmed section into place.

.15 Install factory preformed outside corners.

3.3 Cleaning

.1 Remove any excessive adhesive from surfaces of the base as work progresses inmanner described by manufacturer. Remove wet adhesive with a water dampened cloth.If adhesive has dried, use a cloth dampened with mineral spirits.

.2 Wash surfaces using non-phosphate detergent to remove silicone, wax, dirt and dustusing rotary scrubbing machines fitted with nylon brushes. Wash with neutral milddetergent and water, thoroughly buff dry with smooth wool pad. Do not apply any othercompounds.

END OF SECTION


Vinyl Composite Tile Flooring

PART 1 - GENERAL






1.3 Submittals


.2 Product data:


.3 Samples:

.1 Submit 3 samples of each pattern and colour of vinyl composite tile flooringproposed for use in the work of this section.



.1 Submit maintenance data in accordance with Section 01770.

.2 Provide data sheets for maintenance of flooring for incorporation intomaintenance manual.


.1 Submit maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01770.

.2 Deliver 2% of each color, pattern and type flooring material required for thisproject for maintenance use. Store where directed. Clearly identify each box.

.3 Maintenance materials to be same production run as installed materials.


.1 Install materials of this section only when surfaces and air temperatures have beenmaintained between 18°C and 32°C for 48 hours preceding installation, and will be somaintained during installation and for 48 hours thereafter. Maintain a minimumtemperature of 13°C after above period.

.2 Ensure that adequate ventilation is provided during installation and curing of materials ofthis section.

.3 Ensure that spark-proof electrical equipment is provided, and smoking is prohibited, inareas where flammable adhesives are used. Store materials to prevent spontaneouscombustion.

.4 Concrete floors are to be dry, and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting,and be free of curing/sealing compounds, residue from paint and adhesives.



.5 Conduct the tests in accordance with ASTM F710-08 and the following:

.1 Test for moisture vapour transmission in accordance with ASTM F710-08 andASTM F1869-04 or ASTM F2170-02 in accordance with manufacturer’s writtenflooring installation instructions. Results must not exceed 170 μg/m2 (3 poundsper 1,000 square feet) in 24 hours when tested to ASTM F1869-04, or exceed75% when tested to ASTM F2170-02.

.2 Test for surface pH. Levels of pH shall not exceed the written recommendationsof the flooring manufacturer and adhesive manufacturer. Test in accordance withASTM F710-08.

.3 For each test type: Conduct 3 tests for flooring applications up to 93 m2 (1000square feet) in area, and 1 additional test for each additional 93 m2 (1000 squarefeet) of flooring area.

.6 In areas that are exposed to intense or direct sunlight, Products shall be protectedduring the conditioning, installation, and adhesive curing periods, by covering the lightsource.

1.5 Warranty


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

.1 Vinyl composite tile: to CSA A126.1-M1984; 3 mm thick x 305 mm x 305 mm (1/8"thick x 12" x 12").

.1 Pattern and colour to later selection by the Consultant from the manufacturer'sfull range, allow for up to 6 colours.

.2 Acceptable Products/manufacturers:

.1 'Imperial Texture Standard Excelon', as manufactured by Armstrong.

.2 Standard patterns, Azrock by Tarkett.

.3 Flextile, ‘Architectural Series – Flex Thru/Flex Thru Plus/Flex Crystal’.

.2 Primers and adhesives: water resistant recommended by flooring manufacturer forspecific material on applicable substrate, above, at or below grade.

.3 Substrate filler; minor patching and filling: white premix latex requiring water only toproduce cementitious paste.

.4 Epoxy levelling compound and screed; major patching and levelling: Chembond 'Chem-Epoxy 9931' to ANSI A118.3-2008.

.5 Sealer and polish: institutional grade as approved by manufacturer.

.6 Transition strips; as required between adjacent flooring finishes: manufactured byJohnsonite or Mercer or Finercraft to suit conditions at the Place of the Work for smoothtransition.

.1 Colour to later selection by Consultant from manufacturer’s full range. Adhesiveto be as recommended by manufacturer.

.7 Floor access covers/drains: in accordance with Division 15.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Examination

.1 Examine substrate to ensure clean lines, correct level and freedom from cracks, ridges,dusting, scaling and carbonation.

.2 Examine floors in advance of application of flooring to ensure that floors are protectedagainst entry of water and moisture. Perform compatibility test with primer/adhesive andsubstrate.

3.2 Preparation

.1 Comply with recommendations of ASTM F710-08.

.2 Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.

.3 Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesivesand that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended bymanufacturer. Do not use solvents.

.4 Alkalinity and adhesion testing: Perform tests and proceed with installation only aftersubstrates pass testing. Document tests performed and submit in writing to Consultant.

.5 Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowel-applied levelling andpatching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smoothsubstrate.

.6 Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are tobe installed.

.1 Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will beinstalled at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

.7 Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediatelybefore installation.

.8 Remove chalking and dusting from concrete surfaces with wire brushes.

.9 Where flooring adjoins thicker floor materials, apply epoxy levelling screed, feather out tomake up difference in level between materials.

3.3 Tile Flooring Application

.1 Apply adhesive uniformly using recommended trowel in accordance with flooringmanufacturer's instructions. Do not spread more adhesive than can be covered byflooring before initial set takes place.

.2 Lay flooring with joints parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile pattern.Border tiles minimum half tile width.

.3 Install flooring to entire area indicated or scheduled, including coverplates occurringwithin finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of colour and pattern with piecesof flooring installed on cover plates. Tightly butt edges to perimeter of floor around coverplates and to cover plates. Do not install flooring to floor drains occurring within finishedfloor areas.

.4 As installation progresses, roll tile with polished, clean 45 kg (100 lb) roller to ensure fulladhesion. Telegraphing of adhesive marks not permitted.



.5 Cut tile and fit neatly around fixed or excessively heavy objects.

.6 Terminate flooring at centerline of door in openings where adjacent floor finish or colouris dissimilar.

.7 Centreline of reducer strip should coincide with centreline of door.

3.4 Edge Protection

.1 Protect exposed edges of flooring, where finished and unfinished areas adjoining, bymeans of a reducing strip butting to and flush with the finished surface of the flooringcovering material and securely adhered to the substrate material.

.2 Install reducing strips where flooring terminates. Set flush with adjacent floor finishes.

3.5 Cleaning and Polishing

.1 Remove excessive adhesive from surfaces of the tile and base as Work progresses.

.2 Protect laid flooring from construction traffic for a period of 4 to 7 days to allow flooring tobond firmly. At the end of this time, thoroughly clean all surfaces with a neutral detergentcleaner and single-disc floor machine approved by manufacturer of vinyl composite tileflooring materials, and apply 2 coats of sealer and 2 coats of polish.

3.6 Protection

.1 Protect new floors from time of final set of adhesive until final inspection. Install suitableprotection sheeting, lap joints of material by 150 mm (6") and seal with non-asphaltictape.

.2 Prohibit traffic on floor for 48 hours after installation. No heavy traffic, rolling loads, orfurniture placement for 72 hours after installation.

.3 Install floor protection in areas where other work, repairs and installation of equipment,and foot traffic will occur.

END OF SECTION


Terrazzo Repair and Patching

PART 1– GENERAL




.1 Epoxy terrazzo flooring:

.1 Patch, repair and make good existing terrazzo flooring.

.2 Cutting of existing terrazzo bases, refinish exposed edges.

1.3 Reference Standards

.1 Do terrazzo work in accordance with 2002 TTMAC Terazzo Specification Guide 09400,produced by the Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association of Canada (TTMAC), exceptwhere specified otherwise.

.2 ASTM C1028 - 07 Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient ofFriction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method, minimum coefficient of friction of 0.6.


.1 Subcontractor qualifications:

.1 Work of this section, executed by competent applicators with minimum 5 yearsexperience in application of Products and systems specified and with approvaland training of Product manufacturers.

.2 Subcontractor must be approved by the flooring system manufacturer. SubmitSubcontractor’s certification letter prepared by the flooring system manufacturer.

.2 Execute work of this section only under full time supervision of qualified Subcontractor’ssite supervisor.

.3 Manufacturer qualifications:

.1 Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section,with minimum 10 years experience.

.2 Manufacturer shall be a member in good standing with the Terrazzo, Tile andMarble Association of Canada, providing materials meeting the minimumstandards of TTMAC.



.6 Manufacturer’s field review to be in accordance with Section 01450.

.7 Materials shall be sourced from one manufacturer unless otherwise specified.

1.5 Submittals






.3 Samples:

.1 Submit 200 x 300 mm (8” x 12”) samples, on rigid backing, of each material andsystem proposed for use in the work of this section, demonstrating colour/recipeand showing successive applications of each coat, for verification by Consultantof match with existing.

.4 Mock-up:

.1 Construct a mock-up of a complete patch or repair of one area for each type offloor coating system requiring patching or repair complete with cove base.

.2 Areas to be used for mock-up purposes shall be as directed by the Consultant.

.3 Accepted mock-up may remain as part of final installation.

.5 Certificates:

.1 Manufacturer's representative shall inspect surfaces and substrate preparationsprior to material installation and submit written confirmation that substrates havebeen prepared in a manner which will not affect Product performance orwarranty.

.2 Floor coating system manufacturer shall submit certificate of acceptance thatinstallation meets their requirements.

.6 Maintenance instructions:

.1 Submit manufacturer’s maintenance instructions for incorporation into theoperation and maintenance manuals in accordance with Section 01770.


.1 Maintain ambient temperature of not less than 13°C13 °C and below 29°C , and a floortemperature of not less than 16°C from 7 days before installation to at least 48 hoursafter completion of work of this section. Maintain relative humidity of not higher than 40%during same period.

.2 Ensure substrate is sound, dry, free of dust, dirt, paint, grease, oil or other foreignsubstances that may adversely affect proper adhesion of the coating.

.3 Provide adequate ventilation during installation.

.4 Advise other trades of fixtures and fittings not to be installed until floor coating materialsare cured, such as: radiators, painting, decorating, floor-supported equipment orcabinetwork, caulking, plumbing, fixtures, and the like.

.5 Protect adjacent surfaces from damage resulting from work of this section. If necessary,mask or cover adjacent surfaces, fixtures, equipment, etc. by suitable means.

.6 Post "NO SMOKING" signs while work is in progress and curing.

.7 Commencement of installation implies acceptance of concrete surface as suitable toreceive coating system.

.8 Apply coating in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction.



.9 Concrete floors are to be dry, and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting.Maximum percentage of moisture acceptable is 1.8 kg/93 m2 (4 lb/1000 ft2) in a 24 hourperiod, unless otherwise specified by manufacturer’s printed literature.

.1 Testing requirements:

.1 Test for moisture vapour transmission in accordance with ASTM F1869-04.

.2 Test for surface pH.

.3 For each test type: Perform 3 tests for flooring applications less than 186 m2

(2000 square feet) in area, and 1 test per additional 93 m2 (1000 square feet).


.1 Deliver materials to job site in sealed undamaged containers clearly labelled with nameand batch number.

.2 Store materials at site in an area specifically set aside for purpose that is locked,ventilated, and maintained at temperatures recommended in manufacturer's literature.

.3 Comply with health and fire regulations in storage area, and during handling andapplication.

1.8 Warranty


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

.1 All components and Products of the matrix terrazzo shall be manufactured and suppliedby a single manufacturer.

.2 Cement: to CSA A3000-03, Type 10, white.

.3 Sand, fine and coarse aggregates to CAN/CSA-A23.1-04.

.4 Water: potable.

.5 Marble chips: to CSA A194.1-1967 for uniformity, soundness and abrasion resistance.Grade chips in accordance with TTMAC standard.

.1 Terrazzo marble chip recipe: to match existing.

.6 Terrazzo cleaner:

.1 Ph factor between 7 and 10, where applicable.

.2 Biodegradable and phosphate free.

.7 Sealer:

.1 Three coats Johnson Wax Professional ‘Carefree Matte Low Gloss Floor Finish’.

.8 Pigments: non-fading mineral pigments to British standard 1014.

.9 Reinforcing mesh: 50 mm x 50 mm (2" x 2") No. 16 x No. 16, steel mesh, electricalwelded, galvanized after fabrication, conforming to ASTM A185 / A185M-07.

.10 Slip sheet: 25um (2 mil) polyethylene film to CAN/CGSB 51.34-M86.



.11 Cleaners, sealers and floor finish: to TTMAC standard 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 2001,2002, and 3001 as applicable, or as recommended by terrazzo flooring manufacturer.

.12 Divider strips: White alloy zinc, ‘L’ shaped, depth to match flooring system thickness, tolocations as indicated.

.13 Termination and transition strips: Termination strips: White alloy zinc, ‘L’ shaped, depthto match flooring system thickness, to locations as indicated.

.14 Control Joints: Control joints: Back to back white alloy zinc strips with black neoprenefiller.

.15 Anti-fracture Membrane:

.1 100% solids polyurethane, 500 microns (20 mils) DFT, as recommended byepoxy resin manufacturer.

.2 Joint filler as recommended by floor system manufacturer.

.16 Floor Levelling: Underbed: 1 part cement to 4 parts sand by volume. Use no more than18 litres (4.8 gal) of water per bag of cement for underbed mix.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Removal of Existing

.1 Strip existing flooring in areas requiring patching or repair to nearest existing dividerstrip, unless directed otherwise by Consultant.

3.2 Examination

.1 Verify that specified environmental conditions are ensured before commencing work ofthis section.

.2 Examine surfaces to receive floor coatings. They shall be smooth, sound, dry, and freefrom conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence, or quality of work. Testsurfaces for moisture content to ensure that they are suitable for application, and fullycured. Moisture content of the concrete shall be checked using a Delmhorst moisturemeter. Moisture content shall be within the limits set by the flooring manufacturer prior tocommencing work of this section.

.3 Surfaces to receive coating shall be equivalent to a light steel trowel finish for new orpatched concrete surface.

.4 Ensure that surfaces to receive floor coatings have been Provided as specified in thework of other sections, that they will not adversely affect execution, permanence, orquality of work of this section, and that they can be put into acceptable condition bymeans of preparation specified in this section.

.5 Examine concrete slab surfaces for slope to drain irregularities which could create non-sloping or ponding conditions on the flooring system surface.

.6 Defective work resulting from application to unsatisfactory surfaces will be consideredthe responsibility of those performing the work of this section.

.7 Ensure that floor drains are installed flush with top of floor slabs.



3.3 Surface Preparation

.1 After acceptance of surfaces, prepare them as required by the work of this section.Remove projections and other conditions that may affect the installation of the flooringsystem.

.2 Fill open control joints, and other cracks and voids with sealant material compatible withfloor coating materials.

.3 Clean surfaces by steel shotblast, sandblast, or other method approved bymanufacturer. Thoroughly vacuum clean floors upon completion of blast operation.Prime and seal surfaces as recommended by floor coating manufacturer. Substrate tobe approved in writing by manufacturer prior to application of coating.

.1 Submit written report to Consultant following procedures for manufacturer’s fieldreview in accordance with Section 01450.

.4 Cover or mask surfaces adjacent to those receiving floor coating to protect work ofothers and property from damage and soil.

3.4 Floor Levelling

.1 Install in accordance with manufacturer's and 2009-2010 TTMAC Manualrecommendations and guidelines.

.2 Underbed: Apply over prepared substrate and screed level making allowances forapplicable terrazzo topping. Permit underbed to cure minimum 24 hours prior toreceiving terrazzo topping.

3.5 Anti-Fracture Membrane

.1 Install in accordance with flooring manufacturer's and 2009-2010 TTMAC Manualrecommendations and guidelines.

.2 Concrete joints and cracks shall be routed, cleaned and filled with joint filler. Provide150 mm (6") wide membrane, centred on joints, applied in accordance withmanufacturer's written instruction.

3.6 Application

.1 General:

.1 Apply coatings with care to ensure that no laps, voids, or other marks orirregularities are visible, and with an appearance of uniform colour, sheen andtexture, all within limitations of materials and areas concerned.

.2 Match colours and textures of approved samples.

.3 Make clean true junctions with no visible overlap between adjoining applicationsof coatings.

.4 Place cloths and other disposable coating materials, that are a fire hazard, inclosed metal containers and remove from building every night.

.5 Post "No Smoking" signs and ensure that spark-proof electrical equipment isused in area where inflammable materials are being applied.

.6 Erect barriers to prevent the entry and presence of personnel not performingwork of this section during application of coatings, and for 48 hours followingcompletion of application.



.7 Install flooring to entire area indicated or scheduled, including coverplatesoccurring within finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of colour andpattern with pieces of flooring installed on cover plates. Tightly butt edges toperimeter of floor around cover plates and to cover plates. Do not install flooringto floor drains occurring within finished floor areas.

.2 Provide termination strips between dissimilar flooring materials and fill with sealant.

.3 Carefully prepare and mix materials used in flooring work in compliance with flooringmanufacturer's written instructions.

.4 Flooring Application: Apply each component of flooring system in compliance withflooring manufacturer's directions to produce a smooth and uniform monolithic wearingsurface, uninterrupted except at divider strips, or other types of joints, indicated orrequired.

.1 After a minimum of 24 hours following installation of underbed, soak underbed,remove excess water and place a slurry consisting of cement and colour usingsame proportions as used for topping.

.2 Wet topping mixture, mix thoroughly and apply to underbed while slurry is stillwet. Sprinkle topping with wetted marble chips using same formula used intopping mix, to ensure finished surface will consist of marble chips using sameformula used in topping mix, to ensure finished surface will consist of marblechips to match approved samples. Roll topping with heavy rollers to compacttopping and remove excess water and cement. Hand trowel to level terrazzotopping flush with top of divider strips and cure.

.3 Surface and grout terrazzo when it has set sufficiently hard. Surface by machinerubbing with No. 24 grit or finer abrasive blocks. Use plenty of water duringgrinding. Immediately following initial grinding, flush terrazzo surfaces thoroughlyusing water only and apply a grout to fill the voids. Mix grouts same proportionsas used in topping.

.4 Allow grouted surface to cure for at least 48 hours and then re-surface bymachine rubbing using No. 120 grit abrasive blocks and plenty of water.

.5 Following removal of grout, scrub terrazzo thoroughly using machine scrubbersand ample clean water. Rinse terrazzo with clean water and then dry thoroughly.Apply coat of sealer as soon after cleaning as possible.

.6 Apply sealer in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

.7 Apply second and third coat of sealer in same manner as first, but not until Workis complete and terrazzo has been cleaned again as specified above.

.8 Allow minimum 30 minutes drying time between coats.

.5 Base detail as indicated.

.6 Provide termination strips at cove base and where epoxy terrazzo meets adjacentflooring types. Provide grout on adjacent flooring surfaces suitable for level transition toepoxy terrazzo divider strip.

.7 Provide transition strips where indicated.

.8 Match approved samples in sheen, colour and texture.

.9 Joints:



.1 Where substrate is interrupted by expansion or control joints, Provide joint inflooring to comply with details indicated, or if not indicated, as recommended byflooring manufacturer.

3.7 Existing Terrazzo Clean-up

.1 Strip existing finish to approval of Consultant using equipment and method asrecommended by manufacturer.

.2 Wash surfaces with a neutral cleaner, rinse with clean water and allow to dry. Apply 2coats of sealer in accordance with flooring manufacturer's directions.


.1 Touch up and refinish minor defective work of this section. Refinish entire coated surfaceareas where finish is damaged or otherwise unacceptable.

.2 Remove promptly, as work progresses, spilled or spattered coating materials fromsurfaces of work performed under other sections. Clean uncured flooring materials fromsurfaces in accordance with flooring manufacturer’s written instructions. Removal ofcured materials requires scraping, chipping, or grinding. Do not mar surfaces whileremoving. Clean floors on completion of work.

.3 Leave storage and mixing areas in same condition as equivalent spaces in Work. Cleanflooring just prior to final acceptance using materials and procedures recommended byflooring manufacturer.

.4 Final cleaning is specified in Section 01770.

END OF SECTION


Painting

PART 1 – GENERAL




.1 Interior painting.

.2 Exterior painting.

1.3 Extent of Work

.1 Paint and finish "paintable" surfaces for area of the Work indicated in the ContractDocuments except those exempt by the Contract Documents.

.2 The following surfaces are considered "non-paintable" for purposes of this Contract.Omit painter's finishes from following items:

.1 Material and equipment furnished completely prime and finish painted bymanufacturer;

.2 Internal surfaces of steel tanks and stacks;

.3 Sprayed fire-resistant materials;

.4 Exterior concrete including building walls, building floors and pavements, exceptas otherwise scheduled.

.5 Stainless steel, weathering steel, copper, bronze, chromium plate, nickel,anodized or lacquered aluminum, monel metal;

.6 Exposed insulation, glass, plastic, brick, stone, resilient floors, treads and bases,tile and hardware;

.7 Prefinished metals, unless required to be colour coded.

.8 Metallic and mastic insulation finishes;

.9 Abrasive material finishes on floors, stair treads, stair nosings and landings;

.10 Insulated electric cables;

.11 Machined parts of machinery and equipment.

.12 Concealed surfaces.

1.4 References

.1 Canadian Painting Contractors Association Painting Specifications Manual, latestedition, available from the Ontario Painting Contractors Association (OPCA) andreferenced herein as the OPCA Manual.

.2 CAN/CGSB 85.100-93 Painting.


.1 Comply with the requirements of the OPCA Manual and CAN/CGSB 85.100-93, exceptwhere more stringent requirements are specified.


Painting

.2 Qualifications of Applicators: applicators shall have minimum of 5 years provensatisfactory painting experience of projects of similar size and class subject toConsultant’s approval.

.3 Field quality control shall be in accordance with Section 01450, as supplemented herein.

.4 Following the pre-installation meeting, prepare sample room or area under thesupervision of the paint manufacturer's representative based on recommendations anddecisions made at the pre-installation meeting. The sample room or area selected shallinclude the finishing of all materials and surfaces specified and scheduled for the Work.The minimum sample area for each material and finish shall be as follows:

.1 Concrete block, concrete and gypsum board: 9.29 m2 (100 ft2).

.2 Hollow metal doors and frames, wood doors and frames: 1 door and frame foreach finish specified.

.5 Upon completion and approval, sample finishes shall serve as a standard for thebalance of the Work. Subsequent work carried out and not, in the Consultant's opinion,equal to the standard shall be repainted at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.6 Submittals


.2 Association manual: submit copy of OPCA Manual, and maintain one copy at site officefor reference.

.3 Colours:

.1 Prior to beginning painting work, Contractor will be furnished with paint colournumbers and copies of colour schedule for surfaces to be painted. Colours willbe selected by the Consultant.

.4 Samples:

.1 Samples for initial selection:

.1 Submit manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors availablefor each type of finish-coat material indicated.

.2 Paint colours will be selected by Consultant, from manufacturer's full colourrange including light and deep, dark tones. Consultant will furnish scheduleshowing where the various colours, gloss value and sheen of the finishesoccur.

.3 Consultant shall have complete freedom in choice of colours in compilingcolour schedule and will not necessarily select colours from standard colourcharts of manufacturer whose Products have been approved for use. Allowfor a maximum of 1 field colour and 10 accent colours, 1 colour will be a deephue.

.4 Contractor to provide 3 drawdowns of each selected colour for review byConsultant. Contractor to resubmit as required. Drawdown to be of specifiedcolour, sheen, and paint formula for applicable surface.

.2 Samples for verification:

.1 Submit samples of various finishes for Consultant's approval, at least 30 daysbefore materials are required.


Painting

.2 Submit samples in triplicate on 200 mm x 305 mm (8"x 12") material of thesame type as that on which the coating is to be applied.

.3 Where possible identify each sample as to Project, finish, formula, colourname, number, sheen name and gloss values, date and name of Contractorand painting Subcontractor.

.4 Resubmit as required until colours and gloss value are approved.

.5 Product data and list of Products:

.1 Submit name of paint manufacturer whose Products are proposed for use in theWork along with a complete list of Products intended for use in Work, preparedby paint manufacturer. Indicate manufacturer's official certification that Productslisted thereon are the top quality made by the company unless otherwiseindicated herein.

.2 List shall indicate name of paint manufacturer, the catalogue number, grade, andquality of the Products proposed for use, and be correlated to the schedulefurnished by the Consultant.

.3 List shall be accompanied by manufacturer’s Product data sheets for eachProduct listed.

.4 Products delivered to the Place of the Work shall conform to the reviewed list ofProducts.

.6 Mock-ups:

.1 Provide full finished mock-up installation of each paint colour, for indicatedsurfaces and mock-up size, showing colour and finish selected by Consultant,under lighting conditions matching final area lighting, for acceptance byConsultant. Locate at the Place of the Work as part of finished installation ifaccepted.

.1 Concrete block, concrete and gypsum board: 9.3 m2 (100 ft2).

.2 Hollow metal doors and frames: 1 door and frame for each finish specified.

.2 Upon completion and approval, sample finishes shall serve as a standard for thebalance of the work of this section. Subsequent work carried out and not in theConsultant’s opinion equal to the standard shall be repainted without charge.

.7 Extra materials:

.1 Provide two sealed containers, each of four litres (one gallon) capacity of eachpaint product in each colour used in the work for Owner’s maintenance use.Containers shall be new, clearly labelled with manufacturer's name, type of paint,colour and colour number. Store at the Place of the Work where directed byOwner.


.1 Conform to the OPCA Manual.

.2 Areas shall be clean and dust free before painting is commenced.

.3 Make thorough examination of the complete Contract Documents to determine intent,extent, materials, types of surfaces, and locations requiring painting and be fullycognizant of requirements.


Painting

.4 Use sufficient clean drop cloths and protective coverings for full protection of floors,furnishings and work not being painted. Protect mechanical, electrical and specialequipment and all other components of building which do not require painting from paintspotting and other soiling during painting process. Mask adjoining work adjacent to workbeing painted or carefully cut in without overlaps. Clean surfaces soiled by spillage ofpaint and paint spatters. If cleaning operations damage the surface, repair or replacedamaged work without cost to the Owner.

.5 Do not paint over dust, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces or conditionsotherwise detrimental to the formation of a durable paint film.

.6 Be responsible for damage to the work of this section until the building is complete andaccepted by the Consultant. In cases of damage, surfaces shall be cleaned andrepainted to Consultant’s approval.

.7 Do not paint exterior surfaces at temperatures below 10°C for latex products and below10°C for solvent based products, nor in rainy conditions or high humidity (maximumrelative humidity shall be 85%). Avoid applying paint to surfaces when exposed to directsunlight. Do not paint interior surfaces at temperatures under 10°C, nor on surfaceswhere condensation has or will form due to presence of high humidity and lack of properventilation.

.8 Provide ventilation to remove odours, evaporating solvents and moisture.

.9 Check moisture content of surfaces to be painted using electronic moisture meterapproved by paint manufacturer, and Consultant, or other approved method. Maximummoisture contents shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and asfollows:

.1 Concrete and concrete masonry: Maximum 12% to 14% for solvent coatings,and as recommended by manufacturer for water based coatings.

.2 Gypsum board and plaster: Maximum 12% to 14%.

.3 Wood: Maximum 15%.

1.8 Storage, Delivery, Handling and Protection

.1 Deliver materials to the Place of the Work in sealed original containers with labels intactand store in space directed by Consultant. Keep stored materials covered at all times.The presence of any unauthorized material or containers for such at the Place of theWork shall be sufficient cause for rejection of all paint materials at the Place of the Workat that time.

.2 Exercise extreme caution in the storage of materials to prevent fire or that may createfire hazards. Thinners and solvents shall be stored in CSA approved metal safetycontainers in accordance with governing fire and safety regulations.

.3 In areas of storage protect floor and wall surfaces from paint drips. Protect floors withsheets or clean plywood or metal pans where mixing is being carried out. Post "NoSmoking" signs in areas of storage and mixing and strictly enforce this requirement.Provide and maintain fire extinguishers, accessible in storage and mixing areas.

.4 Leave storage areas clean and free from evidence of occupancy when these arerequired for intended use.

.5 Keep waste rags in metal drums containing water and remove from the Place of theWork at the end of each Working Day.


Painting

.6 Provide labels on each container, correlated to the reviewed list of Products, with thefollowing information

.1 Name of title of Product.

.2 Manufacturer's stock number.

.3 Manufacturer's name.

.4 Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents.

.5 Thinning instructions.

.6 Application instructions.

1.9 Warranty


.2 Throughout the warranty period, painting systems shall remain free from failure due tocauses including: material failure; surface preparation less than that specified; and paintfilm thickness less than that specified, or when not specified, less than that coveragerecommended by manufacturer.

.3 Presence of any of following during the warranty period shall constitute failure: visiblecorrosion; film peeling, blistering, checking, scaling, embrittling or general filmdisintegration; and poor adhesion as determined by tape "peel-off" test procedures.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials


.1 Only Products listed in Chapter 5 of the OPCA Manual shall be used in the Work,unless explicitly specified otherwise.

.2 Paints and coatings materials used within the weatherproofing system shall not exceedthe VOC content limits of the following criteria.

.1 Interior paints and coatings: to following Green Seal GS-11 VOC limits:

.1 Flat coating type: 50 gm/L.

.2 Non-flat coating type: 100 gm/L.

.2 Anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to interior ferrous metal substrates:Green Seal Standard GC-03, Anti-Corrosive Paints.

.3 Clear wood finishes, floor coatings, stains, and shellacs applied to interiorelements: South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1113,Architectural Coatings

.3 Paints and coatings materials used to the exterior of the weatherproofing system shallnot exceed the VOC content limits of the following criteria.

.1 Exterior paints coatings: Green Seal GS-11; to following Green Seal VOC limits:

.1 Flat coating type: 100 gm/L

.2 Non-flat coating type: 200 gm/L

.4 Paint and coating materials for each system shall be Products of a single manufacturer.


Painting

.5 Provide safe and adequate equipment, scaffolding, ladders, plant, tools, brushes, rollers,clean drop cloths and other items required for the completion of the work.

.6 Ensure the proper use of proprietary materials in strict accordance with manufacturer'sdirections.

.7 Undercoatings and primers shall be made for the purpose by the manufacturer of thefinishing materials being used, or as approved by same.

.8 Brushes, rollers, and the like shall be the best of their respective kinds, clean andsuitable for the work.

.9 Joint sealants: in accordance with Section 07900.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Conditions of Surfaces

.1 Prior to commencement of work of this section, thoroughly examine surfaces scheduledto be painted.

.2 Check surfaces with electric moisture meter and do not proceed if reading is higher than12-15% or as otherwise required by paint or coating manufacturer.

.3 Check surfaces to determine if pH of surfaces meet manufacturer’s requirements.

.4 Inspect surfaces to be coated for gouges, marks, nibs, and other defects and properlyprepare patching, filling, smoothing or other surface preparation necessary to ensuresatisfactory finish.

.5 Report in writing any condition adversely affecting this work.

.6 Proceed with work only when surfaces and conditions are satisfactory. Remove dust,grease, rust, scale and extraneous matter, tool and machine marks and insects from allsurfaces which could be detrimental to a satisfactory and acceptable finish.

3.2 Preparation

.1 Prepare surfaces to receive paints and coating in accordance with Chapter 3 of theOPCA Manual.

.2 Prepare existing surfaces to be repainted in accordance with Article 6.2 of CAN/CGSB85.100-93.

.3 Clean floors, adjacent surfaces and surfaces to be painted before work is commenced.

.4 Before commencement of work, remove electric plates, surface hardware, canopies oflighting fixtures, and other escutcheons and appurtenances. Mask adjacent items thatare not removable. Replace items removed, when paint is dry and clean them. Usecleaning methods that will not damage finish.

.5 Use sufficient drop cloths and protective coverings for the full protection of work not tobe painted or coated.

.6 Keep waste rags in covered metal drums containing water and remove from building atend of each day.

.7 Shut down motors, fans, and mechanical ventilation systems during spray painting. Shutdown air intakes in affected areas and ventilate to exterior, when applying noxioussmelling or VOC containing paints and coatings.


Painting

.8 Exposed concrete and concrete block walls which are scheduled to be painted or sealedshall not be painted or sealed until the sealant has been applied at control joints andjoints with hollow metal frames.

.9 Materials shall be thoroughly mixed before application and applied without cutting oradmixture except as indicated in writing by the manufacturer.

.10 Metal:

.1 Clean unpainted and shop primed metal to provide satisfactory surfaces toreceive overcoats and provide permanent adhesion of coatings. Remove rustand scale with emery paper and wire brushes. Prime bare metal, make goodshop primed metal where abraded, feather out edges to make touch-up patchesinconspicuous. Thoroughly clean metal surfaces including piping and ductwork ofoil and grease with mineral spirits.

.2 Remove loose paint and scale from shop primed metal work.

.11 Concrete and Masonry:

.1 Thoroughly clean form oil, parting compounds, curing compounds and otherincompatible materials from concrete surfaces.

.2 Thoroughly clean masonry and concrete surfaces to be painted free of mortardroppings, concrete spotter and extraneous matter.

.3 Check concrete and masonry surfaces to be painted for alkalinity with pink litmuspaper or other recognized method. Where extreme alkalinity occurs (6.8 - 8.0range) wash surface with tetra potassium solution where latex base paint is to beused and with zinc sulphate solution where oil base paints are to be used. Rinsewith clean water and allow to dry thoroughly prior to application of primer.

.12 Gypsum Board:

.1 Ensure that gypsum board joints are smooth and board is clean and free ofjointing compound spatter.

.2 Test surfaces for alkalinity with pink litmus paper or other recognized method.

.13 Metal Surfaces; Galvanized:

.1 Apply cold phosphate surface treatment to SSPC-PT2-82 to unpassivated zinc-coated metal.

.2 For passivated zinc-coated metal ("white rusted"), power wire brush or vigorouslyhand wire brush to scuff galvanize thoroughly, and solvent clean to SSPC-SP1-82(R2004).

.3 Prepare exterior exposed galvanized steel and galvanized steel at wet areas toSSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4-07 – Sweep Blast.

.14 Woodwork:

.1 Sand, wipe off dust and grit before prime coat application. Putty nail holes andminimal cracks after primer has dried; sand between primer and top coats withNo. 300 sandpaper and remove dust.

3.3 Application - Primers

.1 Completely prime surfaces of exterior wood to receive paints or coatings.


Painting

.2 Apply primer coats to steel and galvanized steel surfaces that have and have notreceived shop coat or primer.

.3 Finish and back prime wood components prior to their installation.

.4 When primer sealer is dry, touch up visible suction spots before the next coat is appliedand do not proceed with the work until suction spots are sealed.

.5 Use high-build type primer/sealers at glass mat finished gypsum board substrate.

3.4 Application

.1 Apply to surfaces scheduled to be finished. Apply materials in accordance withmanufacturer's printed directions.

.2 Paint and coating finishes shall be free of defects in materials and workmanshipaffecting appearance and performance. Defects shall include but not be limited toimproper cleaning and preparation of surfaces, entrapped dust and dirt, alligators,blisters, peeling, drips, runs, uneven coverage, misses, poor cutting in, improper use orapplication of materials.

.3 Paint shall be applied by means of brushes, except for wall and ceiling surfaces thatshall be applied by rollers.

.4 Consultant shall have the right to prohibit the use of spray painting for such reasonsduring application as carelessness, poor masking or protective measures, drifting paintfog, disturbance to other trades or failure to obtain a dense even opaque finish.

.5 Apply coats only when the previous coat is dry/cured, in accordance with manufacturer’sprinted installation instructions.

.6 Apply materials evenly, in full coats free from brush and roller marks, sags, runs, crawls,ridges, and other defects. Completed paint or coating shall be uniform in finish, sheen,colour, and texture.

.7 Areas exhibiting incomplete or unsatisfactory coverage shall have the entire planepainted. Where cutting and patching work has been performed, shall have the entireplane painted. Patching will not be acceptable.

.8 Permit paint to dry before applying succeeding coats, touch up suction spots andprepare previous coats in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions. Removedust of sanding.

.9 Arrange to have traffic barred from completed areas wherever possible or provideadequate protection to prevent contamination of paints or coatings with foreignsubstances.

.10 Tint filler to match wood to receive clear finishes, where filler is required. Work filler wellinto grain and before it has set wipe excess from surface.

.11 Prime woodwork designed for painting as soon as possible after woodwork is deliveredto site. Prime surfaces of such woodwork, exposed and semi-exposed, beforeinstallation. Back-prime woodwork indicated to receive transparent finish with 1 coat ofspecified transparent finish reduced 25%.

.12 Sand semi-gloss, medium and high gloss finishes lightly between coats. Sand and dustbetween each coat to remove defects visible from distance of 1.5 m (5 ft).

.13 Reseal cut edges of wood doors and seal unfinished tops and bottoms of wood doorswith 3 coats polyurethane sealer.


Painting

.14 Finishes and number of coats indicated are the minimum required. Apply further coatsuntil complete uniform coverage is achieved to suit paint products and colours.

.15 Priming coat shall be colour toned lighter than second coat and the second coat shall betoned lighter than finish coat. Only the finish coat shall match the colour of the acceptedsamples.

.16 Paint inside surfaces of light coves white unless otherwise indicated.

.17 Grilles and perforated items shall be spray painted. Do not block perforations and applyevenly to present consistent appearance free from defects visible from distance of 1.5 m(5 ft)

.18 Do not apply paints and coating over fire rating labels.

.19 Do not apply paints and coatings over identification labels on mechanical and electricalequipment.

.20 Paint removable and operable items, such as access panels and doors, grilles, andsimilar items, while the item is removed or open, so as to not create a paint seal at thejuncture of the opening or removable item and its fixed frame or substrate.

.21 Keep sprinkler heads, fire detection equipment, and smoke detection equipment free ofpaint.

.22 Repaint existing surfaces and finishes where scheduled, where alterations orrenovations have been carried out, and where surfaces have been disturbed by thealterations or renovations. Repaint surfaces entirely between changes of plane.

.23 Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for equipment before installation.

3.5 Mechanical and Electrical Items

.1 Finish paint primed mechanical and electrical items with 2 coats of paint. Include for thefollowing list unless otherwise indicated:

.1 Convectors

.2 Conduit

.3 Diffusers

.4 Heaters

.5 Fire hose cabinets

.6 Fire extinguisher cabinets

.7 Louvres

.8 Radiators

.2 Prime and paint exposed insulated and bare pipes. Prime and paint exposed conduitsand electrical raceways, fittings, outlet boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes and similaritems. Use heat resistant epoxy paint on pipes and surfaces where operating surfacetemperature exceeds 65°C.

.3 Coordinate the painting of pipes, and coverings with mechanical contractor applyingcolour banding, flow arrows and pipe identification after the painting of pipes andcoverings.

.4 Paint work to match adjacent walls and ceilings unless directed otherwise.


Painting

.5 Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and pipe trenches including heating pipes andelements that are visible through grilles and louvres with one coat of flat metal paint tolimit of sight-line. Paint to be black or white as directed by Consultant.

.6 Gas pipes, whether concealed or exposed, shall be painted in yellow-orange colour, inaccordance with gas code.

.7 Paint and finish wall surfaces behind convectors. Walls to be finished prior to installationof convector covers. Touch up walls after covers are installed as necessary to makegood installation damage.

.8 Air diffusers shall be primed and finished with 2 coats of paint of same colour and sheenas ducts and/or ceiling.

3.6 Patching

.1 Do retouching to ensure that the work is handed over to the Owner in proper condition,free of runs, spatter, finger marks, rust, watermarks, scratches, blemishes or otherdisfiguration, with full, even coverage.

.2 After fully painting, retouching and finishing a room or area, notify Consultant. Afterreview and acceptance by Consultant, post sign "Painting Complete - No AdmittanceWithout Permission".

3.7 Cleaning

.1 Promptly as the work proceeds and on completion of the work, remove paint wherespilled, splashed or spattered during the progress of the work keep the premises freefrom unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials and debris; at theconclusion of the work leave the premises clean.

3.8 Schedules

.1 Finish Schedule:

.1 Assume full responsibility for painting and varnishing of all materials of thecontract exposed in the finished work which do not already have finishedsurfaces and that normally require paint or varnish finish. Inspect surfaces overwhich the work of this section is dependent for unevenness, cracks, surfacedefects, moisture, cleanliness, roughness and other irregularities detrimental tothe application and performance of the work. Confirm conditions satisfactorybefore proceeding. Failure in complying with above or failure to haveunsatisfactory conditions corrected before proceeding, shall not relieveContractor of responsibility for required results.

.2 Exposed means visible in complete work including interiors of cupboards andclosets, tops of doors, trim, and the like, whether in sight line or not, includingbehind surface mounted fixtures and heating units.

.3 In instances where materials specified are not suitable for particular applicationor are contrary to manufacturer's recommendations for use on particular surface,immediately bring to attention of Consultant for clarification and instructions.

.4 Where finishing formula for surfaces requiring paint is not specified, followrecommendations of OPCA Painting Specifications Manual as follows:

.1 Interior painting: Premium Grade.


Painting

.2 Exterior painting: Premium Grade.

.5 Consultant shall have right to make changes in colour tone of finishes prior tofinal coat to obtain desired results without additional cost to Owner.

.6 Unless otherwise noted or scheduled, walls shall be painted the same colourwithin a given area.

.7 Access doors, prime coated butts and other prime painted hardware, registers,radiators and covers, exposed piping and electrical panels shall be painted tomatch adjacent surfaces in terms of colour, texture and sheen, unless otherwiseindicated.

.8 Gloss terms have following values in accordance with ASTM D523-08:

Gloss Term Gloss Units @ 60° Angle

Level 1 - Matte >0 to 5 Level

Level 2 - High-Sheen; flat, velvet 0 to 10 Level

Level 3 - Traditional Eggshell 10 to 25 Level

Level 4 - Satin 20 to 35 Level

Level 5 - Traditional Semi-gloss 35 to 70 Level

Level 6 - Traditional Gloss 70 to 85 Level

Level 7 - High Gloss >85

3.9 Schedule - Interior Finishes

.1 System references listed are based on Chapter 4B (Interior) of OPCA Manual and arePremium Grade, unless otherwise indicated:

.1 Wood; Alkyd finish, INT. 1-A:

.1 Gloss: To later selection by Consultant.

.2 Use mildew resistant alkyd at window stools.

.2 Plaster, Drywall (Gypsum Board); Alkyd finish, INT. 4-A:

.1 Gloss:

.1 Gloss: Typical walls: Eggshell

.2 Typical ceilings: Flat

.3 Concrete block; Tile-like epoxy (waterborne) finish, INT. 8-E:

.1 Provide 2 blockfiller coats and 2 top coats.


.4 Ferrous metals; Alkyd finish, INT.12-A:

.1 Ferrous metal fabrications: Prepared and primed in accordance with Section05505.


Painting


.5 Steel doors and frames: Latex finish, INT.13-D:


3.10 Schedule - Exterior Finishes

.1 System references listed are based on Chapter 4A (Exterior) of OPCA Manual and arePremium Grade, unless otherwise indicated:

.1 Structural steel and steel fabrications; Alkyd finish, EXT. 11-A:


3.11 Colour Schedule

.1 Colours: Refer to Room Finish Schedule.

END OF SECTION


Visual Display Surfaces

PART 1 - GENERAL




.1 Tackboards.

.2 Marker boards (whiteboards).

.3 Related trim, adhesives, and fastenings.


.1 Erection of materials to be carried out by competent workers supervised by a forepersonwith at least 10 years experience in this specialized field and approved in writing bymanufacturer for installation of their Product.

1.4 Submittals




.3 Samples:

.1 Submit 305 mm x 305 mm (12" x 12") samples of each Product specified,diagonally cut to show cross section through assembly, complete withaccessories and trim.

.4 Shop drawings:

.1 Show proposed system of anchorage and materials being supplied on shopdrawings submitted for review.

.2 Show dimensional layouts, hardware items, anchorage devices, dimensions,description of materials and finishes, and all other pertinent information.




.1 Submit maintenance data for maintenance of Products for incorporation intomaintenance manual.

1.5 Trademarks and Labels

.1 No trademarks or labels will be accepted on exposed finished work.

1.6 Protection

.1 During installation utmost care to be taken by workers to ensure the protection of theWork from damage by other trades until the building is ready for occupation and handedover to the Owner.



.2 Protection of materials during the painting operation shall be carried out by the use ofpolyethylene covering which shall be the responsibility of the painting Subcontractor.

1.7 Warranty

.1 The warranty period with regard to the Products of this section is 10 years, inaccordance with section 01780.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Tackboards

.1 Krommenie cork tackboard: 12.7 mm (1/2") factory prelaminated consisting of 6 mm(1/4") thick Forbo ‘Bulletin Board’ linoleum cork laminated to 6 mm (1/4") particle boardsubstrate under mechanical pressure in maximum panel sizes of 1219 mm x 2438 mm(4'-0" x 8'-0"). Bonding of materials by a waterproof adhesive that will not delaminate orrupture at the contact surfaces.

.1 Colour of tackboard to be selected by Consultant from manufacturer's standardcolour range.

.2 Aluminum trim: in accordance with paragraph 2.3 below.

2.2 Marker Boards (Whiteboards)

.1 Porcelain enamel board with porcelain enamel writing surface on 0.8 mm (.03") (22gauge) high quality enameling steel base, 11.1 mm (0.44") impregnated fibreboard coreand 0.4 mm (0.02") (28 gauge) stretcher levelled zinc coated back sheet. Writing surfaceand back sheet laminated in one piece under mechanical or hydraulic pressure to core.

.1 White colour writing surface, designed for long lasting heavy duty marker writingsurface, free of permanent marker staining.

.2 Joints shall be absolutely flush and level, plumb true with edges finished squareand fitted as closely as possible. Use concealed joint fasteners.

.3 Particle board backing to CAN3-0188.1-M78, 6 mm (1/4") thick, with sandedfaces.

.4 Porcelain writing surface: 0.076 mm (0.003") thick porcelain enamel to PorcelainEnamel Institute Standards PEI /s104. Gloss factor: 6-8 as measured by 45°glossmeter.

.5 Concealed mechanical joining system: integral, slotted, PVC insert laminated intoends of panels and 25 mm (1") wide, 2 mm (0.08") thick, galvanized steel spline.

.6 Aluminum trim: in accordance with paragraph 2.3 below.


.1 Architectural School Products (a.s.p.).

.2 Delta Products Ltd.

.3 Global School Products Inc.

2.3 Trim Components

.1 Extruded aluminum components, AA6063 T5.



.2 Tackboards:

.1 Aluminum trim and accessories:

.1 Perimeter.

.2 Divider Bar.

.3 Maprail.

.3 Marker boards:


.1 Perimeter: ASP No. 505.

.2 Divider Bar: ASP No. 507.

.3 Maprail: ASP Kwikgrip Rail No. 500KG.

.4 Marker tray: ASP No. 521.

2.4 Fastenings

.1 Reinforcing anchor plates to be galvanized steel plates conforming to CSA G4-00(R2006).

.2 Use screws, bolts of galvanized steel or aluminum.

.3 Ferrous metal not specified must be plated or baked enamel and treated with primerconforming to CGSB 1-GP-140M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Examination

.1 Prior to commencement of erection, check surfaces for irregularities, trueness andrigidity and projections and defects and immediately report in writing to Contractor.

.2 Commencing installation implies acceptance of surface conditions.

3.2 Installation - Tackboards

.1 Secured from behind and mounted in accordance with manufacturer's writteninstructions to satisfaction of Consultant.

.2 Install secure, plumb and square.

.3 Secure wall brackets to blocking in stud walls, or with zinc plated metal expansion typeanchors at masonry back-up.

.4 Locate seams as directed by Consultant.

3.3 Installation –Marker Boards

.1 Install in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions.

.2 Secure wall brackets to blocking in stud walls, or with zinc plated metal expansion typeanchors at masonry back-up.

.3 Join panels together by use of 14 gauge x 25.4 mm (1") wide steel spline and extrudedpolyvinyl slotted insert for flush butt joints, with a hairline appearance.

.4 Erect units plumb, level and accurate.



.5 Locate seams as directed by Consultant.

3.4 Installation – Trim Components

.1 Install in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions.

.2 Attach aluminum trim, where applicable, in such a manner that fastenings shall beconcealed. Fastening shall be accomplished by the use of #10 x 25.4 mm (1") steelwood screws with rawl plugs, attached to walls.

.3 Erect units plumb, level and accurate.

.4 Leave trim and surfaces clean and free of stains or marks and completely cover finishedsurfaces with "Pliofilm" immediately after installation and remove only at time of finalinspection.

END OF SECTION


Washroom Accessories

PART 1 - GENERAL




.1 Washroom accessories.

1.3 Submittals




.3 Samples:

.1 Submit duplicate samples of each finish specified.

.4 Shop drawings:

.1 Clearly indicate fabrication details, plans, elevations, hardware, and installationdetails.


.1 Submit operation and maintenance data for incorporation into maintenancemanual specified in Section 01770.

.6 Templates:

.1 Submit templates to Contractor for use by installers and fabricators as requiredfor proper location and installation of hardware.


.1 Package or crate, and brace products to prevent distortion in shipment and handling.Label packages and crates, and protect finish surfaces by sturdy wrappings.

.2 Deliver products to location at the Place of the Work designated by Contractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Products

.1 Incorporate reinforcing, fastenings and anchorage required for building-in of Products.

.2 Specified manufacturer's catalogue references are the minimum acceptable standardsfor work of this section. Where two manufacturers or Products are specified for a givenaccessory, select one or the other for installation in the Work, but not both.

.1 Acceptable product manufacturers:

.1 ASI Watrous Inc.

.2 Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.

.3 Bradley Corporation.



.3 Lettering: for identification of accessories and operation instructions shall be silkscreened using international symbols unless otherwise specified.

.4 Washroom Accessory Schedule; locations as indicated or scheduled:

.1 Toilet tissue dispenser: Refer to drawings.

.2 Soap dispenser: Refer to drawings.

.3 Combination paper towel dispenser and waste receptacle: Refer to drawings.

.4 Clothes/robe hook: Refer to drawings.

.5 Grab bars: Refer to drawings.

.6 Baby change station: Refer to drawings.

.7 Hand dryers, electric: Refer to drawings.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1 Installation

.1 Submit manufacturer's information and templates required for installation of work of thissection, and assist or supervise, or both, the setting of anchorage devices, andconstruction of other work incorporated with Products specified in this section in orderthat they function as intended.

.2 Install work to meet manufacturers' recommended specifications, true, tightly fitted, andlevel or flush to adjacent surfaces, as suitable for installation.

.3 Include reinforcing, anchorage and mounting devices required for the installation of eachProduct.

.4 Fit joints and junction between components tightly and in true planes, conceal and weldjoints where possible.

.5 Fabricate Products with materials and component sizes, metal gauges, hardware,reinforcing, anchors, and fastenings of adequate strength to ensure that washroomaccessories will remain free of warping, buckling, opening of joints and seams, anddistortion within limits of intended use.

.6 Supply handling instructions, anchorage information, roughing-in dimensions, templatesand service requirements for installation of the work of this section, and assist orsupervise, or both, the setting of anchorage devices and construction of other workincorporated with Products specified in this section.

3.2 Barrier Free Installation Heights

.1 Install accessories to permit operable parts and controls to be accessed at 1100 mm(43") maximum above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 Installation of Washroom Accessories

.1 Provide manufacturer's handling instructions, anchorage information, roughing-indimensions, and templates for installation of the work of this section.

.2 Install and secure fixtures rigidly in place as follows:

.1 Use expansion shields in solid masonry or concrete, toggle bolts in hollowmasonry or sheet metal screws at metal studs.



.3 Install grab bars in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, on built-inplywood backing.

.4 Install only as specified by manufacturer.

.5 Verify locations and mounting heights with Consultant before roughing-in.

.6 Install plumb, level, straight, tight and secured, centred between joints on masonry andtile walls.

.7 Insulate surfaces to prevent electrolytic action due to contact with dissimilar metals, orconcrete or masonry if required. Use bituminous paint or other approved means.


.1 Verify under work of this section that installed Products function properly, and adjustthem accordingly to ensure satisfactory operation. Test mechanisms, hinges, locks, andlatches and adjust and lubricate to ensure washroom accessories are in perfect workingorder.

.2 Do not remove protective coatings until final cleaning, or earlier if directed by Consultant.

.3 Refinish damaged or defective work so that no variation in surface appearance isdiscernible. Refinish work at Place of the Work only if approved.

END OF SECTION


Roller Window Shades

PART 1- GENERAL




.1 Roller window sun shades at interior locations.

.2 Roller window shades for special applications:

.1 Room darkening (black-out) shades at interior locations.

.2 Privacy shades at interior locations.


.1 Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in thissection, with minimum 10 years experience.

.2 Installer qualifications: Roller window shade fabricator.

1.4 Submittals




.2 Submit manufacturers’ installation instructions.

.3 Shop drawings:

.1 Submit shop drawings or fully dimensioned catalogue cuts.

.2 Window treatment schedule: Use same designations indicated on ContractDocuments.

.3 Clearly indicate general construction, configurations, jointing methods andlocations, fastening methods, handing of controls, required blocking locations,banding (tandem shades), and installation details.

.4 Samples:

.1 Submit samples of each material and finish colour selected and each accessory.

.5 Mock-ups:

.1 Erect 1 full size mock-up each roller shade type at the Place of the Work forreview. Completed and accepted mock-up shall act as the standard to whichbalance of the work of this section will be judged.



.2 Operation and maintenance instructions:

.1 Submit operation and maintenance instructions for incorporation intooperation and maintenance manuals.



1.5 Protection

.1 Before delivery to the Place of the Work, check each shade for operation; remove fingermarks and smudges.

.2 Tightly wrap Products in polyethylene or other protective covering and leave in openposition until directed.


.1 Package Products to prevent distortion in shipment and handling. Label packages andcrates, and protect finish surfaces by sturdy wrappings.

1.7 Warranty

.1 Provide Product warranty for work of this section for a period of 2 years against defectsin labour, materials, and workmanship in accordance with Section 01780.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


.1 Roller window shades shall be fabricated by one of the following:

.1 SunProject Toro Inc.

.2 Solarfective Products Ltd.


2.2 Hardware

.1 Manual: Chain operated, with infinite positioning. Left or right hand operation andbanding as applicable to suit Place of the Work condition.

.1 Drive assembly:

.1 Must allow finger tip control and include a built in shock absorber system toprevent chain breakage under normal operating conditions;

.2 Factory set for the size and travel of the shades;

.3 Capable of being field adjusted from the exterior of the shade unit withouthaving to disassemble the hardware.

.4 Drive Chain: No. 10 stainless steel bead chain formed in a continuous loop.The chain shall have passed a 40 kg (90 lb) load test. Chain may bepositioned at either, or both, ends of the shade without disassembly of theshade unit.

.1 Provide child-safe chain retainers.

.5 Provide counter balancing mechanism designed to offset the weight of theshade and give fingertip control.

.2 Control shades and room darkening shades independently.

2.3 Assembly

.1 Provide fully factory assembled shade unit consisting of 2 end shade brackets, shadetube, extruded aluminum fascia, hembar and fabric as specified.



.2 Factory modify housings where necessary to bypass columns.

.3 End brackets: a two piece moulded ABS construction with a 6.35 mm (1/4") diameternylon drive sprocket. Bracket colour shall coordinate with the fascia colour.

.4 Shade tube: Minimum 1.52 mm (0.060") thick extruded aluminum with three equallyspaced continuous stiffening fins, non-sag design, maximum deflection under full load offabric L/700.

.5 Fascia: 1.7 mm (0.067") thick extruded aluminum.

.6 Hembar: Extruded aluminum with matching plastic end finials.

.7 Mounting: Removal of shade system shall not require the disassembly of the shade unit.

.8 Room darkening shade features: 13 mm (1/2") pile mounted in prefinished38 mm x 28 mm (1-1/2” x 1-1/8") extruded aluminum side and bottom channels finishedto match mullions. Include Dynamic hembar to allow for variance in window sill level.

2.4 Shade Mounting System

.1 Extruded aluminum bracket designed to accept preassembled shade system.

.1 Brackets to be used to facilitate the alignment with shade opening.

.2 Modular construction: Shades must be removable as a complete modular unit withoutany component disassembly required.

2.5 Aluminum Finish

.1 Exposed aluminum: Anodized aluminum.

.2 Unexposed aluminum: mill finish.

2.6 Shade Fabric Types

.1 Sun control shade cloth:

.1 Fabric cloth woven of 0.18 vinyl coated polyester yarn, consisting of singlethickness non-ravelling 0.030” thick vinyl fabric, comprised of dimensionallystable 20-25% polyester and 75%-80% reinforced vinyl (PVC).

.2 Openness:

.1 South or West exposure windows: 3% openness factor.

.2 North or East exposure windows: 5% openness factor.


.1 Solarfective:

.1 3% Shadecloth: SolarBlock 300 Series.

.1 Colours: 304 Grey/Beige or 302 White/Beige or 308 Grey/White.

.2 5% Shadecloth: SolarShield 500 Series.

.1 Colours: 504 Grey/Beige or 502 White/Beige or 508 Grey/White.

.2 SunProject:

.1 3% Shadecloth: 4400 Series.

.1 Colours: Q15 Greystone or P07 Alabaster or P10 Granite.



.2 5% Shadecloth: 4000 Series

.1 Colours: Q15 Greystone or P07 Alabaster or P10 Granite.

.2 Shade cloth for special applications:

.1 Blackout shade cloth:


.1 Solarfective: SolarStop Blackout Fabric.

.2 SunProject: BO 100 Blackout Fabric.

.2 Colour: as selected by Consultant from manufacturer’s full range.

.2 Privacy shade cloth:

.1 Openness: 1-2% openness factor, allows light in during daylight conditions.


.1 Solarfective: Sheerweave Style 4800.

.2 SunProject: 4800 Series.

.3 Colour: as selected by Consultant from manufacturer’s full range.

.3 Performance: Fabric shall hang flat, without buckling or distortion. Edge, where trimmed,shall hang true and straight, without shifting sideways more than 3 mm (1/8") in eitherdirection due to warp distortion or weave design.

.4 Flammability:

.1 Certified by an independent Laboratory to pass CAN/ULC S109-03 Large FlameTest.

2.7 Fabrication

.1 Finished assemblies shall be, square, true to size and free from distortion, twist, or otherdefects that could affect their strength, operation or appearance. Factory applied finishshall be uniform, smooth and without blemishes.

.2 The fabric shall be colour fast, retain its shape, not be affected by moisture or heat, andshall be non-flammable. Cut fabric to eliminate glare and reflection from shining surfaceswhile maintaining exterior view. The top of the fabric is retained in recessed spline of theshade roller and the bottom of the fabric is retained by the hem bar.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation

.1 Install work by manufacturer’s skilled tradesmen and installed in strict accordance withmanufacturers recommendations.

.2 Install shade systems in a plumb, squared, rigidly coupled and adequately anchored,maintaining uniformed clearances, accurate alignment levels, and parallel with thewindow plane. Fabric shall not travel more than 3 mm (1/8") in either direction withinchannels after installation.

.3 Fabric shall be pre-measured and manufactured off-site.

.4 Shades shall be snapped into place without screws or visible fasteners.



.5 Incorporate reinforcing, fastening and anchorage required for installation of shades.

.6 Securely attach installation fittings to their mounting surfaces with stainless steel orhardened aluminum screws of proper length and type, and durable anchors.

.7 Install shade roller true and level, and with cloth to hang flat without buckling ordistortion.

.8 Room darkening shades to be installed to eliminate passage of light from exterior.


.1 Verify that installed shade system functions properly, and adjust it accordingly to ensuresatisfactory operation.

.2 Refinish damaged or defective work so that no variation in surface appearance isdiscernible.

END OF SECTION

TDSB – Kane Public School Section 15010 JAIN & ASSOCIATES Limited Contents Page Project No. KE1016 February 28, 2011 Mechanical General Requirements

JAL NO. 10-265

CONTENTS SUBSECTION TITLE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Related Instructions 1.2 Tenders 1.3 Subtrades 1.4 Workmanship Standards 1.5 Drawings 1.6 Job Site Work Shop and Storage 1.7 Protection 1.8 Record Documents 1.9 Instructions to Operator 1.10 Intent 1.11 Alternates & Substitutions 1.12 By-Laws & Permits 1.13 Co-Operation & Co-Ordination 1.14 Temporary or Trial Usage 1.15 Liability 1.16 Shop Drawings 1.17 Codes and Standards 1.18 Warranty PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Electrical Equipment 2.2 Motors Starters & Controls 2.3 Hangers 2.4 Access Doors PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Installation 3.2 Electrical Work 3.3 Cutting & Patching

3.4 Excavating 3.5 Backfilling 3.6 Supports 3.7 Flashings

... Continued

TDSB – Kane Public School Section 15010 JAIN & ASSOCIATES Limited Contents Page Project No. KE1016 February 28, 2011 Mechanical General Requirements

JAL NO. 10-265

CONTENTS SUBSECTION TITLE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.8 Hangers 3.9 Sleeves 3.10 Levels & Dimensions 3.11 Painting 3.12 Equipment Markers & Nameplates 3.13 Pipe Identification 3.14 Cleanup 3.15 Valve Tags & Chart 3.16 Pipe and Valve Identification Table 3.17 Cold Weather Work 3.18 Floor & Wall Plates 3.19 Work Schedule 3.20 Shop Drawings 3.21 Examine Site & Conditions

TDSB – Kane Public School Section 15010 JAIN & ASSOCIATES Limited Page 1 Project No. KE1016 February 28, 2011 Mechanical General Requirements

JAL NO. 10-265

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED INSTRUCTIONS .1 Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as if

repeated here. .2 Unless specified otherwise, this Section shall apply to all Sections of Division 15. 1.2 TENDERS .1 Submit tender based on specified described equipment or Alternates listed. See

attached Supplementary Tender Form and comply with same. 1.3 SUBTRADES .1 Subcontractors named at the time of Tender or substitutions authorized by the

Board will be recognized as being in accordance with the Contract and any payments will be approved by the Board, only to such Subcontractors.

.2 The Mechanical Contractor shall employ those subcontractors proposed in the

Mechanical Form(s) of Tender and accepted by the Board at the signing of the Contract with the General Contractor.

.3 The Board may, for reasonable cause object to the use of a proposed Subcontractor

and consequently, may require the Mechanical Contractor to employ one of the other Subcontractor bidders.

.4 In the event that the Board requires a change from a proposed Subcontractor

originally proposed by the Mechanical Contractor, the Contract Price shall be adjusted by the difference in cost.

.5 The Mechanical Contractor shall not be required to employ as a Subcontractor, a

firm to whom he may reasonably object. 1.4 WORKMANSHIP STANDARDS .1 Workmanship and method of installation shall conform to best standards and

practice. Where required by local or other By-Laws and Regulations, tradesmen shall be licensed in their trade.


JAL NO. 10-265

1.5 DRAWINGS .1 Mechanical drawings do not show structural and related details. Take information

involving accurate measurement of building from building drawings, or at building. Make, without additional charge, any necessary changes or additions to runs of piping, ducts or equipment locations to accommodate structural conditions. Location of piping, ducts, controls and equipment may be altered by Architect without extra charge provided change is made before installation and does not necessitate major additional material. Do not scale drawings.

.2 Relocate equipment and/or material installed but not co-ordinated with work of other

Sections as directed, without extra charge. .3 Furnish "built-in" items in ample time and give necessary information and assistance

in connection with building-in of same. Notify Section concerned in writing of size and location of recesses, openings and chases at least 48 hours before walls are erected, floors poured and similar work.

.4 Before commencing work, check and verify all sizes, locations, materials, elevations,

levels and dimensions to ensure proper and correct installation. Verify existing and municipal services.

1.6 JOB SITE WORK SHOP AND STORAGE .1 Supply job site office, workshop, tools, scaffolds and material storage as required to

complete the work of this Division. Location of temporary buildings, use of space on site or within building shall be to later direction.

1.7 PROTECTION .1 Securely plug or cap open ends of pipes, ducts or equipment to prevent entry of dirt,

dust, debris, water, snow or ice. Clean all piping, ducting and equipment inside and outside before testing.

.2 Equipment stored on site shall be protected from weather and kept dry and clean at

all times. Take care to avoid corrosion of metal parts. Protect all bearings and motors from damage due to moisture and dust. Equipment not yet in operation shall be turned over at least at monthly intervals to prevent bearing deterioration.

.3 Protect work installed from damage. Secure all unfinished or loose work to prevent

movement.


JAL NO. 10-265

1.8 RECORD DOCUMENTS .1 Conform to General Requirements. Maintain at least 2 sets of documents and

clearly mark on same as job progresses, changes and deviations from work shown so that on completion Owner will have records of exact location of ducts and equipment and record of material and equipment changes.

.2 Contractor shall obtain clean set of prints from Consultant at start of Contract

Work and shall keep these prints up-to-date at jobsite, accurately recording all changes made on project and locating all services, equipment, etc. which may have been shown only diagrammatically on Contract Documents.

.3 Contractor shall ensure that as-built information is accurately recorded and shall

check same. As-Built drawings shall be reviewed with Consultant at each jobsite meeting.

.4 Upon completion of Contract Work, prior to Substantial Performance inspection and

after final review with Consultants, Contractor shall neatly transfer recorded information and make final As-Built submission to Consultant in the following form:

- Two (2) sets of clean, legible prints. - One (1) ACAD 2000 format drawings.

.5 Upon review by Consultant, if required the Contractor shall revise drawings until

acceptable. 1.9 INSTRUCTIONS TO OPERATOR .1 Instruct Building Operators in repair, maintenance and operation of Mechanical

Systems and associated equipment. .2 Supply two sets of full Operation and Maintenance Instructions each in stiff cover,

three-ring binder suitably indexed, separated and labeled. Operate each item of equipment in presence of Operators to ensure understanding of working parts and function of each item of equipment. Supply one complete set of "Reviewed" Shop Drawings in separate hard cover binder suitably separated and labeled for the Board's use.

.3 Operation and maintenance manuals shall be carefully prepared in co-operation

with equipment manufacturers and include miscellaneous parts necessary for proper, efficient operation of all equipment; and shall ALSO identify routine maintenance required on all items.


JAL NO. 10-265

1.10 INTENT .1 Mention herein or indication on drawings of articles, materials, operations or

methods requires: supply of each item mentioned or indicated, of quality, or subject to qualifications noted; installation according to conditions stated: and, performance of each operation prescribed with furnishing of necessary labour, equipment, and incidentals for mechanical work, Division #15.

.2 Where used, words "Section" and "Division" shall also include other Subcontractors

engaged on site to perform work to make building and site complete in all respects. .3 Where used, word "supply" shall mean furnishing to site in location required or

directed complete with accessory parts. .4 Where used, word "install" shall mean secured in place and connected up for

operation as noted or directed. .5 Where used, word "provide" shall mean supply and install as each is described

above. .6 Where used, wordings such as "approved, to approval, as directed, permitted,

permission, accepted, acceptance, report to", shall mean "approved, directed, permitted, accepted, report to", by the Consultant.

1.11 ALTERNATES & SUBSTITUTIONS .1 Throughout Division 15 are lists of "Alternate Equipment" manufacturers acceptable

to Consultant if their product meets characteristics of specified described equipment. See attached Supplementary Tender Form and comply with same.

.2 Each Bidder may elect to use "Alternate Equipment" from lists of Alternates where

listed. Include for any additional costs to suit Alternates used. Prices are not required in Tender for Alternates listed except where specifically noted as "Separate Price".

.3 It is responsibility of this Division to ensure "Alternate Equipment" fits space allotted

and gives performance specified. If an "Alternate Equipment" unit is proposed and does not fit space allotted nor equal specified product in Consultant's opinion, supply of specified described equipment will be required without change in Contract amount. Only manufacturers listed will be accepted for their product listing. All other manufacturers shall be quoted as substitution stating conditions and credit amount.


JAL NO. 10-265

.4 If item of material specified is unobtainable, state in Tender proposed substitute and amount added or deducted for its use. Extra monies will not be paid for substitutions after Contract has been awarded.

.5 If pipe or item, of size or weight indicated, is unobtainable, supply next larger size or

heavier weight without additional charge. 1.12 BYLAWS & PERMITS .1 Obey Government, Municipal and Underwriters Standards and perform work in

accordance with requirements of By-Laws and Regulations in force where building is located.

.2 Apply for, obtain, and pay for permits and inspections required by authorities having

jurisdiction. Furnish necessary certificates as evidence that work installed conforms with laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. Make minor changes required by By-Laws and Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction without extra payment.

.3 Plumbing and Heating permits form part of Building Permit. Costs of these permits

will be paid for as part of overall Building Permit and are not chargeable to this Division.

1.13 CO-OPERATION & CO-ORDINATION .1 Each Section and Trade shall: .1 Confer with other Sections and arrange work so it will be carried on in best

interests of all concerned bearing in mind building construction and finish required.

.2 Furnish "built-in" items in ample time and give necessary information and assistance in connection with building-in of same. Notify Section concerned in writing of size and location of recesses, openings and chases at least 48 hours before walls are erected, floors poured and similar work.

.3 Proceed as quickly as practical so that construction may be complete in shortest possible time.


JAL NO. 10-265

1.14 TEMPORARY OR TRIAL USAGE .1 Temporary or trial usage of may mechanical device, machinery, apparatus,

equipment or materials shall not be construed as evidence of acceptance of same and no claim for damage shall be made for injury to or breaking of any part of such work which may be used.

1.15 LIABILITY .1 Each Section and Trade shall: .1 Assume full responsibility for laying out his work and for any damage caused

to other Sections by improper location or carrying out of same. .2 Be responsible for prompt installation of work in advance of concrete

pouring, ceiling installation or similar work. .3 Protect finish and unfinished work of this Division and work of other Sections

from damage due to work of this Division. .4 Be responsible for condition of material and equipment supplied. Be

responsible for protection and maintenance of work completed until termination and acceptance.

1.16 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Submit for review within 30 days of Contract award, 8 copies of Shop Drawings and

Room Equipment Schedules covering material to be supplied. .2 Each Shop Drawing must be certified correct by submitting trade before submission.

Shop Drawings not so certified will be rejected. .3 Submit Shop Drawings for review for accordance with Division 1. Make printed

submissions of more than two pages in booklet form. Failure to conform may cause undue delay in approvals.

.4 Review of Shop Drawings is for sole purpose of ascertaining conformance with

general design concept. This review shall not mean that Engineer approves detail design inherent in Shop Drawings, responsibility for which shall remain with Contractor and such review shall not relieve Contractor of his responsibility for errors or omissions in the Shop Drawings or of his responsibility for meeting all requirements of Contract Documents.


JAL NO. 10-265

Contractor is responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and coordinated at site, for information that pertains solely to fabrication processes or techniques of construction and installation and for coordination of work of all trades.

.5 Shop drawings shall have manufacturers names, or supplier's name complete with

phone numbers and names of contacts, catalogue model numbers, name of trade supplying same, identification number, all pertinent selection criteria such as air flow, noise, heat input/output, etc. otherwise they shall be returned.

.6 The contractor shall not have equipment delivered to site until a shop drawing for

the item has been reviewed and approved. .7 Shop drawings shall include, but not be limited to the following: .8 Equipment layout drawn to scale including piping accessories to show clearance for

operating and servicing for: .1 Plumbing fixtures, cuts, trim and fittings roughing dimensions; .2 Floor drain and roof drain details; .3 Fan with performance curves stating air quantities, external static pressures,

outlet velocities, top speeds, fan rpm, discharge arrangement, class construction weights and all motor data;

.4 Louvres, grilles, registers and diffusers; .5 Temperature Controls. 1.17 CODES AND STANDARDS .1 Installation must comply with latest editions and all amendments of the following

codes and standards. Where conflicts in requirements occur the higher standards will apply:

.1 Ontario Building Code; .2 Canadian Standards Association; .3 Canadian Gas Association; .4 National Building Code of Canada; .5 The Building Code (Ontario); .6 All governing municipal requirements; .7 Canadian Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Code; .8 Canadian Plumbing Code; .9 Regulation 815/84 respecting plumbing made in the Ontario Water

Resources Act;


JAL NO. 10-265

.10 Section 41 and 42, regarding provision of sewers and water mains, Ontario Regulation 54/76, the Ontario Water Resources Act;

.11 Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada Standards; .12 Ontario Electrical Codes; .13 Ontario Occupational Health and Safety Act; .14 Conservation Authority; .15 Ministry of the Environment; .16 National Standards of Canada; .17 Canadian General Standards Board; .18 American National Standards Institute; .19 American Society of Testing and Materials; .20 Local Fire Codes; .21 Provincial Ministry of Labour 1.18 WARRANTY .1 Furnish to the Owner through General Contractor and Consultant, written warranty

covering materials and workmanship and free service for one year from date of start of substantial performance.

.2 Warrant apparatus installed to properly operate, cool, heat and ventilate without

undue noise through every item of equipment and system and to maintain required room conditions.

.3 Warranty shall entail repair or replacement of materials installed without charge to

the Owner except where, in opinion of Consultant, such repair or replacement was caused by improper use or lack of proper maintenance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT .1 Electrically operated equipment shall be C.S.A. approved and bear approval label.

Special Inspection label of Ontario Hydro will be accepted in lieu of C.S.A. approval label.

.2 Electrically operated equipment, starters and controls shall be rated for satisfactory

operation on following nominal voltages unless otherwise noted: Up to and including 0.25 kw - 60/1/120 V 0.37 kw and larger - 60/3/208 V or as noted


JAL NO. 10-265

.3 Verify characteristics of all electrical components with Electrical Division before submitting Shop Drawings for processing.

.4 Electrical interlocks and control devices shall operate on 120 volts A.C. maximum.

Provide necessary fused and grounded control transformer to suit as necessary. All control circuits shall be fused and grounded.

.5 Unless otherwise noted motors shall be O.P.D. shielded ball bearing, EEMAC

Specification MG-1, Design B, 1.15 service factor, Class 130 of Canadian Manufacture with local service available, be rated for satisfactory operation on noted utilization voltages and bear proper nameplate. Electric motor operated equipment shall have motor sized to bring unit to full operating r/s in ten seconds unless unit is equipped with integral thermal device to prevent motor burnout. Motors shall be 30 r/s synchronous unless otherwise noted.

2.2 MOTOR STARTERS & CONTROLS .1 Mechanical Division 15 shall provide all motor starters and associated controls

required and as scheduled on drawings and noted for Division 15 equipment. Starters and controls shall be Canadian General Electric or Alternate noted. All starters, contactors, thermal overloads, etc. must be EEMAC rated. All starters shall be of one manufacturer except as specifically approved otherwise for integral pre-wired assemblies.

.2 Starter and control units shall be equipped with necessary number of auxiliary

contacts and relays to provide control sequences described in Mechanical Equipment Starter Schedule on Drawings. Auxiliary contacts shall be interchangeable normally open or normally closed, by conversion in field without additional parts exterior to starter.

.3 Manual starters may only be provided for single phase equipment operated by

control device such as thermostat or limit control when such control device is rated for full electrical load of equipment.

.4 Manual starters provided for single phase equipment actuated by electric timer or

shall have H.O.A. feature. "Hand" position shall permit shunting of time switch. Where such units also have protective device (e.g. firestat) such device shall be wired into both "Hand" and "Auto" positions and shall not be shunted.

.5 Manual starters may only be provided for three phase equipment which is not

actuated by pilot control device (pressure switch, float switch, safety limit devices, remote manual control device) unless otherwise noted in Starter Schedule.


JAL NO. 10-265

.6 Magnetic starters for manually operated equipment shall have "On/Off" selector switch or "Start-Stop" pushbutton in cover as scheduled.

.7 Magnetic starters which are started automatically by electric time switch shall

include "Hand-Off-Automatic" (H.O.A.) selector switch. "Hand" position shall permit shunting of time switch or E.M.S. Where such units also have protective pilot device (e.g. firestat) such device shall be wired into both "Hand" and "Auto" position and shall not be shunted.

.8 Magnetic starters which are started automatically by remote pilot device (or

interlocked units) such as level controller, pressure switch, thermostat or flow switch shall include "Hand-off-Auto" (H.O.A.) selector switch, and, where scheduled, a "Test" pushbutton. "Hand" position shall permit shunting of remote pilot device and thereby permit operation of starter but only while depressing "Test" button.

.9 Equip starter apparatus for prime plumbing, heating, air conditioning and ventilating

equipment so that these units will automatically restart on resumption of power after power outage. Starters for these units shall have "On/Off" selector switch in cover if not fitted with H.O.A. selector feature or manual starter or otherwise noted.

.10 Safety control device such as flow switches, pressure switches, high and low limited

("Fire" and "Freeze") shall not be shunted by "Hand" position of switch. .11 Manual motor starter shall be toggle operated with following general construction

features: - Quick-Make, Quick-Break mechanism with double-break contracts. - Overload protection heaters, one per phase and speed. - Enclosure to suit application. - Pilot light, neon lamp. - Cover engraved with "On-Trip-Off". .12 Magnetic motor starters shall comprise electrically-operated motor starters

combined with disconnect switch with following general construction features: - Quick-Make, Quick-Break mechanism with double-break contacts. - Fuse holders to accept specified fuses, one per phase. - Adjustable overload relays, one per phase. - CEMA listed enclosure to suit application. Disconnect with mechanical

cover interlocks, line side barriers and switch operated electrical interlocks to disconnect external control voltage unless starter includes suitable approved enclosed contacts and connections.

- "Reset" button.


JAL NO. 10-265

- Pilot Lights of transformer type incandescent with amber safety lens cap. - Control transformer with 120 volt fused secondary and sized to suit current

rating of associated control devices. - Scheduled cover mounted control devices with standard duty double break

contact blocks. - Minimum of two auxiliary contacts (unused "Seal-in" contact may be

included). .13 Contactors for non-motor applications shall be built similar to combination magnetic

starters, except less overload relays, and with Gould Shawmut AJT time delay HRC1-J fuses, rated for load, and with enclosed continuous current rating of at least 125% of connected full load.

.14 "Double Voltage Relays" shall be CGE Model CR120 LXMC with general purpose

enclosure, number of contacts required and "Mylar" shroud of enclosure of contacts, or approved equivalent.

.15 Pilot devices such as "Start-Stop" pushbuttons, "Hand-Off-Auto" selector switches

and indicating lights shall be of heavy-duty construction. Indicating lamps shall be transformer type incandescent with amber safety lens caps.

.16 Each control unit shall be provided with engraved nameplates for designation of

device controlled and duty. See Subsection "Equipment Markers & Nameplates" for details.

.17 Control wiring shall be 120 volt A.C. maximum. Provide control circuit transformers

where these are not included in motor starters. Secondaries of control transformers shall be fused with one side grounded and controls, safety devices and interlocks shall be connected in ungrounded conductor, excepting only integral starter overload devices.

.18 Single phase motors interlocked to start or operate with other equipment shall be

provided with magnetic starters or suitable relays with necessary auxiliary contacts and double voltage relays or be otherwise electrically separated.

.19 Overload relay heaters for starters shall be selected and field adjusted to trip at

maximum value of 115% of actual nameplate full load amperes. Selection of heater elements shall be based on starter manufacturer's recommendations. Obtain data from Mechanical Division. Submit Motor Starter Schedule which shall list following for each motor:

- Proposed equipment nameplate data - Actual full load amperes of motor


JAL NO. 10-265

- Speed of motor - Temperature Class in degrees Celsius rise and insulation class. - Circuit breaker or fuse type and proposed rating - Type of motor, duty and service factor. .20 Overload relay heaters shall trip in 20 seconds or less from cold or motor-locked

rotar condition. .21 Where equipment is noted to be electrically interlocked, provide necessary

interlocks, double voltage relays (Mylar shroud accepted) to provide specified operation.

.22 Provide all fuses required to protect equipment. Fuses shall be proper size blade

type time delay HRC1-J current limiting. Supply three spare fuses of each size and type and obtain duplicate receipt for same. Fuse clips shall reject standard NEC fuses. Fuses shall be rated in accordance with manufacturer's published data. Fuses to be of one manufacturer throughout.

.23 Acceptable Alternate Manufacturers 1. Furnas Electric 2. Westinghouse 3. Allen Bradley 4. Square `D' 5. Cutler Hammer 6. Klockner-Moeller. 7. Commander 8. Telemecanique 2.3 HANGERS .1 Pipe hangers shall be Myatt or Grinnell equal as follows: .1 For horizontal ceiling supported: Myatt #124 split clevis or Grinnell #260. .2 For horizontal wall supported: Myatt #157 offset wall. .3 For vertical piping: Myatt #182 riser clamp or Grinnell #261. .4 For insulation shield: Myatt #251 galvanized steel or Grinnel #167.


JAL NO. 10-265

2.4 ACCESS DOORS .1 Supply as required, 12 gauge hinged metal access doors with frames for installation

by other Sections in walls or ceilings to permit access to built-in or unaccessible controls, dampers, valves, cleanouts and components.

.2 Access doors shall be Stelpro Ltd. #722 flush type of size to suit controls, valves,

cleanouts, dampers or components serviced, minimum size 300 x 300 mm "Reach-In", 300 x 600 mm "Crawl-In", with prime coat finish, concealed hinges, screwdriver lock and plaster key. Access doors in finished masonry or drywall construction shall be #722 less plaster key. Access doors shall be #726 in acoustic tile ceilings and #704 in drywall ceilings.

.3 Access doors in fire rated walls, duct shafts or in corridor walls shall be UL, ULC or

WHI listed 1-1/2 hour fire rated access doors equal to LeHage #L1010, Nailor Hart #0900 or Acudor #150B with screwdriver lock.

.4 Access doors in fire rated ceiling assemblies, all fire rated walls, duct shafts or in

corridor walls shall be UL, ULC or WHI listed 1-1/2 hour fire rated access doors equal to LeHage #L1010, Nailor Hart #0900 or Acudor #150B with screwdriver lock.

.5 Alternate Equipment: 1. Smille, McAdams & Summerline Ltd. 2. Mifab (Modular Equipment Mfg. Inc.) 3. Can-Aqua Inc. 4. Acudor Products Ltd. 5. LeHage (Ancon Industries Ltd.) 6. Nailor Hart Industries Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Instruct and supervise other Sections doing related work. Co-ordinate all work

between this Division and their relationship to all other Sections. Supply measurement of equipment to other Sections to allow for necessary openings to be left in work of other Sections.

.2 Install all work and equipment to manufacturer's printed directions. .3 Install furred-in work neatly and close to building structure so furring will be as small

as practical.


JAL NO. 10-265

.4 Supply measurements of equipment, duct openings and recesses to other Sections to allow for necessary openings to be left in work of other Sections for work of this Division.

.5 Install pipes and ducts to clear structural members and any fireproofing. Locate

mechanical work to permit installation of specified insulation. Do not remove or damage structural fireproofing. Leave space to permit fireproofing and insulation to be inspected and repaired.

.6 Install work in advance of concrete pouring, ceiling installation, furring or similar

work. .7 Mechanical drawings indicate general location of route of pipes and ducts which are

to be installed. Where required work is not shown or only shown diagrammatically, install same to conserve head room (minimum 2200 mm clear) and interfere as little as possible with free use of space through which they pass.

.8 Relocate equipment and/or material installed but not co-ordinated with work of other

Sections as directed, without extra charge. .9 Where lift-out acoustic board ceilings are used for access to components in ceiling

space, boards shall be secured with accessible hold-down clips and marked with Bildemup #6RH brass paper fasteners inserted through boards and bent over. Paint heads with red enamel before installation.

.10 As work progresses and before installing heating units, registers, diffusers, fixtures

and other fittings and equipment which may interfere with interior treatment and use of building, obtain detail drawings or directions for exact location of such equipment and fittments.

.11 Locate all mechanical and electrical equipment in such a manner as to facilitate

easy and safe access to and maintenance and replacement of any part. .12 In every place where there is indicated space reserved for future or other

equipment, leave such space clear, and install piping and other work so that necessary installation and connections can be made for any such apparatus. Obtain instructions wherever necessary for this purpose.


JAL NO. 10-265

3.2 ELECTRICAL WORK .1 Electric connections and wiring for equipment supplied under Mechanical Division

will be by Electrical Division except for Temperature Controls System, Mechanical Firing Equipment, and where otherwise noted. See also 15950, Temperature Controls. Provide electric wiring to complete all systems. All electrical work must conform to conditions noted in Electrical Division and be concealed except in service areas. All wiring MUST be in conduit or EMT using #18 wire for 24 volt or less, #14 wire for 120 volt control and #12 wire for 120 volt power wiring. Use wiremold where exposed in finished areas.

.2 Supply necessary Shop Drawings of powered equipment to Electrical Division.

Arrange piping, ductwork and equipment to permit access to and mounting of starters and controls. Co-operate with Electrical Division to ensure electrical equipment can be installed and serviced. See Electrical Drawings.

.3 Control and operation of motors shall be in accordance with diagrams included in

Electrical Division. Mechanical Division shall co-ordinate and confirm control functions supplying appropriate wiring diagrams as may be necessary.

3.3 CUTTING & PATCHING .1 Lay out and install work in advance of other Sections for all new work. Bear all

costs resulting from failing to comply with this requirement. .2 Core drill holes up to 200 mm diameter (150 mm pipe) in concrete walls and floors

for piping where not previously sleeved. Do not use mechanical hammers or drills without prior approval in writing. Neatly patch holes to approval and where located in exterior walls above grade, make watertight. Make holes in walls below grade with due provision for pipe movement (min. 50 mm clear all around), fill with 50 mm thick fibreglass blanket insulation and seal watertight with mastic.

.3 Layout cutting and patching for approval before starting and obtain approval of

finished work. .4 See 3.6 Supports, 3.8 Hangers and 3.9 Sleeves, and co-ordinate this work to other

Sections to prevent unnecessary cutting and patching.


JAL NO. 10-265

3.4 EXCAVATING .1 Perform necessary excavating for work of this Division. Ensure bottoms of trenches

are excavated so that full length of each pipe will be supported on solid bed of undisturbed earth. Build approved concrete pad, solid block or concrete piers properly reinforced under piping below grade where solid undisturbed earth bed is not obtainable to meet Plumbing Code.

.2 Remove excavated materials not used as backfill from site unless otherwise

directed. .3 See Soil Test Report re existing soil conditions. Support all piping on approved earth

or other foundation or hangers. Earth support must be minimum 90% density Modified Proctor (ASTM #D-1527) compaction and proven such conditions exist. Include for necessary soil tests to verify earth foundation will support drains as required at approximately 2400 mm centres. Provide supports to meeting Plumbing Code, Section 51 including piers where earth foundation or hangers are not acceptable to Architect or authority having jurisdiction.

.4 Where permitted by authority having jurisdiction where pipe invert is less than 900

mm below floor elevation steel clevis hangers, steel rods and continuous steel supports from floors at half normal spacing may be used. Paint all buried metal hanger work with 2 coats of Bakelite #110-14. See 15010-3.8.

.5 Provide necessary shoring and support for trenching. Do all work in conformity to

Ontario Trench Excavator's Protection Act and Occupational Health & Safety Act, each as amended to date. Trench widths shall be kept to minimum dimension as directed & approved.

.6 Perform necessary pumping to maintain excavations free of water for work of this

Division until backfill is completed. .7 Provide 100 mm bed of 20 mm crusher run limestone compacted to 98% Modified

Proctor under all piping not laid in sandy ground or other approved bedding. For copper and plastic piping, bedding shall be clean sand.

3.5 BACKFILLING .1 Backfill at least first 150 mm above top of piping with clean coarse sand hand placed

in 75 mm layers and compacted to 98% density Proctor Modified (ASTM #D1527). Note conditions and Details and conform thereto.


JAL NO. 10-265

.2 Backfill inside building with M.T.C. granular 'B' or clean coarse sand in 150 mm layers mechanically compacted to give minimum of 98% density Modified Proctor (ASTM #D-1527 STD) compaction.

.3 For Landscape Areas: Backfill outside building with approved clean earth in 300

mm layers watered and compacted to 98% Modified Proctor. Do not use clay, rock, frozen earth, rubbish or other unapproved materials. Remove same from site and bring in approved earth or sand for use in this event.

.4 Backfill under all existing, new and future concreted, paved or graveled areas with

M.T.C granular 'B' placed in 150 mm layers and compacted to 98% Modified Proctor Compaction to level of sub-base of paving or gravel.

.5 Prior to backfill and after completion of all installation pipes of 150 mm and larger

hire a Video Production Company to inspect pipes by television camera and submit a video cassette (VHS) and descriptive booklet. Video and booklet shall indicate start and stop points using tender drawings, type of pipe installed, compass direction of camera travel, chainage and slope of pipe.

3.6 SUPPORTS .1 Supply and install supports, stands and platforms necessary for proper installation of

equipment and components, of steel or wood as may be required and as approved or elsewhere shown or specified. Supply and install necessary anchor bolts and other fastenings. Secure work to concrete with Phillips "Red Head" concrete anchors.

.2 Concrete housekeeping bases and all required concrete work will be provided by

this Section. 3.7 FLASHINGS .1 Where ducts pass through roof, Another Section will provide suitable curb and

flashing. Supply and install approved counterflashing of same material as flashing. .2 Where equipment is roof mounted, this Section will provide suitable approved curbs

and bases properly flashed and sealed to roof unless otherwise noted. .3 Where plumbing vents and stacks, boiler stacks, or other pipes pass through roof,

provide Thaler series MEF flashings complete with necessary insulation.


JAL NO. 10-265

3.8 HANGERS .1 Supply and install hangers to support pipes and ducts. Adjust hangers so that pipes

and ducts will be true in respect of alignment and grade. Obtain approval of methods of hanging to building before proceeding. Ensure that load on building structure does not exceed maximum mechanical loading per square foot as directed by Consultant. Take special care to avoid introduction of undue reaction forces into structure of building.

.2 Where structural bearings do not exist, supply and install auxiliary angle or channel

iron of sufficient size from other structural bearings to support hangers or equipment. Do not hang from steel decking.

.3 Do not use wire, chain, strap or extension bar hangers under any circumstances. .4 Do NOT use percussion type fastenings of any kind without prior approval in writing. .5 Install all work supported from hangers or supports in a manner to ensure that

building construction is not weakened or over-stressed, that pipes and ducts are secure, vibration free, free to expand and contract and properly graded, and that vertical adjustment of horizontal pipes and ducts is possible after erection.

.6 Support all hangers directly from building structure only. Do not support pipes,

ducts or equipment from other pipes, ducts or equipment. .7 Support horizontal piping with clevis hangers as follows: Up to 32 mm size - 1800 mm maximum spacing 38 to 75 mm size - 3000 mm maximum spacing 88 mm size and larger - 4300 mm maximum spacing .8 Support plumbing piping in accordance with more stringent requirements of

Plumbing Code or these specifications. .9 Where hangers are grouped, locate spacing by smallest size pipe. Do not use

trapeze type hangers unless specifically shown. Where trapeze hangers are used, fit insulated piping with insulation shields taped to insulation.

.10 Support through vertical piping with riser clamps at each floor level or maximum of 3

metres whichever is shorter. Secure small vertical piping with long ring stays.


JAL NO. 10-265

.11 On copper piping, supply and install approved separation to ensure no contact between copper and ferrous hanger or other work. Supply and install barrier to prevent copper pipe being in contact with ferrous or cinder materials.

.12 Support hangers with threaded mild steel hangers rods sized in accordance with

hanger manufacturer’s tables. Affix to building structure by coach screw threads into wood construction, inserts into concrete, by beam clamps on to structural steel work, or by bolts or welding. Where inserts are incorrectly placed, Phillips "Red Head" concrete anchors may be used.

.13 Support piping on walls with offset wall hooks fastened to wall with toggle bolts or

Phillips "Red Head" concrete anchors. .14 Hangers shall be arranged so as to load structural steel in a concentric manner.

Loads shall be imparted either on joist panel points or within 150 mm of panel joint. .15 Rawl Drill Anchors and Rawlys may be used to attach to existing structure sized to

suit load with 5 to 1 safety factor. .16 Support all hangers directly from building structure only. Do not support pipes, ducts

or other equipment from other pipes, ducts, equipment, suspended ceilings or their suspension systems.

.17 Hang new piping for at least 2 support points from isolated equipment with

Burgess-Vibro Acoustics or equal `SH' isolators with steel spring having 25 mm minimum static deflection and series connected elastomer element having static deflection of 6 mm underload.

.18 Where structural steel is to be fireproofed, hangers and attachments MUST be

placed BEFORE fireproofing is installed. Cost of any repair will be charged to Section responsible for same.

3.9 SLEEVES .1 Where pipes pass through masonry walls, supply and install suitable 1.2 mm (18

gauge) galvanized steel sleeves. Size sleeves on insulated pipes to permit insulation to continue through sleeves. Sleeve ductwork similarly.

.2 Where pipes pass through concrete or frame construction, supply and install 1.2 mm

(18 gauge) galvanized iron sleeves. Provide copper sleeves on copper pipe.


JAL NO. 10-265

.3 Seal spaces between unburied pipes and ducts through "required" fire separations" with U.L.C. listed (Guide 40U19) fire stopping including pipe insulation. Fire stopping shall comply with O.B.C., be approved by local Building Department and installed as per listing Card, Firestopping shall have approved FH (hose stream) rating.

.4 Seal all holes and openings through floors water tight. In rooms with mechanical

equipment, sleeves through floors shall be welded water stop flange steel pipe sleeves poured in place and extending at least 100 mm above floor or pipes shall have Corrosion Services Co. Ltd. "Link Seals" installed to manufacturers directions. Where ducts pass through floors, provide 100 mm high by 100 mm concrete curb around ducts sealed to floor. Locate openings in field to be snug around ducts and be responsible for correct size and location.

.5 Sleeves on buried piping shall be 50 mm larger all round than pipe and be filled with

50 mm thick fiberglass blanket insulation and sealed with mastic. 3.10 LEVELS & DIMENSIONS .1 General Contractor, on request, will supply this Division with necessary levels and

dimensions which are required to relate work of the Division to other Sections. Maintain all lines and levels so given and relate this work to work of other Sections.

3.11 PAINTING .1 Supply all equipment and materials fabricated from iron or steel (except ductwork

materials) prime and finish painted at factory before shipment. If damaged, touch up with suitable primer and finish paint. All auxiliary support steel supplied by this Division shall be prime painted with one coat of red oxide primer and finish paint.

.2 All metal parts, miscellaneous metal items and work installed exterior to building

(except aluminum) must be degreased and prime and finish paint unless otherwise noted.

.3 Painting of bare piping, ductwork, insulation and finish painting of equipment will be

done by this Section unless otherwise noted. .4 Consult with Architect about colour of exterior equipment and materials.


JAL NO. 10-265

3.12 EQUIPMENT MARKERS & NAMEPLATES .1 Attach to each item of equipment (including electric motors), proper manufacturer's

nameplate showing size, model number, serial number, and all information usually provided including voltage, cycle, phase and horsepower of motors and name and address of unit manufacturer.

.2 Ensure stamped, etched or engraved lettering on plates is legible. Nameplates shall

not be painted over and where apparatus is insulated, provide adequate openings in insulation for viewing purposes.

.3 Provide on each item of equipment suitable nameplate. Before nameplates are

made, submit sample and list of names for approval. Make nameplates of 1.6 mm (1/16 ") thick weather resistant rigid laminated plastic with engraved letters on black background. Secure nameplates with drive screws. Make letters on starters, timers and small items at least 5 mm (3/16") high and at least 10 mm (3/8") high on larger units such as fans. Generally, unit nameplates shall conform to those noted in their Schedules.

3.13 PIPE IDENTIFICATION .1 Identify exposed service piping at 6 metre intervals and at each valve behind access

panel with service name and flow direction marked on piping using Mystic labels ,Westline or Brady "Perma-Code" labels, each applied with #3M clear adhesive. Replace loose or lost labels at end of one year guarantee period without charge. Painted stencil markings are acceptable. Provide similar direction of flow arrows at each label.

3.14 CLEANUP .1 On completion, remove from premises surplus materials and debris resulting from

work of this Division. Keep work areas clean and in a workmanlike manner at all times to approval.

.2 Fill in, compact and level off exterior excavations after final settlement of backfill to

approval.


JAL NO. 10-265

3.15 VALVE TAGS & CHART .1 Provide on each valve, 25 mm diameter or larger brass tag with punched and

embossed numbers. Valves immediately adjacent to plumbing fixtures or radiation need not be tagged.

.2 Provide where later directed, a neat, glass fronted, framed chart stating number,

location, service and function of each valve and lines controlled. Mount 1800 mm above floor to bottom.

.3 Frame each pressure vessel, H.W. tank and Boiler Certificate under glass and hang

where directed in room where unit is located. Mount 1800 mm above floor to bottom.

.4 Identify exposed service piping at 6 m intervals and at each valve behind access

panel with service name marked on piping using "Mystic" labels (H.A. Scarlett Industries), Westline or Brady "Perma-Code" labels, each applied with #3M clear adhesive. Replace loose or lost labels at end of one year guarantee period without charge. Painted stencil markings are acceptable. Provide direction of flow arrow at each service label.

3.16 PIPE AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION TABLE .1 Pipe Marker Valve Tag Primary Colour Legend Legend City Water CI.W. Green Cold Water C.W. Green Drinking Water Return D.W.R. Green Dom. Hot Water Supply D.H.W.S. Green Dom. Hot Water Return D.H.W.R. Green Hot Water Heating Supply H.W.H.S. Yellow 80oC to 120oC Hot Water Heating Return H.W.H.R. Yellow 80oC to 120oC Make-Up Water M.U.A. Yellow Condensate Return C.R. Yellow Storm Sewer S.S. Green Sanitary Sewer SAN.S. Green Steam S.kPa Yellow (indicate pressure) Natural Gas N.G. Yellow


JAL NO. 10-265

Vent (plumbing) V.P. Green Vent V. Yellow 3.17 COLD WEATHER WORK .1 Wherever work is performed in surrounding air temperatures below 4.0oC special

approved precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to mortar, concrete or materials. All such materials used at such times shall be heated. Right is reserved to suspend work at any time should climatic conditions be deemed unsuitable for proper execution of work.

3.18 FLOOR & WALL PLATES .1 Provide one piece nickel plated flanges of stamped brass in finished areas at points

where exposed uncovered pipes pass through walls, floors or ceilings. Secure plates at ceiling with integral brass set screw.

.2 Split plates will not be accepted. 3.19 WORK SCHEDULE .1 Refer to Division 1 General Requirements, for details of work scheduling and

comply with same. 3.20 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Submit for review in accordance with Division 1, within 30 days of Contract award, 8

copies of Shop Drawings and Room Equipment Schedules covering material to be supplied.

.2 Make submittals of more than two pages in individual booklet form for easy

processing. Failure to comply may cause undue delay in approvals. Each shop drawing must be certified correct by submitting trade before submission.


JAL NO. 10-265

.3 Review of Shop Drawings is for sole purpose of ascertaining conformance with general design concept. This review shall not mean that Engineer approves detail design inherent in Shop Drawings, responsibility for which shall remain with Contractor and such review shall not relieve Contractor of his responsibility for errors or omissions in the shop drawings or of his responsibility for meeting all requirements of Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and coordinated at site, for information that pertains solely to fabrication processes or to techniques of construction and installation and for co-ordination of work of all trades.

3.21 EXAMINE SITE & CONDITIONS .1 Examine site and local conditions. Examine carefully all Drawings and complete

Specifications to ensure that work can be satisfactorily carried out as shown. Before commencing work, examine the work of other Sections and report at once any defect or interference affecting the work, its completion or warranty. No allowance will be made later for any expense incurred through failure to make these examinations or to report any such discrepancies in writing.

END OF SECTION

TDSB – Kane Public School Section 15250 JAIN & ASSOCIATES Limited Contents Page Project No. KE1016 February 28, 2011 Insulation

JAL NO. 10-265

CONTENTS SUBSECTION TITLE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Related Instructions 1.2 Work Included 1.3 Submittals PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials 2.2 Piping & Equipment Insulation 2.3 Duct Insulation PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Testing 3.2 Installation Instructions 3.3 Field Quality Control

TDSB – Kane Public School Section 15250 JAIN & ASSOCIATES Limited Page 1 Project No. KE1016 February 28, 2011 Insulation

JAL NO. 10-265

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED INSTRUCTIONS .1 Comply with requirements of Section 15050, Basic Materials & Methods. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED .1 Work under this contract shall include but is not limited to the following. .2 Supply and install insulation for following piping and duct systems: .1 Domestic water piping. .2 Heating hot water supply and return piping. .3 Miscellaneous piping and ducts noted on Drawings or in specifications. .4 Horizontal suspended sanitary soil and waste piping from W.C.'s, urinals and

drinking fountains. .5 Storm & sanitary drains as specified. .6 Water drain lines below handicapped lavatories. .7 Miscellaneous insulation as specified. .8 Domestic hot water storage tank. .9 Exhaust air ducts from outlets to fans. .10 Supply ducts carrying air conditioned air. 1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 Submit detailed list of material for each service stating manufacture, 'K' value,

density, finish, flame spread and smoke ratings, permability, materials, finishes, cements and adhesives.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Insulation, jackets and adhesives shall be incombustible and in compliance with

Ontario Building Code. Products containing asbestos shall not be used. .2 All insulation products used shall be fully tested and approved as fire retardent by

Underwriters Laboratories of Canada Limited.


JAL NO. 10-265

.3 Materials shall be of Canadian manufacture where available, of best quality of their respective kinds and of uniform pattern throughout.

.4 All insulating materials shall be fire retardant. Adhesives shall be waterproof and

incombustible flame resistant. Combustible wrappings or vapour barriers used in conjunction with thermal insulating materials shall be treated to reduce their combustibility so that flame spread classification of entire assembly shall not exceed 25 and smoke developed number shall not exceed 50. Submit report from an approved testing laboratory confirming foregoing ratings.

.5 Wheat pastes shall not be used. .6 Canvas covering shall be close weave fibre fire retarding canvas of weights

specified, 135.6 g/m2 where concealed and at least 203.4 g/m2 where exposed to view. .7 Consultant reserves right to demand test samples to composite insulation systems

for fire hazard test rating. .8 Where wire is specified to secure insulation, it shall be stainless steel wire, 1.3 mm

gauge, dead soft annealed type. 2.2 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION .1 Unburied domestic cold water piping: 25 mm thick heavy density glass fibre

preformed pipe insulation with maximum of 0.033 conductivity at 10oC mean with factory applied vinyl foil kraft laminated glass fibre reinforced fire resistive vapour barrier jacket with not more than 1.15 perm rating (ASJ) with sealed lapped joints. Insulate heat pump condensate lines similarly.

.2 Unburied domestic recirculation and hot water piping: heavy density glass fibre

preformed pipe insulation with maximum 0.043 conductivity at 93oC mean with factory applied fire resistive vapour barrier jacket of not more than 1.15 perm rating. Use 25 mm thickness on piping up to 50 mm size, and 38 mm thickness on piping 63 mm and above.

.3 Unburied high temperature hot water heating piping: as for unburied domestic hot

water piping except use 38 mm thick insulation on all pipe sizes. .4 On water and waste piping and trap below each Handicapped lavatory: insulate with

13 mm Armaflex II or Acwil "Therma-Cel" flexible foamed elastomeric insulation. Paint insulation with two coats of "White Finish".


JAL NO. 10-265

.5 Unburied Rain Water Leaders and storm drains both exposed and concealed: insulate with 25 mm thick fiberglass pipe covering with factory applied aluminum fire resistant vapour barrier and sealed lapped joints. Insulate underside of roof hoppers.

.6 Horizontal runs of sanitary drains: insulate as for storm drains above. Also insulate

horizontal wastes from urinals, toilets and drinking fountains concealed in ceiling spaces to vertical stack.

.7 Exterior exposed piping: weatherproof insulation with two coats of Flintkote #C-29

applied over 45# building paper copper wired on and sealed to approval. Install insulation after electric trace wiring is tested and approved, if tracing is specified.

.8 Valves and fittings: 25 mm glass fibre blanket conforming to CGSB #51-BF11

compressed to same thickness as adjoining insulation and secured with jute twine. Over this apply smooth coat of insulating cement and recover with 4 oz. (135.6 g/m2) canvas. On cold water piping wrap blanket with foil faced friction tape overlapped to form vapour barrier before applying insulation cement. Seal all vapour barriers.

.9 Insulate each hot water storage tank (except factory insulated units) with 50 mm

thick 32 kg/m3 density glass fibre (maximum 0.033 conductivity at 24oF mean) with 25 mm galvanized expanded metal lath finished overall with 13 mm thickness of insulating cement and covered with 271 g/m2 canvas jacket pasted over with approved incombustible adhesive.

.10 Insulate valves, fittings, unions and flanges on heating system with 38 mm glass

fibre blanket conforming to CGSB #51-FP11 compressed to same thickness as adjoining insulation and secured with jute twine. Over this apply smooth coat of insulating cement and recover with 135.6 g/m2 canvas jacket neatly pasted on with fireproof adhesive. Where exposed, apply second coat of adhesive over 203.4 g/m2 canvas or Foster "Sealfas" PVC fitting covers.

2.3 DUCT INSULATION .1 Exhaust air ducts for 1800mm from outlets, supply air ducts: 25 mm thick glass fibre

12 kg/m3 density flexible duct insulation with reinforced foil faced flame resistant kraft vapour barrier. Insulation shall have 0.0-3 perm rating minimum.


JAL NO. 10-265

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TESTING .1 Insulation shall not be installed until piping and ductwork has been tested to

Consultant's satisfaction. Repair to or replacement of insulation is required if installed prior to such testing approvals being given.

3.2 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS .1 General .1 Pipe and fittings shall be dry, free of dirt, scale, rust, oil and grease before

insulation is applied. Rustproof ferrous materials where necessary as directed by Consultant using approved materials and methods.

.2 All insulation material and adhesives shall be installed in strict compliance

with latest editions of manufacturer's recommendations and shall present neat workmanlike appearance upon completion.

.3 Under no circumstances shall ambient temperature in space be less than

10oC during application of any insulation or finishing. Where higher temperature is required by manufacturer's recommendations, this higher temperature requirement shall be complied with.

.4 Work shall be performed only by tradesmen experienced in insulation work.

See 15050-1.3. .5 Recover all interior insulation exposed to view with 6 oz. (203.4 g/m2) canvas

duck pasted on over insulation with approved flame resistant adhesive to form smooth even surface.

.6 Work which is inaccessible for application of insulation after installation shall

be insulated and finished before being placed in position. .7 Provide suitable approved openings in insulation for inspection outlets,

equipment nameplates and operating devices. .8 Install all insulation in first class manner with smooth and even surfaces.

Outline of round insulation shall be true circular and concentric shape. Outline of fitting insulation shall be shaped to blend with adjacent covering. Do not use scrap pieces of insulation where full length section will fit.


JAL NO. 10-265

.9 Joints in insulation shall be made by cementing pieces together and finishing so that there are no cracks or gaps.

.10 Take care that insulation over flexible connections in piping does not unduly

increase lateral or longitudinal stiffness of connections. .11 Sectional insulation furred into spaces or concealed in walls, hung ceilings

and pipe spaces shall not have extra jacket. However, canvas covers supplied as standard on insulation used in such locations, shall remain with overlap pasted down.

.12 Keep insulation clear of instruments, controls, components, access doors

and operating devices so that it will not hinder or interfere with removal, setting, reading of or access to same. Verify with Consultant as to whether such items are located properly before applying any insulation, otherwise be responsible for all retouching that may be required.

.13 Repair and reseal all breaks, cracks and perforations in vapour barriers.

Seal all weld pin penetrations of vapour barrier with 100 mm x 100 mm patch of aluminum foil tape.

.14 Size all insulation exposed to view and leave ready for painting by another

Section unless otherwise noted. .15 Insulation shall continue through sleeves and openings except at "Required

Fire Separations" where sleeves and openings shall be "Fire Stopped". See 15050-3.7, Sleeves. Insulation shall be butted tight to fire stopping and vapour sealed.

.16 Insulate all piping noted to be electrically traced. Install insulation after

electric trace wiring is tested and approved. .2 Pipework .1 Pipe insulation shall be carried uninterrupted through pipe sleeves except

where otherwise noted or required by Ontario Building Code or local authority. Where space will not permit application of sectional insulation on pipes in sleeves, pack sleeves with approved fire stop material. See 15050-3.7.

.2 Insulation shall be continuous on piping systems. Insulate valves and joints

to same thickness of insulation as specified for pipe. Seal vapour barriers to approval where pipes pass through sleeves after sleeves are packed.


JAL NO. 10-265

.3 Do not insulate unions but terminate pipe insulation neatly with cement at each end of unions except on cold water piping where unions shall be insulated.

.4 Carry insulation through hanger clevises and where noted use insulation

protection saddles supplied by Section 15400, and 15750 between clevis and insulation.

.5 Insulate water piping in cupboards and closets as for exposed piping. .6 Hangers directly supporting cold water piping shall be insulated and vapour

sealed as part of adjoining pipe. .7 Buried cold water piping need not be insulated. .3 Ductwork .1 Co-operate with sheet metal installer to ensure correct installation of

insulation plugs for pitot tube test openings in ductwork. .2 Duct insulation shall be carried uninterrupted through sleeves except where

otherwise noted or required by Ontario Building Code or local authority. Where space will not permit application of sectional insulation on ducts in sleeves, pack sleeves with approved fire stop material. See 15050-3.7. Seal vapour barriers to approval where ducts pass through sleeves after sleeves are packed.

.3 Where duct insulation is secured by wire or glass twine, it shall not be drawn

so tightly as to unduly compress insulation. Where Consultant judges insulation has been compressed too much under wire or twine or at corners, it shall be removed and reapplied.

.4 Sagging of duct insulation will not be accepted. Remove and reapply. .5 Do not break continuity of insulation vapour barrier by hanger or rods.

Remove hangers temporarily to facilitate installation of vapour barrier where required.

.6 Supply and install cap strips to cover turned out legs of ductwork reinforcing

and supporting members. .7 Seal duct insulation at all joints, pins and openings. Tape joints with

approved self-adhesive foil faced 50 mm wide vapour barrier tape.


JAL NO. 10-265

.8 Insulate each duct access door to maintain insulation and vapour barrier rating when access door is closed.

.9 Where ducts are acoustically lined, thermal insulation is not required but

shall overlap liner at least 150 mm. .10 Insulate 1800 mm of concealed exhaust ducts (from outlet). 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .1 Keep insulation materials dry while in shipment and on site. .2 Treat all insulation and finishes so that maximum Flame Spread Rating is 25 or

lower and Smoke Index Rating is 50 or lower. .3 Protect insulation passing through walls and similar barriers with a metal sleeve

large enough to accommodate full thickness of insulation. END OF SECTION

TDSB – Kane Public School Section 15400 JAIN & ASSOCIATES Limited Contents Page Project No. KE1016 February 28, 2011 Plumbing & Drainage

JAL NO. 10-265

CONTENTS SUBSECTION TITLE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Related Instructions 1.2 Work Included 1.3 Submittals PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials 2.2 Pipe & Fittings 2.3 Valves 2.4 Cleanouts 2.5 Fixtures & Fittings 2.8 Water Hammer Arrestors

2.10 Sewage Pumps & Pit PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Tests 3.2 Venting 3.3 Connections To Fixtures 3.4 Joints 3.5 Pipe & Fittings 3.6 Valves 3.7 Drips & Drains 3.8 Expansion Provisions 3.9 Cleanouts 3.10 Pipe Grading 3.11 Fixtures & Fittings 3.12 Sanitary Drainage System 3.13 Water Service 3.14 Temporary Water 3.15 Water Hammer Arrestor 3.16 Backflow Preventer

3.17 Sewage Pumps & Pits 3.18 Connections for Other Sections 3.19 Existing Systems & Materials 3.20 Operate and Adjust Systems 3.21 Warranty

TDSB – Kane Public School Section 15400 JAIN & ASSOCIATES Limited Page 1 Project No. KE1016 February 28, 2011 Plumbing & Drainage

JAL NO. 10-265

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED INSTRUCTIONS .1 Comply with requirements of Section 15050 – Basic Materials & Methods. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED .1 Work under this contract shall include but is not limited to the following: .2 Supply and installation of complete storm and sanitary drainage, waste and vent

systems to serve roof hoppers, fixtures, floor drains and equipment and connection to existing drains.

.3 Supply and installation of domestic water piping to serve fixtures, hose bibbs and

equipments. .4 Supply and installation of all fixtures and floor drains including miscellaneous

fittments, equipment and components and accessories to complete entire installation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 Submit Shop Drawings for following:

.1 Plumbing fixtures, faucets and trim.

.2 Plumbing specialities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Materials shall be new, of Canadian manufacture and of best quality of their

respective kinds and of uniform pattern throughout. .2 Traps and fittings shall be of same material and equal in quality and thickness to

soil, vent, waste and drain piping to which attached.


JAL NO. 10-265

.3 All pipe fittings, valves, expansion joints, strainers, measuring devices, safety devices and similar pressure retaining components shall comply with Boiler & Pressure Vessels Act of Ontario and C.S.A. #B.51 in compliance with M.C.C.R. Technical Standards Division Directive of December 9, 1985 and Appendix 'A' thereto.

2.2 PIPE & FITTINGS .1 Buried interior drains laid on approved solid bedding shall be D.W.V. plastic

P.V.C. solvent weld gravity sewer pipe (CSA #B182.1) SDR-28 to 150 mm size and SDR-35 for larger sizes. Use same material for wall hung urinals.

.2 Unburied waste piping shall be: 27.6 MPa class cast iron Soil Pipe CSA #B70 tar

coated or DWV copper drainage pipe with solder fittings. .3 Interior Water Piping: Type `K' or 'L' hard copper with solder pressure fittings for

unburied NO ferrous piping, fittings, bushings or plugs shall be used. Provide Dielectric bushings at connections to ferrous materials. All copper water piping shall be certified for compliance with the ASTM B88-83 Standard, with certification markings on same.

.4 Vent Piping: galvanized steel pipe schedule #40 (ASTM #A53) with 1035 kPa

steam WP galvanized malleable fittings, copper `DWV' pipe with solder fittings or 27.6 MPa class cast iron Soil Pipe. Buried vent lines shall be Type `L' copper or cast iron Soil Pipe.

.5 For pump discharge line use copper with solder joint pipes. .6 Equipment drain and waste water piping: type `L' or `DWV' copper piping with

solder joint drainage fittings, 95/5 solder. 2.3 VALVES .1 Water valves shall be of Crane, Jenkins or Toyo (Industrial Class) manufacture,

all-brass solder joint up to and including 75 mm size and IBBM flanged over 75 mm size.

.2 Shut-off valves on branch lines to room fixtures and equipment up to and

including 50 mm size may be brass ball valves rated for 4137 kPa WWP. .3 Check valves: check type with regrind feature, 1380 kPa water pattern, install in

horizontal position only.


JAL NO. 10-265

2.4 CLEANOUTS .1 Cleanouts in concrete floor shall be Zurn #1602SP, Watts #CO-200-1-34, Mifab

C1100 –R-1-34 Smith 4220 adjustable floor cleanout with round scoriated nickel bronze cover; in terrazzo areas with Zurn #1608SP, Watts #CO-200U-34 Mifab C1100-U-1-34 Smith 4180 cleanout cover; in tiled areas with Zurn #1603SP, Watts #CO-200T-34 Mifab C1100-T-1 Smith 4140 cleanout cover and Zurn #1504, Ancon #CO-200-RC, C1100-RC-1-34 Smith 4020Y in carpeted areas. In ceramic or quarry tile areas, cleanouts shall be as for terrazzo except with square top. In seamless floors cleanouts shall be Ancon #200FC or Zurn 1602-R6-SP, Watts 200-RFC-34, Mifab C1100-RFC-1 Smith 4220PC, or equal. All cleanouts must have inside gasketted C.I. plug. J.R. Smith are acceptable as an alternate.

2.5 FIXTURES & FITTINGS .1 Provide plumbing fixtures shown or noted complete with necessary fittings and

escutcheons of specified manufacture or of make noted. Fixtures and fittings shall conform to C.S.A. B45.1, B45.4 and B125 amended to date.

.2 Submit three (3) copies of fixture shop drawings for Owner’s approval indicating

room names and numbers where each fixture will be installed. .3 ALL plumbing fixtures shall be of one manufacture except where specifically

noted as a special manufacture. ALL plumbing brass and trim shall be of one manufacture except where specifically noted as a special manufacture. Verify each fixture with millwork provided by Another Section. Fixture must be compatible type. No extra will be allowed if revisions is required due to millwork provided by Another Section.

.4 VERIFY mounting height of all fixtures with Architect BEFORE ROUGH-IN.

Adjust flush valves to provide adequate flush with minimum water. Provide all wiring to electrically operated units from outlet provided by Division 16.

.5 Alternate Equipment:

Faucets 1. Chicago - Ceramic Cartridge

Trims 1. Powers


JAL NO. 10-265

Emergency Equipment

1. Bradley 2. Haws 3. Speakman

Sink 1. AMI Fixtures 1. Kohler 2. Zurn Flush Valves 1. Sloan .6 (S-1) One Compartment Classroom Sink Kindered Model QSL-2020/8, back ledge 18-8 20 gauge stainless steel, mirror

finished ledge, self-rimming, counter mounted, with crumb cup strainer, sound deadening. ‘P’ Trap, 38 mm with cleanout. Trim fitting Delta 27T2945 gooseneck, Faucet, C.P. deck mounted, with cast brass body, swing spout with vandal proof flow aerator and cast metal lever handle and loose key stops.

.7 (S-2) One Compartment Kindered QSL2225/12, back ledge 18-8 18 gauge stainless steel, mirror finished

ledge, self-rimming, counter mounted, with crumb cup strainer, sound deadening. ‘P’ Trap, 38 mm with cleanout. Trim fitting Delta 27T2945gooseneck, Faucet, C.P. deck mounted, with cast brass body, swing spout with vandal proof flow aerator and cast metal lever handle and loose key stops.

.8 (S-3) One Compartment – Art Room Kindered QSL2225/12, back ledge 18-8 18 gauge stainless steel, mirror finished

ledge, self-rimming, counter mounted, with crumb cup strainer, sound deadening. ‘P’ Trap, 38 mm with cleanout. Trim fitting Delta 27T2945gooseneck, Faucet, C.P. deck mounted, with cast brass body, swing spout with vandal proof flow aerator and cast metal lever handle and loose key stops. Provide Zurn Model Z-1180 interceptor at outlet of sink. Install interceptor at height to allow basket removal.


JAL NO. 10-265

.9 Eye Wash Unit (EW) Acorn Safety Model O440-TMV1 eyewash unit, C.P. 32 mm 'P' trap with

escutcheon; 13 mm ball valves and C.P. screwdriver stops, escutcheons and automatic pressure controls.

.10 Water Closet (W-1) – Flush Tank - Kindergarten American Standard Yorkville Flowise 2876.100 back outlet, pressure assist,

elongated W.C. bowl complete with brass and rubber floor flanges, bolts, nuts and china bolt caps; vitreous china flush tank with flush fittings, tank liner and float valve; 10 mm C.P. rigid angle supply with screwdriver stop; Centoco #82CC, Olsonite #96CC or Bemis #165 black open front seat with cover with check hinge.

.11 Toilet - Floor Mtd. Flush Valve (W-2) - Staff American Standard `Madera' #AF-3451.001 `Water Saver' Toilet, vitreous china

elongated syphon jet action bowl, 38 mm top spud, with flange bolts, bolt caps, floor flange and gasket. Delta #81T201 flush valve, adj. 4.8L flush, C.P. quiet action diaphragm type with vacuum breaker, seat bumper on angle stop, pressure loss check and with non-hold open feature. Centoco #1500 seat, Bemis 1955C elongated heavy duty solid plastic white open front less cover, with check hinges and chromated steel posts, washers and nuts.

.12 Water Closet (W-3) – Flush Tank – Parenting - HPD American Standard Yorkville Flowise 2878.016, pressure assist, elongated W.C.

bowl complete with brass and rubber floor flanges, bolts, nuts and china bolt caps; vitreous china flush tank with flush fittings, tank liner and float valve; 10 mm C.P. rigid angle supply with screwdriver stop; Centoco #82CC, Olsonite #96CC or Bemis #165 black open front seat with cover with check hinge.

.13 Lavatory (L-1) – Vanity – Standard - Kindergarten

Kindred Model KSRU/9, Delta 25C4847 faucet, 33260 open grid strainer, 47T312 angle supply with S.D. stops, 33T311 ‘P’ trap with cleanout and escutcheon plates. Provide Franke SD80 soap dispenser in vanity for each unit.

.14 Lavatory (L-2) Franke Model V16, self rimming, 20 gauge, Delta 25C4847 faucet, P-trap Teck

47T512 S.D. stops with escutcheons. Provide Franke SD80 soap dispenser in vanity for each unit.


JAL NO. 10-265

.15 Lavatory (L-3) - Wall Mounted - Handicap American Standard Murro 0954.000 vitreous china wall mounted lavatory

complete with Delta 22C151; 32 mm 33T311 C.P. `P' trap with C.P. 32 mm 33T26P offset waste fitting with open grid strainer; 10 mm C.P. Teck 47T312 angle supplies with close to wall screwdriver stops and escutcheons. Provide floor supported chair carrier. Provide Delta R2970-MIX hot water mixing valve installed in ceiling to hot water line serving lavatory.

2.6 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS .1 Water hammer arrestors shall be PP In. or equal, sized and installed as per

Manufacturer’s recommendations. Provide unit in accordance with the following schedule:

Model Fixture Unit SC-500 Up to 11 SC-700 12 – 32 SC-1000 33 – 60 SC-1250 61 – 113 2.7 SEWAGE PUMPS & PIT

.1 Provide in floor pit Zoeller submersible pumps and pits, motor, level controller, vented power cord discharge.

.2 Provide separate high water alarm for each pit supplied by Pump Manufacturer. .3 Provide fibreglass pit with antifloating collar, heavy duty non-skid, metal cover plate

as supplied by Pump Manufacturer and secured in its place. .4 Manufacturer of pump and pits shall review the site conditions and confirm supplied

pump and pit will work satisfactorily. Submit written confirmation. .5 Alternate: 1. Barnes 2. Myers


JAL NO. 10-265

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TESTS .1 In addition to tests required by local authorities, test new piping and drains in

presence of Consultant as hereinafter described. .2 Notify Consultant in writing at least 48 hours prior to start of tests. Failure to do

so may require test to be redone. .3 Ball test drains to OWRC Regulation #815/84, Ontario Plumbing Code as

amended to date. .4 Water test drains, storm, waste and vent piping to top of piping for not less than

two hours without dropping in level. .5 Final air test drains, waste and vent piping to Plumbing Code. .6 Pressure test water piping with 1000 kPa cold water for not less than four hours

without decrease in pressure. Test on buried water piping may be made after piping has been partially backfilled to hold in position but all joints shall be exposed to inspection.

.7 Perform tests before application of pipe covering. Test buried and concealed

piping before backfilling or concealing. Protect equipment and parts not capable of withstanding test pressure during test.

.8 Make leaks tight while systems are still under test. If this is impossible, remove

and refit defective parts. Caulking of threaded joints or welds will not be permitted.

.9 After leaks have been repaired, repeat tests as often as necessary to ensure

tightness of each system. 3.2 VENTING .1 Vent fixtures and traps according to Plumbing Code and local regulations.

Increase vents smaller than 75 mm diameter to 75 mm before same pass through roof.

.2 Connect vent lines into soil and vent stacks above highest fixture or separately

carry through roof. End soil stacks and vent piping 400 mm above roof.


JAL NO. 10-265

.3 Fit each soil and vent pipe through roof with vandal proof vent caps equal to Zurn Model Z-193.

3.3 CONNECTIONS TO FIXTURES .1 Trap each fixture and floor drain same size as outlet according to Plumbing

Code. Vent each trap as outlined above where required by Plumbing Code. .2 Provide each fixture with waste and trap, vent and water as shown or required

and in accordance with following schedule: Fixture Trap Vent Cold Hot Sink (Single or Double) 38 32 13 13 Eyewash 32 32 13 13 Toilet 75 38 25/13 - Lavatory 32 32 13 13 3.4 JOINTS .1 Make all joints in piping to conform to Plumbing Code and to approval. .2 Make joints in copper waste, vent and water piping with certified lead free solder

with non-corrosive soldering flux. Clean and ream each joint and remove excess solder and flux. Other lead free solders giving equivalent strength joints may be used.

.3 Buried copper water pipe to be continuous with no joints. .4 Make joints in threaded pipe with lead free joint compound. Use of lampwick or

hemp will not be permitted. 3.5 PIPE & FITTINGS .1 Provide all necessary piping including fittings, unions, etc., to complete systems

shown. Cut pipes true and square, ream or file ends to smooth surface, all to pipe manufacturer's and accepted trade standards. Fittings shall be of equivalent bore as pipe, of equal strength and weight. Install piping to manufacture's specifications and published directions. All piping shall conform to Plumbing Code.


JAL NO. 10-265

.2 Chrome plate all exposed uninsulated pipes, fittings and valves in washrooms and other occupied areas unless otherwise directed.

.3 Provide flanges, unions or compression fittings on equipment side of shut-off

valves in piping connections to equipment, tanks and fixtures so same can be disconnected for service. Flanges and unions shall be of same material as piping.

.4 Before placing all pipes in service, chlorinate domestic cold, hot, tempered and

recirculation pipes to local municipal directions. Submit copy of Test Certificates and also include one (1) copy in Maintenance Manuals.

3.6 VALVES .1 Provide valves of types noted where shown or directed. .2 Provide shut-off valves on water piping leading to each battery or group of 2 or

more fixtures whether or not shown. Each washroom shall be considered as a group and be valved as a unit unless valved in two or more groups. Locate for easy operation through suspended ceilings and access doors.

.3 Provide shut-off valve at top or base of each domestic water and branch main. .4 Provide check valve, shut-off valve and Tour & Anderson Model 786 circuit

balancing valve suitable for potable water system on each circulation branch pipe.

3.7 DRIPS & DRAINS .1 Provide 13 mm lock-shield brass hose cocks at base of each water riser, on

branch mains and runouts and at low points, set on riser or fixture side of shut-off valves. Provide sufficient valves to ensure complete draining of all water piping.

3.8 EXPANSION PROVISIONS .1 Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction complete with swing joints as

necessary. .2 Anchor and guide piping where necessary.


JAL NO. 10-265

3.9 CLEANOUTS .1 Provide cleanouts to conform to Plumbing Code. Grease cleanout plugs and

covers BEFORE installation. Open and clean each cleanout after floors are finished to ensure easy access for cleaning. Enpoco products are acceptable.

.2 Make each cleanout full size of drain up to and including 100 mm, and 100 mm

size for drains over 100 mm. Extend buried cleanouts up to floor with 'Y', 1/8th bend and recessed brass plug.

.3 Make each cleanout accessible and wherever necessary, extend branch

connections to finished surfaces of walls and floors and fit with cleanout cover and access door.

.4 Provide "Barrett" type cleanout in base of each soil and vent stack and each

rainwater leader. .5 Provide 'Y' type line cleanout on each waste pipe and stack 50 mm size and

smaller extending vertically above grade floor immediately before same becomes buried.

3.10 PIPE GRADING .1 Unless otherwise noted, drains and waste piping shall grade DOWN in direction

of flow as follows: Up to and including 75 mm size - 1:50 100 mm size and larger - 1:100 .2 Grade Hot and Cold Water piping UP in direction of flow 1:240. Grade circulation

piping DOWN in direction of flow at 1:240. .3 Grade Vent piping UP from fixtures so it is self-draining. Minimum grade shall

conform to Plumbing Code. .4 Grade H.W. heating piping 'UP' in 1:240 to air vents. Arrange piping to ensure

minimum number of vents. .5 Grade equipment drain and waste piping 'DOWN' 1:240 minimum to waste

receptacle.


JAL NO. 10-265

3.11 FIXTURES & FITTINGS .1 Set bolt caps and escutcheons in plaster of paris. Hang each fixture to

manufacturer's standards using all bolt holes and secure to wall to approval. Provide floor supported chair carrier for all wall hung fixtures including lavatories and urinals.

.2 Architectural drawings to govern in determination of number and location of

fixtures. Supply and install complete with all services every fixture shown on any Contract Drawing.

.3 Join work surface and sink with 2 parts of epoxy grout or lab grade silicone. .4 Provide all electric wiring to electric operated fixtures from outlet provided by

Division 16. 3.12 SANITARY DRAINAGE SYSTEM .1 Provide sanitary drainage system complete to fixtures and equipment and

connect to existing sanitary line. 3.13 WATER SERVICE .1 Extend existing water service for new fixtures. .2 Rebalance existing recirculation to suit new recirc. lines. 3.14 TEMPORARY WATER .1 Arrange and bring in permanent water service immediately after Contract is

signed and service available. .2 Provide off water service, temporary water connection at point agreeable to

General Contractor and Consultant where construction water may be obtained by trades engaged. Maintain service in working condition until water is available from building services.


JAL NO. 10-265

3.15 WATER HAMMER ARRESTOR .1 Provide water hammer arrestor at the end of each branch serving group of

plumbing fixtures and at each closing valve. Locate each hammer arrestor in accessible location with a shut-off valve.

3.16 BACKFLOW PREVENTER

.1 Install unit to Manufacturer’s recommendations. Pipe drain port to nearest funnel

floor drain to approval. Locate each backflow preventer in existing accessible locatio.

3.17 SEWAGE PUMPS & PITS .1 Provide heavy plastic conduit in floor for power cord. Conduit must be of size to

permit cord plug to pass through same and end at least 50 mm above floor. .2 Provide 50 mm copper discharge pipe from each pump complete with gate and

check valves above floor and connect to each pump with union for easy removal without disturbing other pump.

.3 Provide fiberglass pit with removable gas tight non-skid metal cover plate with 75

mm vent to suit sump to approval. Extend vent to plumbing system to conform to Code. Seal all holes in cover plate and make gas tight to approval.

3.18 CONNECTIONS FOR OTHER SECTIONS .1 Provide water and waste connections required for equipment other Sections.

Examine drawings and specifications and co-operate with Sections to extent of properly locating connections required.

.2 Special valves and controls shall be supplied by Owner or other Sections

concerned and wastes shall be made to F.F.D. or other drains left by this Section in accordance with Plumbing Code. Provide globe valve on each water supply, check valve and Watts #909S backflow preventer and strainer to meet Plumbing Code. Pipe drain port of B.F.P. to nearest F.F.D. as required.


JAL NO. 10-265

3.19 EXISTING SYSTEMS & MATERIALS .1 Disconnect, CAREFULLY remove and relocate existing piping, fixtures, etc. as

required and as shown. Cap piping tight to mains, concealed inside walls or ceilings in workmanlike manner. Remove discontinued piping except where noted.

.2 Verify fully all existing systems as required to ensure proper operation of new

systems. Also clean and adjust existing systems to full extent for operation of new system to be installed. Clean and power flush all existing sanitary and storm lines to entire length to mains for proper operation of new. Allow for video inspection of existing buried lines for their sizes, elevations, location and conditions.

.3 Removed unused fixtures and material shall be removed from site. Removed

materials shall not be reused except as noted, be removed from site, not be allowed to accumulate and become property of Contractor unless otherwise noted.

.4 Verify all work in existing building all existing services and their locations before

tender submission. Verify routes of new pipes and extent of work involved through existing building. Relocate existing ducts, pipes, conduits, etc. in way of new pipes and reconnect to existing systems after completion of new services. For any discrepancy bring to Architect’s attention five (5) working days prior to tender closing. No extra will be allowed due to any existing conditions.

.5 Verify size, location of existing vent lines for connection of new vent lines.

Alternatively pass new vent line thru roof and repatch all opening to original conditions and to approval.

3.20 OPERATE AND ADJUST SYSTEMS .1 Operate all systems to full capacity and verify proper, safe efficient operation of

all parts and of each complete system. .2 Adjust flush valves, flush tanks, controls and valves to give proper performance

and to required settings. Oil motors and grease bearings before operating equipment.

.3 Turn over to Owner, necessary keys, handles and operating devices for each system.


JAL NO. 10-265

3.21 WARRANTY .1 Furnish to Owner through General Contractor and Architect, written warranty

covering materials and workmanship and free service for one year from date of start of lien period.

.2 Warranty shall entail repair and replacement of materials without charge to

Owner except where, in opinion of Architect, such repair or replacement was caused by improper use or lack of maintenance.

END OF SECTION

TDSB – Kane Public School Section 15750 JAIN & ASSOCIATES Limited Contents Page Project No. KE1016 February 28, 2011 Liquid Heat Transfer

JAL NO. 10-265

CONTENTS SUBSECTION TITLE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Related Instructions 1.2 Work Included 1.3 Submittals PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials 2.2 Pipe & Fittings 2.3 Valves

2.4 Wallfin Units 2.5 Strainers 2.6 Flow Measuring Equipment

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Piping Tests 3.2 Piping Installation 3.3 Expansion Provisions 3.4 Pipe Grading 3.5 Drain Valves 3.6 Cleaning Systems 3.7 Wallfin Units 3.8 Strainers 3.9 Operate & Adjust Systems

TDSB – Kane Public School Section 15750 JAIN & ASSOCIATES Limited Page 1 Project No. KE1016 February 28, 2011 Liquid Heat Transfer

JAL NO. 10-265

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED INSTRUCTIONS .1 Comply with requirements of Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED .1 Supply and installation of hot water heating system including radiation and cabinet

heaters. .2 Supply and installation of other components, accessories and incidentals to

complete above systems. .3 Installation of controls supplied by Sections 15900. 1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 Submit Shop Drawings for following: 1. Wallfin radiation 2. Pipe strainers PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Materials shall be of Canadian manufacture where available, of best quality of their

respective kinds and of uniform pattern throughout. 2.2 PIPE & FITTINGS .1 Heating hot water supply & return piping: standard black welded steel pipe,

Schedule #40, CSA #B63 (ASTM#A53). .2 Fittings on unburied piping up to and including 50 mm size: 125# steam WP black

cast iron ANSI #B16.4. Fittings on 63 mm size and larger: #B16.9 butt-welding type with bends, tees and reducing couplings manufactured welding fittings where 2 sizes or less smaller than main.


JAL NO. 10-265

.3 Wall-fin piping inside cabinets on copper/aluminum elements: type `L' hard copper piping (CSA #HC.7.6) with solder joint pressure class fittings.

.4 Equipment drain and condensate piping: type `L' or `DWV' copper piping with solder

joint drainage fittings. 2.3 VALVES .1 Valves shall be Crane, Jenkins, McAvity or Toyo (Industrial Class) manufacture,

all-brass up to and including 50 mm size. Larger sizes shall be iron body, bronze mounted. Valves 100 mm size and larger shall be flanged. Valves shall be for 125 psi steam working pressure or equivalent.

.2 Shut-off valves, up to and including 50 mm size: lever handle ball valves rated for

600# WWP, Crane #9302 or Alternate. .3 Throttling valves: globe type, Crane #14-1/2P or Alternate, all-brass up to and

including 2" size with stainless steel seats and discs. Larger size valves shall be butterfly valves as for shut-off valves but with manual gear operator.

2.4 WALLFIN UNITS .1 Provide wallfin units of Engineered Air manufacture of sizes and types noted.

Wallfin shall have 16 gauge steel fronts and enclosures. H.W. Unit ratings shall be based on 180oC average water temperature with 71oC entering air and 11oC temperature drop through unit. Liner boxes on recessed units may be 18 gauge thick steel.

.2 Provide W.F. elements of types noted to give outputs in BTU/hour per foot of finned

length to give heat outputs shown. .3 Wallfin enclosures shall extend to wall unless otherwise noted. Provide 600 mm

removable or hinged panels on valve ends of wallfin fronts or enclosures for access to valves and vents. Panels shall butt together with inside lap plate to give smooth face to room. Provide slide cradle type hangers for wallfin elements. Overlapping filler pieces will not be accepted.


JAL NO. 10-265

.4 Alternate Equipment: 1. Trane 2. Mark Hot Inc.

3. Rosemex Inc. 4. Sigma

2.5 STRAINERS .1 Pipe line strainers shall be 'Y' type, full line size of piping, of Sarco manufacture with

cast iron or semi-steel body for 125 psi W.P. with stainless steel or monel basket screen with 3/64" holes.

.2 Alternate Equipment: 1. Trane Co. of (Canada) Ltd. 2. Lunkenheimer Canada Ltd. 3. Hayward (Ontor Ltd.) 4. Colton Industries 2.6 FLOW MEASURING EQUIPMENT .1 Provide in return piping zones, a S.A. Armstrong circuit balancing valve to suit pipe

size. .2 Fittings up to 50 mm size shall be Model CBVI screwed end circuit balancing fitting

with shutoff/balancing valve, drain connection and meter connections. Fittings over 50 mm size shall be Model CBV-11 flanged end circuit balancing fitting with valved meter connection and shutoff/balancing valve. Fittings shall be rated for 862 kPa working pressure.

.3 Alternate Equipment: 1. Taco 2. Delta `P' (Air Power Equipment)


JAL NO. 10-265

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING TESTS .1 In addition to any tests required by local authorities, or elsewhere stated, test piping

in presence of Architect as hereinafter described. .2 Notify Architect in writing at least 48 hours prior to start of tests. Failure to do so

may require test to be redone. .3 Fill hot water heating piping systems with cold water and pressure test at 100 psi for

not less than four hours without decrease in pressure. .4 Perform tests before application of pipe covering. Test concealed piping before

concealing in structure. Protect equipment and materials not capable of withstanding test pressure during tests.

.5 Make leaks tight while systems are still under test. If this is impossible, remove and

refit defective parts. Caulking of threaded joints or welds will not be permitted. .6 After leaks have been repaired, repeat tests as often as necessary to ensure

tightness of each system. 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION .1 Supply and install all necessary piping including fittings and unions to complete

systems shown. Cut pipes true and square, ream or file ends to smooth surface, all to pipe manufacturer's and accepted trade standards. Fittings shall be of equivalent bore as pipe, of equal strength and weight. Install piping to manufacturer's specifications and published directions.

.2 Install piping to clear other piping, insulation, obstructions, access doors and

controls. Take branches off mains with fitting and 45o or 90o elbow. Locate valves for easy operation. Locate valves in accessible locations to approval and to suit access.

.3 Do not use ferrous piping, fittings, bushings, nipples or plugs in copper piping.

Supply Dielectric bushings at connections to ferrous materials or equipment on water supply.


JAL NO. 10-265

.4 Make joints in copper piping with 95/5 tin/antimony solder with non-corrosive soldering flux. Clean and ream each joint and remove excess solder and flux. Do not use hemp or lampwick on threads.

.5 Provide flanges, unions or compression fittings on equipment side of shut-off valves

in piping connections to equipment so same can be disconnected for service. Flanges and unions shall be of same material as piping.

.6 Install swing check valves in horizontal position ONLY. .7 Supply shut-off valve on connection to each item of equipment on system side of

union or compression fittings. .8 Supply on piping to and from each item of equipment (coil, pump) necessary

shut-off valves full size of line for isolating same on system side of unions or flanges. .9 Pipe outlets of equipment drains and valves full size to end approx. 50 mm above

Funnel Floor Drains left by Section 15400. Pipe each outlet individually. .10 Provide drain piping with water seal trap from ventilation equipment and ducts. .11 Support piping independently of equipment to permit disconnection and removal

without disruption of piping system. Locate valves, unions and flanges to permit easy removal of coils and equipment with minimum removal of piping.

.12 Where air handling unit has multiple water coil sections, coils shall be reverse return

piped to act as single balanced flow unit. 3.3 EXPANSION PROVISIONS .1 Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction to approval. Provide swing joints

and spring pieces at connections to mains, risers, radiation, coils and equipment. 3.4 PIPE GRADING .1 Grade H.W. heating piping `UP' in 1" in 20 feet to air vents. Arrange piping to ensure

minimum number of vents. .2 Grade equipment drain and waste piping `DOWN' 1" in 20 feet minimum to waste

receptacle.


JAL NO. 10-265

3.5 DRAIN VALVES .1 Provide 3/4" lockshield 100# steam W.P. hose cock at main low points to drain each

water type system. Provide 13 mm lockshield hose cock on each water type downfed unit and at each duct coil.

.2 Provide 19 mm lockshield hose cock on system side of each zone shut-off and

balancing valves or fitting. Locate as directed on site to permit each zone to be drained.

3.6 CLEANING SYSTEMS .1 On completion, clean each complete piping system using Dearborn #11 or equal

cleaner for at least 48 hours at 20oC. Flush out each system, opening and cleaning each scale pocket and strainer. H.W. System must be flushed out before filling with clean water. Chilled water system shall be left empty and plugged.

.2 Provide written report to Architect when cleaning is completed on form supplied by

Owner. Advise Architect, Engineer and Owner at least 48 hours prior to cleanout so same can be witnessed.

3.7 WALLFIN UNITS .1 Mount wall hung units minimum 150 mm clear from floor to bottom of enclosure

unless otherwise noted. .2 Pipe wallfin elements serpentine unless otherwise specifically noted. Stagger

elements to give maximum coverage of outlet grille at windows. .3 Extend wallfin enclosures wall to wall unless otherwise noted. Install 600 mm

removable or hinged panels on valve ends of wallfin fronts or enclosures for access to valves and vents. Install wallfin units in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Butt panels together with inside lap plate to give smooth face to room. Brace lower edge of panels and units to wall at not over 900 mm centres. Provide slide cradle type hangers for wallfin elements. Overlapping filler pieces will not be accepted.


JAL NO. 10-265

3.8 STRAINERS .1 Provide `Y' type strainer ahead of each temperature control valve, full line size of

piping. .2 Install strainers so that screen outlet is pointed down and retained debris will fall out

by gravity into a container. Provide 3/4" ball valve on each pump strainer outlet for blowdown with 6" long nipple extension with hose end.

3.9 OPERATE AND ADJUST SYSTEMS

.1 Operate all systems to full capacity and verify proper, safe efficient operation of all parts and each complete system. Oil motors and grease bearings before operating equipment.

.2 When work is complete and systems are in operation, adjust valves, belt drives,

controls and thermostats as directed so that there is even distribution of cooling, heating and air throughout. Turn over to Owner, necessary keys, handles and operating devices for each system.

.3 Each hydronic system shall be balanced and water quantities listed and forwarded

to Engineer for checking and approval. Balancing Report shall be suitably bound, 8½” x 11” size, six copies required. Clean strainers and leave systems in clean operating condition.

.4 Test and balance each heat pump flow are within 5% of design figures. Balancing

dampers shall be adjusted to achieve these results. Prepare and submit a final balancing report for checking and approval.

.5 Testing and balancing of air system shall be under supervision of qualified

personnel. Balancing and testing shall be performed by trained personnel with records kept of each trial balance for supervision and approval.

.6 If spot checking systems reveals actual water quantities do not agree with water

balance report, this Section will be called upon to completely rebalance systems until satisfactory, without extra remuneration.

END OF SECTION

TDSB – Kane Public School Section 15850 JAIN & ASSOCIATES Limited Contents Page Project No. KE1016 February 28, 2011 Air Distribution

JAL NO. 10-265

CONTENTS SUBSECTION TITLE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Related Instructions 1.2 Work Included 1.3 Submittals PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials 2.2 Fan Equipment 2.3 Grilles, Registers & Diffusers 2.4 Fire Dampers 2.5 Low Pressure Ductwork

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Low Pressure Ductwork 3.2 Fire Dampers & Flaps 3.3 Fan Equipment

3.4 Operate and Adjust Systems 3.5 Quiet Operation 3.6 Warranty

TDSB – Kane Public School Section 15850 JAIN & ASSOCIATES Limited Page 1 Project No. KE1016 February 28, 2011 Air Distribution

JAL NO. 10-265

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED INSTRUCTIONS .1 Comply with requirements of Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED .1 Supply and installation of each exhaust system shown on Drawings including fan,

ductwork and back-draft damper. .2 Supply and installation of supply/return air duct systems with accessories to

complete each system. .3 Supply and installation of all grilles, registers, diffusers, fire dampers, fire flaps and

accessories for all duct systems. .4 Supply and installation of duct acoustic liner in all ducts as specified. .5 Supply and installation of all components, accessories and incidentals necessary to

complete each system and put same in safe, efficient operation. .6 Adjusting of air systems to obtain required air volumes in each room or space as

directed by Air Balance Specialist. 1.3 SUBMITTALS .1 Submit Shop Drawings for following: 1. Fan equipment and accessories. 2. Grilles, registers, diffusers and accessories. 3. Fire dampers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Materials shall be of Canadian manufacture where available, of best quality of their

respective kinds and of uniform pattern throughout.


JAL NO. 10-265

2.2 FAN EQUIPMENT .1 Fans shall be of Penn and Wilcorp manufacture of sizes, types and characteristics

noted. Fans shall be dynamically and statically balanced at factory and clearly indicate direction of rotation. Each fan shall be A.M.C.A. rated and conform to standards of C.F.M.A. and A.S.H.R.A.E.

.2 Fans shall have Canadian made motor for heavy duty continuous operation selected

to operate equipment at maximum efficiency, of H.P. at least equal to brake H.P. Each belt drive shall be adjustable at least 20% up and down from performance shown and have 1.5 service factor. Motors shall be OPD, ball bearing type, grease lubricated unless otherwise noted. See 15050.

.3 Fans shall be prepainted at factory. .4 Support cabinet fan on open spring anti-vibration isolators rated at not less than

95% efficiency so that noise and vibration will not be transmitted to building. .5 Degrease and prime paint each fan at factory and leave ready for painting by

another Section. .6 Each concealed ceiling cabinet type exhaust fan shall be Penn Zephyr exhaust

fan complete with acoustically lined fan housing, gravity backdraft damper, rubber mounted direct driven centrifugal fan with cord, plug and receptacle box, duct collars, C.P. inlet grille and roof cap or wall cap as scheduled.

.7 Provide gravity backdraft damper on each exhaust fan and where noted.

Backdraft damper shall be of multi-bladed type with aluminum blades, neoprene edged and secured. Bearings shall be corrosion resistant located inside rigidly constructed frame of heavy gauge painted steel. Blades shall be interconnected with tie rod on inside of frame which shall be weather-stripped all round and have counter-balanced arrangement to hold blades fully open when fan is on and tightly closed when fan is off.

.8 Each circulating fan shall be Wilcorp Manufacturing Ltd., Toronto, vertical downward

thrust indoor type, large diameter propeller ceiling fan complete with variable speed motor, mounting brackets, canopies, 19 mm diameter downrod, 3 wire BX connections and fire cutout. Supply for each group of fans noted, WMLE-30 solid state infinite speed controller with thermostat. See Fan Schedule. See Starter Schedule. Provide wire guard to enclose and protect each fan secured from building structure as shown on drawings. Provide guard on each speed controller.


JAL NO. 10-265

.9 Alternate Equipment: Cabinet Fans

1. Jenn Air 2. Carnes Corp. 3. Loren Cook 4. Greenheck

Circulating Fans

1. Banvil Ltd. 2. Pleasantaire

2.3 GRILLES, REGISTERS & DIFFUSERS .1 Provide E.H. Price Ltd. grilles, registers and diffusers of sizes and types shown

conforming to and Certified Test Rated in accordance with Air Diffusion Council Equipment Test Code No. 1062R2 of latest date.

.2 Grilles and registers shall be of aluminum construction (except where noted) with

baked white enamel finish, except in walls where prime coat finish shall be supplied. Aluminum frames and bars shall be extruded from hard stock, free from pits and spots. Joints shall be 'hairline'. Attachment shall be with stainless steel or C.P. screws with 6 mm thick urethane foam gasket set under flange.

.3 Diffusers shall have white baked-on enamel finish. Diffusers shall be sized within

limits of sound pressure level NC-32 curve in typical room having average attenuation of 8 DB. Each supply air diffuser shall be complete with flow equalizer and separate volume control operable from ceiling level. Supply diffusers shall be sized so that neck velocities do not exceed 900 fpm.

.4 Return air registers, except where otherwise noted, shall be C-21-S-3, with

removable key operated volume damper. .5 Return air grilles in lay-in ceilings in sizes 300 mm x 300 mm and larger shall be

#TB-80-0 return air grille of aluminum construction with eggcrate face plate, 16 mm wide margin to fit 600 mm O.C. lay-in inverted T-bar ceiling, less volume damper. Where located in ducted system, register shall have volume damper.

.6 Air volume extractor shall be #AG45 set in each 90 degree supply take-off where

shown or where required to give efficient branch air duct performance.


JAL NO. 10-265

.7 Type A diffusers shall be #SCDA-3, of steel construction and fit 600 mm O.C. T-bar suspended lay-in ceilings. Inner assembly shall be easily removable and adjustable. Diffuser face shall be 600 mm x 600 mm size unless otherwise noted.

.8 Alternate Equipment: 1. Kruger 2. Airvector 3. Carnes Corp. 4. Nailor Hart Ind. Ltd. 5. Lisi Aero-Guide Inc. 6. Titus 2.4 FIRE DAMPERS .1 Provide Fire Dampers where shown or required by Ontario Building Code, local

Fire Ordinances and Provincial Fire Marshal. Fire Dampers in ducts through floors and walls shall conform to Ontario Building Code, Subsection 3.1.6. Fire Stop Flaps in ceiling diffusers, registers and grilles shall conform to Ontario Building Code, Subsection 3.1.6 and must be built to U.L.C. Standards and be approved by local Building Department. Submit Shop Drawings for review. No asbestos shall be used.

.2 Fire Dampers shall have 1-1/2 hour fire protection rating in accordance with

NFPA #252, bear U.L.C. label and be tested in accordance with U.L.C. Standard #S-112. Hinged blade Fire Dampers shall close in direction of air flow. Fire Dampers in Fire Walls or fire separations of more than 2 hour rating shall conform to U.L.C. #S-104 for 3 hour rating.

.3 Fire Dampers behind grilles or in standard ductwork shall not decrease duct free

area more than 10% in open position. Enlarge ducts or use Type B (recessed shutter) as necessary to meet this condition. Also where shown, provide Type 'B' (recessed shutter) Fire Damper to give 100% free area for noise and turbulence control.

.4 Fire Dampers in round ductwork shall not decrease duct free area under any

circumstance. Provide Type `C' (100% free area recessed shutter) Fire Damper to meet this condition.

.5 Secure each Fire Damper in place in steel sleeve conforming to ULC #S-112

fitted with steel angle frame secured to sleeve to approval. Clean and prime paint all metal parts.


JAL NO. 10-265

.6 Fire Dampers in drywall or at ceilings (not F.S.F.) shall be Controlled Air Manufacturing Ltd. #CFS or CFSR or equal ceiling damper secured in place independent of ductwork complete with steel channels and wire to manufacturers printed directions.

.7 Alternate:

1. Ruskin

2.5 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK .1 Ducts shall be made of first quality smooth finished, cold rolled galvanized steel

guaranteed to double seam without fracturing of thicknesses noted. Galvanizing shall conform to ASTM A525 (G90).

.2 Balancing damper operators shall be Duro Dyne #KS-195L lockable quadrant type. .3 Splitter damper operators shall be Duro Dyne #SRP24/SRP40 rod operators. .4 Flexible connectors shall be Duro Dyne Durolon coated glass fabric. .5 Access doors shall be assembled with Duro Dyne SP-21 latch assembly, HP series

piano hinges and GN neoprene closed cell gasket material. .6 Pitot tube opening enclosures shall be Dial #1000 or 2000 (Air Power Equipment,

Toronto). .7 Duct sealants shall be Duro Dyne S-3 standard type. .8 Air turning assembly shall be double thickness type with Duro Dyne #VR-2 vane

rails. .9 Duct tape shall be Duro Dyne GS, 50 mm wide self adhesive duct tape. .10 Acoustic duct liner shall be Fiberglas or equal rigid coated duct liner of 4-1/2#

density with flame spread rating of 25, fuel contributed rating of 15 and smoke developed rating of 40 with Neoprene face coating. Soundlining shall be for transfer ducts only.


JAL NO. 10-265

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK .1 Construct ducts and sheet metal shown and required to complete duct systems and

put each in operating condition. This Section is responsible for laying out this work. Drawings showing ducts must not be used for obtaining dimensions for layout except where dimensioned. Mechanical drawings indicate general location and route of ductwork to be installed. General layout of ducts may be taken from drawings but this Section is responsible for avoiding interferences with other Sections not specifically shown on mechanical drawings. Actual measurements shall be taken at building before ductwork is fabricated.

.2 Make without additional charge, any necessary changes or additions to layout of

ductwork to accommodate structural, duct, piping, ceilings, electrical or equipment conditions. Where openings in walls for ductwork have been provided by others, make full use of such openings by fabricating ductwork to fit them or if necessary, provide offsets and transitions to suit. Location of ducts may be altered if change is made before installation, is submitted in writing, is approved by Architect and does not cause Owner or other Sections any extra expense.

.3 Construct ductwork of following sheet metal material: Longest Side U.S. Ga. Up to 300 mm 26 325 to 750 24 775 to 1350 22 1375 to 2100 20 2125 & Over 18 .4 Form ducts with thickness markings on exterior of ductwork visible from floor. .5 Make joints suitably air tight with laps in direction of air flow. Wherever possible,

sizes of ducts shall conform to those indicated. Where building conditions require shape be modified, ducts must have same cross-sectional area indicated and width of duct shall not exceed six times depth except with special approval. Ductwork shall be in accordance with SMACNA Standard of latest publication. Duct leakage shall not exceed 3% of air volume at 500 Pa S.P.


JAL NO. 10-265

.6 Construct ducts up to 600 mm with reinforced ribs formed by pocket slip spaced not more than 2400 mm apart. Make ducts 600 mm and over in either dimension with reinforcing rib formed by pocket slip spaced not more than 1200 mm apart. Provide supplemental stiffening to prevent drumming and make a structurally sound assembly. Cross-break all duct faces except those to which rigid board type insulation is to be applied.

.7 Install in ductwork where shown or required all components such as smoke

detectors, controls and duct coils in accordance with setting instructions supplied by equipment supplier.

.8 Assemble various duct sections with Pittsburgh lock and grooved longitudinal seams

carefully closed for tightness and appearance. Join duct sections with pocket slip sized to conform to following requirements:

Maximum Duct Slip Slip Slip Side Duct U.S. Ga. U.S.Ga . Size Reinforced Up to 300 mm 26 26 25 No 325 to 750 24 24 25 No 775 to 1350 22 22 25 No 1375 to 2100 20 20 38 3 x 28 mm 2125 & over 18 18 38 3 x 28 mm .9 Support duct assemblies and components from building structure with 25 mm x 18

gauge thick galvanized steel `Z' band hangers secured under ducts. Support ducts over 900 mm size with 6 mm steel rods and 6 mm x 32 x 6 angle iron. Space hangers at not over 1800 mm centres. See 15050-3.08 and 3.09.

.10 Make radius of turns at least one duct width. Where space prevents such radius,

make turns square and fit with turning vanes of double faced hollow type with Duro Dyne vane-rails secured with sheet metal screws.

.11 Provide splitter damper in each supply takeoff. Provide manual balancing damper in

each return or exhaust take-off set as close as possible to trunk duct. Make turning vanes, dampers, deflectors, splitters or same material and thickness as for equal size ductwork with formed edges, cross-broken and stiffened. Fit balancing dampers with lockable quadrant operator. Fit splitter dampers with rod-operators spaced at maximum 600 mm centres. Splitters shall be full depth of branch duct and 1-1/2 times branch width.


JAL NO. 10-265

.12 Provide access doors of suitable size (min. 300 x 300 mm) for access to installed duct coils and other equipment in ducts and where necessary for access to balancing and Fire Dampers. Make doors of 22 gauge thick galvanized steel hinged to 22 gauge thick galvanized mounting frame provided with approved quick fastening devices to give tight closure on fire resistant gasket. Provide access in ceilings where necessary for splitter and balancing dampers.

.13 Seal all duct joints during construction with duct sealer and duct tape. Apply to faces

of joints before cleats are installed. .14 Install grilles and diffusers to manufacturer's direction. Supply and install baffles in

diffusers to suit air pattern. Adjust grilles and registers to give required air pattern. .15 Provide extension collars for outlets, air guide vanes and other special features as

indicated or required including connections to equipment provided by Owner or other Sections. Transition ducts at not more than 30 degree slope to full size of each grille, register or equipment.

.16 Paint inside of duct connections behind each grille and register with two coats of

black non-reflective paint to visually conceal duct interior to approval. .17 Install ductwork to clear structural members and any fireproofing. Locate ducts to

permit their proper insulation where required. Do not remove or damage structural fireproofing. Leave space to permit insulation and fireproofing to be inspected and repaired.

.18 Make downstream end of each section of concealed round ducts small and beaded.

Assembly by inserting small end into upstream end of adjoining section. Fasten joints in place by sheet metal screws spaced not over 75 mm apart and joint tape seal to approval with Arno #C-520 or Duro Dyno G.S. duct tape.

.19 Provide 13 x 13 mm mesh galvanized steel birdscreen over intake of each fresh and

open air duct. Hinge birdscreen on upstream end of ducts for easy opening and secure with catches at not more than 600 mm centres.

.20 Provide where shown, Trans-Continental Equipment Ltd. Type ‘S’ ‘A1-U-Flex’

aluminum or Thermoflex S-TL glass fibre flexible air duct hoses each U.L.C. listed for service. Secure hose to metal ducts with Duro Dyne S-3 duct sealant and tape seal with Permascreen fiberglass duct tape. Minimum length 25% longer than measured distance. Maximum length 50% more than measured length (max. 4.3 mm). On air conditioning ducts, provide Type ‘S’ preinsulated ‘A1-U-Flex’ SI or Thermoflex M.KC. Provide manual balancing damper in truck duct at connection to each flexible duct.


JAL NO. 10-265

.21 Install flexible duct where shown. Secure hose to metal ducts with Duro Dyne S-3 duct sealant and tape seal with Permascreen fiberglass duct tape. Minimum lenght 25% longer than measured distance. Maximum lenght 50% more than measured length, 10 feet total. Provide manual balancing damper in truck duct at connection to each flexible duct.

.22 Provide pitot tube opening enclosures in ductwork for each supply, return and

exhaust system. Provide openings at all supply fan discharges, at return inlets and exhaust fan inlets, and at main branch duct take-offs. Locate openings in straight duct runs. Provide a minimum of three holes per duct at each of above locations, and at not more than 18" centres.

.23 After final adjustments are made for air handling systems, lock each control device

in position and visually indicate required setting. For splitter and balancing dampers, provide additional locking screw or bolt to approval.

3.2 FIRE DAMPERS & FLAPS .1 Install Fire Dampers where shown or required by Ontario Building Code and local

Fire Ordinances. .2 Secure each Fire Damper in place in steel sleeve conforming to ULC #S-112 fitted

with steel angle frame secured to sleeve to approval. Clean and prime paint all metal parts.

3.3 FAN EQUIPMENT .1 Hang fans from building structure with vibration isolators. .2 Adjust fan speeds, belts and pulleys to give desired performance. Oil motors and

grease bearings. 3.4 OPERATE AND ADJUST SYSTEMS

.1 Operate all systems to full capacity and verify proper, safe efficient operation of all parts and each complete system. Oil motors and grease bearings before operating equipment.


JAL NO. 10-265

.2 When work is complete and systems are in operation, adjust belt drives, controls, dampers and thermostats so that there is even distribution of air throughout. Turn over to Owner, necessary keys, handles and operating devices for each system.

.3 Each air handling system shall be balanced and air quantities per outlet listed and

forwarded to Engineer for checking and approval. Balancing Report shall be suitably bound, 8½” x 11” size, six copies required. Clean or replace filters and leave systems in clean operating condition.

.4 Test and balance each air system such that air quantities at each outlet, diffuser,

grille and register are within 5% of design figures. Fan speeds, splitter and balancing dampers shall be adjusted to achieve these results. Prepare and submit a final balancing report for checking and approval.

.5 Testing and balancing of air handling systems and water systems shall be under

supervision of qualified personnel. Balancing and testing shall be performed by trained personnel with records kept of each trial balance for supervision and approval.

.6 If spot checking reveals actual air quantities do not agree with air balance report,

this Section will be called upon to completely rebalance systems until satisfactory, without extra remuneration.

3.5 QUIET OPERATION .1 Each air handling system has been designed to be quiet in operation, N.C. 35

maximum. It is responsibility of this Section to supply equipment and install systems to ensure noise levels will be maintained satisfactory to Architect.

3.6 WARRANTY .1 Furnish to Owner through General Contractor and Architect, written warranty

covering materials and workmanship and free service for one year from date of start of lien period.

.2 Warrant apparatus installed to properly cool, heat and ventilate without undue noise

through every item of equipment and system and to maintain required room conditions.


JAL NO. 10-265

.3 Warranty shall entail repair or replacement of materials installed without charge to Owner except where, in opinion of Architect, such repair or replacement was caused by improper use or lack of proper maintenance.

END OF SECTION

TDSB – Kane Public School Section 15900 JAIN & ASSOCIATES Limited Contents Page Project No. KE1016 February 28, 2011 Building Automation System- Appendix ‘A’

JAL NO. 10-265

CONTENTS SUBSECTION TITLE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 General

1.2 Basement Classrooms Rooms 047 to 050 1.3 Ground Floor Classroom Room 110 1.4 Ground Floor and First Floor Classrooms

TDSB – Kane Public School Section 15900 JAIN & ASSOCIATES Limited Page 1 Project No. KE1016 February 28, 2011 Building Automation System- Appendix ‘A’

JAL NO. 10-265

1.1 GENERAL

.1 All equipment listed below will be controlled and operated by DDC controls. .2 Provide a dedicated DDC and transformer for each equipment as detailed in main

specification. .3 Provide trending for all points. Sample interval for trend will be 30 min. default

setting for all analog points. .4 Enable alarms for all points. .5 All setpoints, limits, alarms etc. must be fully operator adjustable / settable without

any limitations. .6 All systems must be capable of operating on Time of Day programs (TOD) and client

schedules. .7 Use TDSB standard terminology and addresses for the BAS.

1.2 BASEMENT CLASSROOMS ROOMS 047 TO 050

.1 Each classroom will have a dedicated radiator. .2 Each radiator will be controlled by a 2-way control valve, modulating type, installed

as shown in the drawings. .3 Install space temperature sensors as shown in the drawings. .4 Temperature sensor will control the 2-way valve to maintain space temperature at

72F during occupied condition and 62F during unoccupied condition. .5 Supply, install, engineer and commission new DDCs, sensors, valves and all

necessary hardware as required to complete the system. Connect new DDCs to existing BAS.

1.3 GROUND FLOOR CLASSROOM ROOM 110

.1 Classroom is served by a dual duct system and a wall fin radiator. .2 Provide space temperature sensor installed on the wall as shown in the drawing. .3 Modulate dual duct unit damper to maintain space temperature at 72F during

occupied condition and 62F during unoccupied condition.

TDSB – Kane Public School Section 15900 JAIN & ASSOCIATES Limited Page 2 Project No. KE1016 February 28, 2011 Building Automation System- Appendix ‘A’

JAL NO. 10-265

.4 If space temperature is not attained even when dual duct damper is fully open, then open and modulate the 2-way control valve on the rad.

.5 The dual duct unit will be stage 1 and the rad will be stage 2. .6 Supply, install and commission a new DDC controller for the classroom along with

new space temperature sensor, control valve and all necessary hardware to complete the system. Connect new DDC to existing BAS.

1.4 GROUND FLOOR AND FIRST FLOOR CLASSROOMS

.1 Relocate space temperature sensors as shown in the drawings.

END OF SECTION

TDSB – Kane Public School Section 15900 JAIN & ASSOCIATES Limited Contents Page Project No. KE1016 February 28, 2011 Building Automation System

JAL NO. 10-265

CONTENTS SUBSECTION TITLE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 General

1.2 Approved Control System Manufacturers 1.3 Shop Drawing Submittals 1.4 As-Built Documentation 1.5 Warranty 1.6 Ownership of Proprietary Material 1.7 Facilities with Existing Building Automation

Systems 1.8 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (TAB) 1.9 Contractor Invoices

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 System Hardware 2.2 System Software 2.3 BAS Dynamic Graphics 2.4 Field Devices

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Coordination with New Mechanical Work 3.2 General – Installation of Controls 3.3 Power Sources and Wiring Methods 3.4 Installation of Standard Control Dampers and

Actuators 3.5 Installation of Automatic Control Valves and

Actuators 3.6 Installation of Fire Stopping and Smoke Seal

Materials 3.7 Installation of Wall Opening Cover Plates 3.8 Cutting and Patching 3.9 Packing and Sealing Core Drilled Conduit Opening 3.10 Access Doors Installation 3.11 Electrical Wiring and Accessories 3.12 Equipment Enclosures and Locations 3.13 Identification and Labeling of Control Equipment 3.14 Systems Hardware Commissioning 3.15 Substantial Completion Inspection 3.16 Training

TDSB – Kane Public School Section 15900 JAIN & ASSOCIATES Limited Page 1 Project No. KE1016 February 28, 2011 Building Automation System

JAL NO. 10-265

1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL

.1 Provide the necessary design, installation, programming, supervision,

commissioning and operator training to ensure for a complete and fully operational system.

.2 Perform an in-depth review of all existing control components (e.g. control valves,

control dampers, linkages, actuators, etc.) to be re-used by the newly installed DDCs. Immediately report any defective or inoperative components to the Engineer.

.3 Co-ordinate the work of the Mechanical Contractor (see Section 3.1) and all sub-

contractors required to complete the scope of work as specified in the contract documents.

.4 The Controls Contractor and all sub-contractors shall employ only certified

tradespersons to carry out all applicable work. .5 Provide all necessary power wiring and hardware to complete the entire project,

including but not limited to, wiring, fittings, connectors, conduits, hangers/supports, box covers and all other accessories required to ensure complete, safe and fully operational systems. This shall include the power wiring for all the equipment installed by the Mechanical Contractor.

.6 Arrange for Electrical Authority inspection of all electrical work. Submit the

Certificate of Inspection and Product Approval Certificate with the as-built documentation.

.7 The scope of work for each facility shall be determined by these specifications and

appendices A and B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to provide written notification to TDSB, prior to tender closing, of any errors, omissions, discrepancies or ambiguities contained in these documents. Following the award of the contract, TDSB reserves the right to act as the sole arbiter of any disputes arising from the interpretation of these contract documents.

1.2 APPROVED CONTROL SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS

.1 Only approved building automation systems will be accepted. No substitutes or

alternates are allowed. The accepted systems are manufactured by: .1 Delta Controls Ltd.


JAL NO. 10-265

1.3 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS .1 Prepare and submit three (3) copies of shop drawing manuals for the review and

approval of the Engineer. Under no circumstances shall the Controls Contractor commence site work prior to the receipt of approved shop drawings

.2 The contractor shall include with the shop drawing submittal, a listing of all BAS

programming code for review of the Engineer. This review shall be for general conformance with the drawings and specifications.

.3 The Engineer shall conduct a subsequent detailed review of programming code and

workstation graphics during the substantial completion inspection of the work when all specified systems and equipment are operating under BAS control. The intent of this review shall be to optimize and fine-tune the programmed strategies, settings, parameters and workstation graphics. The contractor shall make any necessary modifications and/or changes to the programming code and/or workstation graphics as directed by the Engineer.

.4 The shop drawing submittal shall include the following:

.1 Control schematics for each system

.2 Detailed sequence of operation for each controlled system.

.3 System Architecture indicating the type and model number for all BAS components, the proposed interconnection and location of all panels, network connection and key peripheral devices (workstations, modems, printers, repeaters, etc)

.4 BAS Points List indicating the panel ID, panel location, hardware address, point acronym, point description, field device type, point type (i.e. AO/DO/AI/DI), end device fail position, end device manufacture and model number and wire tag ID.

.5 Provide a list of field labels (i.e. lamicoids) with proposed software names and point descriptions.

.6 Wiring diagrams including complete power system, interlocks, control and data communications.

.7 Programming code listing for all controllers

.8 Manufacturers’ data/specification sheets and catalogue cuts for all material and equipment supplied, including the Caretakers’ PCs.

.9 Automatic control valve and damper, VAV box and terminal unit schedules where required.

1.4 AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION .1 Prepare and submit one (1) copy of BAS As Built and Operating/Maintenance

manuals to the Engineer for review and acceptance.


JAL NO. 10-265

.2 Receive one (1) hard copy and one (1) CD of the final mechanical documentation from the mechanical consultant for insertion into a combined BAS-Mechanical manual.

.3 Once the BAS As-Built documentation has been accepted by the Engineer, combine

the mechanical final documentation with the BAS documentation. Prepare and make up five (5) copies of the combined BAS-Mechanical documentation manuals and submit them at the project turn-over meeting.

.4 The BAS contractor shall provide a CD with each manual to include all of the As

Built Documentation contained within the manual (mechanical documentation, fixture cuts, operating/maintenance procedures, warranties, letters, graphics, points lists, programming, sequences etc.) and shall also include As Built drawings in AutoCAD format. TDSB will supply electronic copies of the original tender BAS drawings to the BAS contractor.

.5 The As-built documentation shall include the following: .1 An Information sheet that contains:

School Name and address A brief description of the control details. i.e. total # of points, list of

equipment controls and the panels to which they a connected. Panel’s information i.e. part numbers for panels used and there serial

numbers and revision # (if applicable). Software version. BAS/TDSB WAN IP address. Warranty start date and duration. BAS contractor Name, address, and Phone number.

.2 Detailed sequence of operation for each controlled system. .3 Control schematics for each system. Including a System Architecture

indicating the type and model number for all BAS components, the proposed interconnection and location of all panels, network connection and key peripheral devices (workstations, modems, printers, repeaters, etc)

.4 BAS Points List indicating the panel ID, panel location, hardware address,

point acronym, point description, field device type, point type (i.e. AO/DO/AI/DI), end device fail position, end device manufacture and model number and wire tag ID.

.5 Floor plan with the location of all field mounted control devices. .6 Programming code for all DDC controllers


JAL NO. 10-265

.7 Wiring diagrams including complete power system, interlocks, control and data communications.

.8 Manufacturers’ data/specification sheets and catalogue cuts for all material

and equipment supplied including the workstation PC and any equipment (e.g. valves, starters, VFDs, etc.) supplied under the mechanical scope of work. This section shall include a summary sheet that indicates all BAS Device, Manufacturers’, model number, and quantity of each used on this job.

.9 Automatic control valve and damper, VAV box and terminal unit schedules

where required. .10 Electrical Authority Inspection Certificates – General Inspection and Product

Approval Inspection. .11 Commissioning list including the name of the Commissioning agent of the

BAS Contractor, his signature and the date of commissioning. .12 Licensed BAS workstation software. .13 BAS programming database stored on a CD-R disk. .14 Workstation PC documentation, original Windows operating system/recovery

disks, licenses, and warranty. .6 For projects that include mechanical piping retrofits, provide a framed and laminated

colour schematic of the as-built piping layout. Nominal drawing size shall be 24” x 18”. Securely affix the drawing with screws to wall of boiler room or other suitable location subject to the approval of the Engineer. Submit a copy of the drawing to the Engineer for approval prior to installation.

.7 Provide completed TDSB Equipment Update Form for each piece of equipment that

has been removed and for each new piece of equipment that has been installed. Sample forms shall be provided by TDSB.

.8 Consult with the head caretaker at the conclusion of the project to determine the

specific equipment operating schedules required for the facility. Ensure that BAS weekly and holiday schedules for all controlled equipment are customized to match the actual occupancy requirements of the facility. Include with the as-built documentation, a listing of all programmed equipment weekly schedules installed at the time of the project turnover meeting.

.9 Provide a listing of all network addresses and configuration settings for each DDC

panel (new or existing) within the facility. The information provided should be sufficient to allow for the future replacement and activation of the panel by TDSB staff.


JAL NO. 10-265

1.5 WARRANTY

.1 All labour and material (hardware and software) supplied under this contract shall be warranted free from defects for a period of two (2) years after final completion and acceptance. Control system failures during the warranty period shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no additional cost to TDSB. The Contractor shall respond to TDSB’s request for warranty service within one (1) business day.

.2 The final completion and acceptance date shall be the date of the project turn-over

meeting. .3 All work shall have a single warranty date, even when the Owner has received

beneficial use of part of the system in advance of the final completion date. .4 The contractor shall be responsible for correcting any deficiencies, errors or

omissions in operating strategies, programming code, system functionality or parameters and operator workstation graphics during the warranty period.

1.6 OWNERSHIP OF PROPRIETARY MATERIAL

.1 All project-developed software and documentation shall become the property of

TDSB. These include, but are not limited to:

.1 Project graphic images

.2 Record drawings

.3 Project database

.4 Project application programming code

.5 All documentation

1.7 FACILITIES WITH EXISTING BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS

.1 Where a facility has an existing BAS that is to be replaced, modified or upgraded,

the Controls Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the entire system (hardware, programming and system graphics) and all integral parts (new and re-used) are in conformance with all requirements of the specifications outlined herein.

.2 Ensure complete interoperability and compatibility between new and existing DDC

systems and components. Provide system firmware and/or hardware upgrades to existing DDC panels/modules where required to ensure a complete working system to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

.3 For existing Delta Controls installations, only Delta Version 3 series controllers and

devices shall be re-used with the new system. For all controllers, provide new programming and graphics for specific use with the Delta Version 3 series system.


JAL NO. 10-265

.4 Where an existing DDC panel is re-used, ensure that sufficient controller memory is present to provide for all specified control functions. Provide memory and/or panel upgrades where required to meet system memory requirements.

.5 Provide new network communication wiring for interconnection between all DDC

panels and interfaces. .6 Existing control wiring and conduit may be re-used only where it complies with the

requirements of these specifications and where approved by the Engineer. .7 Provide new end devices (e.g. sensors, transducers, relays) for all system inputs

and outputs. Existing end devices may be re-used only where specifically noted on the controls points list and/or control sequences.

.8 Ensure that all re-used DDC panels/modules are upgraded to the latest version of

system firmware and system operating software. .9 Provide comprehensive commissioning and verification of all system inputs and

outputs, end devices and related components.

.10 Provide new labelling for wiring, devices and equipment where existing labelling does not meet the requirements of these specifications

1.8 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (TAB)

.1 Where specified, provide the services of an approved TAB company. Ensure that all

applicable site personnel employed by the TAB company meet TDSB trades certification and registration requirements.

.2 The Controls Contractor shall walk through the project with the TAB Engineer and

describe the trade work on it. .3 The Controls Contractor shall provide test holes and covers, drive changes,

additional dampers, pipe corrections, access through ceiling, etc as required by the TAB Engineer. Provide stepladders, lifters, scaffolds where required to access for testing of equipment. Replace all temporarily removed parts to their original position.

.4 TAB work shall be performed to ANSI/ASHRAE-III-1988 and 62-1989. Other

standards are as listed in the NBCTA 1995 Directory, AABC and NEBB publications. .5 The TAB report shall be based on true tests which are properly documented. The

report shall have all elements of description, design, equipment supplier and testing data. The testing method (set up), applied testing instruments, achieved accuracy and comfort level need to be described and commented.


JAL NO. 10-265

.6 Where applicable, the TAB report shall have the following structure: .1 Front Title Sheet .2 Table of Content .3 Systems Description, Testing Method and Comments .4 Performance Table, which includes all systems .5 Equipment Test Sheet c/w S.P. profile .6 Autocad Schematics .7 Report Certification .8 Performance Curves .9 Building Pressurization Diagnosis .10 Deficiencies

.7 Standard of Acceptance: Aerodynamics Inspecting Consultants Ltd. (AICL) Mississauga, Ontario

(T) 905-625-4388/89 (F) 905-625-4214

1.9 CONTRACTOR INVOICES .1 This contractor shall submit progress billing for the BAS work based on the following

project milestones:

10% Shop drawings approved 50% BAS Rough-In (including DDC panels) completed 85% Vendor commissioning report is submitted to TDSB 95% Project work is certified as substantially completed 100% Project work is certified as finally completed

.2 Progress draws shall be made as outlined above. Any other invoices shall be

rejected by TDSB. 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM HARDWARE- .1 GENERAL .1 The system architecture will be comprised of PCUs (Primary Control Units),

PACs (Programmable Application Controllers), ASCs (Application Specific Controllers) and any required communications or interface components networked together to provide a system of connected controllers that operate as a single BAS for the entire project.


JAL NO. 10-265

.2 The building operator shall be able to access the local BAS by logging onto an existing TDSB network PC. All required site database and graphics files shall reside on the TDSB central BAS server.

.3 Supply PCU’s, PAC’s and ASC’s as required to interface to all specified

equipment. .4 Allow for a minimum of 25% spare program and trend memory capacity in

each PCU and PAC. .5 For each specified BAS control point, the contractor shall supply the

hardware point type (e.g. AI, AO, DI, DO) as indicated on the controls points list. The use of alternate hardware point types or the use of external interface cards or devices to simulate the function of a specified hardware point type is not acceptable. For example, the use of a DO point and an external PWM card to simulate the function of a physical AO point shall not be accepted.

.2 PRIMARY CONTROL UNITS (PCU) .1 Use only Primary Control Units to directly control any major mechanical

equipment. Major mechanical equipment includes air handling units, boiler plants, chiller plants, cooling towers, roof-top units and other critical equipment.

.2 For Delta Controls, examples of controllers that shall be accepted as a PCU:

DSC 1616 DSC 1212 DSC 1280

.3 Each PCU shall contain a real time clock and sufficient memory to store the its own application database, operating parameters, user programs and trend data storage.

.4 Battery backup shall be provided to support the real-time clock and all

volatile memory for a minimum of 72 hours to eliminate operating data reload in case of power failure.

.5 Each PCU output shall include a Hand/Off/Auto (HOA) selector switch for

each analog and digital output. .6 Each PCU shall have a minimum of 10% spare capacity for each type of

input and output channels and 10%.


JAL NO. 10-265

.3 PROGRAMMABLE APPLICATION CONTROLLERS (PAC)

.1 Programmable Application Controllers (PAC) are fully programmable controllers used for controlling distributed equipment including, but not limited to, VAV boxes, heat pumps, force flow units and unit ventilators. The TDSB considers examples of PAC’s to include the ALC ZN series controllers and the Delta DVC, DFC and DAC series controllers.

.2 PACs shall not be used for controlling major mechanical equipment as

described above. .3 Each PAC shall contain a real time clock and sufficient RAM to store its own

application database, operating parameters, user programs and trend data storage.

.4 Battery backup shall be provided to support the real-time clock and all

volatile memory for a minimum of 72 hours to eliminate operating data reload in case of power failure.

.5 The use of PACs shall not be permitted unless written approval is obtained

from the Engineer.

.4 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS (ASC)

.1 Application Specific Controllers (ASC) are pre-programmed controllers used to control large quantities of distributed equipment such as heat pumps or VAV boxes.

.2 ASCs shall not be used to control major mechanical equipment or common

equipment such as exhaust fans, force flow units, unit ventilators or urinal tank solenoids.

.3 The use of ASCs shall not be permitted unless written approval is obtained

from the Engineer. .5 TEMPORARY SITE WORKSTATION PC

.1 Provide a temporary workstation PC for use during the commissioning and verification of the BAS. Install the PC in the head caretaker’s office or other location designated by TDSB.

.2 The temporary workstation PC shall remain the property of the BAS

contractor and may be removed from site once the project is certified to be substantially completed.


JAL NO. 10-265

.6 CONNECTION TO THE TDSB WAN .1 Advise the TDSB Project Supervisor of the proposed location of the system

router/gateway panel within the facility. The TDSB shall provide a network jack (RJ45) in the specified location. The controls vendor shall connect the BAS to the TDSB WAN and confirm that network access to the BAS has been established.

.2 Submit the proposed site-specific BAS network wiring diagram to the

Engineer for approval. The use of field installed hubs/switches is not allowed under any circumstances.

.7 TDSB CENTRAL SERVER

.1 New site databases and graphics files shall be installed on the designated

central TDSB central server located at 140 Borough Drive. .2 Submit a change request form to the TDSB Energy Project Engineer prior to

installing new site databases on the TDSB server. Do not install software or make any changes to the server without the written consent of the TDSB.

.3 Set up and configure the server software and area routers (where required)

to allow for seamless access to the site BAS via the TDSB WAN. .4 Coordinate all activities related to the central server with the TDSB Energy

Project Engineer and the TDSB ITS group. Provide the TDSB with detailed documentation related to any changes made to the server software, settings or protocols.

.8 LOCAL SERVICE PORTS

.1 Every DDC panel shall be provided with a local network access port to

connect to laptop computer. A user connected to the local access port shall have the same level of system access and functionality as being connected to the site workstation PC.

.2 Where BAS points (4 or more) are located in a mechanical room that does

not have a local BAS panel installed, a remote network access port shall be provided. The access port shall be installed in a hinged metal enclosure with key-lock set and lamicoid ID label.


JAL NO. 10-265

.9 FAIL STATE POSITION OF OUTPUTS .1 Unless specified otherwise, configure BAS output points for the following fail

state (e.g. device position upon panel failure):

All Fans OFF Heating Valves Full heat to terminal device Mixing Dampers Full recirculation air Face/Bypass Dampers Full heat Zone Dampers Full heat Heating Pumps ON (except boiler belly pumps) Boiler Belly Pumps OFF Variable Frequency Drives ON, minimum programmed speed Lighting Relays Last State Boilers (1 stage) ON Boilers (Multi-stage) LOW ON, HIGH OFF Cooling Equipment OFF Electric Heating OFF Domestic Hot Water Pumps OFF Roof-top Gas Burners OFF

2.2 SYSTEM SOFTWARE .1 BAS WORKSTATION SOFTWARE .1 Site licenses are not required. .2 Connect the new DDCs to existing Delta BAS system, modify software to

include the new controllers. .2 TREND DATA

.1 Provide trend logs for all hardware inputs and outputs. .2 All trends should be accessible via the graphical interface. .3 Trends should contain all related variables of a control loop (i.e. setpoint,

measured variable and control output) and have the ability to be plotted simultaneously on the same graph.

.4 Field Devices individual trends should provide an appropriate “snapshot” of

the variable. Slow reacting variables such as space temperatures should be sampled every 30 - 60 minutes while other variables such as mixed air or boiler water temperatures should be sampled every 5 to 10 minutes.


JAL NO. 10-265

.5 Provide the maximum number of trend samples within the controller while maintaining the requirement for spare memory capability.

.6 The primary input sensor for all control loops must physically be wired to the

same panel containing the control loop output (e.g. boiler water temperature and burner control output).

.7 Trend data storage must be in the same panel as the hardware or logical

points being trended.

.3 USER ACCESS .1 Provide TDSB-standard user IDs and passwords for operations,

maintenance and engineering staff. .4 ALARMS .1 Alarms shall be assigned the following categories: Maintenance Alarms

.1 Mismatch of equipment control and status for more than 30 minutes

.2 Any other miscellaneous alarm not specifically noted herein

.3 Run time of major equipment exceeds weekly limit (72 hours nominal) Any space temperature exceeds 24C while the heating plant

is on and the outdoor air temperature is below 5C. Any space temperature in an air conditioned area is below

22.5C while mechanical cooling equipment is running. Any air handling unit mixed air temperature is less than 7C

and the supply fan has been running for at least 30 minutes. Secondary heating water temperature exceeds setpoint by

10C for longer than 60 minutes during heating season. This alarm shall be enabled only when the main heating 3-way valve has been fully closed to heat for at least 90 minutes.

The BAS Alarm is active.

.2 The BAS server shall be configured to generate e-mail messages for all Energy alarms. These alarms shall be directed to the TDSB Outlook account named “[email protected]’.

.3 Alarms shall not require any acknowledgment before automatic reset by the

system. .4 An alarm notification shall not be issued when an alarm condition returns to

normal.


JAL NO. 10-265

.5 The Controls Contractor shall verify that the designated TDSB Outlook account has successfully received a series of test e-mail alarms from the system.

.6 The Contractor shall provide additional alarms as directed by the Engineer

and customize the alarms to the operating characteristics of the specific the systems being controlled.

.5 BAS ALARM OUTPUT / SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM ARMED STATUS

.1 Provide an output point wired to relay with a form-C dry contact. Configure

the output to fail in the normal state (e.g. relay contact shall be closed in the normal state and open in an alarm condition). On BAS panel failure, the BAS alarm output shall fail to the non-alarm state.

.2 In most instances, the facility surveillance system is directly monitored by

TDSB. For these facilities, provide wiring to the main surveillance panel or to the location specified by the Engineer. Provide sufficient spare cabling for future termination by TDSB staff.

.3 In certain TDSB facilities, especially in the former Etobicoke Board of

Education, facility surveillance systems are monitored by a third party (e.g. Chubb, Sonitrol). For these facilities, obtain specific instructions from the Engineer for the designated termination point for the wiring. Provide sufficient spare cabling for future termination by TDSB.

.4 Provide a digital input (dry contact) to monitor the armed status of the

building surveillance system. 2.3 BAS DYNAMIC GRAPHICS .1 Provide customized, site specific dynamic graphics to meet the requirements of the

Consultant and/or the TDSB Engineer. 2.4 FIELD DEVICES .1 Automatic Control Valves

.1 Automatic control valves shall be supplied by the Controls Contractor and installed by the Mechanical Contractor.


JAL NO. 10-265

.2 Automatic control valves, unless otherwise specified, shall be globe type valves. The use of ball valves in sizes 1-1/2” (40mm) and smaller shall also be acceptable. Valves and actuators shall be ordered as one factory-assembled and tested unit.

.3 Submit to the Engineer for review, a valve schedule containing the following

information for each valve:

Valve type and size Connection type Line size Valve manufacturer and model number Valve flow coefficient Design flow Pressure drop across valve Maximum close-off pressure Actuator manufacturer and model number Actuator maximum torque

.4 Valves 2” (50mm) and smaller shall be constructed of bronze. Valves 2 1/2”

(65mm) and larger shall have iron bodies and bronze mountings. .5 All control valves shall have stainless steel stems. Ball valves shall be

equipped with stainless steel balls and stems. .6 The bronze in bodies and bonnets of all bronze valves shall conform to

ASTM B62 for valves rated up to 150psig (1035 Kpa) working pressure and to ASTM B61 for valves rated at 200 psig (1380 Kpa) working pressure.

.7 The bodies and bonnets of iron body valves shall conform to ASTM A126,

Class B. .8 Control valve discs and seats shall be of bronze for 100 °C or less fluid

temperature and of stainless steel for fluid temperatures above 100 °C. .9 The control valves shall have tight shut-off. Flat disk valves are not

acceptable. .10 Control valves 2” (50mm) and smaller shall be complete with screwed ends

type, except for bronze valves installed in soldered copper piping which shall be complete with soldering ends. Control valves larger than 2” (50mm) shall be complete with flanged end type and proper flanged adapters to copper shall be provided where flanged valves are installed in copper piping.


JAL NO. 10-265

.11 The water control valves shall be sized for a pressure drop of 6 ft. water column or as indicated on mechanical drawings.

.12 The zone hotwater control valves shall be sized for the respective steam

flows and pressure drop of 25% of the inlet absolute maximum operating pressure.

.13 Each automatic control valve must provide the design output and flow rates

at pressure drops compatible with equipment selected. .14 Each automatic control valve must be suitable for the particular system

working pressure. .15 Each automatic control valve shall be fitted with a position indicator. .16 All the same type control valves shall be the products of a single

manufacturer and have the manufacturer’s name, pressure rating and size clearly marked on the outside of the body.

.17 Unless otherwise indicated control valves for proportional operation shall

have equal percentage characteristics, while the control valves for open/shut two-position operation shall have straight line flow characteristics.

.18 The zone hot water control valves shall have linear characteristics. .19 Heating valves shall be normally open and cooling valves are to be normally

closed, unless otherwise specified. .20 Standard of Acceptance:

.1 Siemens Flowrite Globe Valve with SKC/SKD actuators .2 Belimo B2/B3 Series CCV Ball Valve (Only for valve sizes 1-1/2”

and smaller) .2 AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVE ACTUATORS

.1 Each automatic control valve shall be fitted with a “fail-safe” operator capable of tight shut-off against the differential imposed by the system.

.2 For interior zone applications such as perimeter radiation, VAV box coils and

force flow units where there is minimal risk of equipment freezing due to actuator failure, the use of non-spring return actuators shall be allowed.

.3 Operators for valves in electric-electronic control systems shall be single

phase AC, 24V electric motor operators.


JAL NO. 10-265

.4 Valve actuators on valves 3 in. dia. and larger shall be provided with a manual position override.

.5 Valve actuators shall accept a 0-10VDC or 4-20mA control signal for all

proportional applications .6 Floating point control of valves is not acceptable under any circumstances.

.3 AUTOMATIC CONTROL DAMPERS

.1 The automatic control dampers not provided as part of the packaged equipment shall be supplied by the Control Subcontractor and install by the Mechanical Contractor.

.2 The automatic control dampers shall be opposed blade type for mixing and

parallel blade type for “on-off” service. .3 Maximum damper blade length shall be 4’-0”(1.2m). Maximum permissible

leakage shall not exceed 1% of the total flow based on an approach velocity of 1,500fpm(7.5m/s) over a temperature range of –30 °F (–34.4 °C) to 100 °F (37.7°C) and a pressure of 3 in H20 (0.75 kpa). Unless otherwise noted, blades are to be constructed of formed galvanized steel with neoprene seal edges, continuous stops and seals on all sides, oil impregnated bronze bearings and galvanized steel channel frames.

.4 Centre bar linkage connectors shall be used wherever possible but where

centre bar linkage cannot be used due to space limitations, external linkage connectors may be used.

.4 AUTOMATIC CONTROL DAMPER ACTUATORS

.1 All new actuators for control dampers shall be electric type and be powered

by a single phase AC 24V overload-proof synchronous motor. .2 All newly provided actuators shall be direct-coupled type for both modulating

or two position control dampers. .3 Damper actuators shall accept a 0-10VDC control voltage signal for all

proportional applications .4 All damper actuators shall be selected to operate maximum damper loads of

28 sq.ft. (2.6 sq.m.)


JAL NO. 10-265

.5 Each actuator shall be “fail safe”, complete with external adjustable stops to limit the length of stroke in either direction and mounted on an adjustable bracket. Operating arms shall have double yoke linkages and double set of screws for fastening to the damper shaft.

.6 The standard of acceptance shall be Belimo.

.5 SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSORS

.1 Mount sensors at a height of 5’-6’’ above the finished floor. Unless indicated otherwise, mount new sensors adjacent to the existing thermostat in the space.

.2 End-to-end accuracy +/- 0.3 °C over the entire operating range. .3 Provide a heavy-duty metal guard for all sensors or thermostats mounted in

public areas such as stairways, vestibules, lobbies, gymnasiums and pools. On the approval of the Engineer, a, stainless steel, ventilated plate-type sensor may be used in lieu of guard or cage.

.4 Provide a heavy-duty metal guard for existing thermostats (typically

pneumatic) controlling perimeter radiation where a space sensor has been added in the same zone for temperature monitoring only.

.5 Do not mount sensors on outside walls or other locations influenced by

external thermal sources (e.g. computers, boiler rooms ). .6 Standard of acceptance:

.1 Enercorp TS-S-E-T-10K, TS-PL-T-10K

.6 FIRE STOPPING AND SMOKE SEAL MATERIALS

.1 Asbestos-free elastomeric materials tested, listed and labelled by ULC in accordance with CAN4-S115-M85, for installation in U.L.C. designated fire stopping and smoke seal Systems. These Systems shall provide a positive fire, water and smoke seal and a fire- resistance rating (flame, smoke hose stream and temperature) not less than the fire resistance rating of surrounding construction.

.2 Materials shall form ULC listed or UL classified assemblies and be

compatible with abutting dissimilar materials and finishes. .3 Standard of Acceptance:

.1 3M Canada Limited

.2 A/D Fire Protection System Ltd.

.3 Fire Stop System


JAL NO. 10-265

.7 WALL OPENING COVERING PLATES .1 All hole covering plates used on this project shall be stainless steel 18-8

chrome metal alloy, type 302, non-magnetic type for finished areas and pressed steel for unfinished areas. Finish brush marks shall be run in a vertical direction.

.8 ACCESS DOORS

.1 Access doors installed in unfinished areas shall be constructed of 12 ga prime coated steel and of stainless steel for all areas finished with tile or marble surfaces.

.2 Access doors shall be complete with 180 opening door, round safety

corners, concealed hinges, screwdriver latches, plaster lock and anchor straps.

.3 Access doors shall be 24’x 24’ or 12’x 18’ as per site condition. .4 Access doors in fire rated construction shall be ULC listed and labeled and

of a rating to maintain the fire separation integrity. .5 Standard of Acceptance:

.1 Zurn Industries Canada Limited .2 LeHage Industries Limited .3 Acudor Acorn Limited.

.9 LAN CABLING

.1 All LAN cabling shall be Category V as defined by EIA/TIA 568A. The contractor shall test all cabling to verify that 100Mb bandwidth is supported. See commissioning requirements.

.2 Cabling shall be 4 pair, 100 ohm UTP, #24 AWG solid copper conductor

PVC insulated, with blue or grey colour coded jacket. FT6 rated cable shall be used unless otherwise required to meet building codes or by-laws.

.3 Data outlets shall be RJ45, 8 pin connectors, with 50 microns of hard gold

over nickel, minimum durability of 750 mating cycles and contact pressure of 100 grams per contact. Transmission characteristics shall meet TSB-40 Category V.


JAL NO. 10-265

.4 Provide one RJ45 data outlet adjacent to each device to be terminated (e.g. workstation PC, DDC panel, hub, etc.) Use a flexible patch cable to connect from the data outlet to the end device. For Delta Controls installations, provide a duplex data outlet at the workstation PC to accommodate the remote security key wiring. LAN cabling shall not be directly terminated to any device.

.5 Provide protection from EMI sources in accordance with CSA-T530 article 4 .6 The contractor shall test all cabling to verify conformance with TIA /EIA TSB-

67 - Basic Link Test using a Level 2, bi-directional tester. See commissioning requirements.

.7 Where there are more than 2-90 degree in a conduit run, provide a pull box

between sections so that there are two bends or less in any one section. .8 Where a conduit run requires a reverse bend, between 100 degrees and 180

degrees, insert a pull box at each bend having an angle from 100 degrees to 180 degrees.

.9 Ream all conduit ends and install insulated bushings on each end. .10 Terminate all conduits that protrude through the structural floor 2” above the

concrete base. .11 Do not use a pull box in lieu of a conduit bend. Align conduits that enter a

pull box from opposite ends with each other. .10 THERMOSTAT GUARDS

.1 Provide a heavy duty, metal thermostat guard for specified existing, stand-alone thermostats.

.2 The guard shall be have a minimum 18 guage metal cover and 22 guage

ring base. The unit shall be tamper-resistant and equipped with a lock and key. The colour of the unit shall be beige.

.3 The standard of acceptance shall be White Rodgers Model #F29-0222.


JAL NO. 10-265

3 EXECUTION 3.1 COORDINATION WITH NEW MECHANICAL WORK

.1 In a facility where mechanical retrofits are planned, obtain and review the

mechanical drawings and mechanical specifications for each site. Coordinate all site work with the mechanical contractor.

.2 Provide all specified labour and material as indicated in the Mechanical Drawings

and/or Specifications. Provide written installation instructions for all supplied equipment and devices to be installed by the Mechanical Contractor.

.3 The Controls Contractor shall supply all required valves, dampers and thermowells

to the Mechanical Contractor for installation, where specified. If a separate Mechanical Contractor has not been hired by TDSB to work on the project, the Controls Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of these devices.

.4 The Controls Contractor shall be responsible for identifying and marking the location

of new thermowells to be installed in piping. Make arrangements to have the Mechanical Consultant or TDSB Engineer (where applicable) review and approve all thermowell locations prior to installation.

.5 Install and commission any BAS points associated with the new mechanical work

during the same time frame as this work. .6 The Controls Contractor shall provide all material and labour to carry out all the

electrical work (power and controls) associated with the new mechanical work. 3.2 GENERAL - INSTALLATION OF CONTROLS

.1 The control sequences indicate only the principal items of equipment controlling the systems. Supplement each control system with relays and auxiliaries to enable each system to perform as specified and to permit proper operation and supervision of it.

.2 Provide complete identification and labelling for all devices and equipment. .3 Provide new cabling, conduits, control cabinets, power supplies and other auxiliary

equipment, as required for a complete operational system.


JAL NO. 10-265

3.3 POWER SOURCES AND WIRING METHODS .1 All wiring shall be installed in EMT conduit unless specified otherwise. Exposed

wiring in finished areas (e.g. corridors, classrooms, gymnasiums, etc.) shall be installed in wiremold (colour to match surrounding area).

.2 Wiring from DDC controllers to sensors and actuators and control system network

and low voltage wiring running in accessible ceilings may be installed using LVT cable. Where the ceiling is used as a return air plenum, plenum rated cable shall be used in lieu of LVT cable.

.3 Install EMT and cable at right angles to building lines, securely fastened, and in

accordance with current electrical codes and standards. .4 Power and control wiring shall be copper conductor (RW90). For power wiring,

provide #12 AWG (minimum) with a 3% maximum voltage drop in accordance with CEC requirements. Control wiring shall be a minimum of #14 AWG, unless otherwise specified.

.5 Wiring smaller than 18 gauge shall not be accepted on the project. Exceptions are

made for wiring between terminal computer devices, wire in standard communication cables, such as printers and short haul modems, wire used in communication networks, i.e. any cable transferring digital data, using twisted shielded pairs.

.6 The wiring from panels to devices shall be installed without splices. The use of

crimp connectors is not allowed when connecting field wiring to sensor or device leads. The use of wire nuts is acceptable in this application.

.7 Power for control system shall not be obtained by tapping into miscellaneous circuits

that could be inadvertently switched off. Only dedicated circuit(s) shall power the control system. Provide additional breakers or electrical panels as required.

.8 Mount transformers and other peripheral equipment in panels located in serviceable

areas. Provide line-side breakers/fuses for each transformer. .9 All 120 VAC power for any controls equipment shall be from dedicated circuits.

Provide a breaker lock for each breaker used to supply the control system. Update the panel circuit directory.

.10 A dedicated power circuit may be used to power DDC panels and equipment within

the same or adjoining mechanical rooms. The use of one power circuit to power DDC panels distributed throughout the building is not acceptable.


JAL NO. 10-265

.11 The controller may be powered from the equipment that it is directly controlling (i.e. heat pump, rooftop unit) only if the controller controls no other equipment and the power supply to the controller remains energized independently of unit operation or status.

.12 Provide all required code gauge boxes, connectors and other wiring accessories. .13 For all DC wiring, positive conductors shall be WHITE or RED in colour while

negative conductors shall be BLACK in colour. .14 On exterior building surfaces, wiring shall be rated for 90C and wet environments.

Conduit shall be rigid metal or rigid PVC with waterproof joints and connectors used throughout.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF STANDARD CONTROL DAMPERS AND ACTUATORS. .1 Supply new automatic control dampers where specified. .2 The new ducts and/or plenums-mounted dampers shall be installed as part of the air

distribution Work specified in a different section of the Specification. .3 The dampers shall be made available at the site at the location where they are

required. .4 Ensure that each damper assembly is properly mounted. .5 The linkage and motors shall be provided and completely connected for all control

dampers, including for dampers factory supplied with equipment. .6 Where newly installed damper sizes exceed 28 sq. ft. (2.6 sq. m) multiple operators

shall be provided. .7 Wherever possible, the new damper actuators shall be installed so they are

accessible from outside ducts, plenums and equipment casings.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES AND ACTUATORS. .1 All control valves shall be supplied by the Controls Contractor and installed by the

Mechanical Contractor, unless specified otherwise. .2 Each control valve shall be equipped with its own actuator. .3 The Controls Contractor shall ensure that each control valve assembly is properly

connected and installed.


JAL NO. 10-265

.4 The Controls Contractor shall test, adjust and verify the operation of each control valve to ensure that it is properly functioning, as required and left in safe working order.

.5 Motorized butterfly valves (usually installed for boiler isolation) shall be supplied and

installed by the Mechanical Contractor but shall be wired up by the Controls Contractor. The valve details are in the Mechanical specifications.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF FIRE STOPPING AND SMOKE SEAL MATERIALS .1 Where conduits penetrate the fire rated construction, ULC listed and labelled fire

stopping and smoke seal materials shall be supplied and installed in accordance with ULC Firestop System requirements to seal holes and voids in the walls or slabs and as follows:

.1 Conduit through a floor with a sleeved or core drilled circular opening – ULC

System SP115. .2 Conduit through a floor with a cast or cut rectangular opening – ULC System

SP116. .3 Conduit through a wall with a sleeved or core drilled circular opening – ULC

System SP114. .4 Conduit through a wall with a rectangular cast or cut opening – ULC System

SP107.

.2 Select thickness and arrangement of back-up materials to suit size of service, length of sleeve and anticipated movement.

.3 At time of application all surfaces shall be properly cleaned, dried and free from

dust, oil, grease, loose or flaking paint and foreign materials.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF WALL OPENING COVER PLATES .1 All existing wall openings of the removed electrical and control devices shall be

covered with properly sized plates in an approved manner so that the finished Work presents a neat and clean appearance.

3.8 CUTTING AND PATCHING .1 All cutting, patching, painting and making good for the installation of the BAS work

shall be done by the BAS Contractor. All cutting shall be performed in a neat and true fashion, with proper tools and equipment to the Engineer and/or TDSB Project Representative approval. The surfaces shall be made good to reasonably match existing finishes to the Engineer and/or TDSB Project Representative approval.


JAL NO. 10-265

.2 Location of the existing services concealed in the construction, if any, shall be determined prior to drilling or cutting an opening. If required, the Contractor is to x-ray the walls or slabs and in any case he shall not drill or cut any surface without the TDSB project representatives approval.

.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for the repair of any damage to existing services, exposed or concealed, caused as a result of this Work.

3.9 PACKING AND SEALING CORE DRILLED CONDUIT OPENINGS .1 The void between the conduit opening and the conduit shall be packed and sealed

for the length of the opening as follows: .1 Pack openings in non-fire rated interior construction with mineral wool and

seal both ends of the opening with non-hardening silicone base caulking compound to produce a watertight seal.

.2 Pack and seal openings in fire rated walls and slabs as specified in this

Section and as per article entitled “Installation of Fire stopping and Smoke Seal Materials”

3.10 ACCESS DOORS INSTALLATION .1 All access doors shall be flush mounted. .2 Access doors shall be installed such as to give proper access to all newly installed

electrical and control equipment and other similar electrical Work which may need maintenance or repair but which are concealed in inaccessible construction.

.3 All access doors shall be installed by the professional trades specialized in working

on the particular type of construction in which the doors are required.

3.11 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND ACCESSORIES .1 Install all electrical materials and equipment conform to Canadian Electrical Code as

amended to date and as specified below. .2 Provide conduit, electrical wiring and fittings from load side of starters and/or

disconnects to motor or electrical connected item, including the connections to all mechanical equipment.

.3 Provide control wiring, conduit and relays to interlock starters and connect safety

and operating controls as required.


JAL NO. 10-265

.4 Wire final 12 in to 18 in of motor connections with flexible liquid tight conduit, with insulated throat connectors.

.5 Use thin wall conduit up to and including 1 ¼ in size for wiring in ceiling, furred

spaces and where not exposed to mechanical injury. Use rigid galvanized steel conduit for exposed wiring and for conduit 1 ½ in size and larger.

.6 Provide branch circuit wiring and an outlet for each motorized damper control. .7 Conduit shall be in accordance with the following CSA standards:

.1 C22.2 No.813 - 1976 - Electric Metallic Tubing

.2 C22.2 No.56 - 1977 - Flexible Metal Conduit and Liquid Tight Flexible Metal Conduit

.3 C22.2 No.136 - 1966 - Rigid PVC Conduit .8 Install all wiring in conduit, unless otherwise specified. .9 Conduit accessories, condulets and fittings shall conform to C.S.A. Standard C22.2

No.18 - M1987. .10 Use thin wall conduit for branch circuit and signal wiring in ceiling, furred spaces and

where not exposed to mechanical injury. .11 Conduit shall be of sufficient size to permit easy removal of conductors at any time.

Do not bend conduit over sharp objects. Do not use bends and fittings together. .12 All conduit connections made to enclosures housing electrical devices (e.g. DDC

panels, transformers, etc.) shall be made on the sides or bottom end of the enclosure. No openings of any kind shall be made to the top side of such enclosures.

3.12 EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES AND LOCATIONS .1 Provide new enclosures for all field equipment (e.g. DDC panels, transducers,

relays, etc.). Enclosures shall be equipped with a hinged door and latch. Provide a TDSB-standard key/lock set for each enclosure.

.2 Mount all enclosures in serviceable areas of mechanical rooms, storage rooms or

janitor closets. Obtain written approval of the Engineer prior to mounting any enclosure in ceiling spaces or more than 5’-6” above the finished floor.

.3 All transformers and power supplies for control equipment shall be installed in new

dedicated metal cabinets with hinged, lockable covers located in the proximity of their dedicated controller cabinets.


JAL NO. 10-265

.4 Include within a DDC panel enclosure one 120 VAC duplex receptacle for portable PC power, if the controller cabinet is located further than 5’-0” from the nearest wall receptacle.

.5 Ensure that enclosures are sized to allow for ease of servicing of all equipment

contained within. Enclosures containing DDC panels shall be sized to allow for the installation of the maximum allowable number of expansion panels/boards. Do not mount other equipment in a manner that may interfere with the future installation of expansion panels/boards.

3.13 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING OF CONTROL EQUIPMENT .1 All panels must have a lamicoid tag (min. 3”x1”) affixed to the front face indicating

panel designation and function (i.e. “BAS Panel 1” or “Relay Panel 3”). .2 All field sensors or devices must have a lamicoid tag (min. 3”x1”) attached with tie-

wrap or adhesive indicating the point software name and hardware address (i.e. AHU1_MAT, 2.IP4). Tags must be secured by screws where mounted outside of the building, in un-heated spaces, in high humidity areas or where subject to vibration.

.3 Room sensors or other sensors in finished areas must have a lamicoid tag affixed to

the front cover. This tag shall be minimum 1”x ½” and indicate the point software name and hardware address.

.4 All devices within a field enclosure shall be identified via a label or tag. .5 All BAS panel power sources must be identified by a label (min. 3”x1”) indicating the

source power panel designation and circuit number (i.e. “120vac fed from LP-2A cct #1).

.6 All field control equipment panels fed from more than one power source must have a

warning label on the front cover. .7 All wires shall be identified with the hardware address with a band-type self-

adhesive strips or clip-on plastic wire markers at both ends. .8 All rotating equipment controlled by the BAS shall have a tag or label affixed

indicating that the equipment may start without warning. .9 The location of the phone line manager shall be indicated via a label affixed to the

inside cover of the modem enclosure or BAS panel. .10 All BAS panels will be supplied with a point’s list sheet (within a plastic sleeve)

attached to the inside door.


JAL NO. 10-265

.11 The points list shall identify the following for each point:

.1 Panel number.

.2 Panel location.

.3 Hardware address.

.4 Software name.

.5 Point description.

.6 Field device type.

.7 Point type (i.e. AI or DO).

.8 Device fail position.

.9 Device manufacturer.

.10 Model number or reference.

.11 Wire tag reference. .12 Provide laminated wiring diagrams for all field mounted relay enclosures. Securely

attach to the inside door. Identify power panels and circuit numbers of the equipment being controlled.

.13 Provide laminated wiring diagrams or modify existing equipment wiring diagrams

wherever the BAS interfaces to other equipment. (e.g. boilers, chillers, etc.). Securely attach to the inside of the respective control cabinet.

.14 Provide lamacoid labels indicating the required operating sequences, on the boilers

and valves, where the boiler plants have manual or automatic isolating valves. Submit actual wording to the engineer for approval prior to fabrication and installation.

.15 Provide lamicoid or machine labels (as outlined above) for all interposing relays or

contactors used in control circuits. The labels shall include the related point software name and hardware address

.16 Provide a lamicoid label to identify the location of concealed devices above the

ceiling space. Mount the label on the ceiling grid t-bar or a permanent surface adjacent to the devices. The label shall contain the wording “BAS Devices Above”.

.17 Provide lamicoid labels for all auxiliary HVAC equipment (e.g. force flow cabinets,

unit ventilators, unit heater, window AC units, etc.) controlled by the BAS. Mount the labels in the vicinity of the existing thermostat or power switch for the unit. The label shall contain the wording “Under BAS Control”.

.18 Where directed by the Engineer, provide any and all additional labelling, diagrams.

schematics or instructions as may be required to facilitate the correct operation and maintenance of controlled building systems.


JAL NO. 10-265

3.14 SYSTEMS HARDWARE COMMISSIONING .1 This contractor shall be responsible for the “end to end” commissioning, testing,

verification and start-up of the complete control system hardware including panels, sensors, transducers, end devices, relays and wiring. Where applicable, this shall include any points from an existing and/or re-used automation system in the building.

.2 The contractor shall conduct the hardware commissioning at each facility in

conjunction with a team of Skilled Trades staff (normally 2 tradespersons) designated by TDSB. The contractor shall supervise the hardware commissioning process and ensure that the Skilled Trades staff are actively participating in all facets this work.

.3 When the site hardware installation is 100% completed (including all labelling and

documentation), the contractor shall provide written notification to the TDSB Project Supervisor to schedule the hardware commissioning dates for each facility.

.4 TDSB reserves the right, at its sole discretion, to discontinue site commissioning at

any time if any part of the site hardware installation is found to be incomplete on the date of commissioning. If this occurs, the Contractor shall assume responsibility for any additional costs related to rescheduling of the site commissioning.

.5 The Contractor shall prepare a hardware commissioning report containing the

following information and test results:

.1 Analogue inputs (i.e. temperatures, pressure, etc.) shall be verified with an approved calibration device. All actual temperature readings should be with +/- 1C of the readings observed at the workstation. Record calibration adjustments and settings.

.2 Analogue outputs shall be verified by manually commanding the output channel from the operator workstation to two or more positions within the 0-100% range and verifying the actual position of the actuator or device. All devices shall operate over their entire 0-100% range from a minimum control range of 10-90%. Record the actual output scale range (channel output voltage versus controller command) for each analogue end device

.3 Digital outputs shall be verified by witnessing the actual start/stop operation of the equipment under control.

.4 Digital inputs shall be verified by witnessing the status of the input point as the equipment is manually cycled on and off.

.5 Record all out-of-season or unverified points in the commissioning report as “non-commissioned”.

.6 Identify any existing equipment (valves, dampers, fan starters, etc..) that are inoperative or require maintenance or repair.


JAL NO. 10-265

.7 The BAS field panel power source shall be toggled on and off to ensure reboot functionality and power down memory retention of all parameters. During the power down test, all controlled system outputs shall go to their fail-safe position.

.8 Verify PID loop tuning parameters by applying a step change to the current setpoint and observing the response of the controlled device. Setpoint should be reached in an acceptable period of time without excessive cycling or hunting of the controlled device. Provide a graph of the trend response to setpoint change for important controlled devices (e.g. valves 1-inch or larger, dampers on major air handlers, etc.)

.9 Provide confirmation that a series of test alarms has been successfully received at a designated remote monitoring workstations.

.6 Include with the hardware commissioning report a site floor plan indicating the

location of all equipment installed in concealed or recessed locations (e.g. interposing relays in ceiling spaces).

.7 Provide testing of all LAN cabling to ensure that 100Mb bandwidth is supported. Verify conformance with TIA /EIA TSB-67 - Basic Link Test using a Level 2, bi-

directional tester. Provide all equipment necessary to carry out the required tests. .8 The hardware commissioning report must be signed and dated by the Contractor’s

technician performing the tests and participating TDSB trades staff. .9 At the completion of site commissioning, submit four (4) copies of hardware

commissioning report to the TDSB Project Supervisor.

3.15 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION INSPECTION .1 At the completion of the site hardware inspection, the Contractor shall test and verify

that the system programming, graphics and alarm software is operating correctly and is in compliance all requirements of the specifications.

.2 The Contractor shall provide written notification to the TDSB Project Supervisor that

the site is ready for the Substantial Completion Inspection by the Engineer. .3 At the conclusion of the Substantial Completion Inspection, the Engineer shall issue

a comprehensive site deficiency report to the Contractor for his immediate action. .4 The Contractor shall correct all items noted in the site deficiency report within ten

(10) business days of receipt. .5 The Contractor shall provide written notification to the TDSB Project Supervisor that

all items on the Engineer’s site deficiency report have been corrected.


JAL NO. 10-265

3.16 TRAINING .1 Provide four (4) hours of operator training and four (4) hours of advanced

maintenance level training per facility. The allocation of training hours and the number of participants shall be determined by TDSB. The training hours may be divided up over several training sessions. The number of trainees to be determined by TDSB but shall not exceed 8 for any one session. Training may take place on site, at another TDSB location, at the Contractor’s office or any combination thereof.

.2 Submit a proposed training lesson plan for each session the TDSB Engineer for

review and approval. .3 Supply customized training manuals or handouts for each trainee.

END OF SECTION

TDSB – Kane Public School Section 16010 JAIN & ASSOCIATES Limited Contents Page Project No. KE1016 February 28, 2011 Electrical General Requirements

JAL NO. 10-265

CONTENTS

SUBSECTION TITLE 1.1 References 1.2 Application 1.3 Work Included 1.4 Intent 1.5 Workmanship 1.6 Temporary & Trial Usage 1.7 By-Laws & Regulations 1.8 Permits & Fees 1.9 Certificates 1.10 Specifications, Drawings & Job Conditions 1.11 Shop Drawing Material & Lists 1.12 Record Documents 1.13 Job Site Work Shop and Storage 1.14 Protection 1.15 Instructions to Operator 1.16 Cleaning, Lubrication and Adjustment 1.17 Inspection & Testing 1.18 Certification of Tests 1.19 Completion 1.20 Alterations of Existing Building 1.21 Site Visit

TDSB – Kane Public School Section 16010 JAIN & ASSOCIATES Limited Page 1 Project No. KE1016 February 28, 2011 Electrical General Requirements

JAL NO. 10-265

1.1 REFERENCES .1 Division 1, General Requirements, is a part of this Section and shall apply as if

repeated here. 1.2 APPLICATION .1 This Section applies to and is a part of all Sections of Division 16. 1.3 WORK INCLUDED .1 Sections of these Electrical Specifications are not intended to delegate functions

nor to delegate work and supply to any specific trade and the work shall include all labour, materials, equipment and tools required for a complete and working installation as described.

1.4 INTENT .1 Mention herein or indication on drawings of articles, materials, operations or

methods requires: supply of each item mentioned or indicated, of quality, or subject to qualifications noted; installation according to conditions stated and; performance of each operation prescribed with furnishing of necessary labour, equipment and incidentals for Electrical Trade, Division 16.

.2 Supplementary to definitions established are: `Supply' shall mean furnishing to

site in location required or directed complete with accessory parts. `Install' shall mean set in place and secured or affixed to building structure as noted or directed. `Provide' shall mean supply and install as each is described.

.3 Where used, wordings such as "approved, to approval, as directed, permitted,

permission, accepted, acceptance", shall mean: approved, directed, permitted, accepted, by authorized representative of the Owner.

.4 Equipment provided under this Division shall conform to applicable standards

and regulations of the following organizations: Canadian Standards Association (CSA) Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC) Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) Electrical Inspection Department of Ontario Hydro Electrical Safety Code (ESC)


JAL NO. 10-265

Canadian Underwriters Association (CUA) National Building Code (NBC) Ontario Building Code (OBC) 1.5 WORKMANSHIP .1 Workmanship and method of installation shall conform to best standards and

practice. Where required by local or other By-Laws and Regulations, tradesmen shall be licensed in their trade.

1.6 TEMPORARY & TRIAL USAGE .1 Temporary or trial usage of any equipment or materials shall not be construed as

evidence of acceptance of same and no claim for damage shall be made for injury to or breaking of any part of such work which may be so used.

1.7 BY-LAWS & REGULATIONS .1 Work shall conform with latest rules, regulations and definitions of Canadian

Electrical Code and applicable Municipal and Provincial Codes and Regulations, and with requirements of other authorities having jurisdiction in the area where work is to be performed. Minor changes required by an authority having jurisdiction shall be carried out without change to the Contract amount. Standards established by drawings and specifications shall not be reduced by applicable codes or regulations.

1.8 PERMITS & FEES .1 File Contract Drawings with proper authorities and obtain their approval of

installation and permits for same before proceeding with work. Prepare and submit necessary detailed shop drawings as required by Authorities.

.2 Pay all fees in connection with examination of drawings, permits, inspections and

final certificate of approval. 1.9 CERTIFICATES .1 Furnish necessary certificates as evidence that work installed conforms with laws

and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.


JAL NO. 10-265

1.10 SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWINGS & JOB CONDITIONS .1 Electrical Drawings do not show structural and related details. Take information

involving accurate measurement of building from building drawings, or at building. Make, without additional charge, any necessary changes or additions to electrical work or equipment locations to accommodate structural conditions. Equipment locations may be altered by Engineer without extra charge provided change is made before installation and does not necessitate major additional material.

.2 Examine site and local conditions. Examine carefully all drawings and complete

specifications to ensure that work can be satisfactorily carried out as shown. Before commencing work, examine the work of other Sections and report at once any defect or interference affecting the work, its completion or warranty. No allowance will be made later for any expense incurred through failure to make these examinations or to report any such discrepancies in writing.

.3 Relocate equipment and/or material installed but not co-ordinated with work of

other Sections as directed, without extra charge. .4 Furnish "built-in" items in ample time and give necessary information and

assistance in connection with building-in of same. Notify Section concerned in writing of size and location of recesses, openings and chases at least 48 hours before walls are erected, floors poured and similar work.

1.11 SHOP DRAWING MATERIAL & LISTS .1 Prepare and submit shop drawings and lists of materials for review in accordance

with Architectural Sections. Make submittals of more than two pages in booklet form. Individual and loose drawings will not be accepted for review.

.2 Prior to equipment fabrication, delivery or installation, submit complete lists of

materials proposed, indicating manufacturer, catalogue numbers and complete performance data.


JAL NO. 10-265

.3 Review of Shop Drawings by Consultant is for sole purpose of ascertaining conformance with general design concept. This review shall not mean that Architect and/or Engineer approves detail design inherent in Shop Drawings, responsibility for which shall remain with Contractor and such review shall not relieve Contractor of his responsibility for meeting all requirements of Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at site, for information that pertains solely to fabrication processes or to techniques of construction and installation and for co-ordination of work with all trades.

.4 Shop drawings transmitted via facsimile (fax) machines, or copies of same, will

not be accepted for review. 1.12 RECORD DOCUMENTS .1 Conform to General Requirements. Maintain at least 2 sets of documents and

clearly mark on same as job progresses, changes and deviations from work shown so that on completion Owner will have records of exact location of ducts and equipment and record of material and equipment changes.

.2 Record all homerun conduits, junction boxes for complete power and systems on

As-Built Drawings. All underground lighting, conduit shall be dimensioned from nearest grid lines.

.3 Contractor shall obtain clean set of prints from Consultant at start of Contract

Work and shall keep these prints up-to-date at jobsite, accurately recording all changes made on project and locating all services, equipment, etc. which may have been shown only diagrammatically on Contract Documents.

.4 Contractor shall ensure that as-built information is accurately recorded and shall

check same. As-Built drawings shall be reviewed with Consultant at each jobsite meeting.

.5 Upon completion of Contract Work, prior to Substantial Performance inspection and

after final review with Consultants, Contractor shall neatly transfer recorded information and make final As-Built submission to Consultant in the following form:

- One (1) set of clean, legible prints. - One (1) ACAD 2010 format drawings.

.6 Upon review by Consultant, if required the Contractor shall revise drawings until

acceptable.


JAL NO. 10-265

1.13 JOB SITE WORK SHOP AND STORAGE .1 Supply job site office, workshop, tools, scaffolds and material storage as required

to complete the work of this Division. Location of temporary buildings, use of space on site or within building shall be to later direction.

1.14 PROTECTION .1 Securely plug or cap open ends of electrical raceways or equipment to prevent

entry of dirt, dust, debris, water, snow or ice. Clean all equipment inside and outside before testing.

.2 Equipment stored on site shall be protected from weather and kept dry and clean

at all times. Take care to avoid corrosion of metal parts. .3 Protect work installed from damage. Secure all unfinished or loose work to

prevent movement. 1.15 INSTRUCTIONS TO OPERATOR .1 Contractor will be responsible for collecting and organizing three (3) copies of all

data, operating instructions, trouble-shooting instructions, parts lists, parts diagrams, evidence of all tests, maintenance manuals, etc. and assembling them in neat manuals. This shall include (however not be limited to) all reviewed shop drawings, manufacturer’s operation manuals, complete fire alarm verification report, final ESA inspection certificate, emergency lighting levels plot and verification letter, panel directories and lamp list.

.2 Contractor shall also collect from Subtrades and Suppliers all

Guarantees/Warranties specified. Check that starting date (date of Substantial Performance of entire project) and extent of each guarantee/warranty are clearly indicated. Check also that all guarantees/warranties indicate Supplier’s Name or Subcontractor’s Name as appropriate together with contact phone number. Assemble neatly in labeled section of each manual.

.3 Submit manuals to Consultant for approval prior to requesting Substantial

Performance inspection. .4 Arrange for on-site instruction by various Manufacturers where considered

necessary by Consultant, at no additional cost to Owner.


JAL NO. 10-265

1.16 CLEANING, LUBRICATION AND ADJUSTMENT .1 Immediately prior to completion of work: .1 Remove all dust, dirt and other foreign matter from internal surfaces of

enclosed electrical apparatus and equipment. .2 Remove all temporary protective coverings and coatings, temporary

labels. .3 Clean, repair, lubricate and adjust all mechanism and moveable parts of

apparatus and equipment leaving it in new condition and operating properly.

.4 Balance demand loads for service and distribution feeders within 5

percent upon completion of work and after the building is in full operation. 1.17 INSPECTION AND TESTING .1 Systems, equipment, and all major items of material shall be tested to the

satisfaction of the Architect, and as required to establish compliance with plans and specifications, and with the requirements for the Supply and Inspection Authorities.

.2 Faulty and defective equipment shall be replaced with new materials. Conductors

which are found to be shorted or grounded, or to have less than proper insulation resistance, shall be replaced with new conductors.

.3 Tests shall include but are not limited to the following: .1 Test of secondary voltage cables shall include megger tests to establish

proper insulation resistance, and phase-to-ground resistance of cables. .2 Proper functioning of all systems. .3 Polarity tests - to establish proper polarity connections to all sockets and

receptacles. .4 Test of system neutral to establish proper insulation resistance and

isolation of neutral from ground except for required ground connection at Service.


JAL NO. 10-265

1.18 CERTIFICATE OF TESTS .1 When work is complete submit three copies of test results and a signed

statement listing all tests that have been performed as required by specifications and manufacturer's instructions.

1.19 COMPLETION .1 Provide receipts from designated representative of Owner for portable and loose

materials (e.g. spare fuses, fixture relamping equipment and the like). .2 Provide copy of final inspection certificate from Electrical Inspection Authority. .3 Perform tests and provide documentation as further described herein. .4 Provide Record Drawings to approval. .5 Provide manufacturers corrected "as built" shop drawings for all major electrical

items and systems, including all shop drawings returned for modifications. 1.20 ALTERATIONS TO EXISTING BUILDING .1 Note that certain alterations and structural changes are to be made to existing

building. Architectural drawings and site are to be examined to determine extent of alterations affecting existing electrical systems. Where existing conduits and wires run through areas to be altered, to feed other parts of existing building, they shall be re-routed and reconnected to maintain their original function. Drawings do not necessarily indicate outlets, switches, receptacles, and the like, and other electrical equipment which are required to be relocated or abandoned. Provide decorative blanking cover plates for obsolete outlet boxes remaining.

.2 Electrical services and auxiliary services (fire alarm, P.A. intercom, and the like)

shall be maintained continuously without interruption. Interruptions to services shall be confined to periods of time to be designated by Consultant, and/or Owner’s designated representative. Include in tender for temporary connections, overtime labour charges, and such related allowances in order to conform with these conditions.

.3 The Electrical Contractor is responsible for removal, reinstallation, cutting and

patching of ceiling and walls as required in the existing building.


JAL NO. 10-265

.4 Cutting directly related to electrical work shall be coordinated and paid for by Electrical Subcontractor involved, under supervision of Contractor.

.5 Where existing electrical items or systems are demolished and removed from

existing construction assemblies, Electrical Subcontractor involved shall be responsible for infilling entire hole left after removal of item or system with new construction assembly to match existing. Where new electrical items or systems are installed through existing construction assemblies, Electrical Subcontractor involved shall be responsible for properly sized and accurate cutting of existing construction assembly to allow installation of new work.

1.21 SITE VISIT

.1 Electrical Contractor shall review existing systems thoroughly. No extras will be entertained after tender due to insufficient familiarity with existing systems.

END OF SECTION

TDSB – Kane Public School Section 16050 JAIN & ASSOCIATES Limited Contents Page Project No. KE1016 February 28, 2011 Basic Materials & Methods

JAL NO. 10-265

CONTENTS SUBSECTION TITLE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 References 1.2 Materials 1.3 Material Acceptance PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Raceways 2.2 Wire & Cable 2.3 Devices 2.4 Devices - Specialized 2.5 Device Cover Plates 2.6 Panelboards 2.7 Switches 2.8 Fuses PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Equipment Locations 3.2 Mounting Heights 3.3 Holes & Drilling 3.4 Cutting & Patching 3.5 Excavation & Backfill 3.6 Hangers & Inserts 3.7 Painting 3.8 Nameplates & Schedules 3.9 Branch Circuit Wiring & Feeder Cables

3.10 Conduit, Raceways and Wireways 3.11 Wire & Cable

…./2

TDSB – Kane Public School Section 16050 JAIN & ASSOCIATES Limited Contents Page Project No. KE1016 February 28, 2011 Basic Materials & Methods

JAL NO. 10-265

CONTENTS SUBSECTION TITLE PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.12 Outlet, Junction & Pull Boxes 3.13 Access Doors & Access Markers 3.14 Panelboards 3.15 Electric Work for Other Divisions 3.16 Grounding - General 3.17 Fireproofing & Sealing 3.18 Inspection & Testing 3.19 Certification of Tests

TDSB – Kane Public School Section 16050 JAIN & ASSOCIATES Limited Page 1 Project No. KE1016 February 28, 2011 Basic Materials & Methods

JAL NO. 10-265

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES .1 Conform to Section 16010 - Electrical - General Requirements. 1.2 MATERIALS .1 Materials shall be new, of Canadian manufacture where available, first quality

and uniform throughout. Submit tender based on the use of materials and equipment specified, or on the listed acceptable alternate equipment as further detailed.

.2 Electrical materials shall be C.S.A. approved and be so labeled. Material not

C.S.A. approved shall receive acceptance for installation by Ontario Hydro Special Inspections Branch before delivery, and modifications and charges required for suchf acceptance shall be included in work of this Section. Material shall not be installed or connected to the source of electrical power until approval is obtained.

.3 Confirm capacity, ratings and characteristics of equipment items being provided

to supply power to equipment provided under other Sections of the work. Resolve discrepancies before such items are purchased.

1.3 MATERIAL ACCEPTANCE .1 Acceptance of materials installed presumes that materials have not been

damaged or exposed to conditions that would adversely affect performance and life expectancy.

.2 If in the opinion of the Architect, materials have sustained damage, or have been

exposed to abnormal conditions it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to have such tests performed as deemed necessary by the Architect to establish condition and therefore, acceptability of installed materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RACEWAYS .1 Rigid galvanized steel conduit shall comply with CSA Specification C22.2 No. 45.


JAL NO. 10-265

.2 Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) shall comply with CSA Specification C22.2 No. 83. Connectors and couplings to be forged steel. Connectors to have factory-installed insulated throats.

.3 Rigid PVC conduit shall comply with CSA Specification C22.2 No. 136. .4 Watertight flexible conduit: "Sealtite" PVC jacketed flexible steel with

Hubbell-Kellum strain relief grips; shall comply with CSA Standard C22.2 No. 56. .5 Cable trays in ceiling spaces shall be open, ventilated, centre-spine, aluminum,

305 mm wide x 102 mm high x 305 rung spacing complete with connectors, hardware, offsets and suspension hangers, complete with 2 barriers providing 3 sections. Wiremold #A 04 12 12. Alternate manufacturers: Canadian Electrical Raceways, Mono-Systems.

.6 Surface wall-mounted raceways shall be Wiremold No. 5400 non-metallic type

complete with two channels and all necessary fittings, closers, device modules, etc.

2.2 WIRE & CABLE .1 Wire and cable shall comprise copper conductors, sized as noted, rated 75 deg.

C., 600 volt minimum flame retardant insulation, and CSA approved for application.

.2 Wire and cable installed in conduit shall be PVC insulated Type TWH - Flame

retardant and comply with CSA Specification C22.2 No. 75. .3 Use Electrovert "Z-Type" code markers for control & communication conductors. 2.3 DEVICES .1 Wiring devices unless otherwise specified herein, or noted, shall be as

manufactured by Arrow-Hart, Hubbell, Leviton, P & S, Bryant Electric. .2 Switches for 347 volt branch lighting circuits, generally shall be A.C. “Quiet

Type” rated 20 amp. 347 volt, totally enclosed phenolic housing PGS 3720 grey toggle handle.

.3 Double Pole lighting switches shall be connected to 2 pole circuit breakers.


JAL NO. 10-265

.4 Key-operated switches shall be PGSPS2OAC1-KL Series of the grey types listed above, except key-operated, and shall be keyed-alike.

.5 Standard 15 amp. 125 volt duplex receptacles generally shall be Specification

grade Hubbell Cat. No.5262, grey CSA #5-15R. .6 Standard Duplex receptacles indicated to have `split-feed' shall be two-circuit

type wired and connected to a 2 pole common trip circuit breaker in associated panelboard. Orientation of common circuit shall be similar throughout project.

.7 Special purpose receptacles as noted on the drawings shall be Hubbell

Conforming to CSA configurations (Table 46 and Table 47 of Canadian Electrical Code) for non-locking and locking receptacles. Provide attachment cap for each special purpose receptacle.

.8 “Range” receptacles shall be CSA Type 14-50R, 50 amp. 3 pole, 4 wire,

grounding 125/250V flush receptacle. Provide the above with 5 foot rubber cord set, 50 amp. and connect to equipment.

.9 Receptacles with integral ground fault interrupter shall be P&S No. GF-5262 with

matching stainless steel faceplate. .10 All receptacles in Kindergarten Classrooms & Parenting Centre shall be ‘safety

shutter’ type. 2.4 DEVICES - SPECIALIZED .1 PAC Poles shall be from floor to ceiling (with upto 50mm adjustment), of

extruded aluminum construction, anodized finish, approximately 50 mm square with snap on covers to provide access to wiring without removing unit, barrier to isolate power from communication systems, fastening accessories at top of pole to secure to inverted T Bar ceiling using set screws to permit relocation, metal sleeve at base to conceal adjustment, flange at ceiling to conceal wiring and removable grip tight devices for carpet floors to prevent movement of poles. Poles shall be complete with receptacles and knock-out holes for communication to suit devices shown on drawings. Install poles in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Secure to ceiling and to finished floor. Re-adjust service poles as required after data cabling is installed.

.2 Retractable Cord Reels shall be Reelcaft Series 4000 Cable Reel installed as per

detail on drawings and in accordance with direction on site.


JAL NO. 10-265

.3 Clocks shall be Edwards 2941 surface-mounted 120VAC 305 mm diameter clock, having 12/24 hour dial and gray bezel.

2.5 DEVICE COVER PLATES .1 Switch and receptacle and other device faceplates for flush mounted devices,

generally shall be single or multi-gang as required, type 301, stainless steel, #4 brushed finish with removable protective covering.

.2 Weatherproof enclosures for outdoor receptacles shall be P & S 4600 with

4600-26 Mounting Plate, duplex ground fault receptacle and two #4609 Keys. Include re-installation of lockable covers as part of installation.

.3 Cover plates for other devices such as flush fan controls, telephone, etc., shall be

stainless steel to match above. 2.6 PANELBOARDS .1 Panelboards as scheduled, shall comprise “Branch” panelboards, with fixed

bolted connection thermal-magnetic, quick-make, quick-break, 40oC, calibrated ULC rated ‘SWD’ switching duty, molded-case circuit breaker branches. “Plug-in” breakers are not acceptable. Multipole breakers shall be common trip type.

.2 Panelboards shall include the following features: .1 Flush or surface trim as noted. .2 Concealed hinges. .3 Combination catch and lock semi flush tumbler type - all keyed alike. .4 Adjustable self-positioning trims. .5 Plain trims not displaying any names or Symbols. "Vault" type handles shall not be used except in unfinished areas. .6 Typed schedules of circuits indicating equipment and area controlled on

the backs of panel doors, in a steel trim pocket, covered with transparent non-inflammable plastic.

.7 Insulated neutral block. .8 Supplementary ground block. .9 Copper Bus. .3 Power and Distribution type panelboards shall be circuit-breaker type, as

scheduled on the drawings.


JAL NO. 10-265

.4 Panelboards shall be Cutler-Hammer Canada “Pow-R-Line 1” branch panelboard circuit breaker type, 120/208 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire mains, minimum interrupting rating of 10,000 amps. RMS asymmetrical at 120 volts.

.5 Panelboard in Technology Room shall be c/w built-in emergency push button,

key operated switch, pilot light and remote electrically held contactor (located above panel, in ceiling space where applicable). Key operated switch shall be 3 position “OFF”-“0”-“ON” with spring for position “O”-“ON”-“O”. Key shall turn panel on when it is in “ON” position and turn panel off when it is in “OFF” position. Also key shall be removable from lock in “OFF” and “0” position. After any power shut down (emergency or other), panel shall be reset only by turning the key operated switch to “ON” position.

.6 Alternate Manufacturers: .1 Schneider Canada .2 Siemens Electric Ltd. 2.7 SWITCHES .1 Provide fusible and non-fusible switches, NEMA Type `HD' with quick-make,

quick-break contacts, horsepower-rated where required, to match the motor protected. Provide holders to accept specified fuses. Switches to include mechanical cover interlocks and line side barriers.

.2 Where applicable and available, switches shall be CSA "Approved For High

Service Factor". .3 Provide safety disconnect switches adjacent to motors and other equipment

when required by regulations. 2.8 FUSES .1 Provide fuse holders in fusible equipment with a complete set of proper size

Form 1, HRC Nema J or L current limiting fuses. Fusible equipment so provided shall be adapted to reject CSA Standard C22.2 No. 59 fuses. Fuses shall be Federal Pioneer - "Econolim".

.2 Provide one complete set of spare fuses for each rating and type used, unless

otherwise scheduled.


JAL NO. 10-265

.3 Apply Thomas & Betts "Kopr/Shield" conductive anti-seize compound to all fuse ferrules and holders.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS .1 Approximate locations of electrical equipment, fixtures switches, outlets, and the

like, are given on the drawings. Refer to the architectural drawings and room elevations for application. In absence of definite detail exact location of outlets shall be determined on site as work progresses. Local switches for lighting shall generally be installed on the lock side of doors. Verify switch locations on the site.

.2 Device plates shall cover opening left for outlet box, and plates shall be attached

to boxes in an approved manner. Outlets and fixtures are to be located symmetrically, (i.e. centred in wall panels, ceiling panels or tiles, columns, between and above doors and the like).

.3 The right is reserved to alter the location of equipment and outlets a distance of

up to 3 metres without involving a change to the Contract amount, providing notice is given prior to installation.

3.2 MOUNTING HEIGHTS .1 Mounting heights of outlets, centre line of outlet to finished floor, except for

exposed masonry construction, shall generally be as follows (unless otherwise noted):

Lighting Switches - 1200 mm Receptacles - 450 mm above finished floor Television Outlets - 450 mm Voice/Data Outlets - 450 mm Manual Fire Alarm Stations - 1200 mm Automatic Fire Alarm Stations - ceiling Panelboards - 1980 mm to top of trim for standard panels. Clocks - 2135 mm or 305 mm below ceiling. 3.3 HOLES & DRILLING .1 Pneumatic hammers and percussion drills are prohibited.


JAL NO. 10-265

.2 Where not sleeved, make holes through concrete walls and floors by core-drill only. Obtain Architect's approval before drilling.

.3 Seal holes and sleeves through floors to serve as water dam.

.4 Provide sleeve for pipes passing through Roof. Sleeve shall be Thaler SJ-31 or Lexsuco Corporation preinsulated stack jack.

3.4 CUTTING & PATCHING .1 Lay out and install work in advance of other Sections for all new work. Bear all

costs resulting from failing to comply with this requirement. .2 Pay for cutting and patching and making good as required for work of this

Division by reason of faulty or late work. Employ appropriate trades already engaged on the site to perform such cutting, patching and making good existing walls, floor, ceiling, etc. Before commencing, obtain Architect's approval for extent and nature of cutting. Make good, disturbed surfaces to the Architect's approval.

3.5 EXCAVATION & BACKFILL .1 Provide necessary excavating and backfilling inside and outside building required

for work of this Division, performed as specified under another Division of the work, except as modified below.

.2 Keep excavations free from water, pump as necessary. .3 Excavation for underground services shall be to required depths and dimension

and shall be prepared as required, so that no portion of any conduit, bears directly against any rock or other hard surface.

.4 Remove and dispose of all surplus excavated material. .5 Backfill promptly after approval of work. Prevent damage to or displacement of

walls, piping, conduits, waterproofing and other work. .6 For direct buried conduit and cable in all soil conditions (refer to soils report)

excavate to 150 mm (6") below and a minimum of 200 mm (8") to either side of the cable run. Fill back with a bedding of sand.


JAL NO. 10-265

.7 Backfill trenches within building, with clean sharp sand in individual layers of maximum 150 mm (6") thickness, compacted to a density of 100% Standard Proctor. Hand compact the first layers up to a compacted level of minimum one foot. Hand or machine compact the balance up to grade, using approved equipment.

.8 Backfill trenches outside buildings with granular `A' gravel in layers not

exceeding 150 mm (6") thickness, compacted to 100% Standard Proctor density up to grade level; manual compaction up to 450 mm (18") and mechanical compaction, using approved equipment, for the balance.

.9 Make good work where damaged by excavation and filling work of this Division.

Repair any subsequent settlement of fill placed under this Division and pay all costs in replacement of other work damaged by such settlement and restoration.

3.6 HANGERS & INSERTS .1 Provide necessary hangers and inserts for work of this Division. .2 Fasten to cast-in place concrete by suitable drilled or cast-in inserts. .3 Fasten to structural steel using bolts or welded fasteners. .4 Do not use wood, chain, wire lashings, strap or grappler bar hangers except

where noted or detailed. .5 Support fixtures independently of ceiling suspension systems. Provide additional

supports as required, which shall be fastened to building structure steel members, joists, beams, etc., but not metal pan or roof decking. Material for additional supports and their installation shall comply with requirements of U.L.C. Refer to "List of Equipment and Materials" Vol. 2, and "Supplement" for application to rated assemblies.

.6 Support outlet and junction boxes independently of the conduits running to them

where required by electrical code and where deemed necessary by the Architect, use steel angle brackets or steel rods to support outlets and fixtures, to the building structure.

.7 Drilled fastenings to concrete shall be self-drilling concrete anchors, Phillips

'Red-Head' or approved equal. The maximum weight per fastening shall not exceed 25% of manufacturer's 'pull-out' load data.


JAL NO. 10-265

.8 Surface mounted or stem suspended fixtures fastened to non-removable ceilings, 2 hr. fire rated ceiling assemblies, or mounted between metal suspension of exposed T-grid ceilings, shall be provided with minimum of two points of attachment for each 300 mm x 1200 mm (1' x 4') luminaire, using metal `channel-bar' fastened to building structure. Attach luminaires to `channel-bar' by means of threaded steel rods. Channel-bar shall be adequately supported and of a construction to prevent deflection under load, as selected from manufacturer's published data, and to Architect's approval. `Channel-bar' shall be Unistrut, Burndy, Flexibar, Cantrough or Canadian Strut Products or approved equal. Refer to Drawing Number ED-1614.1 attached hereto for typical installation detail.

.9 Use support clips (e.g. Caddy Type IDS) for suspension of fixtures attached to

exposed T-grid ceilings. Clips shall be supported directly from building structure and not from suspended ceiling system. Refer to Drawing No. ED-1614.7 attached hereto for typical installation detail, for surface fixtures on 1 hr. rated ceiling assemblies.

.10 Provide recessed fluorescent fixtures with support frames, and plastering frames

where applicable. .11 Chain where permitted and specified for the installation of fluorescent lighting

fixtures shall be No. 4, 2 mm (.080") Tenso Pattern coil steel chain, plated with a strength of 82 kg (180 lbs.) as manufactured by Dominion Chain Co. Ltd. or approved equal. Where 'S' hooks are used with chain, they shall be No. 6 type with open strength of 82 kg (180 lbs.) minimum. Attachment of chain at both ends of support shall develop full strength of chain.

.12 Support outlet boxes, junction boxes, conduit and the like, mounted on exposed

steel deck roofing by means of self-tapping minimum #10 gauge screws, secured through bottom member of deck corrugation. Do not pierce top of steel deck.

3.7 PAINTING .1 Hangers, support framing and all equipment fabricated from ferrous metals which

are not protected with zinc or other suitable corrosion-resistant finish shall have at least one coat of a corrosion-resistant paint applied before shipment or immediately on arrival at the site.

.2 After installation, touch up all scratches, chips, other damage and defects in

paint, using zinc chromate primer or paint or special enamels as necessary to match the original.


JAL NO. 10-265

.3 Finish and colour of all equipment shall be co-ordinated to provide uniform appearance.

.4 Painting of conduits and supports and other exposed surface work will be done

under Painting Section except as noted. Install materials in time to be painted together with mounting surfaces.

.5 Do not paint over nameplates. .6 Refer to other Sections for special paint finishes of equipment. 3.8 NAMEPLATES & SCHEDULES .1 Identify electrical equipment supplied under this Division with 3 mm thick black

laminated plastic nameplate to indicate equipment controlled to provide instruction or warning. Fasten each plate with two chrome plated screws. Lettering shall be 6 mm high for small devices such as control stations and at least 13 mm high for all other equipment. Submit a list of proposed nameplates for approval before manufacture.

.2 Provide panelboards with typewritten schedules identifying outlets and

equipment controlled by each branch circuit including existing panels being changed. Protect schedules with non-flammable clear plastic.

.3 Identify junction boxes, pull boxes, cover plates, conduits and the like, provided

for future extension, indicating their function (e.g. power, fire alarm, communication).

.4 Verify room names and numbers prior to listing on nameplates and schedules. 3.9 BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING & FEEDER CABLES .1 Provide branch circuit wiring, conduits and feeders as required for Lighting,

Power and Auxiliary Systems. Separate conduit systems shall be provided for feeder, lighting and power systems and auxiliary communication systems.


JAL NO. 10-265

3.10 CONDUIT, RACEWAYS AND WIREWAYS .1 Wire and cable shall be installed in conduit as follows: Rigid galvanized steel conduit with threaded IPS fittings to be used: .1 Where noted and required by regulations. .2 Where subject to mechanical damage. .3 For all exposed conduit work. .2 Conduit embedded in concrete or buried below grade floors shall be CSA

approved rigid PVC type. .3 Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) may be used in place of rigid conduit in dry

locations subject to governing regulations, embedded in masonry walls, and concealed above suspended ceilings. Connectors shall be provided with factory-installed insulated throats.

.4 Use flexible metallic conduit for connections to chain suspended and recessed

fixture drops, motors and similar equipment to prevent transmission of vibration. A code-gauge green grounding conductor shall be provided for all such connections. Use "Sealtite" conduit with Hubbell-Kellum Sealtite conduit strain relief grips for all such connections at motors.

.5 Fasten every conduit and cable to structure by means of approved conduit

clamps or clips. Wire lashing is not acceptable. .6 Conceal conduits and wiring except where noted. Run exposed conduits parallel

to building lines and to other conduits. Provide every empty conduit with a pull rope (3 mm polypropylene rope) and identify to designate its function (Power, Telephone, Fire Alarm and the like).

.7 Where conduit is installed in concrete slabs, obtain general approval, prior to

commencing the work, on both maximum dimension and cross-overs which may be used therein.

.8 Install conduits in such a manner as to conserve head room and interfere as little

as possible with free use of space through which they pass. Obtain approval for routing of same. Keep conduits at least 150 mm clear of high temperature work.

.9 Conduit installed at the roof level of exposed structures, shall be run tight to roof

deck, above purlins and beams.


JAL NO. 10-265

.10 Conduit and cables for electrical work in demountable type and drywall type partitions shall enter from above, from a junction box concealed in the ceiling above and shall comprise a flexible conduit connection.

.12 All branch wiring shall be provided with a separate code gauge supplementary

grounding conductor run in each conduit or duct, terminating at ground block at panelboards.

.13 Run conduit exposed in mechanical equipment rooms, electrical rooms, fan

rooms, and the like, and installed after mechanical and other equipment is completed. Install fixtures, outlets, starters, etc., to clear and to suit application.

3.11 WIRE & CABLE .1 Wire and cable shall not be installed at temperatures below 20oC unless "minus

40" type is used. Wiring to heating equipment shall be rated 90oC minimum, the ampacity of which shall be limited to 75oC value. Wiring for exterior shall be type ‘U’.

.2 Conductors used for all auxiliary systems (e.g. Fire Alarm) shall be tagged and/or

colour-coded, and where applicable shall agree with manufacturer`s wiring diagrams.

.3 Minimum wire size for power wiring shall be No. 12 AWG gauge unless specified

otherwise. Minimum wire size for "Common" neutral conductors shall be No. 10 AWG. Control wiring shall be #14 AWG red insulation. Maximum voltage drop between furthest outlet of any circuit, when fully energized, and panel to which it is connected shall not exceed two percent except for electric heating circuits which shall not exceed one percent.

.4 Cables shall be terminated with moisture-proof connectors, clamped to sheet

metal enclosure by a single non-ferrous locknut and grounding bushing. .5 Sheaths of multi-conductor cables shall be grounded at both cable ends. .6 Sheaths of single conductor cables shall be grounded at supply end only.

Provide a Code Gauge Grounding Conductor with each feeder cable run.


JAL NO. 10-265

.7 Number of wires indicated for lighting and power, motor and motor control, alarm, signal, communications, and auxiliary systems is intended to show general scheme only. The required number and types of wires shall be installed in accordance with equipment manufacturer's diagrams and requirements, and with requirements of the installation, except that specification standards shall not be reduced.

.8 Solderless connectors with nylon-jacketted "Vibration-proof" screw-on wire

connectors ideal "Wing Nuts", rated 600 volts shall be used for joints in Branch Wiring.

.9 Use compression joints and terminals for all control wiring; and all conductors #4

AWG and larger. Mechanical connections are acceptable at panelboards and circuit breakers where these are part of factory-assembly.

.10 Wire or cables in feeders, sub-feeders and branch circuits shall be colour-coded

in accordance with Ontario Electrical Safety Code. Each end of feeder terminations (e.g. in Switchboard, Panelboards, switches, splitters and the like) Code Phase A - Red, Phase B - Black, Phase C - Blue, Neutral - White.

.11 Include in each conduit, tubing and raceway, a code gauge green supplementary

grounding conductor which shall be connected to suitable ground bus in equipment.

.12 Armoured or sheathed cables may be used only for vertical wiring within

demountable and dry wall type partitions and above drywall ceilings as fixture whip between junction box and fixture only; however it shall not be directly buried in or below concrete slabs.

.13 The use of exposed plastic-jacketted cables shall be subject to approval of local

inspection Authorities, but shall not be installed in ceiling spaces used as return air plenums for mechanical air-handling systems.

3.12 OUTLET, JUNCTION & PULL BOXES .1 Use suitable electrical boxes for terminations and junctions on conduit work.

Install pull boxes where necessary to permit installation of conductors. Support pull boxes, outlet boxes, panels and other cabinets independently of conduit.

.2 Provide each light switch, wall receptacle and other device with an outlet box of

suitable dimensions and a faceplate. Outlet boxes shall be adapted to their respective locations.


JAL NO. 10-265

.3 "Thruwall" and "Utility" type boxes shall not be used. .4 Electrical boxes and panels shall be CSA approved, code-gauge sheet metal,

galvanized or with suitable protective treatment. Secure covers with screws or bolts.

.5 Outlet boxes shall not be installed "Back-to-Back" in walls; separate by a

minimum of 150 mm. .6 Use "Masonry Type" outlet boxes for flush installation in masonry walls as

detailed on standard Detail Drawings attached hereto.) Standard sectional boxes, 1004, 1104 and the like, shall not be used).

.7 Install surface mounted devices, in cast conduit fittings, with threaded hubs and

suitable stainless steel faceplates. .8 Main pull and junction boxes (excluding obvious outlet boxes) shall be clearly

identified by painting the outside of the cover in accordance with the following schedule:

- Lighting Yellow - Power Blue - Fire Alarm Red - Telephone Cream - Control Brown - Intercom & Sound Green .9 In addition, each box shall be identified with a system and service designator of

logic reference to the service. 3.13 ACCESS DOORS & ACCESS MARKERS .1 Supply access doors for installation under the work of other Division where

electrical equipment requiring maintenance or adjustment or inspection is located above ceilings, within walls or behind furring; except ceilings of lay-in removable panel type.

.2 Access doors shall be 12 gauge hinged metal Stelpro Ltd. or equal #722 flush

type, minimum size 300 mm x 300 mm (12" x 12") "Reach-in" 300 mm x 600 mm (12" x 24") "Crawl-in", with prime coat finish, concealed hinges, screwdriver lock and plaster key. Access doors in finished masonry or drywall construction shall be #722 less plaster key. Access doors shall be #726 in acoustic tile ceilings; #704 in drywall ceiling and #726E in plaster ceilings.


JAL NO. 10-265

.3 Access doors in fire rated ceiling assemblies, all fire rated walls, duct shaft or in corridor walls shall be UL, ULC or WHI listed 1-1/2 hour fire rated access doors equal to LeHage #L1010 or Acudor #150B with screwdriver lock.

.4 Where lay-in removable panel ceilings requiring hold-down clips are used,

access doors are not required but panels shall be secured with accessible hold-down clips and marked with Buildemup #6 RH brass paper fasteners inserted through acoustic panel and bent over. Paint heads with blue enamel before installation.

.5 Obtain approval for sizes and locations. 3.14 PANELBOARDS .1 Provide handle locking devices on circuit breakers feeding Plumbing, Heating,

Ventilating equipment and controls and all auxiliary systems, time switches, and other devices as noted. Paint handles white, to permanently identify location and function. Provide 30 spare handle locking devices for future use.

.2 Circuit numbers on drawings do not necessarily correspond to the numbers on

the lighting panels. Circuits sharing a common neutral shall not be connected to the same main. Panel circuit breakers which are used directly for the switching of lighting fixtures shall be grouped in consecutive numbers commencing at breaker number one.

.3 Use "Panduit" lok-strap cable ties for panelboard branch wiring. .4 Provide empty conduits from flush panelboards, and others as noted, terminating

in accessible ceiling spaces, sized to accommodate spare and space breaker provisions. One 25 mm (1") conduit for each three spare breakers or spaces.

3.15 ELECTRIC WORK FOR OTHER DIVISIONS .1 Examine Architectural and Mechanical (Plumbing, Heating, Ventilating and Air

Conditioning) plans and specifications to determine extent of electrical work in connection with these Divisions which is to be done under the work of the Electrical Division.

.2 In general, all motor starters and associated controls for mechanical equipment

will be supplied under that Division of the work which supplies the equipment, for installation and connection under the work of the Electrical Division 16.


JAL NO. 10-265

.3 Co-ordinate the exact location and verify characteristics of electrical provisions for the work of the Mechanical Division.

.4 The locations of starters, motors and associated equipment shall be coordinated

with Division 15. Co-ordinate with the work of the Division 15 Mechanical Trade Sections to ensure proper location of equipment. The exact locations of conduit terminations at Mechanical units shall be determined from equipment manufactures' approved shop drawings. Conduits must be installed to enter only in the locations designated by equipment manufactures.

.5 Provide safety switches required for disconnection of remotely controlled motors,

and where required at motors by O.E.S.C. regulations whether shown on the drawings or not. Where required at fan motors, they shall be concealed in the fan housing if possible.

.6 Provide for the 120 volt mechanical equipment where noted, all necessary wiring

and connections including wiring and installation of starters, thermostats, aquastats, speed controllers and time switches controlling equipment.

.7 Where motor starters, switches and the like, are grouped together, a suitable 19

mm (3/4") thick plywood panelboard shall be provided to which all such equipment shall be secured. Provide all necessary angle iron supports for support of panelboard and paint entire assembly with two coats of fire retardant type enamel acceptable to Building Inspection Department.

.8 Provide weatherproof unfused safety disconnect switches, fastened to exterior of

roof mounted units, to approval. .9 Connect high temperature thermostats "Firestats" provided in ductwork by

Division 15, to exhaust fan systems, to provide fan shutdown on activation. .10 Refer to Equipment Schedule for further Detail. 3.16 GROUNDING - GENERAL .1 Ground all electrical systems in accordance with provisions of the Ontario

Electrical Code. .2 Provide a grounding electrode in accordance with Section 10 of the Canadian

Electrical Code.


JAL NO. 10-265

.3 Install grounding conductors to permit the shortest and most direct path from equipment to ground. Install grounding conductors in rigid galvanized conduit with both conductor and conduit bonded at both ends. Provide bonding jumpers with approved clamps to maintain ground continuity of metallic raceway systems at all expansion joints.

.4 Ground connections to grounding conductors shall be accessible for inspection

and made with approved solderless connectors bolted to the equipment of structure to be grounded. Clean contact surface prior to making connections to ensure proper metal to metal contact. Connections shall be of the type that grounds both conduit and conductor, and cap screws, bolts, nuts and washers shall be silicon bronze.

3.17 FIREPROOFING & SEALING .1 Make watertight seal at sleeves and other openings through floors above grade.

Sleeves to extend minimum 25 mm (1 inch) above finished floors. .2 Provide Fireproofing protection of openings through floors and fire rated walls. .3 Caulk spaces between conduit, cables, raceways, cabletrays with "Cerafibre"

2300 F packing to Building Department approval. Pack and seal both sides of openings with Electrovert "Flameseal" putty, minimum thickness 25 mm (1"). Install in accordance with Electrovert Instruction Bulletin #3601.

3.18 INSPECTION & TESTING .1 Systems, equipment and all major items of material shall be tested to the

satisfaction of the Engineer, and as required to establish compliance with plans and specifications, and with the requirements for the Supply and Inspection Authorities.

.2 Faulty and defective equipment shall be replaced with new materials. Conductors

which are found to be shorted or grounded, or to have less than proper insulation resistance, shall be replaced with new conductors.

.3 Tests shall include but are not limited to the following: .1 Test of power cables shall include megger tests to establish proper

insulation resistance, and phase-to-ground resistance of cables.


JAL NO. 10-265

.2 Visual examination of switchgear to determine adherence to allowable manufacturing tolerance and compliance with manufacturer's recommended installation requirements.

.3 Proper functioning of all systems. .4 Polarity tests - to establish proper polarity connections to all sockets and

receptacles. .5 Test of all alarm devices and contacts. .4 Testing Company .1 Retain the services of an independent testing company, to Engineer's

approval, to perform the above tests. .2 The testing company shall submit test results directly to the Engineer. 3.19 CERTIFICATION OF TESTS .1 When work is complete, submit three copies of test results and a signed

statement listing all tests that have been performed as required by specifications and manufacturer's instructions.

END OF SECTION

TDSB – Kane Public School Section 16500 JAIN & ASSOCIATES Limited Contents Page Project No. KE1016 February 28, 2011 Lighting Systems

JAL NO. 10-265

CONTENTS SUBSECTION TITLE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Related Instructions 1.2 Work Included 1.3 Lamp & Ballast Conditioning 1.4 Shop Drawings PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Reference Numbers 2.2 Ballasts 2.3 Lenses 2.4 Lamps & Lamp Sockets 2.5 Fixture Reflectors 2.6 Fixture Schedule 2.7 Emergency Lighting System PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Installation 3.2 Recessed Fixtures 3.3 Site Aiming 3.4 Completion

TDSB – Kane Public School Section 16500 JAIN & ASSOCIATES Limited Page 1 Project No. KE1016 February 28, 2011 Lighting Systems

JAL NO. 10-265

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED INSTRUCTIONS .1 Refer to Section 16010 - Electrical General Requirements. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED .1 Provide electrical lighting fixtures and systems scheduled, complete with lamps,

ballasts and necessary accessories required for their installation and performance.

1.3 LAMP AND BALLAST CONDITIONING .1 Upon first energizing all fluorescent and H.I.D. fixtures shall remain energized for

a stabilizing period of 100 hours. 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Conform with requirements of Section 16010. .2 Submit for review a bound brochure containing illustrations of each fixture.

Illustrations to be complete showing dimensions light distribution and mounting requirements. Illustrations to be noted to indicate special features and finishes. A copy is to be retained by the Contractor on the site, to ensure co-ordination of installation requirements.

.3 Fluorescent fixture shop drawings must indicate Ballast Manufacturer and Model

No. for each fixture. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REFERENCE NUMBERS .1 Catalogue reference numbers given for individual fixture types are intended as a

guide when read with the description and the fixture as finally applied. Verify catalogue references with description and coordinated with installation conditions, with particular regard to ceiling construction details, type and finish before ordering fixtures.


JAL NO. 10-265

2.2 BALLASTS .1 Fluorescent lamp ballasts shall be energy efficient electronic rapidstart for

parallel-wired T8 lamps, and shall comply with ASA Spec. C82-1 and meet current CSA Standard C22.2 No.74. Rapid start ballasts shall have an average noise level not exceeding 30 dB when tested in a 24 dB weighted network. Light output to be minimum of 95% of rated lamp lumens. Power factor to be 95% minimum. Ballasts shall operate satisfactorily with fluctuations of plus or minus 10% of nominal system voltage. Ballast protection shall afford both coil and capacitor protection. The use of “DISCRETE ELECTRONIC” instant start ballasts will not be accepted. If used, they will be required to be replaced with rapid start ballasts at no charge to Owners. Ballasts for compact fluorescent fixtures shall be H.P.F. (high power factor) type, electronic.

.2 H.I.D. lamp ballasts (Metal Halide, etc.) shall comply with CSA Spec. C22-2 No.

66 including amendments for indoor operation where applicable, and shall be compatible with fixture and lamp assembly which they serve.

.3 Acceptable Manufacturers: Osram Sylvania, Philips, Canadian General Electric 2.3 LENSES .1 Plastic lenses in lighting fixtures shall be acrylic with minimum thickness of 3 mm

(.125 inches) and, providing flame spread and smoke density ratings, complying with applicable Federal and Provincial Codes; Ontario Fire Marshal's Fire Safety Design Standard; and the Ontario Building Code. Paragraph 3.1.13.1 (1).

.2 Removable components of fixtures (louvres, lenses, wire guards, and the like) to

be limited to maximum 1220 mm (48") in length. 2.4 LAMPS & LAMP SOCKETS .1 Provide lighting fixtures with a full complement of lamps. .2 Fluorescent lamp sockets shall be specific for T8 lamps, positioning lamp within

13 mm of reflector. .3 Fluorescent lamps shall be 32W T8-800 series with a CRI of 80 to 85 at a colour

temperature of 4100 K with low mercury content.


JAL NO. 10-265

.4 H.I.D. lamps shall be complete with arc tube shroud by the manufacturer of the fixture in which they are to be installed, and compatible with ballasts installed.

.5 Acceptable lamp manufacturers are: Compact Fluorescent: Fluorescent: Canadian General Electric – SPX Canadian General Electric - SPX Osram-Sylvania – Dulex Osram-Sylvania – Octron 800 Series Philips – PL Series Philips – L80 Metal Halide: Osram Sylvania – Pro-tech Canadian General Electric - Protected Philips - Protected 2.5 FIXTURE REFLECTORS .1 Reflectors integral within lighting fixtures shall provide 95% specular reflectivity

and 96% total reflectivity. 2.6 FIXTURE SCHEDULE .1 Lighting fixtures shall be as scheduled on drawings. 2.7 EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEM .1 Provide Emergency Lighting Units and Wiring Systems as noted. .2 Emergency battery units shall be designed to provide emergency lighting for at

least 30 minutes automatically upon failure of a normal power source. Upon restoration of the normal power, the battery unit shall be restored automatically to a charging condition. The charging cycle shall raise the battery to an equalized voltage and then electronically sense the full state of charge in the battery and return the battery to a lower float voltage.


JAL NO. 10-265

The charger shall be regulated to a plus or minus 20 mV output for plus or minus 10% input voltage fluctuation. In order to extend battery life at ambience other than room temperature, the charger shall reduce the battery voltage by 4 mV per cell per oC rise in temperature and shall raise the battery voltage by 4 mV per cell per oC reduction in temperature from a 20oC reference temperature. The unit shall be equipped with a phase loss and brown out protection circuit which shall turn on emergency lights when input voltage to the unit falls below 90 volts or 75% full voltage. The unit shall include a test switch, charge and on pilot lights which shall be light omitting diodes. The unit shall include a low voltage disconnect circuit.

.3 Battery units shall be of the types noted, complete maintenance-free, sealed pure

lead with design life of 10 years, 720 watt, 24 volt. The unit shall be performance certified and carry C.S.A. C22.2 No. 141 approval for the wattage noted.

.4 Wall mounted unit shall be provided with recessed back box and mounting

template to allow pre-installation feeds of A.C. input and D.C. output. Both A.C. input and D.C. output shall enter unit through back face without any visible cable or conduit feeds. Provide wall mounted shelf for each battery unit.

.5 Provide a 120 volt input circuit for each unit wired to unswitched circuit indicated.

Wire to exit signs from battery units. Size conductors to all remote lamps to provide maximum voltage drop of five percent.

.6 Emergency Equipment Types: Type 1 - shall comprise an Emergi-Lite EF Series ceiling mounted

adjustable quartz-halogen remote lighting unit, 20 watt, 24 volt. Type 2 - similar to Type 1 except double-head. .7 Exit Signs .1 Shall be Emergi-Lite LPEX300 Series, with red EXIT letters, directional

arrows (if and as shown), extruded aluminum housing, Universal AC/DV voltage input having light emitting diode panel with minimum life of 25 years, with a power consumption of less than 2 watts both single and double face.

.2 Include for the supply, installation and wiring (to nearest emergency

lighting circuit) of 2 additional exit signs at locations later directed on site.


JAL NO. 10-265

.8 Emergency Lighting Verification

1. After completion of installation of the emergency lighting, a verification shall be performed by the manufacturer and will be preformed at night to ensure accurate readings. The verification shall include measuring and recording the lux (or footcandle) level at all areas of egress. An average of 10 lux (1 footcandle) must be maintained to meet National Building Code requirements. The discharge time of the battery units must be verified and the manufacturer must take voltage reading at the last remote of every line to ensure no more than 5% voltage drop. This information must be written up on a report and signed by a professional engineer representing the manufacturer. Submit two (2) copies of report to Consultant.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Do not install or energize lamps until directed by Architect which generally shall

be just prior to occupancy of the building by the Owner. Read ‘Temporary and Trial Usage’.

3.2 RECESSED FIXTURES .1 Provide plaster and/or framing rings for recessed fixtures (except for ‘Lay-in

Tee-Bar’ types) the installation of which shall be the responsibility of this Section. 3.3 SITE AIMING .1 Position and aim adjustable lighting equipment as directed on the site. Position

outdoor units after daylight hours as directed. Provide labour and materials necessary to accomplish this.

3.4 COMPLETION .1 Fixtures shall be clean at the time of final acceptance. END OF SECTION

TDSB – Kane Public School Section 16600 JAIN & ASSOCIATES Limited Contents Page Project No. KE1016 February 28, 2011 Data Cabling System

JAL NO. 10-265

CONTENTS SUBSECTION TITLE PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Scope of Work 1.2 Definitions 1.3 Description of Equipment 1.4 Work Schedule 1.5 Standards and Codes 1.6 Shop Drawings

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Cabling

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Cable Audit 3.2 Testing

TDSB – Kane Public School Section 16600 JAIN & ASSOCIATES Limited Page 1 Project No. KE1016 February 28, 2011 Data Cabling System

JAL NO. 10-265

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK .1 The Contractor shall provide a Category 6 NORDX/CDT type data cabling

system as specified below. .2 The following work shall be performed by the Customer:

a. Supply and installation of data jacks b. Final termination of cabling at jacks, access points and LAN Room c. Supply and installation of PoE switches d. Supply and installation of wireless access points

.3 The need to amend or modify the installation specification may arise. All

changes, modifications or amendments must be approved by the Customer prior to commencement of the installation.

1.2 DEFINITIONS .1 The “Customer” is defined as the Toronto District School Board. .2 The “Contractor” is defined as the provider of the scope of work defined in this

specification. 1.3 DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT .1 The system shall comprise of horizontal UTP (Unshielded Twisted Pair) wiring

from LAN Room (Storage 106) to each data outlet. .2 The cabling system must meet or exceed Category 6 Channel performance as

defined in TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 (Addendum 1: Transmission Performance Specifications for 4-Pair 100 Ohm Category 6 Cabling) and provide a Single Manufacturer 25 year system performance certification and lifetime application warranty.

1.4 WORK SCHEDULE .1 Contractor shall coordinate schedule with General Contractor and ensure timely

installation.


JAL NO. 10-265

1.5 STANDARDS AND CODES .1 Except where specifically modified within this specification, the installation shall,

as minimum, comply with the latest issues of the following standards: CAN/CSA-T527, “Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding

Requirements for Telecommunications” CAN/CSA-T528-93, “Design Guideline for Administration

Telecommunications Infrastructure in Commercial Buildings” CAN/CSA-T529-M95, “Design Guidelines for Telecommunications Wiring

Systems in Commercial Buildings” CAN/CSA-T530-M90, “Building Facilities, Design Guidelines for

Telecommunications” TIA/EIA-568-B.1 Telecommunications Standards for Commercial

Buildings TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 (Addendum 1: Transmission Performance Specifications

for 4-Pair 100 Ohm Category 6 Cabling) .2 Installation shall, as minimum, comply with the latest issue of the Ontario Building

Code, Canadian Electrical Code, Canadian Labour Code, National Fire Code and all authorities having jurisdiction. In the case of conflict or discrepancy the more stringent code shall apply.

1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Customer and shall include: .1 Specification sheets on all items, including cable types and manufacturer’s

cabling system specification numbers. .2 Verification that the installers are trained and authorized the manufacturer –

Nordx/CDT. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 CABLING .1 The data cable shall be FT6 rated, four pair, 24 AWG solid copper, unshielded

twisted cable meeting TIA/EIA-568-B Category 6. The maximum cable length for each run shall be limited to 90 meters.


JAL NO. 10-265

.2 Delay Skew must be 20 NS or less per 100 meters at any frequency between 1 and 100 MHz.

.3 The Data Cable shall be Category 6 CMP, as per the prevailing municipal codes

and fire regulations. .4 Cable jacket colour standard will be blue for data. .5 All cables shall be permanently identified with velcro tie wraps or permanent

labels. The label shall be located within .05 meters of both ends of the installed cable within the Telecommunication Closet. The labeling shall conform to the requirements as defined in CAN/CSA-T528-93 Section 6 (Wiring System Administration).

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 CABLE AUDIT .1 A random visual inspection, by the Customer, prior to the commencement of

Installer Channel Performance and Functional testing will be required. The installation will be validated for compliance with the industry standards with particular attention given to the following criteria: Cable jacket removal and connector termination Routing and pathway supports Cable bend radius and cable tie slack Neatness, clamping, and harnessing of cabling and wiring. Wire and cable identification and labelling. Nameplates, identification, plates, and markings.

3.2 TESTING .1 The Permanent Link test as per TIA/EIA 568-B will be required for the purpose of

verifying the performance of permanently installed cabling. All horizontal Channel testing shall be performed end to end for each port, (Dual Port).

No Conditional Passing Verification for: Wire Map for T568A NEXT for both ends of the Link Attenuation Link Length


JAL NO. 10-265

The Contractor shall supply the Customer with passing test results for approval and system acceptance. An additional copy of the test results is to be included in the operational manuals.

END OF SECTION

TDSB – Kane Public School Section 16700 JAIN & ASSOCIATES Limited Contents Page Project No. KE1016 February 28, 2011 Communication Systems

JAL NO. 10-265

CONTENTS SUBSECTION TITLE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 General 1.2 Fire Alarm System 1.3 Public Address System 1.4 Empty Conduits

TDSB – Kane Public School Section 16700 JAIN & ASSOCIATES Limited Page 1 Project No. KE1016 February 28, 2011 Communication Systems

JAL NO. 10-265

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL .1 Conform to Section 16010 - Electrical - General Requirements. .2 Conform with applicable Section 16050 requirements governing installation,

electrical connections, raceways, conductors and the like. 1.2 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM .1 General

.1 The Building consists of an existing Edwards EST-2 Fire Alarm System. Relocate or provide new addressable devices as shown on drawings and expand existing Fire Alarm System as required. Reverify fire alarm system throughout the entire scope of work area and any components of existing system required to meet CAN4-S537-M86 requirements.

.2 All components shall be CSA and ULC listed and labeled, acceptable to

the Ontario Fire Marshal and the local Fire Department and suitable for operation on service characteristics noted. System equipment and operation and installation shall comply with the National and Provincial Building Code; Canadian Underwriters Association Standards CUA-70 and CUA-72A, Canadian Electrical Code, and ULC Standard CAN4-S524-M91 and latest amendments.

.2 System Components

.1 Fire Alarm Audible Devices New fire alarm bells and bell/strobe combinations shall match existing.

Connect adjacent signals on different and alternating circuits. Make any modifications to existing wiring as required.

.2 Manual Alarm Stations Manual stations shall be semi-flush mounting, pull-lever open circuit type

with a break-glass feature. A locked test feature shall be provided to permit transmission of an alarm without breaking the glass. For surface mounted applications surface cast back boxes shall be provided. Provide guards for stations in rooms noted. All pull station shall be c/w clear lexan polycarbonate shield and local built-in horn.


JAL NO. 10-265

.3 Automatic Detectors Automatic detector stations generally shall be combination, fixed

temperature and rate-of-rise for 57 deg. C. (135 deg. F.) applications. All detectors shall be ceiling mounted on flush octagonal outlet boxes complete with adapter plates to conceal outlet box. Provide guards for detectors in rooms as noted.

.4 Photo Electric Smoke Detectors Shall operate on the photoelectric (light-scattering) principle, a

gallium-arsenide diode as an infrared light source, silicon as a light receiver, a light trap and shield against outside light. Protect against interference by using special geometry of optics and light cone, pulsating light source and CMOS evaluating electronics.

Equip detectors with a mechanism or special tool so that the unit or part

of the unit cannot be removed by unauthorized personnel. .3 Fire Alarm Remote Annunciators

.1 Modify existing remote annunciator to suit. .2 Replace existing fire alarm graphic with new colour graphic reflecting

modifications. .4 Installation

.1 ULC and CSA standards and Electrical Safety Code, shall establish installation requirements.

.2 Conductors entering the control panel shall be identified and terminated

on individual terminals. .3 Wiring for audible and visual signal circuits shall be No. 14 AWG

minimum. Voltage drop to any signal shall not exceed 10 percent. Wiring for detection circuits shall be No. 16 AWG minimum. Wire resistance shall not exceed 50 Ohms. Conductors shall be connected in accordance with manufacturer's wiring diagram and run in conduit throughout.


JAL NO. 10-265

.4 Wiring must be cut at each automatic and manual station and device, and connected to the four terminals provided on the unit. (These connections ensure supervision of the circuit. Looping of the wires under terminal screw is not permissible). All wiring shall be continuous between control panel, detectors, stations and signals. Splices where permitted by the Engineer shall comprise soldered joints.

.5 Install resistor for signal circuit in a suitable box adjacent to the last signal

of the signal circuit; if diodes are used, install in the outlet box of the last signal of the signal circuit and indicate on signal. End-of-line resistors for station circuits shall be mounted in flush box, maximum of 6 feet above floor beyond last device on circuit.

.6 Mount detectors on ceiling as per ULC standard CAN4-S524-M91 unless

otherwise specified herein, at the highest point where variations in ceiling height exist. Do not mount detectors on sides, undersides, or less than 12" (300 mm) from beams, joists, open web steel joists or any structure projecting below actual ceiling height.

.7 Should interference from obstruction, lamp positions or heat radiating

surfaces be encountered in locating any detector where shown, locate the detector as near as possible to the indicated position, clear of obstacles, to the satisfaction of the Architect.

.8 Identify signal circuit, box circuit, auxiliary circuit, wiring at fire alarm

control panel, annunciator, terminal boxes or elsewhere on completion of work.

.9 Wiring for sprinkler system devices, flow switches and monitor switches

as required will be provided by this Division. .5 Tests

.1 Retain the services of the equipment supplier to provide Special Commissioning “Verification, Inspection and Certification” and to supervise the connection, initial test and adjustment of the system throughout new Addition and existing building. The verification shall be done to suit code and Local Authorities requirements.


JAL NO. 10-265

.2 Verification procedure shall comply with ULC standard CAN4-S537-M86 and shall include providing proper functioning and connection of each device and function of the systems. Furnish upon completion of the work, a letter from the manufacturer as evidence that such tests and instruction have been performed to their satisfaction, and additionally to indicate that:

a. System complies with manufacturer's installation

recommendations, ULC requirements, and specified operation. b. Installation is acceptable for Warranty. c. Completed system complies with regulations concerning

supervision of functions, signals, stations, and automatic detectors.

d. Test completed systems for Building Approval Authority. Advise Local Fire Department when “Verification” is to be performed.

.6 Shop Drawings & Documents

.1 Prepare maintenance schedule. Contractor to correct shop drawings to provide “as-installed” record.

.2 Shop Drawings for the Fire Alarm System shall include copies of

documents to substantiate ULC listing for all items, identified by catalogue.

.3 Provide copies of Inspection and Verification Certificates to Local Fire Department, Fire Prevention Division.

.7 Inspection Certification

.1 Retain services of the Supplier to perform tests and provide the following

documents:

a. A copy of the inspection Technician's report showing location of each device, and certifying the test results of each device.

b. A Certificate of Verification confirming that the inspection has been completed and showing the conditions upon which such inspection and certification have been rendered.

c. Proof of liability insurance for the inspection. d. Audibility level plots in the addition areas.


JAL NO. 10-265

1.3 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM .1 General

.1 The Building consists of an existing Bogen MCP 35A Public Address System. Provide new speakers, call switches, etc. as shown on drawings and expand existing Public Address System as required. Bogen Authorized Distributor is Baldwin Sound. Telephone: 416 481 7291

.2 System Components

.1 Wall-mounted Classroom Speakers Enforcer Model E86CWT5 or equivalent by McBride

.2 Call Switch Bogen CA11

.3 Installation

.1 Wiring shall be done in accordance with Manufacturer’s Recommendation. Provo #992252. All terminal connections to be on barrier strips.

1.4 EMPTY CONDUITS

.1 Provide a complete interconnecting system of conduits, pull boxes and other raceways as noted further herein and as shown on drawings for the enclosure of communication equipment wiring and as hereinafter specified:

1. Voice/Data system 2. Public Address System

3. Security & CCTV Systems .2 Outlets where shown on drawings shall consist of a single or multi gang deep

outlet box flush mounted in wall. Provide blanking plate for each outlet. .3 Provide a homerun conduit from each data outlet or wireless access point shown

on drawing to existing LAN Room.


JAL NO. 10-265

.4 Conduits

.1 Conduits shall be 19 mm trade size minimum. .2 Conduit shall have not more than 90 degree or equivalent bends and 30

metres between outlets and ceiling space and bending radius shall not be less than 10 times the conduit diameter.

END OF SECTION

TDSB – Kane Public School Section 16950 JAIN & ASSOCIATES Limited Contents Page Project No. KE1016 February 28, 2011 Occupancy & Daylighting Sensors

JAL NO. 10-265

CONTENTS SUBSECTION TITLE PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included 1.2 Equipment Qualification 1.3 System Description 1.4 Submittals 1.5 System Operation

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers 2.2 Products 2.3 Circuit Control Hardware - CU

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation 3.2 Factory Commissioning

TDSB – Kane Public School Section 16950 JAIN & ASSOCIATES Limited Page 1 Project No. KE1016 February 28, 2011 Occupancy & Daylighting Sensors

JAL NO. 10-265

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED

.1 Contractor's work to include all labor, materials, tools, appliances, control hardware, sensor, wire, junction boxes and equipment necessary for and incidental to the delivery, installation and furnishing of a completely operational occupancy sensor lighting control system, as described herein.

.2 Contractor/Supplier shall examine all general specification provisions and

drawings for related electrical work required as work under Division 16. .3 Contractor shall coordinate all work described in this section with all other

applicable plans and specifications, including but not limited to wiring, conduit, fixtures, HVAC systems and building management systems.

1.2 EQUIPMENT QUALIFICATION

.1 Products supplied shall be from a single manufacturer that has been continuously involved in the manufacturing of occupancy sensors for a minimum of five (5) years. Mixing of manufacturers shall not be allowed.

.2 All components shall be U.L. listed, offer a five (5) year warranty and meet all

state and local applicable code requirements. .3 Products shall be manufactured by an ISO 9002 certified manufacturing facility

and shall have a defect rate of less than 1/3 of 1%. .4 Wall switch products must be capable of withstanding the effects of inrush

current. Submittals shall clearly indicate the method used. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

.1 The objective of this section is to ensure the proper installation of the sensor based lighting control system so that lighting is turned off automatically after reasonable time delay when a room or area is vacated by the last person to occupy said room or area.

.2 The sensor based lighting control shall accommodate all conditions of space

utilization and all irregular work hours and habits.


JAL NO. 10-265

.3 Contractor shall warrant all equipment furnished in accordance to this specification to be undamaged, free of defects in materials and workmanship, and in conformance with the specifications. The suppliers obligation shall include repair or replacement, and testing without charge to the owner, all or any parts of equipment which are found to be damaged, defective or non-conforming and returned to the supplier. The warranty shall commence upon the owner's acceptance of the project. Warranty on labor shall be for a minimum period of one (1) year.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

.1 Manufacturer shall substantiate conformance to this specification by supplying the necessary documents, performance data and wiring diagrams. Any deviations to this specification must be clearly stated by letter and submitted.

.2 Submit a lighting plan clearly marked by manufacturer showing proper product,

location and orientation of each sensor. This plan shall reviewed by Consultant prior to manufacturing.

.3 Submit any interconnection diagrams per major subsystem showing proper

wiring. .4 Submit standard catalog literature which includes performance specifications

indicating compliance to the specification. .5 Catalog sheets must clearly state any load restrictions when used with electronic

ballasts. 1.5 SYSTEM OPERATION .1 It shall be the manufacturer's responsibility to verify all proper adjustments and

train owner's personnel to ensure owner's satisfaction with the system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS .1 The Watt Stopper .2 Hubbell .3 Leviton


JAL NO. 10-265

2.2 PRODUCTS .1 All products shall be Watt Stopper product numbers:

1. OS1: DT 200 Series Dual Technology Ceiling Sensor 2. DLS: LS 102 Daylighting Controller 3. Power and Slave Packs: BZ-150 (120V) 4. InteliSwitch: TS-200

.2 Passive infrared sensors shall utilize Pulse Count Processing and Digital

Signature Analysis to respond only to those signals caused by human motion. .3 Passive infrared sensors shall utilize mixed signal ASIC which provides high

immunity to false triggering from RFI (hand-held radios) and EMI (electrical noise on the line), superior performance, and greater reliability.

.4 Passive infrared sensors shall have a multiple segmented Lodif Fresnel lens, in a

multiple-tier configuration, with grooves-in to eliminate dust and residue build-up. .5 Ultrasonic sensors shall utilize Advanced Signal Processing to adjust the

detection threshold dynamically to compensate for constantly changing levels of activity and air flow throughout controlled space.

.6 Ultrasonic operating frequency shall be crystal controlled at 25 kHz within ±

0.005% tolerance, 32 kHz within ± 0.002% tolerance, or 40 kHz ± 0.002% tolerance to assure reliable performance and eliminate sensor cross-talk. Sensors using multiple frequencies are not acceptable.

.7 All sensors shall be capable of operating normally with electronic ballasts, PL

lamp systems and rated motor loads. .8 Coverage of sensors shall remain constant after sensitivity control has been set.

No automatic reduction shall occur in coverage due to the cycling of air conditioner or heating fans.

.9 All sensors shall have readily accessible, user adjustable settings for time delay

and sensitivity. Settings shall be located on the sensor (not the control unit) and shall be recessed to limit tampering.

.10 In the event of failure, a bypass manual override shall be provided on each

sensor. When bypass is utilized, lighting shall remain on constantly or control shall divert to a wall switch until sensor is replaced. This control shall be recessed to prevent tampering.

.11 All sensors shall provide an LED as a visual means of indication at all times to

verify that motion is being detected during both testing and normal operation. .12 All sensors shall have UL rated, 94V-0 plastic enclosures.


JAL NO. 10-265

2.3 CIRCUIT CONTROL HARDWARE - CU

.1 Control Units - For ease of mounting, installation and future service, control unit(s) shall be able to externally mount through a 1/2" knock-out on a standard electrical enclosure and be an integrated, self-contained unit consisting internally of an isolated load switching control relay and a transformer to provide low-voltage power. Control unit shall provide power to a minimum of two (2) sensors.

.2 Relay Contacts shall have ratings of: 13A - 120 VAC Tungsten 20A - 120 VAC Ballast .3 Control wiring between sensors and controls units shall be Class II , 18-24 AWG,

stranded U.L. Classified, PVC insulated or TEFLON jacketed cable suitable for use in plenums, where applicable.

.4 Minimum acceptable wire gauge from the circuit control hardware relays shall be

#14 AWG. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 It shall be the contractor's responsibility to locate and aim sensory in the correct location required for complete and proper volumetric coverage within the range of coverage(s) of controlled areas per the manufacturer's recommendations. Rooms shall have ninety (90) to one hundred (100) percent coverage to completely cover the controlled area to accommodate all occupancy habits of single or multiple occupants at any location within the room(s). The locations and quantities of sensors shown on the drawings are diagrammatic and indicate only the rooms which are to be provided with sensors. The contractor shall provide additional sensors if required to properly and completely cover the respective room.

.2 It is the contractors responsibility to arrange a pre-installation meeting with the

manufacturer's factory authorized representative, at the owner's facility, to verify placement of sensors and installation criteria.

.3 Proper judgment must be exercised in executing the installation so as to ensure the

best possible installation in the available space and to overcome local difficulties due to space limitations or interference of structural components. The contractor shall also provide, at the owner's facility, the training necessary to familiarize the owner's personnel with the operation, use, adjustment, and problem solving diagnosis of the occupancy sensing devices and systems.


JAL NO. 10-265

3.2 FACTORY COMMISSIONING .1 Manufacturer shall provide a factory authorized technician to confirm proper

installation and operation of all lighting control system components. The startup requirement is intended to verify:

1. That all occupancy and daylighting sensors are located, installed, and

adjusted as intended by the factory and the contract documents.

2. The occupancy sensors and daylighting sensors are operating within the manufacturers specifications.

3. The sensors and relay panels interact as a complete and operational system to meet the design intent.

4. Manufacturer to provide a written statement verifying that the system meets the above requirements.

.2 Manufacturer shall provide factory authorized technician to train owner personnel in the operation, programming and maintenance of the lighting control system including all occupancy sensors and daylighting controls.

.3 Manufacturer shall provide system programming including:

1. Wiring documentation.

2. Switch operation.

3. Telephone overrides.

4. Operating schedules.

.4 The electrical contractor shall provide both the manufacturer and the electrical

engineer with ten working days written notice of the scheduled commissioning date. Upon completion of the system fine-tuning the factory authorized technician shall provide the proper training to the owner's personnel in the adjustment and maintenance of the sensors.

END OF SECTION

TDSB – Kane Public School Section 16995 JAIN & ASSOCIATES Limited Contents Page Project No. KE1016 February 28, 2011 Modular Control Panels

JAL NO. 10-265

CONTENTS SUBSECTION TITLE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Related Work 1.2 Submittals PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials 2.2 Modular Panel Elevation

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation 3.2 Coordination

TDSB – Kane Public School Section 16995 JAIN & ASSOCIATES Limited Page 1 Project No. KE1016 February 28, 2011 Modular Control Panels

JAL NO. 10-265

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK .1 Conform to Section 16010, Electrical General Requirements. .2 Conform with applicable requirements governing installation of Section 16050, Basic

Materials & Methods. .3 Conform to related architectural governing sections applicable to classroom control

panels. 1.2 SUBMITTALS .1 Provide two (2) copies of shop drawings in accordance with Section 16010. .2 Shop drawings to clearly indicate all materials supplied by this section, installation

methods and all cut-outs as required. .3 Drawings to show all reinforcing as required to support equipment by others. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .1 Provide surface mounted classroom control panels as detailed on the drawings.

Specification is based on units manufactured by Interspec Systems Limited. – Rosemont, ON (705) 435-3780 x.21. Any alternates shall meet the specifications or state deviations at time of tender.

.2 Modular control panels shall be constructed of structurally sound 6063 T5 alloy satin

anodized aluminum frame .080 mm thick with high pressure plastic laminate faced panels of lightweight particle core and 0.50 mm thick plastic laminate backing sheet. Plastic laminate colour as selected by the Architect from Arborite or Formica, furniture finish, from manufacturer’s standard colour range. Complete assembly to meet flame spread ratings in areas used.

.3 Units to be complete with backboxes fabricated from heavy guage satin coat steel

with suitable barriers and continuous knockouts. Satin anodized faceplates shall be pre-punched to accept detailed components.


JAL NO. 10-265

.4 All panels shall be vandal resistant and removable with special tools for service access.

.5 Fabricate units in accordance with reviewed shop drawings with extruded aluminum

frames and solid plastic laminated face panels. .6 Panels to be removable from aluminum frames with rounded profile edging. .7 Front panels to have colour finish as selected by the Architect. .8 Panels to have all openings, mounting hardware, etc. for services as required for

installation of mechanical and electrical services by division 15 and 16. .9 Units to be full height from 200 mm off floor to underside of ceiling panels. .10 Part numbers:

CCP-3016-04JV – ClassMate 16” [406 mm] Wide x 4” [102mm] Deep .11 Alternate Manufacturer: 1. Wiremold Vista 2.2 MODULAR CONTROL PANEL ELEVATION .1 Refer to drawings for elevation and details of modular control panels for classrooms.

Also refer to architectural specifications, details and room finish schedule for exact heights of all classroom control panels floor to ceiling.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION .1 Division 16 to install units in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and

reviewed shop drawings complete with all frames, cut-outs, face panels etc. to provide a complete installation.


JAL NO. 10-265

3.2 COORDINATION .1 It is Division 16 responsibility to co-ordinate installation of all mechanical, electrical

and miscellaneous services in all control panels. Components within control panels will vary from room to room in some instances.

END OF SECTION

Toronto District School Board - Kane Public School Kane C.S. ARC... · TDSB - Kane Public School...

Documents

Transcript of Toronto District School Board - Kane Public School Kane C.S. ARC... · TDSB - Kane Public School...